Home

Clock Cable, 4601:5-104

1. Part Number Length Length Part Number Length Length feet meters feet meters 830 0889 01 1 0 304 830 0889 06 8 0 2 43 830 0889 02 5 5 1 67 830 0889 07 10 0 3 04 830 0889 03 6 0 1 82 830 0889 08 12 0 3 65 830 0889 04 6 5 1 98 830 0889 09 15 0 4 57 830 0889 05 7 0 2 13 830 0889 10 16 0 4 87 Figure C 52 CAT 5 RJ45 R 45 P N 830 0889 xx P1 P2 RJ45 RJ45 _ f _ 1 d t WHTZORG Tx 2 2 TX 3 WIT GR 3 RX GRN WHT XX GRN WHT agg BLU WHT BLU WHT GND 4 4 GND GND 5 P dd 5 GND u GND 8 8 GND 1 DRAIN T IT it 88 1 P1 P2 RJ45 RJ45 LENGTH CABLE ASSEMBLY C 60 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0895 01 T1 LIM to MPL Cable Adapter Cable adapter T1 LIM to Multi Port LIM This adapter is only to be used when installing an E1 T1 Card in an existing MPL location and wanting to terminate the E1 link on Port B Figure C 53 T1 LIM to MPL Cable Adapter P N 830 0895 01 P1 P2 POS 1 POS 10 D DB 26 MALE DB 26 FEMALE GRN RED N GRN R
2. RESET ABORT D i __ D RUN BM qu la 0 1 TEKELEC s o H k Interface A 0 ETHERNET O e o 5 E 2 s CLEI R ASSEMBLY E FANS OFF AUTO FANS A ME _ Interface 9r376 suite cable P N 830 0788 xx P N 830 0788 xx K B D REV Processor card P N 870 1523 02 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 151 EOAP Figure 6 57 GR 376 EOAP Cabling
3. 10 12 15 DIAG Note P10 P12 and P15 DIAG Pin one must be covered with jumper for diagnostics to work properly Remove Jumpers for normal operation P18 Monitor Printed circuit board diagnostics Personal computer System test testing links Palm held computer future Front of Front connector Tonto o connector Connectors used only P N 803 0029 01 ALPHA N ribbon cable Pin one red wire equals pin one To front of board P N 870 2061 01 804 0176 01 Converter This straight through converter is a purchased part There is no illustration or wiring diagram The part number is here for reference only 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 7 Cables 830 0224 xx Drive Power Cable Figure C 3 Drive Power Cable P N 830 0224 xx CENTIMETERS 830 0224 01 4 50 11 41 830 0224 02 3 50 8 87 1 2 5 4 99 9 11234 q p 1 CONTACT 1 P1 830 0224 P2 C 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0231 xx Local Maintenance Center Cable Cables Table C 1 Local Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0231 xx Part Number 2 T Part Number 4 ters 830 0231 01 50 1525 830 0231 07 200 61 00 830 0231 02 75 22 88 830 0231 08 250 76 25
4. J ACTIVE 000 FANS OFF P N 830 0788 xx P N 830 0788 xx 91376 suite cable A 17 LEDs HMUX High Speed Multiplexer TEKELEC ALIGN Q SHELF 1 PROC 870 1965 01 HMUX HMUX P N 870 1965 01 Figure A 15 HMUX LEDs LEDs Descriptions ALIGN AMBER Programming XILINX complete GREEN Complete code initialization stays Amber until the first valid Shelf ID is received from MASP Code running SHELF ID AMBER Programming XILINX complete Complete code initialization RED While code running if ID address received from OAM does not match the on board stored address read from the assigned shelf address register see first note below GREEN While code running if ID address received from OAM matches the on board stored address read from the assigned shelf address register see second note below PROC Health Power on Reset AMBER Programming XILINX GREEN Programming XILINX complete Complete code initialization Code running 18 NOTE LED color state change during power up and reset happens within one second To determine operating status wait until reset is over NOTE Atstart up each HMUX card
5. Screw Fuse holders Fuse holders Screw Y mn Eam 7 enl E ET ID e 5 156 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Control and Extension Shelves Figures 5 65 through 5 70 show the card locations in Control and Extension shelves Figure 5 65 shows the numbering of the shelves with the shelf identification backplane wiring and card locations on the Control Frame CF Figure 5 65 Control Frame CF 00 Numbering Plan Control Shelf frame 1 shelf 1211 Card location PsM mbal B SHELF e ID e BIT 00 01 02 03 GRD e MT addresses 1 22 3 F9 FA FB FC numbers These locations paired entities Ronn Extension Shelf frame 1 shelf 2 12 DIP switch Wire wrap identification identification SHELF ID 1200 E on SHELF e Card 1 1 LSB ID e location 2 BIT 00 numbers 2 3 01 1 4 02 5 03 3 6 MSB IMT 7 addresses o0 04 02 03 04 05 06 07 Extension Shelf frame 1 shelf 3 13 DIP switch Wire wrap identification identification SHELF ID 1300 Bl on SHELF e Card 1 LSB ID e location 2 BIT 00 numbers 3l 01 4 02 5 03 6 MSB m 7 GRD addresses 10 11 12 13 14 15 1
6. Table B 17 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND 01 amp IF1 60 01 amp IF10 60 D01 IN2 A02 amp IF3 60 02 amp IF2 60 02 amp IF19 60 D02 LGND A03 LGND B03 C03 amp IF20 60 D03 LGND A04 amp IF4_60 B04 C04 amp IF21_60 D04 LGND A05 amp IF5_60 B05 C05 amp IF22_60 D05 LGND A06 amp IF6 60 B06 amp IF24 60 C06 amp IF23 60 LGND A07 amp IF7_60 BO7 amp IF26 60 07 D07 IF25_60 A08 amp IF8_60 08 amp IF9 60 08 amp IF18_60 LGND A09 LGND B09 C09 D09 LGND A10 B10 C10 EBI XSP2 D10 EBI XSP3 A11 LGND 11 LGND C11 EBI XBEO D11 EBI XD00 A12 BSEROQ 50 B12 LGND C12 EBI XBEI D12 EBI XDO01 A13 BSEROQ 50 13 LGND C13 EBI XBE2 D13 EBI XD02 A14 LGND 14 LGND C14 EBI XBE3 014 EBI XD03 A15 B15 LGND C15 EBI XBS8 D15 EBI XD04 A16 B16 LGND C16 EBI XBS16 016 EBI XD05 A17 LGND B17 LGND C17 EBI ADSO D17 EBI XD06 A18 BSEL B18 C18 EBI ADSI D18 EBI XD07 A19 B19 C19 EBI XW R D19 EBI XD08 A20 BMUXIN B20 C20 EBI XM IO 020 EBI XD09 A21 LGND B21 BINQ C21 EBI XSP1 D21 EBI XD10 B 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Table B 17 Extension
7. Test points 48V 48V Test points i A 9 B iG gt eee ALARM INTERFACE Cee 48V 181920 12181920 lolol B retum lelofolo RET 1819 20 12181920 M LOGIC Chassis lalelele P3 GND TORQUE TO 25 INCH LBS ground 12181920 12181920 TORQUE TO 25 INCH LBS 870 1606 0T test points Rearview B side Fuse position Fuse position A side MIS MIS Procedure Power Up the System 1 Turn on breaker or insert fuse for control frame A side 48VDC power source 2 Check for 48VDC at the control frame fuse and alarm panel A side test point see Figure 5 72 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the control frame B side 48VDC power source 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each 48VDC A side and B side power source for all extension and miscellaneous frames CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of this system must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION This is a redundant system to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and takes down the system WARNING Before beginning any of the following procedures ensure t
8. 12 When the dollies are removed from the frame after the frame has been moved to permanent location The dollies are shipped to Calabasas California separately from the shipping container 13 Inventory the shipment to make sure that all items listed on the pick list have been received in good condition Report any discrepancies or damaged equipment by calling 1 888 673 4827 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 9 Frames and Shelves 3 10 14 Do not allow the empty shipping containers to become a safety problem or a fire hazard Contact the site supervisor for specific instructions Dispose of leftover packaging materials according to local recycling procedures 15 Follow this procedure when opening all similar shipping containers Procedure Preparing Shipping Container and Dolly for Return to Tekelec Use this procedure if the shipping container is to be returned to Tekelec 1 Replace the retaining brace and re attach the ramp support to the front of the shipping container using the bolts saved previously a If the shipping container has been returned to Calabasas ship the both dollies to the same location listed below 2 After replacing the shipping container front panel arrange the return shipment by contacting Shipping Manager TEKELEC Attn RMA Department 5200 Paramount Parkway Morrisville NC 27560 assigne
9. 3 Revision number lt lt 49 LJ 97 870219891610 number The E1 T1 channel provides a physical interface to the system The interface terminates or distributes E1 T1 facility signals for the purpose of processing the 557 signaling links carried by the 1 carrier The E1 T1 can be configured as an E1 T1 master card or as a channel card The implementation is configured by way of provisioning E1 T1 MIM 870 2198 01 Tekelec has developed an adapter P N 830 0895 01 that will reverse the Port 2 pin addresses for those customers that choose to maintain the Multi port LIM P N 830 0772 xx cabling The customer may choose the new cable T1 MIM 100 Ohms cable P N 830 0894 xx These options are provide for the customers and will be designated by the site survey 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 125 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 9 E1 T1 and Channel Cards Cables Part Number Function E1 830 0622 xx 120 Ohm cable T1 830 0894 xx 100 Ohm cable PORT 2 830 0895 01 Reverse PORT 2 Transmit and Receive pins Adapter Table 5 10 provides an overview of the functions of the E1 T1 MIM card and the Channel card Table 5 10 E1 T1 MIM and Channel Cards Card Function
10. 0 9 00 0 FAN B PWR A PWR A J POWER IN B POWER IN A 5 BCLKIN A BBCLKOUT A d CO I Ponr 18 PORT1A PORT nm PORT 4B B PWR B FAN A PWR PORT 4A RST B LKIN B BCLKOUT B 5 gt Y 0 00000000000 0200 oO ooo o o o Dual configuration cable routing Fan cables P N 830 0609 01 Installing the GR 376 EOAP Clock Connections Cable Plug one end of the clock cable P N 830 0657 xx onto the connector marked BCLKIN A located at the upper middle of the GR 376 EOAP backplane Then tighten the cable connectors From the connector route the clock cable down to the second tie down from the top and across the rod toward the right side of GR 376 EOAP backplane Use cable ties to secure the cable to the tie rod every three or four inches NOTE Do not connect cable P N 830 0657 xx to the system until both A and B GR 376 EOAPs have been integrated into the system NOTE Lacing cord not tie wraps must be used on cables on the top traverse arm of any frame and above to the cable rack Route the clock cable up the GR 376 EOAP frame rails across the cable rack and down to the control frame Use cable ties to secure the cable to the frame rails and the traverse arms every three or four inches 910 4601 01 Revision
11. Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A13 50 LGND C13 XBE2 D13 EBI XD02 A14 LGND B14 LGND C14 EBI XBE3 D14 EBI XD03 A15 B15 LGND C15 EBI 58 D15 EBI XD04 A16 B16 LGND C16 EBI XBS16 D16 EBI XD05 A17 LGND B17 LGND C17 EBI ADSO D17 EBI 006 A18 BSEL B18 C18 EBI_ ADS1 D18 EBI XD07 A19 B19 C19 EBI XW R D19 XD08 A20 BMUXIN B20 C20 EBI XM IO 020 EBI XD09 A21 LGND B21 C21 XSP1 D21 EBI XD10 A22 B22 LGND C22 XINTA 022 XD11 A23 B23 LGND C23 EBI XRDY D23 EBI XD12 A24 LGND B24 LGND C24 EBI XCASO 024 EBI XD13 A25 50 B25 LGND C25 EBI 51 025 EBI XD14 26 BSERI _50 B26 LGND C26 EBI XCAS2 026 EBI XD15 A27 LGND B27 LGND C27 D27 A28 B28 C28 D28 LGND A29 LGND B29 C29 D29 A30 B30 C30 D30 LGND A31 LGND B31 C31 MB56KHZ _50 D31 A32 B32 C32 MB56KHZ 50 D32 LGND A33 LGND B33 C33 MB8KHZ 50 D33 A34 B34 C34 MB8KHZ 50 034 LGND A35 CHASSIS B35 CHASSIS GND C35 CHASSIS GND D35 CHASSIS GND GND E2 48 A or B for TDM connectors P21 and P19 respectively 4 or 5 for TDM connectors P21 and P19 respectively L for TDM connectors P21 and P19 respectively B 56 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Maintenance Disk a
12. i870 2572 0 REV X mm 16 17 18 PROC TDM PROC TDM MDAL 04 05 06 07 08 1 d 12 13 IMTB L MASP A L ACTIVE o o ALARM FANS OFF AUTO FANS 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 75 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 76 10 When the fans are powered up and running a test must be conducted to ensure proper service Go to the system terminal At the terminal enter the command gt chg feat fan on With this input this command the user will perform the tests beginning with Step 6 At the terminal enter the command gt Rept stat trbl Check to see that there are no fan errors Fan Verification perform steps 6 through 14 for each fan assembly On the front of the fan unit toggle the switch to the OFF position switch to FANS OFF Result The fans stop running and the MINOR LED is lit At the terminal type gt Rept stat trbl Result The terminal will show 0055 0302 SYSTEM Cooling Fan Failure MINOR LED is lit Fan Veriication 2222222 On the front of the fan unit toggle the fan switch to the ON position switch to FANS ON Result The fans are running and the MINOR LED is not lit Terminal reports alarm 303 Cooling Fan Normal NOTE The normal setting for the fan unit is ON Move to the rear of the frame and remove the A POWER cable from the FAN un
13. XAR 554 000 AN 64 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0932 01 E1 T1 MIM 22 AWG Figure C 57 830 0932 01 E1 T1 MIM 22 AWG PART NO REV LENGTH 830 0932 01 B 15 F 830 0932 02 B 20 FT 830 0932 03 B 25 FT 830 0932 04 B 30 FT 830 0932 05 B 35 830 0932 06 50 830 0932 07 75 830 0932 08 100 FT 830 0932 09 B 125 FT 830 0948 10 B 150 FT 830 0932 11 B 175 F 830 0932 12 B 200 FT 830 0932 13 B 250 FT 830 0932 14 B 300 FT 830 0932 15 B 500 F 830 0932 16 1000 FT Pi I 1 1 1 _ 2_ GRN RED 77 GRN RED rae RED GRN i XX H 1 RED GRN PI mr DES BLU RED I BLU RED GRY WHT 1 E GRY WHT 3 WHT GRY Li WHT GRY This end of the cable is not id ELT equipped with a connector in E brad manufacturing T rng The wires must be cut dressed NOT USED i ied and connected at the site td specific location N i DCRNG 2 1 OC SUSE N 3 ELE wwe eet M ORC I OO Cd cr M ORC PE RING 1 22 gt EL NUR E1 T1 MIM LIM P N 830 0932 xx 22 AWG 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 65 Cables
14. i 800000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001 800000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 Table B 28 Control Shelf HMUX Backplane Pin Outs Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND B01 LGND 01 LGND D01 LGND A02 BSEROH 50 B02 LGND C02 BSEROI 50 D02 LGND A03 BSEROH 50 LGND 50 D03 LGND A04 LGND B04 BSELH C04 LGND D04 BSELI A05 BSERIH 50 05 LGND C05 BSERII 50 D05 LGND A06 50 B06 LGND C06 50 D06 LGND A07 LGND B07 BINH C07 LGND D07 BINI A08 BSEROG _50 B08 LGND C08 BSEROJ 50 D08 LGND A09 BSEROG 50 09 LGND C09 BSEROJ _50 D09 LGND A10 BMUXIN B10 BSELG C10 LGND D10 BSELJ A11 BSERIG 50 B11 LGND C11 BSERIJ 50 D11 LGND A12 BSERIG _50 12 LGND C12 BSERIJ 50 D12 LGND A13 LGND B13 BING C13 LGND D13 BINJ 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 43 Connectors Table B 28 Control Shelf HMUX B Backplane Pin Outs Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A14 BSEROF 50 14 LGND C14 BSEROK 50 D14 LGND A15 BSEROF 50 15 LGND C15 BSEROK 50 015 LGND A16 LGND B16 BINF C16 LGND D16 BSELK A17 BSERIF 50 17 LGND C1
15. 120 to 75 Ohlm converters 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 14 Part Numbers Tekelec Part Numbers OEM part numbers Description 804 0982 01 010 0000 2701 Chassis 804 0983 01 010 2704 1100 Wire wrap 804 0984 01 010 2704 1200 Bayonet Connector BNC Figure 5 60 120 Ohms Converter and Shelf e osse at 0000 e e e 6 e e e 2 0000 IN e e 2 N 120 ta 75 Wont iso ou y 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 137 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 61 120 Ohms Converter Front 08 US OO009 0009 0009 0009 0009 60000 0000 0000JO00O0 O0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 B e e e e gt 9999 9999 8999 ese 00000000 0000590000009 cecco 989899899990 eee eee 99 Table 5 15 Physical Conditions 120 to 75 front 120 Ohms to 75 Ohms converter Mechanical Insertion force 4176 1 9kg average Withdrawal force 5 21lb
16. P1 RJ45 RJ45 1 WHT ORG WHT ORG 3 RX aus ORG WHT ORG WHT el ga WHT GRN WHT GRN 1 xs lr GRN WHT GRN WHT 4 BLU WHT BLU WHT 4 ND WHT BLU WHT BLU 7 WHT BRN WHT BRN 7 GND cus n BRN WHT BRN WHT eub 1 I DRAIN I T WIRING DIAGRAM LENGTH PART NO METERS FEET 830 0723 01 30 1 830 0723 02 90 B 830 0725 03 1 37 E5 1 8 t i di P1 P2 TER LENGTH 5 CROSSOVER CABLE ASSEMBLY 830 0723 X 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 41 Cables 830 0724 xx CAT 5 Straight Trough Cable Figure C 34 CAT 5 Straight Through P N 830 0724 xx m RJ45 RJ45 4 watyore fi 2 2 ORG WHT E owe ORG WHT al a exl 3 WHT GRN WHT GRN pen GRN WHT GRN WHT Be EHE BLU WHT BLU WHT el Sane WHT BLU XX WHT BLU GND 5 5 GND ERSTE WHT BRN WHT BRN e SNB GND 8 8 GND _ om _ J WIRING DIAGRAM LENGTH PART NO METERS FEET 830 0724 01 15 5 850 0724 02 3 28 10 0 8350 0724 03 4 5 15 0 830 0724 04 7 5 25 0 830 0724 05 0 30 1 0 830 0724 06 1 8 6 0 830 0724 07 2 13 7 0 830 0724 08 52 1 6 830 0724 09 15 24 50 0 850 0724 10 30 48 100 0 P1 41 LENGTH P2 RJ45
17. 5 60 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Figures Figure 5 19 tay ete ala ee eee 5 61 Figure 5 20 Fan tray inserted into fan tray bracket in the frame front view nennen eterne nennen S a 5 61 Figure 5 21 Tighten rear fan tray Screws 5 62 Figure 5 22 Tighten fan side bracket screws 2 0 5 63 Figure 5 23 Fan card with LEDs on front of fan assembly 5 66 Figure 5 24 System Air Baffle coeperit deed et 5 69 Figure 5 25 Fan Assembly with Grill and Filter sss 5 70 Figure 5 26 Installing Fan Assembly 5 71 Figure 5 27 Fan Bracket Installation ridet 5 71 Figure 5 28 Fan with Brackets and Screws esee 5 72 Figure 5 29 Front Card Suite with Fan Switch sss 5 75 Figure 5 30 Fan Assembly with Grill and Filter sss 5 78 Figure 5 31 Cable P N 830 0404 XX terne teneor piede 5 89 Figure 5 32 Cable P N 830 0398 xx 5 90 Figure 5 33 Backplane P N 850 0330 06 Control Shelf 5 98 Figure 5 34 Backplane P N 850 0356 04 Extension Shelf 5 99 Figure 5 35 Clock Cable A and B clocks teet 5 102 Figure 5 36 Clock Cable Routing estre etre to 5 104 Figure 5 37 Control Shelf P N 850 0330 06 BITS Co
18. ARI 19 DB 26 MALE TX RING 4 4 GRN RED Q GRN RED TX TIP 4 3 ORG RED ORG RED RX RING 4 2 1 LRED ORG RED ORG BLU RED BLU RED TX RING 3 9 Tx TP 3 7 S ae GRY WHT GRY WHT RX RING 3 6 SX TEC 5 WHT GRY WHT GRY 10 NOT USED 17 Da Bos BRN WHT BRN WHT TX RING 2 24 Fi o WH WH RX RING 2 26 Rx Tip 2 WHT GRN ORN WHT ORN WHT TX RING 1 20 mb 21 ue moe BLU WHT BLU WHT RX RING 1 22 Ry_tip_1 23 LWHT BLU WHT BLU Ly Y L DRAIN 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 UNTERMINATED 2 This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location C 45 Cables 830 0788 xx Straight Through DB26 to RJ 45 Figure C 38 Straight Through P N 830 0788 xx System Router Hub Network GR 376 HB DB26 To RJ 45 STRAIGHT THROUGH P2 Male DB 26 8PIN Male D Y ATX 2 WHT BLU Log LWHTBLU 4 A TX 1 A TX 23 BLU BLU 2 A TX Rx 7 L WHI ORN Log 1 LWHTORN 3 A RX ORN 1 1 ORN ARX T 1 6 A RX I 5 A 4 Y I I if 8 5 I G 8 Not used Drain Y 2 830 0788 xx C 46 910 4601 01 Re
19. gt iz lt E 28 zig lt a gt vs Ex Bas 29 56 lt Eg 7 N e E aw 28 598 8 Sas gt s 8 25 zis O aj lt Zag 5 O 2 E gs 1 d E98 5 Zo 3 8 ACLKO de ACLKT Jag CUSTALM2 pg GPST estas ws 7 V 2 J o g re ACERS Soe ACERS la es X uy orco gee et e ees ee d 571 0 SS L Wa econda 34 _ m Bis GNP PORT 2 ENET2 re BCLK3 5 x M FEM AE UE RE HH ME WEN ne eu J62 BOLKO BCLK2 183 1 J47 7 E I _ i 2 2 V 315 7 RMC 3617 9 SECONDARY 1 RALM4 RALM5 c s V 7 2 V 7 Vos 7 ay 67 PRIMARY RALM2 RALM3 RALM6 RALM7 a Warning O Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT Metal points on printed circuit boards conducts 48VDC and can cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 113 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 114 10 Route the cable up the left side of the control frame viewed from the rear over to the miscellaneous frame containing the holdover clock and down the left side of the miscellaneous frame to the cable tie bar next to the alarm connections see Figure 5 42 Tie wrap the cable to the
20. Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Control Frame 00 CF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 65 Fuse 1A 3Amp 1101 1102 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM GPSM Fuse 2A 3Amp 1105 1106 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 3A 1Amp 1109 HMUX Fuse 4A dummy fuse 1111 1112 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM GPSM Fuse 5A 3Amp 1115 1116 MASP B TDM and MCAP Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A 3Amp 1201 1202 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM GPSM Fuse 8A 3Amp 1205 1206 LIMs ACM ASM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 9A 1Amp 1209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 1211 1212 LIMs ACM ASM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11A 3Amp 1215 1216 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A 3Amp 1301 1302 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14A 3Amp 1305 1306 LIMs ACM ASM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 15A 1Amp 1309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 1311 1312 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM GPSM Fuse 17A 3Amp 1315 1316 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse Control Frame 00 CF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B see Figure 5 65 Fuse 1B 3Amp 1103 1104 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 2B 3Amp 1107 1108 LIMs ACM ASM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3B 1A
21. 22 00 50 PART NUMBER IN 50 LABEL A USAGE LABEL B USAGE APPLICATION 830 0884 01 22 00 FRAME SWITCH CABLE GROUND SWITCH TO FRAME NTW 830 0884 01gn C 58 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0888 xx 5 RJ45 RJ45 Table C 17 Power Cable P N 830 0888 xx Part Number Part Number 830 0888 01 1 0 304 830 0888 06 8 0 2 43 830 0888 02 5 5 1 67 830 0888 07 10 0 3 04 830 0888 03 6 0 1 82 830 0888 08 12 0 3 65 830 0888 04 6 5 1 98 830 0888 09 15 0 4 57 830 0888 05 7 0 2 13 830 0888 10 16 0 4 87 Figure C 51 CAT 5 RJ45 RJ45 P N 830 0888 xx P1 P2 RJ45 RJ45 n WHT ORG dos Sells ORG WHT XX ORG WHT TERN ME ETE XC j BLU WHT BLU WHT ono 5 15 eNO XX 7 90 T 2 DRAIN T 8045 LENGTH CABLE ASSEMBLY A U a 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 59 Cables 830 0889 xx CAT 5 RJ45 RJ45 Table C 18 Power Cable P N 830 0889 xx
22. Z Z IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 250 001 000 IS NR 250 001 000 IS NR STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS 1 2 3 Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 6 131 EOAP rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Association Al IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active LSMS SYSTEM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms 0 3 Assoc 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms 0 3 Assoc Bl ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Completed If alarms are shown for the EOAPs in either the rept stat seas or rept stat 1sms outputs contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 Method B Perform steps a through d to update both EOAPs at the same time This method is NOT recommended a Enter the following command act oap config oap all After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST
23. EDCM Single Slot Enhanced DCM Card EOAP Embedded OAP General Purpose Service Module GPSM ID GR2376 RS HMUX High Speed Multiplexer eee ILE1 Integrated Link Interface Module E1 IPMX Inter processor Message Transport Multiplexer MCA Matrix Controller Assembly Card Holdover MCAP MAS Communications Applications Processor MDAL Maintenance Disk and Alarm MIS Maintenance Interface System Card Holdover Clock MPL LIM Multi Port Link Interface Module MPLT Multi Port LIM with Taxi Component OCU LIM Office Channel Unit LIM ST3 Stratum 3 Clock Card Holdover Clock Terminal Disk Module TDM GTI Terminal Disk Module Global Timing Interface Holdover Clock V 35 LIM Link Interface Module Appendix B Connectors A Clock 0 through A Clock b oia peat plos rte a deest B Clock 0 through B Clock
24. C 15 Figure C 11 Clock Cable P N 830 0404 xx C 16 Figure C 12 CD ROM Cable P N 830 0421 xx tne C 17 Figure 13 Adapter 15 Pin to 26 Pin P N 830 0425 01 C 18 Figure C 14 External Alarm Cable Custom P N 830 0435 xx C 19 Figure C 15 Alarm Holdover Clock Cable P N 830 0543 C 20 Figure C 16 RS232 P N 830 052 XX tdt C 21 Figure C 17 Serial I O Transition Card P N 850 0514 01 C 22 Figure C 18 Serial Interface Adapter MODEM P N 830 0531 03 C 23 Figure C 19 Serial Interface Converter Cable P N 830 0531 01 C 24 Figure C 20 Serial Interface Adapter P N 830 0531 02 C 26 Figure 21 Terminal Printer Cable P N 830 0535 xx 222222221 C 27 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Figures Figure C 22 Figure C 23 Figure C 24 Figure C 25 Figure C 26 Figure C 27 Figure C 28 Figure C 29 Figure C 30 Figure C 31 Figure C 32 Figure C 33 Figure C 34 Figure C 35 Figure C 36 Figure C 37 Figure C 38 Figure C 39 Figure C 40 Figure C 41 Figure C 42 Figure C 43 Figure C 44 Figure C 45 Figure C 46 Figure C 47 Figure C 48 Figure C 49 Figure C 50 Figure C 51 Figure C 52 Figure C 53 Figure C 54 Figure C 55 Figure C 56 Figure C 57 Figure C 58 E1 Patch Cable P N
25. Fuse 11A 3Amp 5215 5216 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A 3Amp 5301 5302 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM Fuse 14A 3Amp 5305 5306 LIM MPL 1 1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM Fuse 15A 1Amp 5309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 5311 5312 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM Fuse 17A 3Amp 5315 5316 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse Extension Frame 03 EF 03 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B see Figure 5 69 Fuse 1B 3Amp 5103 5104 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 2B 3Amp 5107 5108 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3B 1Amp 5110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 5113 5114 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 5B 3Amp 5117 5118 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B 3Amp 5203 5204 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 8B 3Amp 5207 5208 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 9B 1Amp 5210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 5213 5214 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11B 3Amp Fuse 12B dummy fuse 5217 5218 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 13B 3Amp 5303 5304 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14B 3Amp 5307 5308 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM
26. 61 Figure B 41 Power Connector ueniet ate sette pte B 62 Figure B 42 Rack Alarm Connector esee B 63 Figure B 43 Rack Alarm Connector ets etin ete dein B 64 Figure B 44 Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Connector B 65 Figure B 45 Row Alarm Connector B 66 Figure B 46 Serial Port Connector imi B 67 Figure B 47 Shelf Power Connector B 68 Figure B 48 TOM TOP uuu sasa 70 Figure B 49 TDM Backplane Pin outs Bottom B 72 Figure 0 1 Installer s Cable Running List Example 4 Figure C 2 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable P N 803 0029 01 C 7 Figure C 3 Drive Power Cable P N 830 0224 C 8 Figure C 4 Local Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0231 xx C 9 Figure C 5 Row Alarm Cable P N 830 0232 xx C 10 Figure C 6 Remote Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0233 11 Figure C 7 Hazard Ground Cable P N 830 0257 C 12 Figure C 8 Power Cable P N 830 0315 xx C 13 Figure C 9 Interface Cable P N 830 0366 C 14 Figure C 10 Clock Cable P N 830 0366 xx
27. B 27 Extension Shelf Modules uen REOR B 28 ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM B 28 Extension Shelf oe tree 33 External Alarm natem quete B 35 Farb POWER B 36 Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 B 37 General Purpose Relay Connector reote Pede B 38 General Purpose Relay Connector 02 ies B 39 General Purpose Serial Interfaces eet iet ee iet B 40 High Speed Message Multiplexer Control Shelf B 41 Control Shelf HMUX A Backplane 8 B 41 Control Shelf HMUX B Backplane P24 tem B 43 High Speed Message Multiplexer Extension Shelf B 46 Interface 49 Inter processor Message Transport Control Shelf B 51 Interprocessor Message Transport oco penne teen B 52 IPMX Connector J7 J8 J43 J44 B 52 Local Maintenance Center Alarm Backplane B 53 MAS Communication Application B 54 Maintenance Disk and Alarm Card Control Shelf Backplane B 57 QAP Alarm Backplane Qe B 6
28. Cables P1 P2 MALE DB 25 FEMALE DB 25 N UNUsED 2 ware UNUSED UNUSED FHAN gt lt 3 UNUSED SH1 MBUSRX 4 maa 4 1 MBUSRX SH1 MBUSRX 5 EET ee 5 SH1 MBUSRX SH2 MBUSTX 6 5 2 MBUSTX SH2 MBUSTX FANCTRL 7 S EET E 7 5 2 MBUSTX FANCTRL SH2 MBUSRX 8 SH2 MBUSRX SH2 MBUSRX 9 BRN WHT BRN WHT 9 5 2 MBUSRX SH3 MBUSTX 10 gt 10 SH3 MBUSTX SH3 MBUSTX 11 ET 11 SH3 MBUSTX SH3 MBUSRX 12 a gt l Tez 12 SH3 MBUSRX SH3 MBUSRX FANBALM 13 E 13 5 3 MBUSRX FANBALM SH1 56KHZ 14 SED ORN RED ORN __ 56KHZ SH1 S6KHZ 15 gt lt HERED 15 5 1 sekuz SH1 8KHZ 16 16 SH1 8KHZ 8 2 17 REO 17 SH1 8KHZ SH2 56KHZ 18 18 SH2 56KHZ SH2 56KHZ 19 JE gt lt E REO 19 sH2 56kHz SH2 8KHZ 20 20 SH2 8KHZ SH2 BKHZ 21 iR gt lt EP 21 sH2 8KHZ SH3 56KHZ4 22 LK BL 22 SH3 56KHZ BLU BLK XX BLU BLK oe ee EA r I SH3 2 25 ORN BLK gt C sd ORN BLK 155 BkHz T cc aera PIN 1 PIN 14 gt 1 00 1 00 4 4 PIN 1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 10 00 1 00 2 57 Cables 830 0884 01 Switch to Frame Ground Cable Figure C 50 Switch to Frame Ground Cable P N 830 0884 01 L m
29. 39 50 inches Open space above frame 3 875 3 8 inch plywood typical gt 2X2 inch board p 93 75 Wooden retaining bar 4 inches with foam backing Bag for bolts pr f Wheels 2 inches wide 2 10405 E 22 0 inches on centers U bolts 2 places Wheel guides 2 places 5 45 to top of the floor of crate Ramp front door of crate to top of the floor of crate 6 Use the 9 16 inch wrench to unbolt the wooden retaining bar across the front of the frame Do not discard the retaining brace or the bolts At this time Do not remove the bolts holding the dolly to the frame Refer to Figure 3 4 3 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves 7 Atleast two people are required any time a frame is moved Use the 9 16 inch wrench to turn the threaded rod counter clockwise to lower the wheels of the dolly and to raise the frame and dolly enough to clear the front edge of the shipping container approximately 1 1 2 inches The threaded bolts must be turned at the same time by two people one in the front and one in the rear to avoid making the frame tilt 8 Only raise the frame high enough to clear the angle created by the front ramp When the frame and dolly have been raised enough to clear the angle created by the front ramp slowly and carefully roll the frame out of the shipping container NOTE For clarity
30. Extension Shelf frame 2 shelf 3 23 Wir Wrap identification identification SHELF ID 2 2300 3 B SHELF e 1 LSB ID e C 2 0 2 BIT 900 location 3 9 01 numbers 3 0 4 02 8 2 5 03 3 6 MSB 1 7 GRD IMT 8 addresses 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 0 5 158 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 67 Extension Frame EF 01 Numbering Plan DIP Switch Wire wrap Extension Shelf frame 3 shelf 1 31 SHELF ID 3100 ll oN 1 LSB SHELF e ID e Card 2 location 3 BIT e00 numbers 4l 01 5 02 6 MSB 03 7 8 GRD IMT addresses 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E DIP Switch Wire wrap Extension Shelf frame 3 shelf 2 32 SHELF ID 3200 ll 1 Lsg SHELF e Card 2 ID e location 3 BIT 00 numbers e01 e 02 03 6 MSB 2 7 GRD IMT 8 addresses 62 63 64 65 66 68 69 6A 68 6 60 6E 6 DIP switch Wire wrap Extension Shelf frame 3 shelf 3 33 identification Identification SHELF ID 3300 B ou SHELF e 1 LSB ID e location 2 BIT 00 numbers 3 01 4 02 5 03 6 MSB 7 GRD IMT 4 addresses 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 0 78 79 7B 7C 70 7 7F 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 sh 31 23 5 159 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 160 Card location numbers IMT addres
31. 5 157 48VDC Power Source n au aD enne nennen 5 162 Verification of Fuse Alarm Function 5 163 Chapter 6 EOAP Saf ty Information eset er n OR RERO h E HAE UA 6 2 Introduction iet ee ee her Pte iu Cus 6 5 Rm 6 8 COVOERVICW P oe Se 6 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 vi Table of Contents BOAP Fan Assembly ettet bon 6 14 Install rtis en 6 20 e set oe ee 6 21 EOAR apnea sn sus ebat tinte Us 6 26 EOAP Cabling OVErview 6 26 Single Configuration Cabling 220 6 35 Dual Configuration Cabling 6 38 Single to Dual Configuration Cabling 6 59 Dua S a GUN 6 73 Fan Operation 6 74 Maintenance Modem Setup seo ette oeste ug a tp see 6 77 EOAP Test Procedures ics ve e cm ettet 6 79 OVerVIew A n RD ML M M aa 6 79 Test ad ds 6 80 ete eee its 6 81 Initial conditions s ene dodi 6 95 EOAP Provisioning au 6 101 Before You Start Read 6 6 101 Tools and Equipment eese eene
32. Before the oapza oap b or 11 parameters are specified using the act oap config command the link from the system to the specified EOAP must be in service The status of the terminal ports assigned to the terminal type can be verified with the rept stat trm command The entry IS NR in service normal must appear in the field of the rept stat trm command output for the act oap config command to be successfully executed The parameter must be specified with the oap a or oap b 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 parameters EOAP Checksums and Alarms The chg oap con ig command allows you to enter one or several parameters ata time If the required information for a feature has already been configured in the database you do not have to re enter all the parameters for that feature when you make a change It is mandatory however that the configuration data in the system database and the EOAP database match Table 6 17 shows the fields of the rtrv oap config command output that must be configured depending on which feature is on Table 6 17 also shows the parameters of the chg oap con ig command that are used to configure the EOAP configuration data 6 115 EOAP Table 6 17 Fields Displayed for the RTRV OAP CONFIG Command Fields Required Entry Before CHG OAP CONFIG Feature Displaved Configuration can be sent Pa
33. Slot Connector Interface Address Signal Symbol Values amp A 5 bottom P30 4B 4 2A L 4B E 4 6 top P12 5A 5 2A K 5A 4 6 bottom P29 5B 5 2A K 5B F 4 7 top P11 6A 6 2B J 6A 6 7 bottom P28 6B 6 2B J 6B G 6 8 top P10 7A 7 2B I 7A 6 8 bottom P27 7B 7 2B I 7B H 6 11 top P8 8A 8 4A H 8A 8 11 bottom P25 8B 8 4A H 8B I 8 12 top P7 9A 9 4A G 9A 8 12 bottom P24 9B 9 4A G 9B 8 13 top P6 10A A 4B F 10A A 13 bottom P23 10B A 4B F 10B 14 top P5 11A B 4B E 11A A 14 bottom P22 11B B 4B E 11B L A 15 top P4 12A C 5A D 12A C 15 bottom P21 12B C 5A D 12B M C 16 top P3 13A D 5A C 13A C 16 bottom P20 13B D 5A C 138 C 17 top P2 14A E 5B B 14A E 17 bottom P19 14B E 5B B 14B O E 18 top P1 15A F 5B A 15A E 18 bottom P18 15B F 5B A 15B P E B 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Extension Shelf Interface Extension Shelf Interface Connectors J9 through J40 Figure B 21 Extension Shelf Interface Connector OO OO COO Oo OO 09 09 09 09 05 0 9 69 69 2 6 9 Table B 19 Extension Shelf Interface Connector Pins Signals Connectors Interface Connector Pins and Signals V 35 V 35 DSOA OCU Ethernet Pin V 35 35 DSOA OCU Ethernet Signal Pin Signal ATM Signal Signal Pin Signal Signal ACM ACM 1
34. 3 33 Side Panels Su ree RO E e ORE 3 33 Shelves dnce ertet te ipe usto e eerie 3 35 R ar COVersc iet tot 3 37 Chapter 4 Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuse and Alarm Panels a 4 2 ii 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table of Contents S fety Information eet iot sa 4 2 Fuse and Alarm Panel Overview 4 3 Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 and P N 870 2320 02 4 5 Jumper Board Fuse Installation 4 5 Power Cabling torres re pront 4 8 Recommended Tools 4 10 Frame Ground and Logic Ground Cabling Procedures 4 13 Grounding Requirements 4 13 Recommended Tools eee 4 13 Logic Ground Connections to the System Ground Bar 4 16 Logic Ground Cables 4 19 Fuse Verification esas eth eee eee Yr ers rend 4 21 Lists Fuse and Card Locations 4 24 Card Locations in Control and Extension Shelves 4 35 Chapter 5 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Safety Information u 5 4 EAGLE 30 0 Specific 5 6 Intra system Cable Installation eti
35. ABCDEF HAVING SAME TEXT ROTATION FEDCBA Y COVER THIS RECTANGLE AND TEXT WITH SERIAL 4 STICKER TEKELEC 8 1998 J5A TRNASITION CARD EOAP FORCE 520 G PROCESSOR APC NTW J5B 850 0496 _____ ____ J4A J4B J3A J3B TEKELEC 1998 TRANSITION CARD EOAP FORCE 520 G Processor APC NTW 850 0496 REV C 68 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 D Power Cords to Peripherals International Power Cords a D 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 D 1 Power Cords to Peripherals International Power Cords Table D 1 International Power Cords For Peripheral Equipment Country Part Number Voltage Frequency Plug Pattern USA Cord provided 120 60 K Argentina 804 1185 02 220 50 C Australia 804 1185 02 240 50 CP Austria 804 1185 01 220 230 50 Belgium 804 1185 01 220 230 50 B F Brazil 804 1185 01 110 220 50 B K N Bulgaria 804 1185 01 220 60 Cord provided 120 60 K N Chile 804 1185 01 220 50 B I China 804 1185 09 220 50 X Columbia Cord provided 110 220 60 N Cyprus 804 1185 03 240 50 Czech Republic 804 1185 01 220 50 Denmark 804 1185 04 220 230 50 B E Egypt 804 1185 01 220 50 B Estonia 804 1185 01 220 50 A B Finland 804 1185 01 220 230 50 A B France 804 1185 07 220 230 50 B F Germany 804 1185 01 220 230 50 A
36. B 30 Figure B 21 Extension Shelf Interface Connector B 33 Figure B 22 External Alarm Connector ori B 35 Figure B 23 Fan Power Connector Jude lige mondes B 36 Figure B 24 Control Extension FAP Rear View B 37 Figure B 25 Alarm Interface Connector see 37 Figure B 26 General Purpose Relay Connector 01 B 38 Figure B 27 General Purpose Relay Connector 02 B 39 Figure B 28 General Purpose Serial Interface Connector 01 GPSI B 40 Figure B 29 Control Shelf HMUX A Pin Outs see B 41 Figure B 30 Control Shelf HMUX B Pin Outs ne B 43 Figure B 31 HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Connector P9 B 46 Figure B 32 Interface Connector sense aute need b B 49 Fieure B 33 TIEMX CONDECTOT 51 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 xix List of Figures Pigure B 34 IPM ConnectOE aue oss ete tet pns B 52 Figure B 35 Local Maintenance Center Alarm Connector B 53 Figure B 36 Backplane Pin Outs Top e B 54 Figure B 37 Maintenance Disk and Alarm Connector Top B 57 Figure B 38 MDAL Backplane B 58 Figure B 39 OAP Alarm Connector B 60 Figure B 40 Power Connector sagu s
37. DIP switch identification SHELF ID 4300 m 2 O Q Wire identification LSB SHELF BIT 00 01 02 Wire wrap identification SHELF e LSB Wire wrap identification SHELF e LSB ID e e 00 01 02 03 MSB e GRD Figure 4 20 Extension Frame EF 03 Numbering Plan Extension Shelf frame 5 shelf 1 51 Fuses and Alarm Panels DIP switch identification SHELF ID 5100 gt 5 location numbers 1 3 1 4 5 3 6 7 IMT 8 addresses IRQ 2 B3 5 87 BB IBD BE Extension Shelf frame 5 shelf 2 52 DIP switch identification SHELF ID 5200 oN 1 Card locatiof 2 numbers 4 5 6 7 IMT 8 addresses Co C1 C2 C3 c7 0 C4 C5 C6 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF Extension Shelf frame 5 shelf 3 53 Card location numbers T addresses DO D1 02 D4 05 D6 DA DB DC DD DE DF Figure 4 21 Extension Frame EF 04 Numbering Plan Card location numbers IMT addresses EO E1 Extension Shelf frame 6 1 61 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EB EC ED DIP switch identification SHELF ID 5300 W 3 DIP switch identification SHELF ID 6100 2 ONDAN
38. Gateway are registered trademarks of Tekelec Inc Patents This product is covered by one or more of the following U S and foreign patents U S Patent Numbers 5 008 929 5 953 404 6 167 129 6 324 183 6 327 350 6 606 379 6 639 981 6 647 113 6 662 017 6 735 441 6 745 041 6 765 990 6 795 546 6 819 932 6 836 477 6 839 423 6 885 872 Ordering Information Additional copies of this document can be ordered from Tekelec Network Signaling Group 5200 Paramount Parkway Morrisville NC 27560 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Safety Informati n 1 3 Introduction nont E e qiia his 1 6 Regulatory Safety Compliance and Certification 1 8 Environmental Requirements dee drei oo Patri 1 9 Temperature Variations an nuan u t ede 1 9 Relative Humidity dete peas qasaqa 1 9 El vationz ie e ete oe Ra ENSE e red PE 1 9 Building Requirements 1 9 Scope and Audlenee cu espere rientro tes 1 10 Tekelec Signaling Products oysters eife ete mors 1 10 1 11 7 CALC WAY cu onse e m 1 11 P aen 1 11 Doc mentation fortes eh cee 1 12 About this 1 12 Admonishments and Conventions 8 1 12 Documentatio
39. PN1 System PINTO PIN 19 TH SO 2 dE i QE m O m o PIN 9 PIN 1 P1 P2 WHT BLU MOES Y BLUWHT RXD 12 GRY BLU ML COL 2 BLUIGRY 3 C Tibe 3 WHTIORN 8 1 10 2 6 20 HM 12VDC 13 2 42V GND 6 GRNYEL 19 0 7 CGND CGND 4 ND SUDIJA DRAIN WIRE 83004251 C 18 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0435 xx External Alarm Cable Custom Figure C 14 External Alarm Cable Custom P N 830 0435 xx PART NUMBER FEET METERS 830 0435 01 50 15 24 830 0435 02 75 22 86 830 0435 03 100 30 48 830 0435 04 125 38 10 850 0435 05 150 45 72 850 0435 06 175 53 34 830 0435 07 200 60 96 850 0435 08 250 76 20 830 0435 09 300 91 40 830 0435 10 500 152 40 830 0435 11 1000 304 80 P1 This end of the cable is not P1 equipped with a connector in manufacturing MALE 26 The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location 0 WHT BLU WHT BLU 3 BLUZAT XX BUE Cura 4 WHT ORN WHT ORN_ CUFAS CUFA1 5 ORN WH 2 ORN WH CUFA1 CUFA9 6 HAM GRN CUFA9 CUFA2 7 gt lt gt GRN WHT CRIT
40. 7 Figure B 3 BITS Clock Connector tarte B 9 Figure B 4 Clock A In Connector on Backplane B 10 Figure D 5 Clock A Out Connector uoa das B 11 Figure B 6 Clock A In Extension Shelf Connector B 12 Figure B 7 Clock B In Connector on Backplane B 13 Figure B 8 Clock Out Connector on Backplane B 14 Figure B 9 Clock Out Extension Shelf Connector B 15 Figure B 10 Clock B In Extension Shelf Connector B 16 Figure B 11 Clock B Out Extension Shelf Connector B 17 Figure B 12 Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 B 18 Figure B 13 Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 06 B 19 Figure B 14 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector 20 Figure B 15 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector B 22 Figure B 16 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 01 B 25 Figure B 17 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 03 B 26 Figure B 18 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 04 B 27 Figure B 19 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector 28 Figure B 20 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector
41. 5 86 Integrated Timing System Clock Supply Cables 5 88 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables sees 5 89 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables sss 5 91 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables Introduction 5 91 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables Description 5 91 Terminal nd eee eiae ades 5 107 Holdover Clock Installation 5 108 Card e his itus 5 108 Recommended 5 5 108 Output Panel Connections run 5 109 Ribbon Cables eese 5 109 i ettet eiiis 5 109 Output Panel Frame Ground t etre 5 109 ConnectionS u uu 5 109 Holdover Clock Switch Settings treten 5 110 iv 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table of Contents Clock Input DIP Switch Settings ecrire retinerent 5 110 Output Panel Connections 5 112 Clock Output Connect OS cedo 5 112 Holdover Clock Alarm Connections 5 112 BITS Clock Source Cables 5 115 Replacing Holdover Clock Rear 5 116 Hold
42. SIG GND 7 SIG GND RXD 3 TXD TXD 2 RXD DTR 20 CTS DSR DTR RTS RTS DCD DCD NC NC 0 mN 83005313 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 23 Cables 830 0531 01 Serial Interface Converter Cable C 24 Figure C 19 Serial Interface Converter Cable P N 830 0531 01 NC TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR SIG GND DCD DTR SPARE 4 MALE DB25 P1 1 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 20 19 21 4 gp q PIN 14 FEMALE WHT NC RXD RED TXD ORN RTS BLU DTR SEN DSR SIG GND BLK 7 SPARE DB25 P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 19 25 NS 83005311 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0528 01 Terminal Converter Cable This converter is a purchased part and the pin out is that of a straight through converter There is no illustration or wiring diagram The part number is here for reference 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 25 Cables 830 0531 02 Serial Interface Terminal and Printer Adapter Figure C 20 Serial Interface Adapter P N 830 0531 02 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 1 1 DB25F DB25M SIG GND 7 7 SIG GND RXD 3 3 RXD TXD 2 2 TXD DTR 20 4 RTS RTS 4 5 CTS CTS 5 6 DSR DCD 8 8 DCD 1 20 DTR 6 1 9 9 NC 19 19 NC 21 21 25 25 83005312 C 26 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0535 xx Terminal Printer Cable
43. o 2 M 2 z of 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 28 875 9 S 4 1 59 3 ac de s i z 56 P20 SIS S P24 sire ral m Ars sl 3 a prs E RE 2 2 5 P17 P19 2 g 5 25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P32 z Slits E ERE MEE SE gu 075 B IMT IN 2 P21 5 58 E gis Br S a a 3 3 E 3 5 5 E Les 3 3 8 3 5 5 B MT 269 OUT MMS MMIi3 MMIT4 15 OAPALM R18 Ri9 R20 R22 R23 R24 R25 CONTROL SHELF BACKPLANE Warning Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT 55 850 0330 06 Metal points on printed circuit boards conducts 48VDC and cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly 850 0330 06 5 98 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B POWER PRIMARY R1 P1 R2 R3 Port 18A er ser Port 18B R4 R5 Warning Ji P2 Port 17A orr 9er Port 17B Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 34 Backplane P N 850 0356 04 Extension Shelf B POWER A POWER APOWER SECONDARY B FAN POWER AFAN POWER BECQNDARY EBIMARY J45 22 J8 OUT P3 P4 PS P6 P7 P8 P10 P12 P13 P14 P16 17 o e e 5 IMT 7 OUT IN umm 4 13A 124 HA 8A 6A 5A 2 7 Js lt E 5 S
44. Backplane Pin outs Top Continued Connectors Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A21 LGND B21 MBUSSTX 50 21 MA56KHZ24 50 D21 A22 B22 MBUSSTX 50 C22 MA56KHZ _50 D22 LGND A23 LGND B23 C23 50 D23 A24 B24 C24 MA8KHZ 50 D24 LGND A25 LGND B25 C25 EBI_ XSP4 D25 EBI XSP5 A26 B26 C26 EBI XA11 D26 A27 LGND B27 C27 EBI XA12 D27 A28 B28 C28 EBI XA13 D28 LGND A29 LGND B29 C29 EBI_ BREQ D29 A30 B30 C30 EBI_ BG D30 LGND A31 B31 C31 EBI_ XIRQ D31 A32 B32 C32 EBI HOSTSAN 032 LGND A33 B33 GSTSAN 033 A34 B34 C34 D34 LGND MCAP Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connectors P19 P21 Table 36 MCAP Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connectors Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND 1 C01 D01 LGND A02 B02 C02 D02 A03 LGND B03 C03 D03 LGND A04 B04 C04 D04 A05 B05 C05 D05 LGND A06 B06 C06 D06 LGND A07 07 C07 D07 A08 B08 C08 D08 A09 LGND B09 C09 D09 LGND A10 B10 C10 EBI_ XSP2 D10 EBI XSP3 A11 LGND B11 LGND C11 EBI XBEO D11 EBI XD00 A12 BSERO _50 B12 LGND C12 EBI_ XBE1 D12 EBI_ XD01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 55 Connectors Table B 36 MCAP Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connectors Continued
45. R2 DB25M TERM PRNTR PIN PIN 14 C 37 Cables 830 0709 xx Modem Terminal Cable C 38 Figure C 30 Modem Terminal Cable P N 830 0709 xx LENGTH PART NUMBER INCHES CENTIMETERS 830 0709 01 180 0 1 8 457 2 830 0709 02 300 0 3 0 762 0 830 0709 03 600 0 6 0 1524 0 830 0709 04 900 0 9 0 2286 0 830 0709 05 1200 0 12 0 3048 0 830 0709 06 1500 0 15 0 3810 0 830 0709 07 1800 0 18 0 4572 0 BLK E m eo HR ORN G II 0 SIG GND 7 WETABUR 7 SIG GND RED BLK Fg DCD 8 1 1 1 1 8 DCD ur 14 1 14 TXCNN is SRN BLK 15 NC 16 16 NC RXCIN 17 ORG BLK 17 RXCIN NC 18 18 NC 11 e 21 21 NC 22 22 NC NC 23 23 NC TXCEXT 24 BLK WHT I 24 NC 25 ul 25 NC Terminal Printer Modem fee ee dB un N P1 850 0709 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0710 xx Network Cable Figure C 31 Network Cable P N 830 0710 xx P1 RJ45 2 RJ45 RED RED Te 79 TX 2 TX RX BLACK BLACK 3 Ret 2 _ we hm 152 L 90 GND BROWN BROWN
46. 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Note Interprocessor cards in place plus Extension shelf No less than one card per Extension shelf 01 02 03 IM 01 02 04 05 06 07 08 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 frame install See Rear Covers on page 3 37 3 36 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Rear Covers Gray tinted plastic rear covers P N 654 0075 01 with round holes are provided three per frame to physically protect the system backplanes and cables see Figure 3 26 Procedure Attach Rear Covers with Round Holes 4 Carefully peel off the protective wrapper from each cover With the round holes up place the cover into the support groove Line up the rear cover holes with the holes in the frame support arm Secure rear cover in place with two screws Figure 3 26 Rear Cover Installation Mounting screws 88 aa 999 898 0 0 0 1 U H Giada H Hi m d 8 d d
47. DCD O CRITICAL O MAJOR O MINOR e ACO E LOCAL COMM MIS 45018 155 LEDs Descriptions FAIL RED This card or its power supply has failed BLANK No card or power supply failure detected CRITICAL RED Holdover clock system has failed BLANK No holdover clock system failure detected MAJOR RED Holdover clock system or any holdover clock card has a major alarm BLANK No major alarm detected MINOR YELLOW Holdover clock system or any holdover clock card has a minor alarm BLANK No minor alarm detected ACO GREEN The ACO push button has been pressed to silence the alarm during an alarm state A 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs MPL LIM Multi Port Link Interface Module Figure A 22 MPL P N 870 2061 xx LEDs LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Application processor is not running or is hiling diagnostics TEKELEC PROC AMBER MPL is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN MPL is running an application APPL RED GREEN Alternating Operational but no communication with MASP PROC INTA IMTA RED MPL is off IMT bus A MPL is on bus A but testing is not complete GREEN MPL is on IMT bus A Q PoRTA BLANK Communication processor is not operating Q PORT A1 IMTB RE
48. 2 Place the loopback connector on port 5A of the EOAP A backplane Enter the following command at the prompt to take down X 25 software on the links tekelec XxXX root cd etc rc2 d tekelec XxXX root cd S87x25net stop 3 Confirm that the network has been stopped The X 25 software is being stopped please wait The network programs are being killed please wait NOTICE LAPB Down on link 0 NOTICE LAPB Down on link 0 The network has been stopped 4 Enter the following command to execute the loopback test of synchronous port 5A tekelec X X X root syncloop t 2 ases2 Verify that the amount of packets sent is the amount of packets received Data device dev ases3 Control device dev ases ppa 3 speed 9600 loopback no nrzi no txc baud rxc rxc checking for quiet line Trying first packet Trying many packets 100 100 packets sent 100 received CRC errors Aborts Overruns Underruns In lt Drops gt Out 0 0 0 0 0 0 estimated line speed 9485 bps 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 91 EOAP 6 92 Place the loopback connector on port 6A of the EOAP A backplane Enter the following command at the prompt to take down X 25 software on the links tekelec XXX root cd etc rc2 d tekelec XXX root cd S87x25net stop Confirm that the network has been stopped The X 25 software is being stopped please wait The network programs are being killed please wait NOTICE LAPB Down on link 0 N
49. Na d Fuse and E GR 376 L hard drive CDROM iis Cooling duct Fan switch e LD Fan unit Frame with GR 376 Front View 6 149 EOAP Figure 6 54 GR 376 EOAP Front GR 376 EOAP processor card o _ Hard 2 drive 00 00 gt CDROM Air management cards 0 S a lt Cooling duct ALARM p Fan switch TODA Figure 6 55 GR 376 EOAP P N 890 1050 02 Assembly GR 376 B GR 376 A hard drive lt GR 376 processor Cooling duct CD ROM Processor card Air management card Fan Assembly Power supply eight fans location below GR 376 6 150 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Figure 6 56 Routing Ethernet Cables
50. 1 Connectivity of both E1 and T1 interfaces by way of dual ports either an T1 network or an E1 network but not both at the same time External adapter P N 830 0895 01 is required on specific configurations SS7 processing of 8 time slots per card in any combination across both ports Interface E1 T1 PORT 1 provides an extension capability to E1 T1 MIM cards configured as Channel cards through an external backplane for processing additional time slots Channel Processing of up to 8 additional time slots from the Master card Interface through an external backplane provides Master card connectivity Table 5 11 provides an overview of the PORT 1 PORT 2 and EXT PORT Amber Light Emitting Diodes LEDs of the E1 T1 MIM card The PORT 1 PORT 2 Amber LEDs indicate the Cards is being use as a Channel Card or the EXT PORT Amber LED indicates a Master Card The card cannot be used as a channel card and a master card at the same time The Use of the card is determined by the way the card is provisioned 5 126 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 5 11 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies E1 T1 MIM and Channel Cards Card Function PORT 1 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned PORT 2 A
51. 830 0872 04 93 5 28 49 Black Black BP 1 POS RAID B PS B 830 0872 05 95 0 28 95 Black Red Input Power PSA 830 0872 06 93 5 28 49 Black Black Input Power PSB 830 0872 07 49 0 14 93 Black Red BP 1 POS 5A RAID A PSA 830 0872 08 47 5 14 47 Black Black BP 2 POS 5B RAID A PSB 830 0872 09 79 5 24 23 Black Red BP 2 POS 5A RAID B PS 830 0872 10 78 0 23 77 Black Black BP 1 POS 5B RAID B PS B Figure C 46 Power DC RAID P N 830 0872 xx PA P1 STRIPPED RING AND TINNED TERMIALS 1 125 1 75 38 1 5 10 62 62 a d 25 1 50 5 11 00 5 50 LENGTH 1 830 0872 B dwg 54 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0892 xx Multi Port LIM DSO 24 AWG Cables Figure C 47 Multi Port LIM 050 P N 830 0892 xx 1 1 ip POS 1 ec oum POS 19 POS 10 P DB 26 MALE TX RING TX TIP RX RING RX TIP TX RING 3 TX TIP 3 RX RING 3 RX TIP 3 NOT USED TX RING 2 TX TIP 2 RX RINC 2 2 TX RING 1 1 RX RING 1 1 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 P2 UNTERMINATED e i GRN RED GRN RED RED GRN RED GRN ORG RED ORG RED RED ORG RED ORG BLU RED BLU RED RED BLU RED BLU
52. A lt A AR a E qp La 1541 PI WA 5 ikl SG 2 0 Side Panel latching plates Frame brackets Side Panel latching plates _ 4 places Upper Panel clips Panel handle Lower P 3 25 Frames and Shelves Installing Unit Separation Brackets Procedure Install Brackets With Studs 1 Use preexisting holes in the frames 2 Use 12 screws P N 601 0010 01 to attach three unit separation brackets P N 652 0609 01 with studs as shown in Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 Unit Separation Bracket Installation Complete Separation Kit P N 840 0019 02 Separation panel 5 se ye lt 59 Hex nut with external washer 10 32 P N 604 0007 Separation bracket Separation P N 652 0609 01 bracket screw with external tooth washer 12 24 P N 601 0010 3 26 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frame Labeling Frames and Shelves This section details the application of frame and shelf labels All of the frames shown in Table 3 1 are labeled the same way on end panels and separation panels see Figure 3 20 and Figure 3 21 Additional labels on the newer heavy duty frame shown in Figure 3 22 on page 3 32 come pre installed Apply frame labels to the front of each frame as shown in Figure 3 18 Refer to Figure 3 20 for exact placement Refer to Table 3 1 for the proper label for each frame Table 3 1 Frame Labels and
53. DATA OAP A OAP B Hostname tekelec 260 tekelec 259 IP Address Not configured Not configured IP Netmask Not configured Not configured Default Router Not configured Not configured Config dual dual SEAC CLLI TEKELECSTP TEKELECSTP X25 Packet Size 7 7 X25 Mode DTE DTE 3 Issue the command to Activate EOAP configuration act oap config act oap config Command entered at terminal 41 tekelecstp 01 10 22 09 12 54 HST Rel XX X X XX X X ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD 4 Example with one EOAP or L2P3 set in the DEFAULTS FILE rept stat seas tekelecstp 96 01 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 24 0 0 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM OOS MT Fault TDM Port 8 IS NR Active ene EOAP A 024 006 000 IS NR Active X25 Link Al OOS MT Fault X25 Link B1 OOS MT Fault E SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS C 0349 SEAS unavailable 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 89 EOAP 6 90 SEAS EOAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link A1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 1 PVCs IS NR X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 B1 PVCs IS NR X25 Bl PVCs OOS MT Command completed Example with 2 EOAP s A amp B or DUAL MODE or L1P3 set in the DEFAULTS FILE NOTE The GPL of the EOAP may be different depending on the EAGLE and EOAP release The PST may vary from IS NR to IS ANR depending on status of X 25 links A SST state
54. DB DD DE DIP switch identification SHELF ID 5100 Wire wrap identification W ov SHELF e ID e BIT 00 01 02 03 MSB GRD LSB DIP switch identification SHELF ID 5200 Wire identification W oN og P SHELF e ID e BIT LSB DIP switch identification SHELF ID 5300 W DF 3 Figure 5 70 Extension Frame EF 04 Numbering Plan Extension Shelf frame 6 shelf 1 61 Card location numbers IMT addresses EO E1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EB EC ED DIP switch identification SHELF ID 6100 2 ONDAN Wire identification Wire wrap identification SHELF e LSB ID e MSB 5 161 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 48VDC Power Source 5 162 This section verifies that the 48VDC Power Source has been labeled and connected correctly to the corresponding system frame s Fuse and Alarm Panels FAPs Your system may not include all of the frames described For test points used in the following procedures see Figure 5 72 and Figure 5 72 DANGER No commercially AC powered equipment be used or placed within 7 ft of 48V equipment This may create a shock or current loop that can be severely haza
55. OAP Frame Control Frame Dual GR 376 Cabling pn E SYS GND BAR 2 KA anD GND oo FUSE PANEL 48VDC RTN 48VDC RTNC Leh LOGIC GND LOGIC 48VDC 48VDC BH 48VDC RTN 48VDC E CHASSIS GND CHASSIS 5 RTN B RTNCEHDS 9 L rn B 48VDC A 4BVDCEEI cn sve B 48VDCc 4 e ALARM INTFC P1 ACh ALARM INTFC B Ry Us CONTROL BP L HPOWER B RALMOcD 6 CHOAP ALARM PWR AC VT 520 KYBD 1 MMI X rHMMI X MMI X ch 115VAC 8 cpMMEX MMI X ch CF 00 13 EXT SHELF BP H H H B CLK OUT 6 POWER KYBD COMI VT 520 DSPLY com2 coms L 3 i FAN TRAY 1 890 1038 01 FAN A PWR FAN B PWR n 850 0487 xx 2 5 5 lt 5685555 SEE ic po E EE kerekeket av rEEELIE k k o a a ao a d59009000 E z a aa LALAT gu os lt a cages o e co m a o gt SYSTEMA amp System 9 amp n a i LEFT OAP BP RIGHT OAP 2 850 0488 xx VO BP 58 E nS 8 4 e f 5 2 5 amp 5 5 a R OR 5 HARD DISK CD ROM HARD DISK CD ROM CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER G0 18 850 0485 01 850 0485 02 850 0485 01 850 0485 02 BACKPLANE 850 0489 01 cPCI BACKPLANE 850 0489
56. Wire wrap identification SHELF e ID e BIT 00 01 02 t MSB GRD 03 LSB Wire identification SHELF e ID e BIT LSB Wire identification Wire wrap identification SHELF e LSB ID e MSB 4 39 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 40 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP Secure Gateway Assemblies Safety Information gun mise et 5 4 Recommended Ye ee cerae eco 5 7 Iritta system Cable Installatioti 5 7 Interprocessor Message Transport 5 7 Interface Cable InstalbitO9j eto estre preti rtr 5 12 Interface Cable Installation Order dee eret aen 5 13 Recommended Tools g Motu vet 5 18 LAN Ethernet Cable Installation for ACM sse 5 21 Recommended Tools tet eret debe ferire 5 21 DCM and Fan Option EDCM DSM 5 25 ASM and DSM MCPM Upgrade Procedures 5 28 Fan Assembly Installation and Cabling sees 5 54 Installing Fan Assembly 890 0001 01 eene 5 54 Installing Fan Assembly 890 1038 01 or 890 1038 02 5 68 Clock Cable Installation ten recen
57. fan connector g 97376 frmside eoap 910 4601 01 L i Cable ties Cable butt at this point three wires to FAP on each side Power cable 830 0699 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 13 When the power cables are formed across the back of the GR 376 EOAP shelf route the power cables up the frame rails to the FAP Form and dress cables NOTE When any cable is formed around the edge of the shelf or frame first wrap the cable with fiber paper Do not form power cables on the traverse arms 14 At the FAP end of the cable butt the cable at one and 1 1 2 inches beyond the frame rail The butted cable exposes three wires blue brown and green with a yellow tracer refer to Figure 6 63 for FAP termination points 15 Follow these guides to terminate the wires The blue wire will terminate on the RETURN terminal strip The brown wire will terminate on the 48V terminal strip The green wire with a yellow tracer will terminate to the CHASSIS GROUND terminal strip 16 For the fuse and alarm panel P N 870 2320 01 terminate the wire to terminal strips using terminal rings P N 502 0040 01 refer to Figure 6 63 NOTE Form the wires together to their proper location and then break them out of the form Figure 6 63 FAP P
58. 00 00 00 30 30 00 00 INDEF 00 30 00 30 00 30 00 30 00 30 00 30 00 30 09 30 00 30 00 30 59 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6 107 EOAP 6 108 TRM TRAF LINK SA SYS PU DB DB SUB UIMRD NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES YES 2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 3 YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES 4 YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 5 NO YES NO NO NO YES NO YES 6 NO NO YES NO NO NO YES YES NO 7 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 8 NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO 9 NO YES NO NO NO YES YES YES YES 10 NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO 11 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 12 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO 13 NO YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES 14 NO NO YES NO NO NO NO YES NO 15 YES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES 16 NO NO NO NO YES NO YES NO NO The first part of the output displays the communication security attributes of the terminal port The communication attributes of the terminal port BAUD parity stop bits and data bits are displayed in the comm field of the rtrv trm output and are displayed in this format BAUD DBTS PRTY SB The second part of the rtrv trm command output displays the types of unsolicited messages the terminal port may receive Place the terminal you wish to change out of service using the rmv trm command and specifying the ports you wish to place out of service For the configuration example of this procedure enter these commands
59. 1 2 3 GPL PST SST EOAP LSMS SYSTEM TDM Port TDM Port OAP OAP 0 3 Association 1 Q 3 Association B1 LSMS SYSTEM OAP A OAP B 0 3 Assoc A1 Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM Command Completed 250 001 000 IS NR 250 001 000 IS NR STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms Active Active Active Active Active Active Active If alarms are shown for the EOAPs in either the rept stat seas or rept stat 1sms outputs contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 19 Back up the changes using the chg db action backup dest fixed command These messages appear the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor MASP message appears first BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP FIXED FIXED FIXED FIXED MASP A Backup MASP A Backup MASP A Backup MASP A Backup starts on active MASP on active MASP to fixed disk complete starts on standby MASP on standby MASP to fixed disk complete 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 133 EOAP Reprovisioning Changing the EOAP Configuration Changing the EOAP Configuration from the Eagle STP Terminal Use this procedure if you need to change EOAP settings for example the number of EOAPs after you have upgraded to a dual configuration the host ID or the IP addr
60. C 51 Table C 13 Power Cable to Breaker Strip P N 830 0866 52 Table 14 Power DC Router P N 830 0869 C 53 Table C 15 Power DC RAID P N 830 0872 xx C 54 Table C 16 Power Cable P N 830 0908 xx C 56 Table C 17 Power Cable P N 830 0888 xx C 59 Table C 18 Power Cable P N 830 0889 C 60 Table D 1 International Power Cords For Peripheral Equipment D 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Procedures SRM A en onde tS e tni ie indie mets 1 21 Anchor Heave Duty Frame on Raised Floor eren 3 16 Attach Rear Covers with Round Holes 2 3 37 Attach Unistrut Overhead Supports ie tein Didier ortae 3 24 Cable Single Configuration BOUND 52 46 ro bei 6 35 Change Cabling to Dual Configuration ie 6 69 Change BOAP Configuration at Eagle 6 135 Configure from Eagle 6 119 Configure EOAP System Parameters put 6 104 Configure TDM Ports for EOAP at Eagle STP 6 107 Configuring the EOAP from the Eagle STP Terminal 6 112 Connect Ground Cable to Control
61. NSD Components Continued Function Number Note LIM OCU Link Interface Provides 2 Office 870 1010 xx Replaced by Module Office Channel Unit 870 1486 xx and EILA Channel Units OCU interfaces at 56 kbps LIM V 35 Link Interface Provides 1 V 35 870 1012 Replaced by Module Trunk interface at 56 870 1487 xx and EILA Interface and 64 kbps for SS7 and 4 8 9 6 19 2 56 and 64 kbps for X 25 GPSM II General Purpose IP connectivity 870 2360 01 Service Module replace MCAP in large systems MCA Matrix Controls output 000 0028 xx Controller protection switch Automatic matrix Holdover Clock MCAP Maintenance Provides control 870 1013 xx Administration for the interface 870 1307 xx 256 Subsystem functions of the MAS TDM Communications Applications Processor MDAL Maintenance Alarming and 870 0773 XX Disk and Alarm cartridge based Card loading of software MIS Maintenance Provides alarms 804 0175 xx Interface System output to system Card Holdover control shelf Clock MPL Multi Port Link Provides up to 8 870 2061 xx Interface Module ANSI 56 Kbps DSO link connectivity MPS Multi purpose Database reload 890 1287 xx OEM Open Server functionality to 890 1374 xx System various applications 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 General Installation Information Table2 1 NSD Components Cont
62. P1 P2 ran Length Long Long Label A usage Label B usage Number Level inches inches Lead Lead 830 0869 01 C 72 0 11 0 Black Red BP 1 POS ISO Router A 830 0869 02 C 79 0 17 0 Black Red BP 1 POS Dial in Router 830 0869 03 C 78 0 17 0 Black Red BP 2 POS ISO Router B 830 0869 04 C 78 0 17 0 Black Red BP 1 POS 6B Dial in Router 830 0869 05 C 72 0 11 0 Black Red 1 POS 5A ISO Router A 830 0869 06 C 78 0 17 0 Black Red 1 POS 5B ISO Router B 830 0869 07 A 82 0 22 0 Black Red BP 1 POS 6B To Router YEL from Router YEL from BP 1 POS 6A 830 0869 08 A 74 0 14 0 Black Red To BP 1 POS 68 To Router BLU from Router BLU from BP 1 POS 6A 830 0869 09 A 38 0 11 0 Black Red BP 2 POS 4A Dial in Router Figure C 45 Power DC Router P N 830 0869 xx P2 1 STRIPPED RING AND TINNED TERMIALS 5 125 1 75 38 1 75 4 62 F 50 8 6 5 50 X 7 50 LENGTH 1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0869 XX_REV_F DWG C 53 Cables 830 0872 xx Power DC RAID Table C 15 Power DC RAID P N 830 0872 xx P1 P2 Length Length Long Long Label A usage Label B usage Number inches meters Lead Lead 830 0872 01 91 0 27 73 Black Red BP 1 POS3A RAID A PS A 830 0872 02 89 5 27 27 Black Black BP 2 POS RAID A PS B 830 0872 03 95 0 28 95 Black Red BP 2 POS3A RAID B PS A
63. TOCA cards positions Recommended Tools 5 108 Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Wire wrap tool and bit Diagonal cutters Flush cutters Slotted screwdriver with 1 8 inch blade and 8 inch shank preferred Phillips screwdrivers 2 and 3 3 8 inch shrink wrap Heat shrink gun hot air blower 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Output Panel Connections The following output panel connections are factory installed and should be checked during installation TOCA Ribbon Cables Timing Output Composite Clock Automatic TOCA ribbon cable check to insure that the ribbon cables connecting the holdover clock with the output panel are connected as shown in Figure 5 42 OUT 1 on the holdover clock to J1 on the output panel and OUT 2 on the holdover clock to J2 on the output panel NOTE These cables connect the clock outputs from the TOCA cards to the output panel TOLA Card When Using a Timing Output Logic Clock Automatic TOLA card only terminate the clock cable leads to the odd pin positions 1 3 5 7 and 9 Set DIP switch settings to the OFF position Once switches are set seat the card Figure 5 40 TOLA Master Timing Leads Note Master Timing leads can only be terminated on the ODD ports on the Holdover C
64. eee C 29 830 0622 xx E1 Cable eese eene nnne C 30 830 0624 xx Cable Assembly BNC to C 31 830 0625 xx Cable BNC Oper C 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table of Contents 830 0638 xx Filter Rack Alarm Cable C 33 830 0651 48V Power Cable C 34 830 0656 01 Fifty Position Cable Hard Drive C 35 830 0657 XX Clock Connection C 36 830 0708 MMI Port Cable C 37 830 0709 xx Modem Terminal Cable C 38 830 0710 xx Network Cable C 39 830 0711 xx 100 BASE TX Interface C 40 830 0723 xx CAT 5 Crossover Cable 41 830 0724 xx 5 Straight Trough Cable C 42 830 0759 xx Null Modem Cakble C 43 830 0763 01 Loop Back Cable Adapter terrre C 44 830 0772 xx Multi Port LIM DS0 C 45 830 0788 xx Straight Through ec odere inne C
65. shelf Part of 830 0699 01 clock out blue conductor to 830 0709 xx 804 0657 TARTN D Q G 0 0 0 0 0 0 o m FAN B PWR A FAN APWR A POWER IN B E lt p E OAPRST A BCLKIN A BCLKOUT A 5 Ca To 18 port 28 MODEM A 830 0709 xx e FAN B PWR B FAN APWR B PORT 4B oO A OAP RST B BCLKIN B BCLKOUT B T C CO MMLX A port s G 830 0708 xx VK 9 EOAPbackcables 101010 o ofo oo ofo j PORT 10B PORT 5A PORT 104 PORT 6B ENN PORT6A PORT 9A PORT 5B PORTE PORT 7A PORT 8A PORT 7B 830 0609 01 830 0709 xx 830 0709 xx T To To Fan Tray B 25 MODEMA X 25 MODEM B Power 6 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Figure 6 16 Cable Connections Diagram Single Configuration OAP Frame Control Frame GND Bar 77 System Ground Bar L _ B B Fuse Panel Fuse Panel Logic Gnd Logic Gnd rj Lh Logic Gnd Logic Gnd 48 0 48VDC RING 1 48VDC 48VDC BO 48VDC 48VDC RTN 48VDC B
66. 1 Run the 1 0 ground cable from the central office Main Ground Bar MGB over the cable rack horns to the system Control Frame CF 00 2 Atthe control frame end of the cable a Cutthe 1 0 Green Ground Cable P N 690 0108 07 to length and strip the end b Slide the clear heat shrink P N 804 0229 01 on the cut and stripped end of the cable Move the heat shrink past the stripped portion of the cable to allow access to the uncovered wire Apply a thin coat of non oxidizing grease to the stripped end of the cable d Slide the 1 0 pink lug P N 804 0977 01 to the stripped cable Secure the lug to the cable by double crimping the barrel of the lug using a crimping tool with embossing dies The stripped cable must fill lug completely to the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug e Slide the heat shrink P N 804 0229 01 down over the barrel of the lug and the cable f UseaHeat shrink gun hot air blower to shrink the clear heat shrink to the barrel of the lug and cable 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 15 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 16 3 Secure the cable to the cable rack horns with lacing cord NOTE Tie wraps are not allowed on the top frame horn or above On the top horn bracket and above use only lacing cord 4 Applya small amount of non oxidizing grease to the mounting holes on a copper system ground bar where the lug contacts the ground bar on a tinned ground bar non
67. 9 Take the cable end marked EOAP PORT 1A and plug it into port COM2 on the back of the VT 520 terminal 10 Take the cable end marked EOAP PORT 1B and plug it into port on the back of the VT 520 terminal 6 50 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP You have now connected the four terminal cables P Ns 830 0528 xx 830 0709 between the EOAP and the VT 520 terminal Finish these cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 Install EOAP Asynchronous Modem Cables Use two EOAP modem cables P N 830 0709 xx to connect to asynchronous modems A and B Procedure Install EOAP Asynchronous Modem Cables 1 Take the first modem cable P N 830 0709 xx and connect it to PORT 2A located at the center right of the EOAP backplane Connect the other end to Modem A Tighten the cable connectors 2 Take the second modem cable P N 830 0709 xx and connect it to PORT 2B located at the center left of the EOAP backplane Connect the other end to Modem B Tighten the cable connectors 3 Loosely route these two cables from each connector down to the third tie rod and across the rod toward the right side of the EOAP backplane 4 Route the two cables around the right side of the shelf to the center of the next traverse arm extender Then route the cable up to the top of the EOAP frame across the cable rack and down to the modem A connector You have now connected the two asynchronous modem cables P N 830 0709 x
68. BIS Clock uya Sa na ett RE Cleck A re eue Clock A In Connector a Clock A Out Connector hiin niin Clock In Out Extension Clock A In Connector J5 sese Clock B In OWt naui Clock B In COnnecto eite deter REO qa a Clock B Out Connector essere eren Clock A Out Connector J6 Clock B In Extension Shelf Connector J41 Clock B Out Extension Shelf Connector 42 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 vii Table of Contents Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 B 18 Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 06 B 19 Control Shelf Modules a 20 ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector B 20 ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector B 22 Extension Backplane P N 850 0356 01 B 25 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 01 B 25 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 03 B 26 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 04
69. GREEN Link is aligned and service PORT A3 RED Link is out of service Revision GREEN Link is aligned and in service b T PORTB RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service number PORT B1 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B2 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B3 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service 5 134 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies MPL Card Diagnostic Cable Diagnostic Cable P N 803 0029 01 provides a terminal interface for on board diagnostic tests of the Multi Port Link Interface Module MPL card The MPL card supports eight Digital Signal Level 0 DS0 ports links per module Figure 5 58 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable P N 803 0029 01 MPL Card P N 870 2061 01 Diagnostic Connection rum 10 12 15 DIAG Note P10 P12 and P15 DIAG Pin one must be covered with jumper for diagnostics to work properly
70. Unscrew and remove jumper board Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 FAP_JB hang Remove the FAP JB Jumper Board by turning the top and bottom screws to the left until they disengage Pull the board straight out of the FAP until the board is clear of the frame The fuse location is apparent Fuse Holders are marked with the prefix FH followed by a numbered sequence Refer to Figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Jumper Board FAP Fuse Remove damaged fuse Hs o H7 FH70 G 1 _ Tapfuse change 2 4 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Refer to the Fuse Holders FH70 FH71 FH72 and FH73 and install or replace any fuse necessary refer to Figure 4 6 Figure 4 6 Jumper Board FAP Fuse Installation Replace damaged fuse with a new undamaged fuse P N 517 0031 01 Always Replace With The Same 30 Amp Fuse Type Return the board to the appropriate slot making sure the board is well seated Tighten the screws on the front of the jumper board on the front of the FAP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 7 Fuses and Alarm Panels Power Cabling Procedure This procedure is used to install the office battery power cable The Fuse and Alarm Panel FAP is located at the top of the frame
71. ray tihted acrylic rear cover i Support groove This is the end of this chapter For more information on Frames and Shelves refer to 910 4058 Chapter 3 Document 910 4058 contains information on all frame types that have been used by Tekelec 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 37 Frames and Shelves 3 38 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuse and Alarm 4 2 Safety Information ve due ua ay h 4 2 Fuse and Alarm Panel Overview 2 22221 4 3 Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 and P N 870 2320 02 4 5 Jumper board Fuse Installation peuples 4 5 Power Cabling Procedure Li 4 8 Frame Ground and Logic Ground Cabling Procedures 4 13 Fuse Verilicaliori o oet eim octets 4 21 Lists Fuse and Card 4 24 Card Locations in Control and Extension Shelves 4 35 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 1 Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuse and Alarm Panels Safety Information DANGER Do not carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets or on belts when working on or around electronic equipment Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry on wrists or hands when working on the electronic equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive compone
72. Enter the following command to inhibit each OAP terminal displayed in the output from Step 8 inh trm trm x where x is the terminal number Enter the following command for each terminal inhibited in Step 9 to temporarily change the terminal type from OAP to none chg trm trm x type none where x is the terminal number Enter the following command to verify that the databases in the current FD CRNT and the backup FD BKUP partitions of the active MASP match rept stat db display version The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 27 03 46 39 EST EAGLE 31 6 0 DATABASE STATUS gt gt OK lt lt TDM 1114 ACTV TDM 1116 STDBY LEVEL TIME LAST BACKUP C LEVEL TIME LAST BACKUP FD BKUP Y 43 03 08 14 03 02 18 EST Y 43 03 08 14 03 02 18 EST FD CRNT Y 43 43 MDAL 1117 RD BKUP Y 1 CARD APPL LOC C T LEVEL TIME LAST UPDATE VERSION STATUS TDM CRNT 1114 Y N 43 03 08 27 00 56 30 121 000 000 NORMAL TDM BKUP 1114 43 03 08 14 01 10 46 121 000 000 NORMAL TDM CRNT 1116 Y N 43 03 08 27 00 56 30 121 000 000 NORMAL TDM BKUP 1116 Y 43 03 08 14 01 10 46 121 000 000 NORMAL MDAL 1117 Y 43 03 08 27 00 56 30 121 000 000 NORMAL Compare the VERSION STATUS of the TDM cards in the output of the previous step If they are identical continue to the next step If they are not the same contact Tekelec Technical Services at the appropriate number 910 4601 01 Revision
73. Environment Product damaged by environmental phenomena such as water damage or earthquake Damaged in Shipment Damaged between shipment from Tekelec and receipt at the Customer s installation site DOA Dead on Arrival Product is not functional when it is first installed at the Customer s location Lab Return Products returned from lab sites Product Capture Defect to be captured by Quality or Engineering not Product Recall Product Deficiency Anything wrong with the part that doesn t fall into another category Product Recall Products recalled by divisions for the repair of a defect or replacement of defective products Return No Product Deficiency Anything returned without the product being defective 1 20 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Repair and Return Shipping Instructions Introduction returned equipment assemblies or subassemblies must be shipped to the Tekelec Repair and Return Facility specified by the Technical Services engineer The item being returned must be shipped in the original carton or in an equivalent container assuring proper static handling procedures and with the freight charges prepaid The assigned RMA number must be clearly printed on the RMA line of the shipping label on the outside of the shipping package If the RMA number is not placed on the label the return could be delayed Procedure RMA 1 Obtain a
74. Frame cable tie bars intcables es21 Rear of Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 XX 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 27 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies ASM TDM and DSM MCPM Upgrade Procedures This section describes procedures for upgrading your ASM and TDM cards and your DSM cards loaded with the MCPM application NOTE Note DSM and EDSM cards loaded with the MCPM application will be referred to as cards Application Service Module ASM to Transaction Service Module TSM 256 or higher Upgrade for SCCP 5 28 Description Beginning with EAGLE 31 6 ASM cards are obsoleted and all ASM cards must be replaced by TSM cards Use the following procedure to replace your ASM cards with TSM cards The SCCP identifier signifies that this ASM TSM card is being used to provide global title translation GTT The TSM 256 or higher provides additional memory for storage of the GTT tables These tables are downloaded from the terminal disk module TDM to the ASM upon power loss or hard reset TSM cards can perform the same function as the ASM cards Procedure Upgrading ASM SCCP 1 Enter the following command to determine the number of ASM SCCP cards in service providing GTT rept stat sccp mode perf The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 98 02 04 15 10 19 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 SCCP SUBSYSTEM REPORT IS NR Ovflw 1 SCCP Cards Configured 4 Cards IS NR
75. V RXD 14 2 RxCB X RXD 15 3 TxCCA Y 16 4 IxCCB 17 55 GND 5 TEST i 18 LOOPL RLSD F TXD 19 RTS C SIG GND 7 DSR E 20 TxDA TX RING 12VDC 8 CHASS A TXD 21 TxDB 5 12VDC GND 9 22 RxDA R RX RING 10 SIG B SIG 23 RxDB T RX TIP GND GND 11 24 IxCTA U 12 25 TxCDB W 13 26 LOOPM BB 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 33 Connectors Table B 20 Connectors Ports and Card Slots Interface Connectors Ports and Card Slots Card Slot Port Connector Port Connector 01 1A J24 1B J40 02 2A J23 2B J39 03 3A J22 3B J38 04 4A J21 4B J37 05 5A J20 5B J36 06 6A J19 6B J35 07 7A J18 7B J34 08 8A J17 8B J33 11 9A J16 9B J32 12 10A J15 10B J31 13 11A J14 11B J30 14 12A J13 12B J29 15 13A J12 13B J28 16 14A J11 14B J27 17 15A J10 15B J26 18 16A J9 16B J25 B 34 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors External Alarm J28 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 External Alarm J35 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 CUST ALM 1 J66 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 CUST ALM 2 not supported by software Figure B 22 External Alarm Connector 9 9 O 9 9 0 9 OO 9 2 9 9 69 69 9 69 69 69 69 69 69 9 Table B 21 External Alarm Connector Pin Signal Description 2 CUFA13 Signals a customer defined trouble 13 to the s
76. connected to EAGLE STP System information sheet for each GR 376 EOAP processor card containing system s hostname customer s network IP address ofthe following general information that is applicable to the customer s system customer s subnet netmask customer s network default router IP address number of configured EOAPs single or dual LSMS system identity main or shadow network service access point MNSAP of the main LSMS system session selector MSSEL of the main LSMS system presentation selector MPSEL of the main LSMS system network service access point SNSAP of the shadow LSMS system session selector SSSEL of the shadow LSMS system presentation selector SPSEL of the shadow LSMS system SEAC common language location identifier SEACCLLI X5 packet size 7 or 8 X25 mode DCE or DTE Configuring EOAP System Parameters operating system Any undocumented changes to the files may cause the system to become corrupted and unusable Making any undocumented changes on the EOAP including changes to the hardware operating system and or the components found therein will void the warranty CAUTION EOAP s open system architecture allows access to the 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 103 EOAP EOAP Initial Inplementation 6 104 This section provides the procedures for the Initial Implementation of the EOAP These procedures a
77. on MTCD LINK on MTCD STPLAN on MTCD LNKSET on If measurement collection is off COLLECT off go to Step 17 If it is on go to Step 16 16 Enter the following command to turn off measurement collection chg meas collect off The system returns the output similar to the following tekelecstp 00 01 07 07 29 18 EST Rel 31 6 0 CHG MEAS MASP A COMPLTD 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 39 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 40 17 Enter the following command to verify that the security log on the 18 19 standby MASP contains no entries that must be copied to the FTA area of the fixed disk rept stat seculog The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 96 10 04 15 59 06 EDT EAGLE 31 6 0 SINCE LAST UPLOAD OLDEST NEWEST LAST LOC ROLE ENTRIES FULL OFLO FAIL RECORD RECORD UPLOAD 1114 Active 8312 84 No No 95 08 12 96 01 04 96 12 16 11 23 56 15 59 06 14 02 22 1116 Standby 693 7 No No 95 09 12 95 09 30 95 09 30 11 24 12 14 00 06 14 02 13 If the number shown in the ENTRIES field for the standby MASP shown with the entry Standby in the ROLE field is 0 go to Step 22 If the number shown in the ENTRIES field for the standby MASP is greater than 0 these entries must be copied to the FTA area of the fixed disk To copy these entries go to Step 18 Copy the security log entries on the stan
78. rmv trm trm 4 rmv trm trm 10 After successful completion of each command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Inhibit message sent to terminal rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 Verify that the terminal that was placed out of service in step 3 is in the OOS MT DSBLD state by entering the rept stat trm command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 15 Active 2 15 Active 3 IS NR Active 4 OOS MT DSBLD Manual 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active 7 IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 10 OOS MT DSBLD Manual 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 15 Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Active 16 IS NR Active Command Completed 5 Changethe terminal characteristics using the chg trm command For this example enter these commands chg trm trm 4 type oap chg trm trm 10 type oap After successful completion of each command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG TRM MASP A COMPLTD 6 Verify the changes made in step 5 by using the rtrv trm command with the port number specified in step 5 Enter these commands rtrv trm trm 4 rtrv trm trm 10 These
79. 7 830 0366 02 1201 CF 00 105 09 SH2 J24 RR 106 03 1 JK 13 TR XMT 8 02 830 0366 02 12018 CF 00 105 09 SH2 J40 RR 106 03 PNL 1 JK 14 2 Locate the labels included with the cable shipment 3 Take one cable and identify the cable s part number in the Cable Type column of the cable running list C 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 4 Match the cable with its corresponding pair of labels a Goto the cable s From column of the cable running list b Match the From column information to the From information on one label c Match the From column information to the To information on the other label NOTE 1 The label for the connector end of these cables can be identified by the presence of a J number for example J32 that appears in the From area of the label NOTE2 Make sure that all cables specific to an A or B side are clearly labeled as A cable and B cable 5 Repeat Step 4 for each cable to ensure that all labels are present and that originations and destinations of all cables are clearly identified 6 For cables that come from the factory with connectors already installed apply the appropriate label onto each end of the cable approximately two inches from the connector NOTE Ensure that the labels are positioned so they are still readable after the cables are installed 7 For cables that need to be cut to the appropriate length After the ca
80. 870 1824 01 5 63 870 1915 01 2 10 870 1965 04 1 6 870 1984 01 5 25 870 2049 01 A 6 870 2320 4 34 870 2320 01 2 10 4 5 4 8 870 2360 01 1 6 890 1038 01 5 68 Index 6 parameter AIPADDR chg oap config 6 112 ANAME chg oap config 6 112 ANMASK chg oap config 6 112 AROUTER chg oap config 6 112 BIPADDR chg oap config 6 112 BNAME chg oap config 6 112 BNMASK chg oap config 6 112 BROUTER chg oap config 6 112 CFG chg oap config 6 112 FORCE chg oap config 6 113 LSMS chg oap config 6 112 MNSAP chg oap config 6 113 MPSEL chg oap config 6 113 MSSEL chg oap config 6 113 OAP chg oap config 6 113 SNSAP chg oap config 6 113 SPSEL chg oap config 6 113 SSSEL chg oap config 6 113 performance impact act oap config parameters 6 114 pink lug 4 15 port labels and functions 6 32 Power 4 8 power cable 4 8 power cable installation 5 7 power cables 4 12 power connectors B 62 power source verification 5 162 power up procedure 5 163 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 problems critical 1 18 major 1 18 minor 1 19 procedure Configuring the EOAP from the System Terminal 6 104 6 112 Production Control 1 17 3 4 R rack alarm and row alarm cable routing 5 11 rack alarm cable installation 5 87 rack alarm connectors B 64 rack horns 4 16 Raised Floor 3 14 Raised floor 3 24 raised floor 3 16 ramp 3 5 rear covers 3 26 3 37 Receiving 3 4 Recommended Tools 3 11 3 14 5 7 5 21 5 85 5 108 5 121 Recommended Tools and Mat
81. A IMT OUT J7 AIMTOUT 78 AIMTOUT 78 B IMT IN J44 BIMTIN _78 BIMTIN _78 B IMT OUT J43 BIMTOUT _78 N e Ni e N ej N e BIMTOUT _78 B 52 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Local Maintenance Center Alarm Backplane J40 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J47 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 35 Local Maintenance Center Alarm Connector C 9 0 oO OOOO o Table B 34 Local Maintenance Center Alarm Connector Pin Signal 1 3 4 5 11 12 Not used 2 LMCANC Local Maintenance Center Audible Alarm Normally Closed 6 LMCVMJNC Local Maintenance Center Major Alarm Normally Closed 7 LMCVMNNC Local Maintenance Center Minor Alarm Normally Closed 8 LMCVCRNC Local Maintenance Center Critical Alarm Normally Closed 9 LMCACOM Local Maintenance Center Audible Alarm Common 10 LMCANO Local Maintenance Center Audible alarm normally Open 13 LMCVCOM Local Maintenance Center Common 14 LMCVMJNO Local Maintenance Center Major Alarm Normally Open 15 LMCVMNNO Local Maintenance Center Minor Alarm Normally Open 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 53 Connectors MAS Communication Application Processor MAS Communication Application Processor Control Shelf Backplane connector MCAP Connectors P3 P5 P19 P21 MCAP Backplane Pin outs Top Connectors P3 P5 Figure B 36 MCAP Backplane Pin Ou
82. ASEROC 50 09 LGND C09 50 009 LGND A10 ABMUXIN B10 ASELC C10 LGND D10 ASELF 11 50 11 LGND C11 50 D11 LGND A12 50 B12 LGND C12 50 D12 LGND A13 LGND B13 AINC C13 LGND D13 AINF 14 ASEROB 50 14 LGND C14 ASEROG 50 D14 LGND A15 ASEROB 50 B15 LGND C15 ASEROG 50 015 LGND A16 LGND B16 ASELB C16 LGND D16 ASELG 17 ASERIB 50 B17 LGND C17 50 D17 LGND A18 ASERIB 50 18 LGND C18 50 D18 LGND A19 LGND B19 AINB C19 LGND D19 AING 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 41 Connectors Table B 27 Control Shelf HMUX A Backplane Pin Outs Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A20 B20 LGND C20 50 D20 LGND A21 B21 LGND C21 50 D21 LGND A22 LGND B22 C22 LGND D22 ASELH A23 B23 LGND C23 50 D23 LGND A24 B24 LGND C24 50 D24 LGND A25 LGND B25 C25 LGND D25 AINH A26 ASEROA 50 B26 LGND C26 ASEROI 50 D26 LGND A27 50 B27 LGND C27 ASEROI 50 D27 LGND A28 LGND B28 ASELA C28 LGND D28 ASELI A29 ASERIA _50 B29 LGND C29 ASERII _50 D29 LGND A30 ASERIA 50 B30 LGND 50
83. Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A dummy fuse Fuse 14A dummy fuse Fuse 15A dummy fuse Fuse 16A dummy fuse Fuse 17A dummy fuse Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A 10 A EOAP A A power FAP P N 870 2320 01 Fuse 20A 10 A EOAP B A power FAP P N 870 2320 01 5 154 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 3B dummy fuse Fuse 4B dummy fuse Fuse 5B dummy fuse Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B dummy fuse Fuse 8B dummy fuse Fuse 9B dummy fuse Fuse 10B dummy fuse Fuse 11B dummy fuse Fuse 12B dummy fuse Fuse 13B dummy fuse Fuse 14B dummy fuse Fuse 15B dummy fuse Fuse 16B dummy fuse Fuse 17B dummy fuse Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B 7 5 A OAP A B power FAP P N 870 2320 01 10 A EOAP A B power FAP P N 870 2320 01 Fuse 20B 75 A OAP B B power P N 870 2320 01 10 A EOAP B B power FAP P N 870 2320 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 155 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 64 shows the location of the fuse holders on FAP P N 870 2320 01 P N 870 2320 01 mounting brackets required Figure 5 64 Fuse Holder Locations on FAPs Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01
84. GANWHT RMCMJNO 14 Q WHT BRN RMCMNNO 15 6 BRNIWHT R 1 DRAIN WIRE 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0233 C 11 Cables 830 0257 xx Hazard Ground Cable C 12 Table C 4 Hazard Ground Cable P N 830 0257 xx Part Length Length Length Length Number inches centimeters Part Number inches centimeters 830 0257 01 15 38 1 830 0257 03 36 91 4 830 0257 02 24 75 62 9 830 0257 04 36 91 4 Figure C 7 Hazard Ground Cable P N 830 0257 xx Q O AE O O 8300257x 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0315 xx Power Cable Table C 5 Power Cable P N 830 0315 xx Cables Lengt Length Length Length Part Number 5 5 Part Number 5 5 h feet meters feet meters 830 0315 01 4 0 1 07 830 0315 04 4 5 1 22 830 0315 02 6 0 1 07 830 0315 05 6 5 1 98 830 0315 03 8 0 2 29 830 0315 06 8 5 2 58 Figure C 8 Power Cable P N 830 0315 xx 5 Ll P1 I g 55 P2 E3 8 1 2 26 MALE DB 26 MALE EAGLE BACKPLANE FAP 7 P5 48VDC 1 LS BLK 9 P5 48VDC P5 48VDC 10 XXK RED 18 P5 48VDC P5 48RTN 2 T T 8 P5 48RTN P5 48RTN 11 IT ux 17 5 48 P4 48VDC 3
85. LGND B25 INE C25 LGND 025 INL A26 SEROD 50 B26 LGND C26 SEROM 50 D26 LGND A27 SEROD 50 27 LGND C27 SEROM 50 027 LGND A28 LGND B28 SELD C28 LGND D28 SELM A29 SERID _50 B29 LGND C29 SERIM _50 D29 LGND A30 SERID _50 B30 LGND SERIM _50 D30 LGND A31 LGND B31 IND C31 LGND D31 SINM A32 SEROC 50 B32 LGND C32 SERON 50 D32 LGND A33 5 50 B33 LGND SERON _50 D33 LGND LGND B34 SELC C34 LGND D34 SELN A35 S SERIC 50 B35 LGND C35 SERIN 50 D35 LGND A36 SERIC _50 B36 LGND C36 SERIN _50 D36 LGND A37 LGND B37 INC C37 LGND D37 SINN A38 SEROB 50 B38 LGND C38 SEROO 50 D38 LGND A39 SEROB 50 B39 LGND C39 55 50 039 LGND A40 LGND 40 SELB C40 LGND D40 SELO 41 SERIB _50 B41 LGND C41 SERIO 50 D41 LGND 42 5 50 42 LGND C42 SERIO 50 D42 LGND A43 LGND B43 SINB C43 LGND D43 INO 44 SEROA _50 B44 LGND C44 SEROP 50 D44 LGND 45 55 50 B45 LGND C45 SEROP 50 D45 LGND A46 LGND B46 SELA C46 LGND D46 SELP 47 SERIA _50 B47 LGND C47 SERIP _50 D47 LGND 48 SERIA 50 B48 LGND C48 SERIP _50 D48 LGND A49 LGND B49 INA C49 LGND D49 INP 50 5 78 B50 LGND C50 IMTOUT 78 D50 LGND A51 IMTIN 78 B51 LGND C51 IMTOUT _78 D51 LGND A52 LGND B52 LGND C52 LGND D52
86. MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3A 1Amp 3109 HMUX 4 26 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 4 5 Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 4A 3Amp 3111 3112 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 5A 3Amp 3115 3116 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 6A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7A 3Amp 3201 3202 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 8A 3Amp 3205 3206 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 9A 1Amp 3209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 3211 3212 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 11A 3Amp 3215 3216 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM EDCM Fuse 12A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13A 3Amp 3301 3302 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 14A 3Amp 3305 3306 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 15A 1Amp 3309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 3311 3312 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17A 3Amp 3315 3316 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 18A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19A dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20A dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 01 EF 01 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B refer to Figure 4 18 Fuse 1B 3Amp 3103 3104 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM
87. Not configured Shadow LSMS PSEL Not configured Not configured When both the SEAS and LNP features are on all the fields of the rtrv oap config output are displayed This output example shows all the fields of the rtrv oap config output If only the SEAS LNP feature is on then only fields related to the feature that is on are displayed Table 6 17 on page 6 116 shows the fields that are displayed when the SEAS and LNP features are on 6 122 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Before the EOAP configuration can be sent to the specified EOAP with the act oap config command certain fields of the rtrv oap config command output must be correctly configured depending on whether the SEAS or LNP features are on or not If these fields do contain incorrect entries and the EOAP configuration is sent to the specified EOAP the specified EOAP may go out of service Table 6 17 on page 6 116 also shows the fields that must be correctly configured before the EOAP configuration is sent to the specified EOAP 8 Make sure that there are no alarms for either EOAP If only the SEAS feature is on enter the rept stat seas command If only the LNP feature is on enter the rept stat 1sms command If both the SEAS and LNP features are on enter both the rept stat seas and rept stat 1sms commands The following are examples of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report IS
88. PORT A is the active PORT RED PORT is inactive GREEN PORT B is the active PORT CLEI RED PORT B is inactive code Plug JTAG T T Revision number XX Part number EDCM 870 2372 01 A 14 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Embedded EOAP P N 890 1050 01 Figure A 12 EOAP LEDs OAP A front view OAP B font view OO00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Bion OAP A hard drive LED 3 OAPA CD ROM LEDs E 20 ALARM FANS OFF AUTO FANS Power GREEN processor card has power RED is processor card failure Activity OFF Power Alarm Power Power Status ACTIVE ALARM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 GREEN flashing when communicating over Compact PCI bus Not used GREEN Input power is on AMBER Power supply failure GREEN Hard drive card is powered AMBER CD ROM Drive
89. RBCRNC 031 RBBNO A32 R5FANCTRL B32 SSEL 100 C32 D32 A33 B33 SI O 100 C33 D33 A34 B34 SC D 100 C34 D34 A35 LGND B35 5 100 C35 D35 E2 P5B48RTN 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 59 Connectors OAP Alarm Backplane J74 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J69 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 39 OAP Alarm Connector OO OOO G0 9 09 090 49 49 Table B 39 OAP Alarm Connector Pin Signal 1 2 6 7 13 14 Not used OAPMNNC OAP Alarm Minor Normally Closed OAPMJNC OAP Alarm Major Normally Closed Fuse Alarm 3 4 5 OAPCRNC OAP Alarm Critical Normally Closed 8 9 OAPBNO OAP Alarm busy Normally Open 10 OAPMNNO OAP Alarm minor normally Open 11 OAPMJNO OAP Alarm Major Normally Open 12 OAPCOM OAP Alarm Common 15 OAPFA Row Fuse Alarm not currently supported B 60 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Power Connector Extension Backplane J1 J4 P N 850 0356 01 J1 J4 Primary J45 J46 Secondary P N 850 0356 03 Figure B 40 Power Connector OR ORO OOOO 9 0 09 05 09 9 9 9 69 69 69 62 6 9 Table B 40 Power Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 P5 48VDC 14 LGND 2 P5 48RTN 15 P3 48RTN 3 P4 48VDC 16 P3 48VDC 4 P4 48RTN 17 P2 48RTN 5 LGND 18 P2
90. 100 F 830 0949 09 B 125 FT 830 0949 10 B 150 F 830 0949 11 B 175 FT 830 0949 12 B 200 F 830 0949 13 B 250 FT 830 0949 14 B 300 FT 830 0949 15 B 500 F P1 830 0949 16 B 1000 FT P2 POS 1 POS 10 POS 19 10 00 50 E1 T1 LIM to MPL CABLE ADAPTER P2 DB 26 MALE P N 830 0949 01 DB 26 FEMALE GRN RED N _ TX RING 4 24 SED EEN Mx Severn 4 IX RING 4 4 25 3 PCTP 4 RX RING 4 26 2 RX RING 4 4 18 2 RED ORC 4 RX TIP 4 BLU RED BLU RED TX RING 3 9 9 IX RING 3 3 7 ym gt lt m 7 3 RX RING 3 6 6 RX RING 3 RX TP 3 5 WHT GRY 5 Rx TP 3 Ea 414 10 10 NOT USED NOT USED 17 17 19 19 TX RING 2 1 24 TX RING 2 TX TIP 2 2 LA wird a 25 TX TIP 2 RX RING 2 3 26 RX RING 2 Rx TP 2 4 FWHTI GRN y o d WHT GRN 18 RX TIP 2 ORN WHT ORN WHT TX RING 1 20 20 TX RING 1 TX TIP 1 21 E 9 21 TX TIP 1 RX RING 1 22 22 RX RING 1 RX TIP 1 23 HI BLU XXK WHT BLU 23 RX TIP 1 v v E DRAIN J 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 67 Cables 850 0496 01 Force Transition Card Figure C 60 Force Transition Card P N 850 0496 01 COVER THIS RECTANGLE AND TEXT WITH SERIAL STICKER
91. 19 LGND B19 LGND C19 D19 A20 ROFBALM 20 C20 RIFBALM 020 A21 ROFAALM 21 LGND C21 RIFAALM 21 A22 LGND 22 R2FBALM C22 D22 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 57 Connectors Table B 37 MDAL Backplane Top Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A23 LGND B23 RAFAALM C23 RICRNC D23 RICOM A24 LGND B24 C24 RIMJNC D24 RIMJNO 25 RIFANCTRL B25 LGND C25 RIMNNC 025 RIMNNO A26 R2FANCTRL B26 LGND C26 RIBNC D26 RIBNO 27 LGND B27 C27 D27 A28 RACRNC B28 RACOM C28 028 29 RAMJNC 29 C29 R2MJNC D29 ROMJNO A30 RAMNNC B30 RAMNNO C30 RRMNNC D30 A31 RABNC B31 C31 031 R2BNO A32 RMCANC B32 C32 D32 LGND A33 RMCBNC B33 C33 LGND D33 RMCANO A34 RMCMJNC 34 RMCMNNC 34 RMCCOM D34 RMCBNO A35 RMCCRNC B35 C35 035 RMCMJNO E2 LGND MDAL Control Shelf Backplane Bottom Connectors P17 Figure B 38 MDAL Backplane Bottom OOOOOOO00000000000000000000000000000 8 8OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O000O0O0O000000000000000 800000000000000000000000000000000000 89 5 200000000000000000000000000000000000 n Table 38 MDAL Backplane Bottom Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LMCANO B01 01 LMCACOM 001 LMCANC A02 L
92. 2 Locate the Fan A power cable P N 830 0609 xx port FAN A PWR A the clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx port BCLKIN A and the clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx port BCLKOUT A on the top center of the EOAP shelf backplane Refer to Figure 6 31 Figure 6 31 Locate Cables on EOAP Backplane Cable tie down rods o ooooooocoo oo o o onsoif c gt FAN PWR A JAN A PWR A POWER IN B POWER IN A a _ A eue d 5 gt BCLKII Bcffkour A 9 C l Ponr 18 PoRT PORT 147 PORT 2A Or X VY FAN B PWR B PWR B PORT 3B cD GC JO CES F 1 al b RST B MCLKIN B BCLKOUT B OO OO 00000000 00 000000 00 0 Dual configuration cable routing Fan cables P N 830 0609 01 3 Usea cable tie and secure the cables to the third tie down rod without obstructing any ports Form these cables along the rod and secure them with cable ties every three or four inches until they reach the frame rail 4 Wrap the cables with fiber paper at the point where they are routed around the edge of the EOAP shelf toward the frame rail 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 53 EOAP 6 54 10 11 12 13 14 15 Locate terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx PORT 1B on the B side of the Ref
93. 20 0 6 069 830 0638 07 21 5 6 553 830 0638 08 27 5 8382 gt T CONTACT 1 CONTACT 9 P1 _ 2_ MALE DB 15 MALE 08 15 FILTERED UNUSED 1 1 UNUSED 2 WHT BLU auc BLU WHT BLU WHT MNNC 3 3 MNNC 4 LWHT ORG I WHT ORG 5 ORG WHT L ORG WHT 5 cRNC UNUSED 6 6 UNUSED UNUSED 7 7 UNUSED FA 8 8 FA Bno o GRNZWHT 9 BNO 10 LWHT BRN 11 WHT BRN MANO m 11 SRNZWHT POSG BRN WHT MJNO WHT GRY WHT GRY COM 12 COM GRY WHT GRY WHT UNUSED 13 Pee UNUSED TSTR 14 l BLU RED DXX BLU RED TSIR FA 15 H FA Le 6 1 T Q DRAN C 33 Cables 830 0651 xx 48 Power Cable Figure C 27 48V Power Cable P N 830 0651 01 P 41 MATE N LOK MATE N LOK 5 POS PIN MALE 5 POS SOCKET FEMALE 48VDC 1 RER 1 48VDC c GND 2 GREEN GREEN 2 GND 5 a BAEK 5 RET rg E POS 5 D1 joo 850 0651 01 C 34 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0656 01 Fifty Position Cable Hard Drive I O F
94. 2106 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 3A 1Amp 2109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 2111 2112 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 5A 3Amp 2115 2116 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 6A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7A 3Amp 2201 2202 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 8A 3Amp 2205 2206 LIMs ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 9A 1Amp 2209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 2211 2212 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 11A 3Amp 2215 2216 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 12A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13A 3Amp 2301 2302 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM II Fuse 14A 3Amp 2305 2306 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 15A 1Amp 2309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 2311 2312 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 25 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 17A 3Amp 2315 2316 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 18A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19A dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20A dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 00 EF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B refer to Figure 4 17 Fuse 1B 3Amp 2103 2104 LIMs A
95. 24 P4 48VDC P4 48VDC 12 b lt a 23 P4 48VDC P4 48RTN 4 t 6 P4 48RTN P4 48RTN 13 1 gt X E 15 P4 48RTN 3 48 6 4 3 48 3 48 15 tt K d tt 13 3 48 P3 48VDC 7 1 1 IA 22 P3 48VDC P3 48VDC 16 gt lt I A 21 P3 48VDC 2 48 8 t tt 20 P2 48RTN 2 48 17 one gt lt E 19 P2 48RTN P2 48VDC 9 1 P2 48VDC P2 48VDC 18 Ar AX A 10 P2 48VDC P1 48RTN 19 2 P1 48RTN P1 48RTN 20 ER I cE 11 P1 48RTN P1 48VDC 21 T 5 P1 48VDC P1 48VDC 22 Em e 12 P1 48VDC PF 48VDC 25 7 PF 48VDC PF 48VDC 26 tt tt 16 PF 48VDC EAS a4 SER O LEBEN 5 Cm PF 48RTN 24 RED RED 25 PF 48RTN GND 5 t 5 GND ow 14 Ff CRED ouo DRAIN L eL RAN 8 a s J WIRING DIAGRAM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 13 Cables 830 0366 xx Interface Cable Table C 6 Interface Cable P N 830 0366 xx Part Number m Length Part Number Length 830 0366 01 25 7 63 830 0366 09 200 61 00 830 0366 02 35 10 68 830 0366 10 250 76 25 830 0366 03 50 15 25 830 0366 11 300 91 50 830 0366 04 75 22 88 830 0366 12 500 152 50 830 0366 05 100 30 50 830 0366 13 1000 305 00 830 0366 06 125 38 13 830 0366 14 15 4 58 830 0366 07 150 45 75 830 0366 15 20 6 10 830 0366 08 175
96. 48VDC A A 48VDC ABVDC B 1 Alarm INTFC Frame GND Frame GND D ARTN RTN B rH A 48VDC 48VDC L g 4 Alarm INTFC Control Backplane rrPower RALMO rr alarm Power A r Co GP01 MMI XCH Last Extension Shelf VT 520 KYBD MMI XCO Backplane in the Control Frame Keyboard Lax MMI Xcl3 B clock out 115 115 115 HVAC 8 8 MODEMA H H A OM 1 115VAC 115 Power Keyboard lt gt Power 25 X 25 MODEM B VT 520 DSPLY z ARS232C DTE COM2 5 Fan tray 890 1038 01 FanApower Fan power 1 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ar GK BBS gt FER D D 5 20 o o oot x O c z z E a 005 amp 2 v lt m 2 8 9 System A m z z a a amp lt lt AS d OAP 850 0488 XX u x 3 x Backplane E a a B d 5 e eo a a a 5 a 5 a Hard Disk Carrier CD ROM Carrier 850 0485 01 850 0485 02 9 99 CPCI Backplane 850 0489 01 Power Hard Disk CD ROM Processo Supply 892 0012 01 To Network 910 4601 01 Revision
97. 55 B55 R2FA C55 DCD3 D55 DCD7 E1 P 48VDC A or B for TDM connectors P4 and P2 respectively 4 5 for TDM connectors and P2 respectively E2 P 48RTN TDM Bottom Connectors P18 P20 Control Shelf Backplane Figure B 49 TDM Backplane Pin outs Bottom 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 tt 180 5 bi 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 6 E 800000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 80000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 BOTTOM Table B 49 TDM Backplane Pin outs Bottom Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 CHASSIS 01 CHASSIS GND 01 CHASSIS 001 CHASSIS GND A02 B02 C02 LGND D02 A03 PBITSIN 60 B03 LGND C03 SBITSIN _60 D03 LGND A04 PBITSIN 60 B04 C04 SBITSIN 60 D04 A05 LGND B05 LGND C05 D05 A06 LGND B06 C06 SPARE1 A07 B07 LGND C07 LGND D07 R3FA A08 B08 C08 D08 R3FA A09 B09 C09 D09 R4FA A10 LGND B10 LGND C10 LGND D10 R4FA B 72 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 49 TDM Backplane Pin outs Bottom Continued Connectors Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 11 MBUSI
98. 830 0231 03 100 30 50 830 0231 09 300 91 50 830 0231 04 125 38 13 830 0231 10 500 152 50 830 0231 05 150 45 75 830 0231 11 1000 305 00 830 0231 06 175 53 38 Figure 4 Local Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0231 4 2 ds 7 PIN 1 PIN 9 RA 3 NOTUSED 4 5 1 L 2 iee WHTIBLU X BRNWHT 54 inge LMCVMUNC 6 LMCVMNNG 7 ORNWH LMCVCRNC 8 LMCACOM 9 LMCANO 10 5 BRNWHT LMCVCOM 13 LORA LMCVMJNO 14 REDIBLU X BLUIRED 2 t 1 DRAIN WIRE Iw 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0231 This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location Cables 830 0232 xx Row Alarm Cable Table C 2 Row Alarm Cable P N 830 0232 xx Length Length Part Length Length Part Number feet meters Number feet meters 830 0232 01 5 1 53 830 0232 12 20 6 1 830 0232 02 8 2 44 830 0232 13 30 9 25 830 0232 03 10 3 05 830 0232 14 40 12 2 830 0232 04 12 3 66 830 0232 15 50 15 25 830 0232 05 14 4 27 Figure C 5 Ro
99. A 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs TDM Terminal Disk Module For EAGLE 30 0 must be TDM P N 870 0774 10 or later Figure 26 LED LED Descriptions STATUS RED Card is resetting hardware and software are not currently configured GREEN OAM application is running and this MASP is primary GREEN AMBER OAM application is running and this ACTIVE STANDBY MASP is in standby mode serial number NOTE LED state is not defined if the CEHI associated GPSM ll is resetting is not code installed or has failed 0123456789 0123456789 revision number part number 870 0774 REV XX x gt N 5 tdm led a 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 29 LEDs TDM GTI Terminal Disk Module Global Timing Interface Beginning with EAGLE STP Software Release 31 6 Terminal Disk Module cards must be P N 870 0774 15 to support Global Timing Interface TDM GTT 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs TDM P N 870 0774 15 or later Figure A 27 TDM LED LED Descriptions STATUS RED is resetting hardware and software are not currently configured GREEN OAM application is running and this MASP is primary GREEN AMBER OAM application is running and this ACTIVE STANDBY MASP is in standby mode serial NOTE LED state is not defined if the
100. Cable tie down rods cC Op FAN PWR A FAN A PWR A e POWER IN B POWER IN A eC OAPRST BCLKIN A BCLKOUT A d C lPoRr port 28 P PORT1A 2 FAN B PWR B FANAPWR B PORT 3B PORT 4B oo cO PORT 3A PORT 4 E OAPRSTB BCLKOUT B 4 gt Y O Q 0 OO 0 0 OO OO O OO S rte I Terminal cables P N 830 0528 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 49 EOAP 8 Route the two extended terminal cables around the right side of the shelf to the center of the next traverse arm extender Refer to Figure 6 30 Then route the cable up to the top of the EOAP frame across the cable rack and down to the VT 520 terminal Figure 6 30 Route EOAP Terminal Cables to Cable Rack To Cable _ TR Rack B FAP c Cable tie Terminal cables 830 0528 01 830 0709 01 Side Panel Clock connection supports cable 804 0657 xx w gt Traverse arms 9 d EOAP l C J Power cable 22524 8 830 0699 01 5 E Traverse arm Fan extenders I Side Panel A supports n 9 n BA sl
101. Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 18B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19B dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20B dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 04 EF 04 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A refer to Figure 4 21 Fuse 1A 3Amp 6101 6102 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 2A 3Amp 6105 6106 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3A 1Amp 6109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 6111 6112 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 5A 3Amp 6115 6116 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A dummy fuse Fuse 8A dummy fuse Fuse 9A dummy fuse Fuse 10A dummy fuse Fuse 11A dummy fuse Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A dummy fuse Fuse 14A dummy fuse Fuse 15A dummy fuse Fuse 16A dummy fuse Fuse 17A dummy fuse Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse Extension Frame 04 EF 04 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B refer to Figure 4 21 Fuse 1B 3Amp 6103 6104 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 2B 3Amp 6107 6108 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 3B 1Amp 6110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 6113 6114 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 31 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses and Card
102. Figure 5 54 1 Interface Backplane Connector Diagram Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot3 Slot2 Slot 1 Connectors J1 J16 Connectors J17 J32 Connectors J33 J48 Connectors J49 J64 Slot mate siot 18 siot 17 Slot 16 slot 15 Slot 44 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot8 Slot 7 516 5045 Slot 4 5043 Slot2 Slot1 eidalenns 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 129 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies When mounting 1 1 backplanes be aware that the connectors are marked on the board as J1 J16 J17 J32 J33 J48 and J49 J64 should be connected so that the E1 T1 board card slot numbers match the shelf card slot number on both the top and bottom boards For this to be accomplished the top E1 T1 board must be turned 180 degrees from the bottom board see Figure 5 55 for E1 connections and see Figure 5 56 for T1 connections Figure 5 55 1 Interface Backplane Connections Upper E1 backplane Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot8 Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot3 Slot2 1 2 5 J6 J7 48 J9 1 11 1 1 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 6 415 510 14 Flot 13 Slot 2 Slot 1N Slot8 Slot7 Slot6 51015 Slot 4 Slot3 Slot2 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 input input input input input input input 519 18 5101 17 NSlot 1 lot 15 Slot 1 amp Slot 13 Slot 127 Slot 11
103. GREEN channels provisioned ISNR ont AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS O PORT RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS E xs RED No channels are provisioned PORT PORT 2 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned APPLICATION JTAG TERMINAL 00000 00000 Card is an E1 T1 Master Card Serial PORT GREEN channels provisioned ISNR number AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS P RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned OOS Out of service Revision 20Me prior releases of EAGLE software do not support the E1 T1 MIM number P N 870 2198 02 The following table list the supported card part numbers by release Both E1 T1 MIM part numbers are supported REV XX e beginning with EAGLE Release 30 0 ES number Table 5 7 1 1 MIM Release Compatibility me E MIM Release Release Release Release Release ind 28 x 29 0 29 0 2 29 1 29 1 1 Number 870 2198 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 870 2198 02 No No Yes No Yes 5 120 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies E1 Interface patch
104. Goto the cable s From column of the cable running list b Match the From column information to the From information on one label c Match the From column information to the To information on the other label NOTE 1 The label for the connector end of these cables can be identified by the presence of a J number for example J32 that appears in the From area of the label NOTE2 Make sure that all cables specific to an A or B side are clearly labeled as A cable and B cable 5 Repeat Step 4 for each cable to ensure that all labels are present and that originations and destinations of all cables are clearly identified 6 For cables that come from the factory with connectors already installed apply the appropriate label onto each end of the cable approximately two inches from the connector NOTE Ensure that the labels are positioned so they are still readable after the cables are installed 7 For cables that need to be cut to the appropriate length After the cable is cut to the appropriate length affix labels with the item number approximately two inches from the end of the cable insulation 8 For cables not ordered through Tekelec confirm source part number and origination destination points before labeling them NOTE Allcables must be labeled and FROM After you have labeled all cables you are ready for cable installation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 2 9 General Installation Informa
105. Hardware Operational Testing ertt trennen 2 11 Temperature Variation ous denote 2 11 ues o RU Eti est 2 11 Elevation oett eee 2 11 Eagle STP and SG Post Installation Inspection 2 12 Chapter3 Frames and Shelves Safety and Cautionary Information onere cernere 3 2 3 4 Unpacking DH b 3 4 Floor Preparation for Heavy Duty 3 11 General Floor 3 11 Recommended Tools 3 11 Raised za eee eh 3 14 Recommended Tools eer rtr 3 14 Concrete Floor iiaea ni E Eee 3 20 Recommended Tocols 3 20 Anchoring to Overhead Rack of Heavy Duty Frame 3 24 Heavy Duty Panels and Rear Covers 3 25 Removing Heavy Duty Frame Panels 3 25 Installing Unit Separation 3 26 Frame Labeling 3 27 Shelf Labeling 3 28 Older Frame Side Panels 3 33 Recommended Tools
106. J11 J25 J39 J53 J61 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and 13 715 J32 J46 J61 J68 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 43 Rack Alarm Connector C 94082 9 09 09 05 00 5 9 Table B 43 Rack Alarm Connector Pin Signal 1 2 6 7 9 18 14 Not used 3 MNNC Rack Alarm Minor Normally Closed 4 MJNC Rack Alarm Major Normally Closed 5 CRNC Rack Alarm Critical Normally Closed 10 MNNO Rack Alarm Minor Normally Open 11 MJNO Rack Alarm Major Normally Open R R R 8 R FA Rack Fuse Alarm R R R 12 COM Rack Alarm Common 15 R FA Rack Fuse Alarm 0 through 5 RALMO through 5 J5 J11 J25 J39 J53 J61 respectively B 64 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Control Backplane J26 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J33 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 44 Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Connector 6060009000 Table B 44 Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Connector Pin Signal 1 3 4 5 9 11 12 not used 2 RMCANC Remote Maintenance Center Audible Alarm Normally Closed 6 RMCMJNC Remote Maintenance Center Major Alarm Normally Closed 7 RMCMNNC Remote Maintenance Center Minor Alarm Normally Closed 8 RMCCRNC Remote Maintenance Center Critical Alarm Normally Closed
107. J56 J57 J63 not currently supported 850 0330 06 J64 J65 J72 not currently supported 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors B Clock 0 through B Clock 5 Je J12 J13 J54 J55 J62 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J3 J16 J18 J62 J63 J70 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 2 B Clock 0 through B Clock 5 Connectors 20206 0020202020000 6 69 9 9 62 9 9 6 Table B 3 Clock 0 through B Clock 5 Connectors Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 850 0330 03 1 ROFAALM 8 15 B56KHZ0 5 22 B56KHZ2 J6 0 50 n 2 9 16 BBKHZ0 _5 23 B56KHZ2 5 rack 0 0 0 850 0330 06 J3 3 10 17 BSKHZO 50 24 BBKHZ2 _5 0 4 11 18 B56KHZ1 _ 25 B8KHZ2 50 50 5 12 19 B56KHZI 5 0 6 13 ROFBALM 20 BBKHZ1 _5 0 7 ROFANCTR 14 B56KHZO 21 B8KHZI 50 50 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 7 Connectors Table B 3 Clock 0 through B Clock 5 Connectors Continued Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Signal Pin Signal 850 0330 03 1 R2FAALM 8 15 B56KHZ3 5 22 B56KHZ5 04 0 50 112 2 9 16 BBKHZ3 _5 23 B56KHZ5 5 01 rack 2 0 0 850 0330 06 3 10 17 BBKHZ3 _50 24 B8KHZ5 5 J16 0 4 11 18 B56KHZ4 _ 25 B8KHZ5 50 50 5 12 19 B56KHZ4 5 0 6 13 R2FBALM 20 B8K
108. LGND 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 47 Connectors Table B 29 HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs P9 and P26 Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A53 B53 MBUSSRX 50 53 MBUSSRX 50 D53 54 54 MBUSSIX 50 C54 55 50 054 LGND A55 CHASSIS GND 55 CHASSIS GND 55 CHASSIS GND 055 CHASSIS E2 P3 48RTN E B 48 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Interface Backplane Control 129 J38 J43 J52 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J36 J45 J50 J59 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 32 Interface Connector 000000000 9 9 9 9 2 9 69 9 69 69 62 OW Table B 30 Interface Connector Pins and Signal Connectors Interface Connector Pins and Signal DB 26 V 35 V35 Dev Ethernet DB 26 V 35 V 35 DSOA OCU Ethernet Pin Signal Pin Signa Signal ACM Pin Signal Pin Signal ATM Signal ACM 1 RxCA V RXD 14 2 RxCB X RXD 15 3 TxCCA Y COL 16 4 TxCCB COL 17 CHASS GND 5 TEST 18 LOOPL 6 RLSD F TXD 19 RTS C SIG GND 7 DSR E 20 TxDA TX RING 12VDC 8 CHASS TXD 21 TxDB S TX TIP 12VDC GND 9 CTS D 22 RxDA RX RING 10 SIG B SIG GND 23 RxDB RX TIP GND 11 24 TxCTA U 12 25 TxCDB W 13 26 LOOPM BB 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 49 Connectors
109. MAJ down HOLDOVER ALARM SW3 MAJ down REFA SW4 TERM down REEB SW5 TERM down Clock Input DIP Switch Settings The Dual In line Package DIP switch settings for the Clock Input are 5 110 Transmission 1 544 mb TI On Composite Clock CC Off Extended Superframe Format ESF On Bipolar 8Bit Zero Substitution B8ZS 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 42 Holdover Clock and Output Panel Rear TB2 output panel Power connector TB2 MCA ribbon cable ribbon cables Power connector TB1 RIN 0072 GN GN FR OSCB COMI 506 J18 EXPSN MASTER MASTER MASTER UNPROTECTED INPUT OUTPUT 1OUTPUT 20UTPUT Jg 68 r sw5 sw4 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J23 J24 J25 BRDG BRDG CON J38 J37 J39 J36 435 J34 J33 J32 391 J30 J29 J28 SW4 J21 5 TRS SW5 SW Sw2 Sw 2 HS2 HS1 1010 09 TO7 TO6 TOS TO4 TO SHELF POWERHOLDOVER E coma ALARM ALARM 4 420 GND SO CFRM 5 AUX REF INPUT B J2
110. MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 2B 3Amp 3107 3108 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3B 1Amp 3110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 3113 3114 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 5B 3Amp 3117 3118 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 6B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7B 3Amp 3203 3204 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 8B 3Amp 3207 3208 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 9B 1Amp 3210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 3213 3214 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 11B 3Amp 3217 3218 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 27 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 13B 3Amp 3303 3304 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 14B 3Amp 3307 3308 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 15B 1Amp 3310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 3313 3314 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 17B 3Amp 3317 3318 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 18B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19B dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20B dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 02 EF 02 Fuse and Alarm Panel
111. May 2005 EOAP 4 Loosely route both Ethernet cables straight up to the top of the EOAP shelf and back to the third tie down rod Route both cables to the right side of the frame and up the frame rail onto the cable rack 5 Route the cables across the cable rack to the customer network equipment and down the frame rail 6 Connect each cable to the respective Ethernet port of the customer network equipment You have now connected the customer network to and EOAP B using the two Ethernet cables P N 830 0710 xx Single to Dual Configuration Cabling The cards of a single configuration EOAP EOAP A occupy the left side of the shelf and the two top drive bays in the center of the EOAP shelf The right side of the shelf EOAP B contains filler cards also called Air Management cards The two bottom drive bays in the center of the EOAP shelf are empty and covered with face plates For a dual configuration remove the filler cards and the face plate covers to install a second set of EOAP cards Upgrade to a dual configuration by following these procedures Installation Order for Single to Dual EOAP Configuration Table 6 11 lists the recommended order for changing from single configuration cabling to dual configuration cabling Table 6 11 Installation Order for Single to Dual EOAP Configuration Procedure Name and Location Remove Filler Cards and Hard Drive Slot Covers on page 6 60 Install
112. NOTE self tapping screws with captured washers are shown in four places see Figure 3 23 must be tightened securely to provide a secure ground Do not over tighten these screws no more than 15 inch pounds of torque should be applied Figure 3 23 End Panel Self Tapping Screws Side panel top Self tapping screws P N 601 3608 01 7 Side panel bottom o 3 34 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Shelves Figure 3 24 EAGLE 5 SAS Frame with Door Ground Door ground 3 35 D May 2005 1s10n 910 4601 01 Rev Frames and Shelves Figure 3 25 EAGLE 5 SAS Frame with Shelves Fuse and Alarm Panel e 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 06 07 08 09 11 12 a Extension shelf sa Control shelf 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 di 04 16 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 101 Fan 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Interprocessor cards in place plus Extension shelf No less than one card per Extension shelf
113. NSD include the EAGLE 5 Signaling Application System SAS Signaling Transfer Point STP and the IP Secure Gateway SG system This Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle manual includes 7 information and provides installation information for each system of the following areas General Installation Information Frames and Shelves Fuses and Alarm Panels Eagle STP and Secure Gateway Assemblies EOAP LEDs Connectors Cables Power Cords to Peripherals Refer to this manual to install components or the complete system Components that only apply to a specific system are clearly indicated 1 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction For an overview of each system and subsystems standard and optional hardware components per system and basic site engineering refer to the Hardware Manual included in your current Documentation Suite For replacement procedures of existing hardware components refer to the Maintenance Manual included in your current Documentation Suite 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 7 Introduction Regulatory Safety Compliance and Certification Tekelec products are tested to meet NEBS level 3 per Telcordia SR 3580 Issue 1 November 1995 Products in this manual conform to applicable Telcordia Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety requirements in GR 1089 CORE Issue 2 with Revision
114. P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Tie wrap tool Diagonal cutters e Flush cutters e Slotted screwdriver 1 8 inch blade with 8 inch shank 3 8 inch shrink wrap e Heat shrink gun hot air blower Torque screwdriver Wire wrap gun 22 gauge wire wrap bit 24 gauge wire wrap bit Interface Cable Installation Examine the labels on the ends of the interface cables to determine the system backplane connection location FROM information on label and DSX cross connect panel location TO information on label for each cable Run the cables on the cable rack to the cross connect panel on the Miscellaneous Frame in groups of eight There are four groups per extension shelf and groups per control shelf a total of 20 per control shelf The jack numbering on the cross connect panel determines which side of the frame to run the cable Viewing the frame from the rear cables going to jacks 1 through 32 are run on the right side of the frame and cables 33 through 64 are run on the left side of the frame Procedure Installing the Interface Cable 1 Secure connector to its respective receptacle on the backplanes See Procedure Install Interface Cable Connector on page 5 12 2 Tie cables to the shelf cable tie bar at the rear of the shelf 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 3 Pullslack from each cable
115. Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 Dual Configuration Cabling Use this procedure to cable the shelf for a dual configuration EOAP This section describes complete cabling for the EOAP backplane If the EOAP shelf is delivered preinstalled in a frame the frame includes a Fuse and Alarm panel and the shelf is partially cabled power cables P N 830 0699 xx fan cables P N 830 0609 xx and the clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx are connected routed and finished on the EOAP backplane and the frame In this case skip the first three cabling procedures and begin with procedure Install EOAP Terminal Cables on page 6 48 For backplane cabling connect each cable to its proper connector and loosely route it from the EOAP backplane down or up the frame rail and where applicable across the cable rack and down to the destination shelf before forming it with other cables and securing it with cable ties Forming and securing cables is described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 The following cables are installed Install EOAP Power Cables on page 6 39 Install Fan Power Cables on page 6 42 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Install Clock In Out Cable on page 6 43 Install EOAP Clock Connection Cable on page 6 44 Install Terminal Cables on page 6 48 Install EOAP Asynchronous Modem Cables on page 6 51 Install EOAP X 25 Modem Cables on page 6 51 Install EOAP MMI X Cables
116. RED MCAP is off IMT bus A AMBER MCAP is IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN MCAP is on IMT bus A DOE DET BLANK Communication processor is not operating IMTB IMT Bus RED MCAP is off IMT bus Etats AMBER MCAP is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN MCAP is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating CLEI code Revision number Part number leds 22 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs MDAL Maintenance Disk and Alarm Card MDAL P N 870 0773 XX Figure A 20 MDAL LEDs LEDs Descriptions CRITICAL RED Critical alarm condition TEKELEC detected GREEN No alarm MAJOR RED Major alarm condition OCRITICAL detected OMAJOR GREEN No alarm OMINOR MINOR AMBER Minor alarm condition detected OMASP A GREEN No alarm MASP A GREEN is the active MASP rm OFF MASP A is the standby MASP or is not present MASP B GREEN MASP B is the active MASP OFF MASP B is the standby MASP or is not present Revision number Seria number CLEI code e N MDAL Part number 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 A 23 LEDs MIS Maintenance Interface System Card Holdover Clock MIS P N 804 0175 01 Figure A 21 Holdover Clock MIS Card LEDs
117. RJ45 CAT 5 STRAIGHT THOUGH CABLE ASSEMBLY 830 0724 XX C 42 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0759 xx Null Modem Cable Figure C 35 Null Modem Cable P N 830 0759 xx o 14 fe P1 o 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 850 0759 01 NULL MODEM CABLE UNUSED TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR DCD SIG GND P1 _ 2 C BLK C NI 11 RD iy 3 2 4 1 i 5 CTS 5 1 4 RTS BLU Wg 6 BLU Fg 21 NC 8 ORG TERT 20 SIG GND 7 it tt 7 SIG GND 1 Fg i ZEN 14 14 15 ri 15 NC 16 1 16 NC 17 17 NC 18 11 18 NC YEL 19 YEL OSR 20 1 1 1 1 8 DCD 21 19 NC 22 Fg Fg 22 NC 23 25 24 b 24 NC 25 SU UJ 25 NC eee AARS aa WIRING DIAGRAM 850 0759 01 NULL MODEM CABLE Cables C 43 Cables 830 0763 01 Loop Back Cable Adapter Figure C 36 Loop Back Cable Adapter P N 830 0763 01 H P1 0825 MALE LL A LOOPBACK PLUG ASSEMBLY SCALE NONE C 44 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0772 xx Multi Port LIM DSO 830 0772 xx Multi Port LIM DSO 26 AWG Cables Figure C 37 Multi Port LIM DSO P N 830 0772 xx TS 4 1
118. Refer to Figure 4 7 to see the details on the rear of the fuse and alarm panel FAP P N 870 2320 xx is for for heavy duty frame Figure 4 7 Fuse and Alarm Panel Rear Fuse and Alarm Panel rear view P N 870 2320 01 B side 48 VDC A side 48 VDC 8 2 48 ARN INTERFACE 48 Jom fee 0 TORQUE TO TORQUE TO 25 IN LBS 25 IN LBS B A ea amp ea P1 P2 FUSES FUSES FUSES 1 6 7 12 13 18 5 J LOGIC GND FUSES FUSES FUSES HASIS CHASIS 1 6 7 12 eoo ND GND Logic ground to system ground bar 5 230 fap rear B side A side Logic ground to system ground bar Each frame is divided into A and B power buses If loss of power on one of the buses occurs the other bus must be able to supply current for the entire frame Therefore each bus requires wiring sized to handle up to 40A at 48VDC with a maximum voltage drop of 0 6 volts To meet this specification you must Fuse each bus for 40A for fuse and alarm panel P N 870 2320 01 Rev through I for the heavy duty frame and for 60A for P N 870 2320 01 Rev NOTE Beginning with EAGLE software release 33 0 all frames containing HCMIM modules are required to have 60 Amp power circuits and the FAP must b
119. Reinsert the screw and tighten it d Remove the terminal screw from the CHASSIS GROUND terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the green wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 Figure 6 48 shows the rear layout of the FAP P N 870 2320 01 NOTE Form the wires together to their proper location and then break them out of the form Figure 6 48 Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 Rear View e ALARM INTERFACE 20 1218 1920 B A lelelole 20 12181920 la Chassis ground 12181920 o 121819 20 48V RTN LOGIC GND Rear view Fuse position Fuse position MIS MIS Table 6 15 Fuse Panel Items and Description Fuse Panel Item Description Input Terminal Block A Input for power source A Input Terminal Block B Input for power source B 48VDC and Return Outputs A 26 pin D connectors P1 P2 and for A side outputs 48VDC and Return Outputs B 26 pin D connectors P1 P2 and for B side outputs Alarm Panel 15 pin D connector for external alarms 11 Remove the exist
120. Secure Cables from EOAP to Cable Rack 6 55 Rear View P N 870 2320 01 6 57 Locating Processor ooo gag tenen er 6 58 Dual EOAP Overview essere 6 60 Dual EOAP Card Slots and Drive Bays 6 61 Top Handle and Air Management Card 6 62 Freeing the Card from the EOAP Card Cage 6 62 Hard Drive and CD ROM Drive Faceplates 6 63 EOAP Backplane Connector Pins 6 63 amp edu ense 6 66 Inser ng the ns 6 66 Locking the Eject Handles eoe e 6 67 Tightening Captive Screws 6 67 Installing a Drive Assembly etre tatam 6 68 Pressing the Faceplate diede 6 68 Set Fan Switch to OFF Lulu essent 6 69 Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 Rear View 6 71 Fan Switch Set to ON innana 6 73 Set Fan Switch to OFF 6 75 EOAP Connection 6 81 Verify LED on EOAP Is 6 93 GR 376 EOAP Bram eerte fe 6 149 GR 376 EOAP Front ea actin sas 6 150 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 xviii Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Fi
121. Sigt8 Slot7 51046 Slot5 510 4 Slot3 51062 FH wt at bas Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot Slot System extension shelf Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 1 2 5 J6 J7 48 9 11 1 1 1 61 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Lower E1 backplane 5 130 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 56 T1 Interface Backplane Connections Upper T1 backplane Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 J5 J6 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 6 Slot 15 51014 Flot 13 Slot 2 Slot 1 T1 T1 input input 51 18 510417 NSlot 1 lot 15 Slot 1 amp Slot 13 Slot 127 Slot 11 lt o Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 System extension shelf Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 J6 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Lower T1 backplane 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot3 Slot2 11 Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot3 Slot2 T1 T1 T1 input input input Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot 3 NSIot2 lt o Slot Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot Slot Sl
122. Table B 31 Interface Connectors Ports and Card Slots Interface Connectors Ports and Card Slots Card slot Port Connector Port Connector 01 1A 138 152 02 2A J37 2B J51 03 3A J36 3B J50 04 4A J35 4B J49 05 5A J34 5B J48 06 6A J33 6B J47 07 7A J32 7B J46 08 8A J31 8B J45 11 9A J30 9B J44 12 10A J29 10B J43 B 50 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Inter processor Message Transport Control Shelf Connectors J8 J16 J58 J64 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and 123 J22 J75 J74 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 33 IPMX Connector Table B 32 IPMX Connector Pins Connector Pin Signal A IMT IN backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 J8 1 AIMTIN 78 A IMT IN backplane P N 850 0330 06 J23 5 AIMTIN 78 A IMT OUT backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 J16 1 AIMTOUT _78 A IMT OUT backplane P N 850 0330 06 J22 5 AIMTOUT 78 B IMT IN backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 58 1 78 B IMT IN backplane P N 850 0330 06 75 5 BIMTIN 78 IMT OUT backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 64 1 BIMTOUT 78 B IMT OUT backplane P N 850 0330 06 J74 2 BIMTOUT 78 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 51 Connectors Interprocessor Message Transport IPMX Connector J7 J8 J43 J44 Figure B 34 IPMX Connector Table B 33 IPMX Connector Connector Pin Signal A IMT IN J8 AIMTIN 78 AIMTIN 78
123. gt P 3 20 Concrete Floor This section describes how to prepare a concrete floor for heavy duty frame installation Always get permission from facility personnel before drilling holes Before drilling holes in any flooring verify with facilities personnel that the area is free of gas or water pipes ventilation ducts electrical wiring conduits or any other items that may be damaged Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Rotary impact drill 18mm masonry drill bit e Extension cord Vacuum cleaner an approved industrial type that prevents escaping dust particles that may contaminate electronic equipment Masking tape Fiberglass tape measure e Isolation sheet in mounting hardware kit e Ear protectors Felt tipped marking pen e Mounting hardware kit P N 840 0092 01 furnished with each heavy duty frame CAUTION All personnel associated with the installation of this system must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION This is a redundant system to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected Disco
124. shelf 1 11 1 TE 1 SHELF e 110 ID e location 1 9 BIT 00 numbers 01 0 1 02 8 03 1 GRD e Maresses 1 F4 7 9 These locations are paired entities Extension Shelf frame 1 shelf 2 12 DIP switch Wire wrap identification identification 1 SHELF ID 1200 2 W oN SHELF e Card 0 1 1 LSB ID e location 9 2 BIT 00 numbers 2 3 01 1 1 4 02 5 03 2 1 MSB IMT 1 7 GRD 800785569 02 03 04 05 06 07 0 Jos 09 bA 00 loe oF Extension Shelf frame 1 shelf 3 13 DIP switch Wire wrap identification identification SHELF ID 1300 Eon SHELF Card 1 1 1 LSB ID e location 2 BIT 00 numbers 3 3 3 01 1 1 4 02 5 03 1 4 6 MSB 7 GRD IMT M addresses 10 18 19 HA 1B HC 1D 8 11 2 3 The Extension Frame accommodates up to three extension shelves each shelf capable of supporting up to 16 Link Interface Module LIMs Application Service Module ASMs Translation Service Module TSMs or Application Communication Module ACMs any combination 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 35 Fuses and Alarm Panels The system is delivered with customer specific locations for the Database Communications Module DCM and EDCM cards NOTE For Eagle STP only the insertion of a DCM card requires an odd numbered slot The entire sys
125. 01 POWER PROCESSOR POWER PROCESSOR SUPPLY SUPPLY HARD DISK CD ROM HARD DISK CD ROM rm TO SYSTEM DCM PORT M TO SYSTEM DCM PORT TO NETWORK TO NETWORK 6 152 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 6 21 EOAP GR 376 EOAP Cable Legend ITEM QTY NO EKELEC P N SYSTEM LENGTH COMMENT PART OF 830 0699 01 2 10 3 05m RIN BLUE CONDUCTOR 4 PART OF 830 0699 01 2 10ft 305m 48VDC BROWN CONDUCTOR 5 PART OF 830 0699 01 2 CGND GREEN YELLOW CONDUCTOR 10 ft 3 05 6 830 0638 XX 1 SITE SPECIFIC 7 830 0789 2 SITE SPECIFIC CROSSOVER CABLE 8 830 0759 01 1 8 244m NULL MODEM CABLE 9 830 0710 2 SITE SPECIFIC 10 830 0657 1 SITE SPECIFIC 11 804 0176 0 2 CONVERTER 2 830 0528 01 2 2 61m 3 830 0709 2 SITE SPECIFIC 14 830 0609 01 3 6f 1 83m 850 0496 01 2 FORCE TRANSITION CARD 48V POWER CABLE 16 830 0651 01 2 10in 254 0mm FROM OAP BP TO CPCI PWR i 830 0224 02 350 88 90mm DRIVE POWER CABLE PART OF DRIVE ASSY REF I 50 POS SIGNAL CABLE 18 830 0656 01 2 5 30 in 134 62 HARD DRIVE CABLE IN OUT PART OF DRIVE ASSY REF 19 830 0421 02 2 250in 63 5mm CD ROM CABLE 20 850 0514 01 4 SERIAL 1 0 TRANSITION CARD R FOR REFERENCE ONLY N A N A 6 153 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP GR 376 EOAP Installation 6 154 Procedure Install GR 376 EOAP 1 Determine
126. 0398 18 272 0 830 0398 09 84 0 850 0398 19 284 0 830 0398 10 116 0 830 0398 20 52 0 830 0398 21 78 0 ESL P2 MALE DB 25 MALE DB 25 UNUSED 1 1 UNUSED SH1 MBUSTX FANAALM 2 Lo Pe HE ae 412 SH1 wBUSTX FANAALM SHI MBUSTX 3 5 SH MBUSTX SH MBUSRX 4 1209 x 4 SH MBUSRX SH MBUSRX 5 ORNAWHT 5 5 1 MBUSRX SH2 MBUSIX 6 6 5 2 MBUSTX SH2 MBUSTX FANCTRL 7 T gt lt T 7 SH2 MBUSTX FANCTRL SH2 MBUSRX 8 8 SH2 MBUSRX SH2 MBUSRX 9 7 ae ET 9 SH2 MBUSRX SH3 MBUSTX 10 24 gt ey war 10 SH3 MBUSTX SH3 MBUSTX 11 ee 11 MBUSTX SH3 MBUSRX 12 RED XX 12 SH3 MBUSRX SH3 MBUSRX FANBALM 13 Ser Len 3 SH3 MBUSRX FANBALM SH 56KHZ 14 14 5 1 56KHZ SH 56 2 15 CEES ORN RED 15 1 56KHZ SH BKHZ 16 BED GRN xx RED SRN 16 SH1 8KHZ SH BKHZ 17 m RED SR RED 17 5 8kHz SH2 56KHZ 18 18 5 2 56 7 SH2 56 2 19 XX RE 19 2 56 2 SH2 8KHZ 20 20 SH2 8KHZ SH2 BKHZ 21 XX 21 sH2 BkHz SH3 56KHZ4 22 H 22 SH3 56KHZ SH3 56KHZ 23 ERIT 23 SH3 56KHZ SH3 8KHZ 24 24 SH3 8KHZ SH3 BKHZ 25 ORN BLK _ ORN BLK 155 su3 BkHz 1 T DRAIN B 4 e n PIN 14 PIN 14 PIN 1 Cable P N 830 0398 xx N 90 IL 7 B 15
127. 1 3 000000000000000050001 C 65 830 0948 01 E1 T1 MIM LIM 4 Port 24 AWG C 66 830 0949 01 E1 T1 MIM LIM to MPL Adapter C 67 850 0496 01 Force Transition Card C 68 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table of Contents Appendix D Power Cords to Peripherals International Power Cords Index 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 xi Table of Contents xii 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Figures Figure 2 1 Removing an Eagle STP and IP7 SG card 2 7 Figure 2 2 Installer s Cable Running List Example 2 8 Figure 3 1 Removing an Eagle STP SG 3 3 Figure 3 2 Shipping Container for Heavy Duty Frame 3 5 Figure 3 3 Shipping Container for Heavy Duty Frame 3 6 Figure 3 4 Shipping Detach Dolly Heavy Duty Frame 3 7 Figure 3 5 Heavy Duty Frame retten teretes 3 8 Figure 3 6 Heavy Duty Frame with Dolly see 3 9 Figure 3 7 Typical Frame Layout boo nte vint cup reet petat 3 11 Figure 3 8 Typical Floor Layout for Frames esee 3 12 Figure 3 9 Isolation Sheet Template for Frame 3 13 Figure 3
128. 10 Raised Floor Installation Elements 3 17 Figure 3 11 Raised Floor With Washers and Nuts 3 18 Figure 3 12 Raised Floor Installation With Unistrut 3 19 Figure 3 13 Anchor Assembly 3 21 Figure 3 14 Anchor Installation of Heavy Duty Frame 3 22 Figure 3 15 Heavy Duty Frame Installation With Cable Rack 3 24 Figure 3 16 Heavy Duty Frame Panels 3 25 Figure 3 17 Unit Separation Bracket Installation 3 26 Figure 3 18 Frame and Shelf Label Locations 3 29 Figure 3 19 Heavy Duty Frame Label Location 3 30 Figure 3 20 Frame Label Location Detail ess 3 31 Figure 3 21 Shelf Label Location Detail iie 3 31 Figure 3 22 Heavy Duty Frame Label Location 3 32 Figure 3 23 End Panel Self Tapping Screws eee 3 34 Figure 3 24 EAGLE 5 SAS Frame with Door Ground 3 35 Figure 3 25 EAGLE 5 SAS Frame with Shelves 3 36 Figure 3 26 Rear Cover Installation i tette tenent 3 37 Figure 4 1 Fuse and Alarm Panel Location ees 4 3 Figure 4 2 Fuse and Alarm Panel Details erret 4 4 Figure 4 3 FAP P
129. 10 RMCANO Remote Maintenance Center Audible Alarm Normally Open 13 RMCCOM Remote Maintenance Center Common 14 RMCMJNO Remote Maintenance Center Major Alarm Normally Open 15 RMCMNNO Remote Maintenance Center Minor Alarm Normally Open 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 65 Connectors Row Alarm Control Backplane J27 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J34 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 45 Row Alarm Connector NGO CO C qn Table 45 Row Alarm Connector Pin Signal 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 Not used 4 48VDC 5 RACRNC Row Alarm Critical Normally Closed 10 RAMNNO Row Alarm Minor Normally Open 11 RAMJNO Row Alarm Major Normally Open 12 48VDC return B 66 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Serial Port Control Backplane J17 24 J65 J72 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J24 J31 76 J83 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 46 Serial Port Connector 0006606909000 99 9 Table B 46 Serial Port Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 9 2 10 3 DCD 11 4 RX 12 5 TX 13 CTS 6 DTR 14 RTS 7 logic ground 15 8 0 through 15 MMIO through MMI15 respectively J17 through J24 and J65 through J72 respectively 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 67 Connectors Shelf Power Shelf Power Connector
130. 1np on using the rtrv feat command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 EAGLE FEATURE LIST GTT on GWS on NRT off X25G on LAN on CRMD off SEAS LFS off MTPRS off LNP on FAN on DSTN4000 off WNP off CNCF on LNP12MIL off TLNP off SCCPCNV off TCAPCNV off X252000 off PLNP off NCR off ITUMTPRS off SLSOCB on EGTT off If the three features are turned on go to step 3 To turn on the LNP feature or to turn on the LNP and the GTT features refer to procedure Activating the LNP Feature in the Eagle STP Database Administration Manual LNP Then return to step 2 To turn on the SEAS feature for updating the SEAS portion of the EOAP configuration go to step 2 Turn on the SEAS feature by entering this command chg feat seas on NOTE Once the SEAS feature is turned on with the chg eat command it cannot be turned off The SEAS feature is optional and must be purchased before you turn on the feature with the chg feat command If you not sure whether you have purchased the SEAS feature contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG FEAT MASP A COMPLD 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 119 EOAP 3 For the EOAPs to be configured by the chg oap co
131. 21 EOAP Cabling on page 6 26 EOAP Power Up on page 6 73 and Fan Operation Testing on page 6 74 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Shelf shelf contains EOAP cards for a single or dual EOAP configuration At delivery the EOAP shelf comes premounted in an OAP frame with all EOAP cards preinstalled The EOAP shelf is always installed above the cooling duct of the fan assembly Figure 6 9 shows an EOAP dual configuration in relationship to fan assembly and cooling duct Use this procedure if your EOAP shelf was delivered together with a fan assembly and cooling duct to be installed in an OAP frame If your EOAP shelf came preinstalled in a frame go to Change Cabling to Dual Configuration on page 6 69 to finish the cabling Two EOAP shelves can be mounted in each frame This procedure describes how to mount a fully assembled EOAP shelf or an empty card cage to the frame Installation of the fan assembly and cooling duct are described in EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 14 WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 Figure 6 9 EOAP Shelf with Cooling Duct and Fan Assembly EOAP A hard drive CD ROM Processor card Serial I O card Power supply Embedded Operations Support System Application EOAP B hard drive CD ROM Cooling duct Processor
132. 3 2 Shipping Container for Heavy Duty Frame Reusable Container Front Side Rear 39 50 49 62 39 50 inches g lt inches P r inches di t SIDE t THIS SIDE UP NOT Te DO NOT TIP bd STACK DO ROT STACK e TEKELEC 93 75 TEKELEC REUSABLE inches REUSABLE RENEA ER S CONTAINER DO NOT USE HOOKS e tio NO1 e OR STRAPS HOOKS DELICATE INSTRUMENT HANDLE WITH CARE INSTRUMENT Return address 651 HANG WITH CARE 26580 W Agoura rd e 16 0 e e Calabasas CA el inches FRONT 91302 ed ODDUUDUUUUUUUIU J ERR DIM E Y 1 1 1 Ramp front door of crate 26 0 inches 4 Use the front panel of the shipping container as a ramp to remove the frame from the shipping compartment Place the ramp against the front of the container making sure the angle side is up and slants away from the frame in the container Place the ramp against the front edge of the shipping container Insert the U bolts in the holes to secure the ramp support and container together refer to Figure 3 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 5 Frames and Shelves 5 Open the rear door of the shipping container Figure 3 3 Shipping Container for Heavy Duty Frame
133. 46 830 0789 xx Patch Panel Crossover C 47 830 0814 xx Multi Port Power Cable C 48 830 0846 01 HS Master Timing C 49 830 0849 051 Cable sss C 50 830 0859 xx Null MODEM for Terminal C 51 830 0866 xx Power Cable Breaker To Terminal Strip C 52 830 0869 xx Power DC C 53 830 0872 xx Power DC RAID a C 54 830 0892 xx Multi Port LIM DSO 24 AWG C 55 090 000 S SGCPOWEE RING up ii 56 830 0857 01 Adapter Cable eee C 57 830 0884 01 Switch to Frame Ground C 58 830 0888 xx CAT 5 45 RJ45 59 830 0889 xx CAT 5 45 RJ45 60 830 0895 01 T1 LIM to MPL Cable Adapter C 61 830 0900 xx Alarm NETRA Server Cable C 62 830 0901 xx Tone and Announcement Server Alarm Cable C 63 830 0917 01 Adapter RJ 45 to 9 BIG Ro oen bdo obese etin C 64 830 0932 01 1 1 MIM 22 2 2
134. 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 35 EOAP Figure 6 33 shows the rear layout of the FAP P N 870 2320 01 NOTE Form the wires together to their proper location and then break them out of the form Figure 6 17 FAP Rear View P N 870 2320 01 48V RTN LOGIC GND 6 36 9 e e ALARM INTERFACE 1218192 B Retum P e amp 42181920 B P pa P1 P2 P3 Chassis lt gt GND TORQUE TO 25 PPE cond TORQUE TO N 25 IN LBS IN LBS 0 12181920 o 12181920 2 Taprear 870 1606 017 Rear view B side A side Fuse position Fuse position MIS MIS Connect fan power cable A to port FAN A PWR A and to the Fan B port on the back of the fan assembly Connect fan power cable B to port FAN B PWR A and to the Fan A port on the back of the fan assembly Secure all fan connectors Connect the clock in out cable to ports BCLKOUT A and BCLKIN B Connect the clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx to port BCLKIN A of the EOAP backplane and to port BCLKOUT 42 located at the lower right side of the last extension shelf backplane in the control frame Tighten the cable connectors NOTE extension shelf is present cable to connector B CLK 5 J70 on control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 or connector B CLK 7 J17 on
135. 48VDC 6 P3 48RTN 19 P1 48RTN 7 P3 48VDC 20 P1 48RTN 8 P2 48RTN 21 P1 48VDC 9 P2 48VDC 22 P1 48VDC 10 P5 48VDC 23 PF 48RTN 11 P5 48RTN 24 PF 48RTN 12 P4 48VDC 25 PF 48VDC 13 P4 48RTN 26 PF 48VDC A or B A POWER J4 or B POWER 1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 61 Connectors Power Connector Control Backplane B 62 J1 J4 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 J1 J11 Primary and J2 10 Secondary on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 41 Power Connector Table B 41 Power Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 P5 48VDC 14 LGND 2 P5 48RTN 15 P3 48RTN 3 P4 48VDC 16 P3 48VDC 4 P4 48RTN 17 P2 48RTN 5 LGND 18 P2 48VDC 6 P3 48RTN 19 P1 48RTN 7 P3 48VDC 20 P1 48RTN 8 P2 48RTN 21 P1 48VDC 9 P2 48VDC 22 P1 48VDC 10 P5 48VDC 23 PF 48RTN 11 P5 48RTN 24 PF 48RTN 12 P4 48VDC 25 PF 48VDC 13 P4 48RTN 26 PF 48VDC A or B A POWER J4 or B POWER 1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Rack Alarm Alarm Interface Figure B 42 Rack Alarm Connector OOOO OOOO 69 69 69 9 59 9 9 Table B 42 Rack Alarm Connector Connectors Pin Circuit Descriptions 1 2 3 4 5 Critical Alarm 6 7 8 Fuse Normally Closed 9 10 Minor Alarm 11 Major Alarm 12 Common 13 14 Test 15 Fuse Normally Open 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 63 Connectors Rack Alarm Control Backplane Jo
136. 5 5 a 3 8 5 S 9 88 78 68 5B 4B 3B 28 1B g 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 N 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 S 8 8 8 Port Port Port Port Port Port B B 16B 15B 148 138 128 11B CLK CLK OUT P20 pei 22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P P32 P33 43 J44 16 15 14 13 12 B 8 7 6 5 a 8 2 1 IMT IMT OUT IN next extension shelf Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT Metal points on printed 10 850 0356 04 ext A and B clock circuit boards conducts 48VDC and can cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly Procedure Install B Clock Cable 1 Atthe system terminal check the clock A status to ensure that the redundant clock is running Enter the following command rept stat clk NOTE No other rept stat xxx command can be in progress when you issue this command The output indicates the number of cards that use clock A and clock B RLGHNCXAO3W 97 02 07 08 51 31 EST Rel 25 0 0 CARD LOC 1114 Active CARD LOC 1116 Isolated PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS SECONDARY BITS Idle SECONDARY BITS HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS PRIMARY CLK HS SECONDARY CLK Idle HS SECONDARY CLK 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 99 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 100 PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR ACTIVE ALMINH Cards using CLK A 009 Cards with bad CLK 000 Cards us
137. 5 6 5 B1 POS 2 amp 5 SERVER B PS2B 03 77 0 7 0 TB1 POS 3 amp 6 SERVER B PS3B 04 64 0 6 0 TB4 POS 1 amp 4 SERVER B PS3A 05 70 5 6 5 B4 POS 2 amp 5 SERVER 52 06 77 0 7 0 B4 POS 3 amp 6 SERVER B PS1A 07 44 5 11 5 TB2 POS 1 amp 4 SERVER A 51 08 51 0 12 0 B2 POS 2 amp 5 SERVER A PS2B 09 57 5 12 5 B2 POS 3 amp 6 SERVER A PS3B 10 44 5 11 5 TB3 POS 1 amp 4 SERVER A PS3A 11 51 0 12 0 B3 POS 2 amp 5 SERVER A PS2A 12 57 5 12 5 B3 POS 3 amp 6 SERVER PS1A Multi port Server End TenineliBleck End P2 P1 UNTERMINATED ME F 2 62 1 50 38 1 50 1 50 3 g MM 450 LENGTHzx 125 BONN BATT pin 1 RTN pin 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0846 01 HS Master Timing Adapter Cables Figure C 41 HS Master Timing Adapter P N 830 0846 01 P1 P2 MALE DB 25 FEMALE 08 25 1 UNUSED UNUSED WHT BLU WHT BLU BLU WHT gt lt BLU WHT SI pie Vg m BUS 3 WHT ORN WHT ORN ORN WHT ORN WHT 5 Bus o4 BUS 0 5 WHTJGRN 6 WHIZERN 6 Bus 1 Tx BUS Je GRN WHT XX GRN WHT BUSTA WHT BRN WHT BRN albus J BUS TS 8 BRN WHT bae d BRN WHT BUS e WHT GRY WHT GRY GRY WH
138. 53 38 830 0366 16 30 9 15 Figure C 9 Interface Cable P N 830 0366 xx SPARE TX RING TX TIP RX RING RX TIP C 14 BR WHT GRN WHT OR SPARE WHT BLU gt lt OD OD CxD WHT DRAIN WIRE This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing I The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location 830 03366 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0398 xx B Clock Cable Figure C 10 Clock Cable P N 830 0366 xx Cable P N 830 0404 xx will not support HMUX and must be replaced by Cable P N 830 0398 xx for Eagle Release 30 0 Cables PART NUMBER LENGTH L INCH PART NUMBER LENGTH L INCH 830 0398 01 96 0 830 0398 11 132 0 830 0398 02 1440 830 0398 12 164 0 830 0398 03 192 0 830 0398 13 176 0 830 0398 04 240 0 830 0398 14 208 0 830 0398 05 288 0 830 0398 15 224 0 830 0398 06 360 0 830 0398 16 232 0 830 0398 07 18 0 830 0398 17 252 0 830 0398 08 48 0 830 0398 18 272 0 830 0398 09 84 0 830 0398 19 284 0 830 0398 10 116 0 830 0398 20 52 0 830 0398 21
139. 5A 3Amp 3115 3116 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A 3Amp 3201 3202 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 8A 3Amp 3205 3206 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 9A 1Amp 3209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 3211 3212 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11A 3Amp 3215 3216 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A 3Amp 3301 3302 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14A 3Amp 3305 3306 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 15A 1Amp 3309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 3311 3312 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 17A 3Amp 3315 3316 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse Extension Frame 01 EF 01 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B see Figure 5 67 Fuse 1B 3Amp 3103 3104 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 2B 3Amp 3107 3108 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3B 1Amp 3110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 3113 3114 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 5B 3Amp 3117 3118 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B 3Amp 3203 3204 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 8B 3Amp 3207 3208 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 9B 1Amp 3210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 3213 3214 LIMs
140. 78 0 1 2 MALE DB 25 MALE DB 25 UNUSED 1 wanu 211 USED SH1 MBUSTX FANAALM 2 lt x HHE 2 SH1 MBUSTX FANAALM SH PLUAN 3 MBUSTX SH MBUSRX 4 4 SH1 MBUSRX SH1 MBUSRX 5 M d 5 5 1 MBUSRX SH2 MBUSTX 6 6 SH2 MBUSTX SH2 MBUSTX FANCTRL 7 RA eR 0 7 SH2 MBUSTX FANCTRL SH2 MBUSRX 8 SH2 MBUSRX SH2 MBUSRX 9 m gt d 9 SH2 MBUSRX SH3 MBUSTX 10 R gt AERE 10 SH3 MBUSTx SH3 MBUSTX 11 11 SH3 MBUSTX SH3 MBUSRX 12 x 12 593 MBUSRX SH3 13 13 SH3 MBUSRX FANBALM RED ORN RED ORN SH1 56 7 14 14 SH1 56KHZ ORN RED XX ORN RED SH1 56 2 15 15 5 1 56KHZ BKHZ4 16 BEDZGRN RED GRN 6 8KHZ SH1 BKHZ 17 GRNZRED gt lt gt lt GRN RED 117 BKHZ SH2 56 7 18 m 4 gt H n 18 5 2 56KHZ SH2 56KHZ 19 EMRE ERRED 19 542 56KHZ SH2 8KHZ 20 20 SH2 8KHZ SH2 BKHZ 21 lt 21 5 2 BKHZ SH3 56 2 22 H H 22 SH3 56 2 BLU BLK XX BLU BLK SH3 56KHZ 23 Ere SEE Soo 123 SH3 56 2 SH3 8KHZ 24 x om mc 24 SH3 8KHZ SH3 BKHZ 25 25 SH3 8KHZ DRAIN PIN 1 4 830 03983x FINA PIN 14 PIN 1 Cable P N 830 0398 xx P1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 0 2 I M V 15 02 P2 C 15 Cables 830 0404 xx B C
141. 830 0948 01 E1 T1 MIM LIM 4 Port 24 AWG Figure C 58 E1 T1 LIM 4 Port P N 830 0948 01 PART NO REV LENGTH 830 0948 01 B 15 FT 830 0948 02 B 20 FT 830 0948 03 8 25 F 830 0948 04 B 50 F 830 0948 05 B 35 F 830 0948 06 B 50 FT 830 0948 07 B 75 FT 830 0948 08 B 100 FT 830 0948 09 B 125 F 830 0948 10 B 150 F 830 0948 11 B 175 F 830 0948 12 B 200 F 830 0948 13 B 250 FT 830 0948 14 B 500 FT 830 0948 15 B 500 FT 830 0948 16 B 1000 FT D RX RNO 4 26 RED ORG TXRING 3 REDZU RICRNG 3 6 yis This end of the cable is 10 equipped with a connector in manufacturing NOT USED The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site 17 specific location TXRING 2 ABEN wien m DRNG 1 20 WHORE w RNG 1 22 Ug L DRAIN E1 T1 MIM LIM P N 830 0948 xx 24 AWG C 66 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0949 01 E1 T1 MIM LIM to MPL Adapter Figure C 59 E1 T1 MIM LIM To MPL Adapter P N 830 0949 01 Cables PART NO REV LENGTH 830 0949 01 B 15 FT 830 0949 02 B 20 FT 830 0949 03 B 25 FT 830 0949 04 B 30 F 830 0949 05 35F 830 0949 06 B 50 830 0949 07 75F 830 0949 08 B
142. 850 0330 06 TOP Figure B 13 Connectors Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 06 o 1 1 u E ___ ____ LENS NEN Aaa J31 PORT 1A PORT 1B Jas 8 ________ 2 458 5 i o _ _ L W jin 0 __ wt PORT 2B 182 s CER 9 55 EM im PORT 3B J81 gt fg em o SPEEN EE Sy Siva PORT 4B 85 J55 8 DR to ________ Ls PORT 5B J79 z 85 i x z PORT6A 7777 8 c _______ ERO _____ 2 Re 2 zt E PORT7A __ 7 7E lon SU 138 a _ 22 i E gt LOZ J6 2 gt 1 54 20 z 151 iz PORT PORT 11B B J36 J50 ACLKO PORT 12A PORT 128 GP02 I amp GNPPORT2 E mm BOLKO J47 gt 9 J2 J15 RMC LMC m SECONDARY RALM RALM4 RALM5 5 J60 4 __ O PRIM RALM3 RALM6 RALM7 oO ASSY 850 0330 06 CONTROL SHELF BACKPLANE 850 0330 06 pwr BOT
143. 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 3 Attach a BNC connector to the end of the 1OBASE 2 coax cable If necessary attach RJ45 type connector to the end of the twisted pair cable 4 Secure each cable see Figure 5 8 to its respective connector on the system backplane as follows a b Plug the 26 pin side of the adapter into the backplane interface connector Start one of the adapter connector screws and then alternately tighten the two adapter screws Ensure the adapter slide latch is in the unlocked up position see to Figure 5 7 Plug the single port MAU into the adapter Move the adapter slide latch to the locked down position For the 10 2 MAU push the BNC connector on the coax cable onto the MAU and lock the connector in place by twisting the connector clockwise For a 10 MAU push the RJ45 connector into the MAU until it snaps into place Figure 5 7 Adapter Slide Latch Locked Unlocked 5 Tie wrap each cable to the cable tie bar at the rear of the shelf and then to the cable tie bars at the side of the frame 6 Pullthe slack back toward the other end of the cables and lace to the cable rack 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 23 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 7 Ensure that each tie wrap strap is cut flush with the tie wrap heads so that no sharp edges are exposed Figure 5 8 LAN Ethernet Cable Inst
144. A04 LGND B04 SELH C04 LGND 004 SELI A05 SERIH 50 B05 LGND C05 SERII 50 D05 LGND A06 5 50 B06 LGND C06 SERII _50 LGND A07 LGND B07 INH C07 LGND 207 INI A08 SEROG 50 B08 LGND C08 SEROJ _50 LGND A09 SEROG 50 B09 LGND C09 SEROJ 50 D09 LGND A10 BMUXIN B10 SELG C10 LGND D10 SELJ 11 SERIG 50 B11 LGND SERIJ 50 D11 LGND A12 SERIG 50 B12 LGND C12 SERIJ 50 D12 LGND A13 LGND B13 ING C13 LGND D13 INJ 14 SEROF 50 B14 LGND C14 SEROK 50 D14 LGND A15 5EROF _50 B15 LGND C15 5 50 015 LGND A16 LGND B16 S INF C16 LGND D16 SELK A17 SERIF _50 B17 LGND C17 5 50 017 LGND A18 SERIF _50 B18 LGND C18 SERIK _50 D18 LGND A19 LGND B19 INF C19 LGND D19 INK A20 SEROE 50 B20 LGND C20 5 50 D20 LGND A21 SEROE 50 B21 LGND C21 SEROL _50 D21 LGND A22 LGND B22 SELE C22 LGND D22 SELL B 46 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Table B 29 HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs P9 and P26 Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A23 SERIE _50 B23 LGND C23 SERIL _50 D23 LGND A24 SERIE _50 B24 LGND C24 SERIL _50 D24 LGND A25
145. ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11B 3Amp Fuse 12B dummy fuse 3217 3218 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 13B 3Amp 3303 3304 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14B 3Amp 3307 3308 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM 5 148 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 15B 1Amp 3310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 3313 3314 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 17B 3Amp 3317 3318 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse Extension Frame 02 EF 02 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 68 Fuse 1A 3Amp 4101 4102 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 2A 3Amp 4105 4106 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3A 1Amp 4109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 4111 4112 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 5A 3Amp 4115 4116 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A 3Amp 4201 4202 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 8A 3Amp 4205 4206 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 9A 1Amp 4209 HMUX
146. Assembly Tools and Equipment Check Tools and Equipment P N Safety glasses Tie wraps Flushcutter to cut cable ties Phillips screw driver Straight screw driver B clock cable 830 0398 xx 2 fan power cables 830 0609 xx 1 fan assembly each includes 890 1038 01 mounting brackets 652 0954 01 tooth washers 606 0062 01 screws 600 0934 01 air filters 551 0011 01 Cooling duct for EOAP shelf 652 0860 01 DANGER Exercise extreme care and strict adherence to safety precautions when working on or near electrical equipment WARNING All tools must be insulated and or taped All equipment that is below the shelf being worked on must be protected All jewelry must be removed before starting work WARNING The EOAP unit can operate without failure or component damage for up to one hour without the fan tray providing cooling Complete the replacement within this time frame to avoid having to shut down the entire EOAP unit gt 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 15 EOAP Procedure Install EOAP Fan Assembly 1 Determine where the fan assembly will be installed see Figure 6 3 EOAP Front on page 6 13 and be aware of hardware that needs to be retained or installed in a specific way If an air baffle is installed in place of the fan assembly a The fan unit may be secured with the same screws that are removed from the frame holding th
147. B32 C32 MBUS6RX _50 D32 8KHZ6 _50 A33 EBI HOSTSAN B33 EBI GSTSAN C33 MBUS6RX _50 D33 8 76 _5 0 A34 55 50 B34 8KHZ5 50 C34 MBUS6TX _50 D34 56KHZ6 5 0 A35 55 50 B35 8KHZ5 _50 C35 MBUS6TX _50 D35 56KHZ6 _ 50 A36 55 50 B36 56KHZ5 50 C36 RTSO D36 RTS4 A37 MBUSSTX _50 B37 56KHZ5 _50 C37 CTSO D37 CTS4 A38 MBUS4RX _50 B38 8KHZA 50 C38 TXO D38 TX4 A39 MBUSARX 50 B39 8KHZ4 50 C39 RXO D39 RX4 40 MBUS4TX _50 B40 556KHZ4 50 C40 DCDO D40 DCD4 A41 MBUS4TX _50 41 56KHZ4 _50 41 RTS1 D41 RTS5 A42 MBUS3RX _50 B42 8KHZ3 50 C42 1 D42 CTS5 43 MBUS3RX _50 8KHZ3 50 TX1 D43 TX5 44 MBUS3TX _50 B44 56KHZ3 50 C44 RX1 D44 RX5 45 MBUSSTX 50 B45 56KHZ3 _50 C45 DCD1 D45 DCD5 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 71 Connectors Table B 48 TDM Backplane Top Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A46 B46 C46 RTS2 D46 RTS6 A47 B47 C47 CTS2 D47 CTS6 A48 LGND B48 LGND C48 TX2 D48 TX6 A49 B49 LGND C49 RX2 D49 RX6 A50 B50 C50 DCD2 D50 DCD6 A51 LGND B51 LGND C51 RTS3 D51 57 A52 B52 C52 CTS3 D52 CTS7 A53 RAFA B53 C53 TX3 D53 TX7 A54 B54 2 C54 RX3 D54 7
148. Cables Figure C 21 Terminal Printer Cable P N 830 0535 xx System Terminal Printer Modem DCD SIG GND 7 RXD 2 TXD 3 DTR 6 RTS 5 CTS 4 8 20 1 9 9 NC N 8300535x 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 PIN 15 SIG GND TXD RXD DSR CTS RTS DCD DTR NC C 27 Cables 830 0605 xx E1 Patch Cable Figure C 22 E1 Patch Cable P N 830 0605 xx PART NUMBER LENGTH 71 830 0605 01 12 0 830 0605 02 15 0 DB 26 MALE MINI D 20 MALE WHT TAN WHT TAN RCLK 1 tf t 2 RCLK 2 LIAN WHT C TAN WHT Reik 3 WHI BRN I WHI BRN ice BRN WHT p BRN WHT TCLK 4 t T 5 TCLK 5 WHI PNK 6 Tep LPNK WHT I lt gt 4 PNK WHT gt _ NO CONTACT 4 WHT ORG ORG WHT XC ORG WHT LGND 9 11 LGND WHT YEL WHT YEL LGND 10 l ye HT YEL WHT 10 LOND LGND 11 20 LGND NO CONTACT INSTALLED 12 NO CONTACT INSTALLED 13 RET P 8 UNUSED NO CONTACT INSTALLED 14 t 9 UNUSED NO CONTACT INSTALLED 15 11 NO CONTACT INSTALLED 16 SU o gt lt A ux 12 UNUSED NO CONTACT INSTALLED 17 I 13 UNUSED NO CONTACT INSTALLED 18 ODE 20 WHT VO py WAT MIO 14
149. Clock Connection Cable EOAP Shelf Cable tie down rods 0000000 O O O O O O O O O C7 lt p BPWR A FAN A PWR A POWER IN B POWER IN A o RST A y BCLKOUT A d KA O Ponr 18 port 28 PORT1A 2 FAN 55 FAN A PWR PORT PORT 4B PORT 4 00000000002 02000000 dp 00 Clock connection cable P N 830 0657 XX 3 Loosely route the clock connection cable around the right side of the shelf to the center of the next traverse arm extender Refer to Figure 6 26 Then route the cable up to the top of the EOAP frame across the cable rack to the right side of the control frame and down to the last extension shelf in the control frame STP until both sides of the EOAP have been integrated into the system Refer to the procedure Configuring the EOAP from the Eagle STP Terminal on page 6 112 CAUTION Do Not connect this P N 830 0657 xx cable to the Eagle 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 45 EOAP Figure 6 26 Route Clock Connection Cable to Cable Rack To Cable Rack imeem 0 FAP Cable tie LJ B e a Clock connection cable 804 0657 xx All
150. Contact Site Supervisor for site specific customer information WARNING not leave or allow unused metal objects such as screws or washers to remain anywhere within the equipment Remove all unused material from the equipment WARNING Do not allow any metal shavings to remain in the equipment area This may occur from over tightened screws or bolts These small metal particles are hazardous to electronic equipment Be careful not to over tighten screws or bolts 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 5 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies EAGLE 30 0 Specific Information NOTE Beginning with EAGLE STP Software Release 30 0 all IPMX cards must be replaced by High speed Multiplexer HMUX P N 870 1965 01 cards MCAP cards must be replaced by GPSM 1 cards P N 870 2360 01 and all Terminal Disk Modules TDM cards must be P N 870 0774 10 or later These cards are installed at the factory or by Tekelec Technical Support These cards are not installed by customers of Tekelec NOTE Replace the A and B frame clock cables P N 830 0404 xx with frame clock cables P N 830 0398 xx When the EAGLE 5 SAS system is converted from IPMX cards to HMUX cards any frame clock cables A or B in the system with P N 830 0404 xx must be replaced with P N 830 0398 xx P N 830 0404 xx frame clock cables are not compatible with HMUX NOTE Alarm cables should not be formed with power cables and should have a lacing cord approximately every
151. D May 2005 EOAP 28 Power up the GR 376 Insert 10A fuses red P N 517 0012 01 into the front of the FAP for both the A and the B feeds of the GR 376 Put the fuses in the locations related to the power on the terminal strip refer to the fuse card on the front of the fuse and alarm panel The following message displays powered up The machine re boots 29 Both sides of the GR 376 EOAP are powered up 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 163 EOAP VI Editor Quick Reference Invoke vi by typing vi filename vi begins in command mode Start input mode with any of the Entering Text commands listed below Return to command mode by typing the command again Commands with a before them denote to repeat the command a number of times or to move to the line of the same number Function Command Description CTRL d scroll down a half screen CTRL u scroll up a half screen Scrolling CTRL f scroll forward a screen CTRL b scroll backward a screen lt gt down of lines lt gt k up of lines lt gt h left of spaces lt gt right of spaces arrow keys replace h j k and commands Cursor lt gt G line of the file Positioning G last line of the file H top of the screen M middle of the screen L last line of the screen 0 zero beginning of current line end of current line a append text after cursor i i
152. D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 13 Enter the following command to show the version numbers of the GPLs stored on each fixed disk TDM rtro epl The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 27 03 46 48 EST EAGLE 31 6 0 GPL Auditing ON APPL CARD RELEASE APPROVED TRIAL REMOVE TRIAL EOAM 1114 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 116 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 SS7ANSI 14 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 SS7ANSI 16 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 SCCP 114 121 002 000 074 002 005 121 002 000 121 002 000 SCCP 116 121 002 000 121 002 000 21 002 000 GLS 114 21 002 000 121 002 000 21 002 000 121 002 000 GLS 16 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 MPLG 1114 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 151 002 000 MPLG 1116 121 002 000 121 002 000 121 002 000 14 Examine the output of the previous step If any card shows an alarm ALM call Tekelec Technical Services If no alarms are displayed continue with Step 15 15 Issue the command to retrieve measurement collection setup rtro meas sched The following is sample output tekelecstp YY MM DD hh mm ss TTTT PPP XX x x YY y y COLLECT on SYSTOT STP off SYSTOT TT off SYSTOT STPLAN off COMP LNKSET off COMP LINK off MTCD STP
153. D May 2005 6 31 EOAP Table 6 8 Port Labels and Functions Port Label Function Location BCLKIN A Clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx to last EOAP backplane DB 9 extension shelf in control frame BCLKIN B Clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx to EOAP backplane DB 9 BCLKOUT A BCLKOUT A Clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx to EOAP backplane DB 9 BCLKIN B BCLKOUT B Unused EOAP backplane DB 9 Ethernet port EOAP to customer network Ethernet cable EOAP A and B RJ 45 P N 830 0710 xx processor cards face plate upper port FAN A PWR A Fan power cable P N 830 0609 xx to fan tray EOAP backplane DB 9 FAN A PWR B Unused EOAP backplane DB 9 FAN B PWR A Fan power cable P N 830 0609 to fan tray EOAP backplane DB 9 single configuration FAN B PWR B Fan power cable P N 830 0609 xx to fan tray EOAP backplane DB 9 dual configuration EOAP RST A Unused EOAP backplane EOAP RST Unused EOAP backplane PORT 1A Terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx converter EOAP backplane DB 25 P N 804 0176 01 terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx to display unit PORT 1B Terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx converter EOAP backplane DB 25 P N 804 0176 01 terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx to display unit PORT 2A Modem cable to Modem A P N 830 0709 xx EOAP backplane DB 25 PORT 2B Modem cable to Modem B P N 830 0709 xx EOAP backplane DB 25 PORT 3A MMI
154. F to 104 F Exceptional Operating Limit 5 C to 50 C 23 F to 122 F no more than 96 hours duration at extremes and at elevations less than 1800m e Storage 5 C to 50 C 23 F to 122 Relative Humidity Operating 5 to 85 non condensing maximum absolute humidity of 0 024 kg of water per kg of dry air Short Term Operating 5 to 90 non condensing maximum absolute humidity of 0 024 kg of water per kg of dry air Elevation Operating 60m below sea level at ambient temperature of 30 C to 4000m above sea level at ambient temperature of 40 C Building Requirements The building requirements are standard telephony industry requirements for equipment installation The building must provide a clear uncluttered route between the loading receiving dock and the planned location In order to move the equipment to the proper location recommend hall clearance is at least 4 5 feet 1 4 meters wide by 8 feet 2 4 meters tall Four feet 1 2 meter side aisles should be used to allow maneuvering frames into place and provide ample work space around the equipment 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 9 Introduction Scope and Audience This Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle manual is intended for qualified technical installation and test personnel that must have thorough knowledge of telecommunication installation specifications procedures and equipment standards NOTE All personne
155. Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Route Clock Connection Cable 6 37 Install EOAP Power Cables P N 830 0699 6 39 Route Power Cables on EOAP Shelf 6 40 Route Power Cables to FAP 6 41 Install EOAP Fan Cables P N 830 0609 6 42 Install EOAP Clock In Out Cable P N 830 0609 6 43 Install EOAP Clock Connection Cable 6 44 Route Clock Connection Cable EOAP Shelf 6 45 Route Clock Connection Cable to Cable Rack 6 46 Route Clock Connection Cable 6 47 Install EOAP Terminal Cables 6 48 Route Terminal Cables on EOAP Shelf Backplane 6 49 Route EOAP Terminal Cables to Cable Rack 6 50 Locate Cables on EOAP Backplane 6 53
156. Grill and Filter Installation directional p di arrow on filter Attach flange Fan assembly 8 fans 5 70 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 7 Install the fan unit in the space left by the baffle Figure 5 26 Installing Fan Assembly Frame rail Fan Assembly 77 gt a Tighten the screw D m attached to the h rear frame rail o k c 2 7 Insert the screws and washers through the mounting bracket into the side of the fan assembly O x Insert the screws and WC washers through the Washer fan assembly into the Screw front of the frame rail 2 Figure 5 27 Fan Bracket Installation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 71 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 72 8 9 Secure the fan unit with the same screws that were removed from the frame holding the baffle in place Do not tighten the screws at this time to allow for some minor adjustment See Figure 5 27 on page 5 71 NOTE When mounting the fan unit be sure not to pinch cables between the bottom of the shelf and the fan unit From the front of the frame install the four screws and tighten At this time check and tighten all screws Figure 5 28 Fan with Brackets an
157. IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies including cabling clock and termination information fan assemblies master timing Ohm converter and hardware acceptance information Chapter 6 EOAPdescribes EOAP and GR 376 EOAP assemblies including initial provisioning test procedures Appendix A LEDs provides Light Emitting Diode LED information Appendix B Connectors provides information on connectors Appendix C Cables provides information on cables Appendix D Power Cords to Peripherals provides information on power cords patterns for different countries Admonishments and Conventions Admonishments icons and text throughout this manual alert the reader and technical personnel to assure personal safety to minimize possible service interruptions and to warn of the potential for equipment damage This manual has four admonishments listed in descending order of priority 1 12 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Table 1 2 Safety Icons TOPPLE DANGER This icon and text indicate the possibility of personnel injury and equipment damage DANGER This icon and text indicate the possibility of personnel injury CAUTION This icon and text indicate the possibility of service interruption gt P P WARNING This icon and text indicate the possibility of equipment damage and personnel injury The Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle manual uses the followi
158. IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Association Al IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active LSMS SYSTEM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms 0 3 Assoc 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Completed If alarms are shown for the EOAPs in either the rept stat seas or rept stat 1sms outputs contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 17 Back up the changes using the chg db action backup dest fixed command These messages appear the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor MASP message appears first BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup starts on active MASP BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup starts on standby MASP BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete 6 148 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 GR 376 EOAP EOAP NOTE After shipping or moving remove all cards and modules prior to applying power Overview Figure 6 53 GR 376 EOAP Frame GR 376 cards 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 o o og pe
159. Idle Cards using CLK A 2 Cards with bad CLK A 0 Cards using CLK B 2 Cards with bad CLK B 0 Cards using CLK I 0 Command Completed 5 80 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Master Timing Eagle STP The section provides information about the High Speed Master Timing feature and instructions on how to implement the feature Procedures include the replacement of the composite clock cables and the replacement of the Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor MASP NOTE This feature does not cover the replacement of the control shelf the control shelf backplane or an EAGLE STP software upgrade For these items contact Tekelec Technical Support for assistance Master timing Overview The High Speed HS Master Timing feature offers a mode of operation that allows a high speed capable T1 or E1 rate Link Interface Module LIM ATM or E1 T1 MIM installed in an EAGLE STP to receive its transit timing reference directly from an external HS master clock source instead of slaving to the timing information contained in the received data The timing information is then encoded into the T1 or E1 transmitted data stream used to synchronize downstream equipment The site clock sources both HS and composite are connected with an 5422 compatible cable to the primary and secondary clock inputs of the EAGLE STP The high speed master clock source provides the EAGLE STP
160. J 34 ROW ALM J 66 MMI9 J 77 MMI 9 J 28 EXT ALARM J 35 CUST ALM 1 J 67 MMI 10 J 78 MMI 10 J 66 CUST ALM 2 29 PORT 10A 36 PORT 10A 68 MMI 11 79 MMI 11 J 30 PORT J 37 PORT 9A J 69 MMI 12 80 MMI 12 J 31 PORT 8A J 38 PORT 8A J 70 MMI 13 J 81 MMI 13 J 32 PORT 7A 39 PORT 7A J 71 MMI 14 82 MMI 14 J 33 PORT 6A J 40 PORT 6A J 72 MMI 15 J 83 MMI 15 J 34 PORT 5A J 41 PORT 5A J 73 GP02 J 69 OAPALM J 35 PORT 4A J 42 PORT 4A J 74 OAPALM J 5 GP02 75 1 71 GP01 J 36 PORT PORT J 76 GPSI 73 GPS1 J 37 PORT 2A J 44 PORT 2A J 67 RALM7 NOTE This table is a cross reference between Control Shelf backplanes P N 850 0330 03 04 and P N 850 0330 06 B 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 A Clock 0 through A Clock 5 J7 J14 J15 J56 J57 J63 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J7 J21 J20 J64 J65 J72 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 1 A Clock 0 Through A Clock 5 Connectors 200 009 000400 0000 6 69 9 9 9 69 9 2 9 9 Connectors 25 pin v Table 2 Clock 0 Through A Clock 5 Connectors Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 850 0330 03 1 8 MBUSIRX 5 15 A56KHZ0 5 22 A56KHZ2 5 04 0 0 0 2 5 9 MBUSIRX 16 8 20 50 23 AB6KHZ2 5 CF00 x B a rack 0 12 0590 06 MBUSOTX 10 MBUS2TX 5 17 A8KHZO0 50 24 ASKHZ
161. Module DIAG cess Diagnostics DGS tata qt Data Gateway Server anaes Disk Management Service epis Dynamic Random Access Memory Digital Signal Level 0 64 Kbits sec Digital Signal Level 1 1 544Mbits sec PSM eaten Database Services Module BT ettet dete e n ei European Digital Signal Level 1 2 048 Mbits sec S toot onmes Extended Bus Interface Enhanced Database Communications Module 81 Extension Frame ELA Eagle Local Network Portability Application Processor Enhanced Integrated Applique EMA Eagle Measurement Application Processor EMM Extended Memory Management reete titt Eagle Provisioning Application Processor iiti Enhanced OAM GPL Embedded Operation Support System Applications Processor ESP Expanded Services Platform nennen Fuse and Alarm Panel GLS eee ee Generic Loader Services 1 26 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Generic Program Load GPL Management General Purpose Service Module Global Title Translation GTT Gateway Screening High Speed Communications and Applications Processor Human Machine High Capacity Multi Channel Interface Module High Level Data Link Control High s
162. N 870 2198 01 A 11 E1 T1 MIM 02 P N 870 2198 02 A 12 EDCM Double Slot LEDSs A 13 Smgle Slot LEDS thori 14 EOAXP EEDS Z eed et tette ae mtt A 15 5 870 2360 01 A 16 GR 376 LEDS oie A 17 S 18 eer 19 PMX TP ENTIA A 20 Holdover Clock MCA Card LEDS A 21 MGAP TEEBIS 2 ctt et eet ette e arg A 22 nette we aaa heh 23 Holdover Clock MIS Card LEDS A 24 MPL P N 870 2061 LEDS A 25 E E RE ERE A 26 teet edes 27 Holdover Clock 573 Card LEDS A 28 TOM LED uie mendum 29 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Figures EFEigure Az22Z TOM LED sS 6 ee A 31 Figure 28 Holdover Clock Card LEDs A 32 Big ren 20 TINI S9 ete ue df A 33 Figure B 1 A Clock 0 Through A Clock 5 Connectors B 5 Figure 2 B Clock 0 through B Clock 5 Connectors
163. N 870 2320 01 Rear 48V 48V a i endum ay zy 25 65 65 48V 17 E a E E E Oo GH 48V 12181920 12181920 RTN 21 elelele B retum _ O LOGIC 8 12181920 12181920 7 amp 8 Loaic GND P3 L Chassis P2 GND TORQUE TO ESTIS ee ground al ed TORQUE TO 925 IN LBS 12181920 12181920 E amp d Rearview B side Fuse position Fuse position A side 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 159 EOAP 6 160 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Install the fan power cables P N 830 0609 01 Plug the GR 376 end of one fan power cable on the connector designated FAN A PWR A located at the top center of the GR 376 EOAP backplane Plug the FAN end of the cable onto the FAN A PWR connector of the fan assembly and tighten the connector Tighten the cable connectors Plug the EOAP end of the second FAN power cable P N 830 0609 01 onto the connector marked FAN B PWR B located in the center lower middle of the EOAP backplane Plug the FAN end of the cable onto FAN B PWR connector on the fan assembly Tighten all cable connectors Route the FAN B PWR cable down to the bottom tie down rod and across the
164. PORT 8B J 52 PORT 8B J 4BCLK6 7 A CLK 0 7 A CLK 0 J 46 PORT 7B J 53 PORT 7B J 6 A CLK 6 8 AIMTINGND J 23 A IMT IN J 47 PORT 6B J 54 PORT 6B J 9 A CLK IN N A J 48 PORT 5B J 55 PORT 5B J 10 A CLK OUT J 14 CI J 49 PORT 4B J 56 PORT 4B 11 RALM 1 15 RALM 1 50 PORT 57 PORT 3B 12 B CLK 2 16 BCLK2 51 PORT 2B 58 PORT 2B 17 BCLK7 13 B CLK 1 J 18 B CLK 1 J 52 PORT 1B J 59 PORT 1B 14 A CLK 2 J 21 A CLK 2 J 53 RALM4 J 61 RALM4 J 60 RALM 6 J 15 A CLK 1 J 20 A CLK 1 J 54 B CLK4 J 62 B CLK 4 J 16 A IMT OUT J 22 A IMT OUT J 55 B CLK 3 63 CLK 3 J 17 MMI 0 J 24 MMI 0 J 56 A CLK 4 J 64 A CLK 4 J 18 MMI 1 J 25 MMI 1 J 57 CLK J 65 CLK 3 J 19 MMI 2 J 26 MMI 2 J 58 B IMT IN J 75 B IMT IN J 20 MMI 3 J 27 MMI 3 J 59 B CLK IN N A J 21 MMI 4 J 28 MMI 4 J 60 B CLK OUT N A 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Table B 1 Control Shelf Backplanes P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 Continued Control Shelf Control Shelf Control Shelf Control Shelf Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 J 22 MMI 5 J 29 MMI 5 61 RALM5 68 RALM5 J 23 MMI 6 J 30 MMI 6 J 62 B CLK 5 J 70 5 71 GP01 24 MMI 7 31 MMI 7 63 CLK 5 72 CLK 5 25 RALM2 32 RALM2 64 B IMT OUT 74 BIMT OUT 26 33 65 MMI 8 76 MMI 8 27 ROW
165. Pin Signal 1 14 56 2 _50 2 MBUSSTX 50 15 MAS56KHZ 50 3 MBUSSTX _50 16 2 50 4 MBUSSRX 50 17 MASKHZ 50 B MBUSSRX _50 18 SH2A56KHZ _50 6 SH2MBUSTX _50 19 SH2A56KHZ _50 7 SH2MBUSTX _50 20 SH2A8KHZ _50 8 SH2MBUSRX _50 21 SH2A8KHZ _50 9 SH2MBUSRX 50 22 SH3A56KHZ _50 10 SH3MBUSTX _50 23 SH3A56KHZ _50 11 SH3MBUSTX _50 24 SH3A8KHZ _50 12 SH3MBUSRX 50 25 SH3A8KHZ 50 13 SH3MBUSRX _50 B 12 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Clock B In Out Clock B In Connector J59 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Figure B 7 Clock B In Connector on Backplane 69 69 69 9 2 9 69 6 Table B 8 Clock B In Connector on Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 FANAALM 14 MB56KHZ 50 2 15 MB56KHZ 50 3 16 MB8KHZ 50 4 17 MB8KHZ 50 5 18 SH2B56KHZ 50 6 19 SH2B56KHZ 50 7 FANCNTRL 20 SH2B8KHZ 50 8 21 SH2B8KHZ 50 9 22 SH3B56KHZ 50 10 23 SH3B56KHZ 50 11 24 SH3B8KHZ 50 12 25 SH3B8KHZ 50 13 FANBALM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 13 Connectors Clock B Out Connector J60 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Figure B 8 Clock B Out Connector on Backplane OOOO OOOO Oooo 6 6 69 6 69 9 2 9 9 Table B 9 Clock B Out Connector on Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Pin
166. Power t 116 x EIA 52320 DTE COM 2 COM 3 DTE EIA RS232C x 2 Q 5 Fan tray 890 1038 01 FanApower Fan B power G Q T Q 3 Q3 d q 9 lt lt cox 5 d mom 240485808868 9 35 BS 5 5555 30 52205 55 ge 28 amp RR PEQRL 405582882 Pg a lt lt m lt a 8 e gg a 22 zz 98 2 gg Lo Be 850 0488 XX ic cd 850 0487 XX S z i 8 X System B 2 SystemA Bon Right OAP 2 Left OAP m 6 e 2 dox a Backplane 5 5 a 5 5 a 5 a aa 5 Hard Disk Carrier CD ROM Carrier Hard Disk Carrier CD ROM Carrier 850 0485 01 850 0485 02 850 0485 01 850 0485 02 CPCI Backplane 850 0489 01 CPCI Backplane 850 0489 01 Power Hard Dis CD ROM Hard Disk CD ROM Power Processor 1 Supply Processonl O Supply To Network To Network 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 29 EOAP Figure 6 15 Backplane Cable Connections Single Configuration Misc Fuse Panel To Part of 830 0699 01 fan tray B To green yellow conductor Power VT 520 DSPLY To Frame GND 830 0609 01 To fan tray 804 0528 01 2 Part of 830 0699 01 Power brown conductor to To 830 0609 01 804 0176 01
167. REV XX 1 T1 MIM 70 2198 02 b 3 A 12 European and North American standard for signaling and channels MIM Multi channel Interface Module Release 30 0 and later Figure A 9 E1 T1 MIM 02 P N 870 2198 02 Serial number CLEI code Revision Part number LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Critical alarm condition detected PROC GREEN No alarm IMT A RED Major alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm PORT 1 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned PORT 2 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned EXT AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Master Card PORT GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned OOS Out of service Some prior releases of EAGLE software do not support the E1 T1 MIM number P N 870 2198 02 The following table list the supported card part numbers by release Both E1 T1 MIM part numbers are supported beginning with EAGLE Rel
168. Rear Cover sse 5 116 Holdover Clock Buses ette haqa 5 117 LIST tere obedit 5 118 EX Introduction olet oe Rte ne ane 5 118 Configured as an LIM E1 Card euer needed 5 119 Configured as a Channel Card ut 5 119 Design Considerations for bete ule dde 5 123 BN SET E 5 125 LIM E1 T1 Card Installation eee nnne 5 132 Installing Patch Cables eer ertt mere peto tens 5 129 MPD redu petes 5 133 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable seit re Do nr pn 5 135 Ohms Converter International Market 5 136 5 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Hardware asna aha aS pen 5 140 Introductions uma ayam ENERO NERO MS 5 140 F se Verification niente a tede 5 142 Frame Assignments 5 144 Control and Extension Shelves 5 157 A8V Power SOUT e iis tete t en es 5 162 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 3 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Safety Information Tekelec uses these icons and text throughout this manual to alert the reader to assure
169. Ren yn 5 79 Master Timing Eagle STP Seen tu 5 81 Master timing Overview coe 5 81 Master Timing Site Requirements ausente eres 5 83 Master timing Feature Requirement Matrix sss 5 83 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 1 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Termination of Alarm Clock Supply and Terminal Cables 5 85 Recommended Tools o titt tet rae sei p idus 5 85 Alarm c d ditis 5 86 Integrated Timing System Clock Supply 5 88 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables sss 5 69 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables Introduction 5 91 Replacing and B Frame Clock Cables Description 5 91 Terminal Cables oes edi eee 5 107 Holdover Clock Installation oeste terkt 5 108 Card Placement 5 108 Recommended Tools tepore S rpg eine rien eate e sans 5 108 Output Panel Connections irren utar ten 5 109 Holdover Clock Switch Settings rats 5 110 Clock Input DIPSwitchebettifigs seio ovp pe iene nes n bans 5 110 Output Panel Connecti Ons aov de apt i 5 112 Holdover Clock Alarm Connections eee 5 112 Replacing Holdover Clock
170. Signal Pin Signal 1 FANAALM 14 SH2B56KHZ 50 2 15 SH2B56KHZ 50 3 16 SH2B8KHZ 50 4 17 SH2B8KHZ 50 5 18 SH3B56KHZ 50 6 19 SH3B56KHZ 50 7 FANCNTRL 20 SH3B8KHZ 50 8 21 SH3B8KHZ 50 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 FANBALM B 14 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Clock A Out Connector J6 Figure B 9 Clock A Out Extension Shelf Connector 0100 90 0000 0000 6 69 6 69 9 9 9 9 6 Table B 10 Clock A Out Extension Shelf Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 14 SH2A56KHZ 50 2 SH2MBUSTX 50 15 SH2A56KHZ 50 3 SH2MBUSTX _50 16 SH2A8KHZ _50 4 SH2MBUSRX _50 17 SH2A8KHZ 50 5 SH2MBUSRX 50 18 SH3A56KHZ 50 6 SH3MBUSTX 50 19 SH3A56KHZ 50 7 SH3MBUSTX _50 20 SH3A8KHZ _50 8 SH3MBUSRX _50 21 SH3A8KHZ _50 9 SH3MBUSRX _50 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 15 Connectors Clock B In Extension Shelf Connector J41 Figure B 10 Clock B In Extension Shelf Connector 09 05 65 0 6 69 9 69 9 Table B 11 Clock In Extension Shelf Connector Pin Number Signal Pin Number Signal 1 FANAALM 14 MB56KHZ 50 2 15 MB56KHZ 50 3 16 MB8KHZ _50 4 17 MB8KHZ _50 5 18 SH2B56KHZ _50 6 19 SH2B56KHZ _50 7 FANCNTRL 20 SH2B8KHZ 50 8 21 SH2B8KHZ 50 9 22 SH3B56KHZ 50 10 23 SH3B56KHZ 50 11 24 SH3B8KHZ 50 12 25 SH3B8KHZ 50
171. Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 45 50 B45 LGND C45 D45 LGND A46 LGND 46 BSELA C46 LGND D46 47 BSERIA 50 B47 LGND C47 D47 LGND 48 BSERIA _50 B48 LGND C48 D48 LGND A49 LGND B49 BINA C49 LGND D49 A50 BIMTIN _78 B50 LGND C50 BIMTOUT 78 050 LGND A51 BIMTIN 78 51 LGND C51 BIMTOUT 78 D51 LGND A52 LGND 52 LGND C52 LGND D52 LGND A53 B53 MBUSSRX 50 53 MBUSSRX _50 D53 54 54 MBUSSTX 50 54 MBUSSTX 50 054 LGND 55 CHASSIS B55 CHASSIS GND 55 CHASSIS GND 055 CHASSIS GND GND E2 P3B48RTN 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 45 Connectors High Speed Message Multiplexer Extension Shelf HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs P9 P26 Figure B 31 HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Connector P9 OO000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000004 5 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 ooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo 800000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 Table B 29 HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs P9 and P26 Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND B01 LGND C01 LGND D01 LGND A02 SEROH 50 B02 LGND C02 SEROI _50 D02 LGND A03 SEROH 50 B03 LGND C03 SEROI _50 D03 LGND
172. Straight Trough Cable sess C 42 830 0759 xx Null Modem Gables tte P teer ee C 43 830 0763 01 Loop Back able Adapter C 44 830 0772 xx Multi Port LIM DU tete D RESI C 45 830 0788 xx Straight Through C 46 830 0789 xx Patch Panel Crossover C 47 830 0814 xx Multi Port Power Cable eee C 48 830 0846 01 HS Master Timing Adapter eene C 49 830 0849 x DSI C 50 830 0859 xx Null MODEM for Terminal eene C 51 830 0866 xx Power Cable Breaker To Terminal Strip C 52 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0869 xx Power DC 53 830 0872 xx Power DC RAID C 54 830 0892 xx Multi Port LIM 050 24 202 22 55 6390 0908 Power RING ied ra fette eee 56 830 0857 01 Adapter Cable ccd eec trees eos C 57 830 0884 01 Switch to Frame Ground 58 830 0888 xx C AT 5 RJ45 RJ45 ctr treo bunt tre Coe an Petri 59 830 0889 CAT 5 RI45 R MB cti tente ta getrennte 60 830 0895 01 1 LIM to MPL Cable C 61 830 0900 xx Alarm NETR
173. Test 4 1 Loginto the EOAP Console login ccsproj Password XXXXXXX Last login Wed Aug 9 07 23 48 on console Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 5 1 Generic May 1996 You have new mail 2 the following command to change to the EOAP Application Executables Console login cd ccsosmr Console login ccsproj ls MR os54 STPCCSM1013 filelist lost found modelSTP Console login ccsproj cd STP bin NOTE STP is an example of the instance usually in caps 3 To verify that all processes are up and running enter 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 83 EOAP 6 84 ccemr all status NOTE Only applicable processes are listed Verify all these Processes are running If a process is not shown on the screen then the process is not running The following example is for a default instance with X25Config of L2P3 the X 25 PVC daemons will be different if the instance is not configured with L2P3 tekelec XXX ccsproj ccsmr all status System msDI registration report starts date time Wed Aug 9 07 34 32 2000 Process msDI00 Host tekelec XXX PID 352 IPC directory daemon Process ysT300 Host tekelec XXX PID 390 ct ct ct Process ysA201 Host tekelec XXX PID 405 UAL Timeout PVC state cntl daemon Process ysA301 Host tekelec XXX PID 421 UAL Multi Seg Re assembly daemon Process ysA401 Host tekelec XXX PID 437 UAL co
174. Unterminated RX1_E1P 60 This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing and the wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location C 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0624 xx Cable Assembly BNC to BCN Figure C 24 Cable Assembly BNC to BCN P N 830 0624 xx 830 0624 xx P1 td MZ 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 31 Cables 830 0625 xx Cable BNC Open End Table C 8 to Open End P N 830 0625 xx Part Number Length feet Length meters 830 0625 01 15 4 57 830 0625 02 25 7 62 830 0625 03 50 15 24 830 0625 04 75 22 86 830 0625 05 100 30 48 830 0625 06 125 38 10 830 0625 07 150 45 72 830 0625 08 175 53 34 830 0625 09 200 60 96 830 0625 10 250 76 2 830 0625 11 300 91 44 830 0625 12 500 1524 830 0625 13 1000 304 8 Figure C 25 Cable BNC Open End P N 830 0625 xx P1 If D ie P2 C 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0638 xx Filter Rack Alarm Cable Cables Figure C 26 Filter Rack Alarm Cable P N 830 0638 xx CONTACT 1 CONTACT 9 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 PART NO 8350 0658 01 5 0 1524 LENGTH FEET METERS 850 0658 02 5 0 2438 830 0638 03 11 0 3 352 830 0638 04 14 0 4 267 830 0638 05 17 0 5 182 830 0638 06
175. WHT BRN WHT BRN cUFAt0 9 BRN WHT CBRN WHT WHT SLT WHT SLT P5A48RTN 10 SLT WHT b e 4 SLT WHT 48RTN 11 48RTN NOT USED 12 RED BLU MOT USED 13 BLU RED XX BLU RED NOT USED 14 RED ORN RED ORN NOT USED 15 8 ORN RED XX 8 NOT USED 16 RED GRN RED GRN 17 u yumana y tt tigen CUFA7 21 RED SET RED SLT_ i SLT RED XX SLT RED eurns 22 SAO Sur s CUFA6 24 BLU BLK BLU BLK DeL MAUR CUFAS 25 BLK ORN BLKAORN CUFAS ORN BLK x lt ORN BLK CUFA11 26 UJ CUFA11 DRAIN e NOT USED 18 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 19 Cables 830 0543 xx Alarm Holdover Clock Cable Figure C 15 Alarm Holdover Clock Cable P N 830 0543 xx PIN 19 PIN 1 m P1 Male DB 26 a This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing Not used The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location Not used WHT ar WHT Not used HLDCLK CRIT BLU XX BLU HLDCLK CRIT R HLDCLK MINR ORN i ORN HLDCLK MINR RTN WHT XX RTN RTN iul RTN HLDCLK MAJR sin HLDCLK MAJR Not used BRN BRN Not s d XX Not used E DRAIN WIRE Not used i Not used 1 CUST ALM 1 cable P N 830 0543 01
176. and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Testing the Cables 1 Verify each card report no clock alarms by using a REPT STAT CARD LOC xxxx Where xxxx is any card entered into the database IE rept stat card loc 1101 tekelecstp 99 09 10 07 37 54 EST Rel 1 0 X04 CARD VERSION APPL PST SST AST 1101 XXX XXX XX LIMDSO SS7ANSI OOS MT Isolated ALARM STATUS Alarms 2 Optionally you can check for any remaining alarms by entering rept stat trbl The output will show any minor major critical C and inhibited I alarms The following display shows possible error messages with their alarm indicators C 0100 0128 CLOCK SYSTEM clocks have failed 0014 0021 CARD 1116 OAM Clock for card failed Clock B normal 0014 0022 CARD 1116 OAM Clock B for card failed Clock A normal 0014 0023 CARD 1116 OAM Clocks A and B for card failed 0053 0145 CARD 1115 OAM HS Clock A for card failed B normal 0053 0145 CARD 1115 OAM HS Clock B for card failed A normal 0053 0147 CARD 1115 OAM High Speed Clocks A and B for card failed NOTE There should be no clock error messages present in the output of the rept stat trbl command 3 Verify no cards are using the Clock by entering a REPT STAT CLK rept stat clk CARD 1114 Active CARD LOC 1116 Standby PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Active PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR
177. are examples of the possible output rtrv trm trm 4 rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM TYPE COMM FC TMOUT MXINV DURAL 4 OAP 19200 7 E 1 SW 30 5 00 30 00 LNP LNP TRM TRAF LINK SA SYS PU DB DB SUB UIMRD 4 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 109 EOAP 6 110 rtrv trm trm 10 rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM TYPE COMM FC TMOUT MXINV DURAL 10 OAP 19200 7 E 1 SW 30 5 00 30 00 LNP LNP TRAF LINK SA SYS PU DB DB SUB UIMRD 10 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Return the terminals to service that were taken out of service in step 3 using the rst trm command For this example enter these commands rst trm trm 4 rst trm trm 10 After successful completion of each command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Allow message sent to terminal rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Command Completed Back up the changes using the chg db action backup dest fixed command The following messages appear the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor MASP message appears first BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup starts on active MASP BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup starts on standby MASP BACKUP FIXED MASP A Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Flowchart 6 1 Conf
178. bad CLK B 000 Cards using CLK I 0 Command Completed PST SST AST HS SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards using HS CLK A 1 Cards with bad HS CLK A Cards using HS CLK B 0 Cards with bad HS CLK B Cards using HS CLK I 0 lo lo 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Command Completed Verify that both BITS clocks are either in IDLE or ACTIVE state on both ACTIVE and STANDBY MASP underlined cards with bad CLK values should equal zero 7 Forthe A frame clock cable being replaced remove all tie wraps or lacing cord securing the cable in the frame 8 Remove the A frame clock cable from the shelf s A CLK OUT connector 9 Remove the other end of the frame clock cable from the next shelf s A CLK IN connector 10 Select the new frame clock cable P N 830 0398 xx and connect it to the A CLK OUT connector refer to step 8 11 Route the clock cable in the frame following the routing directions in this manual 12 Connect the other end of the new P N 830 0398 xx frame clock cable from A CLK OUT refer to step 10 to the next shelf s A CLK IN connector 13 Issue the command to report clock status rept stat clk 14 Response to the clock status command is displayed tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel rept stat clk Command entered at termoinal 1 tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel CARD LO
179. card Serial I O card Power supply Fan Assembl y eight fans located below EOAP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 21 EOAP Table 6 6 Tools and Equipment EOAP Shelf Check Tools and Equipment Doors P N 840 0016 02 EOAP Shelf Single configuration 890 1050 03 Dual configuration 890 1050 01 Mounting brackets to attach to shelf P N 652 0841 01 Mounting bracket screws P N 600 0154 01 Flushcutter to cut cable ties Phillips screw driver Safety glasses Tie wrap tool 6 22 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Procedure Install EOAP Shelf 1 Examine the frame designated for the EOAP shelf The shelf has to be installed above the cooling duct Mark the space for the EOAP shelf Figure 6 10 EOAP Installed in OAP Frame FAP EOAP with cards Cooling duct Fan Switch Fan unit HE Q i Grill 2 Unpack the EOAP assembly 3 Install the mounting brackets P N 652 0841 01 with screws provided P N 600 0154 01 on the side of the assembly refer to Figures 6 11 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 23 EOAP Figure 6 11 Fans and EOAP Showing Mounting Brackets Flanges removed for shipping 55555 Flanges removed for shipping 6 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 Install the EOAP unit from the rear of the frame above the coo
180. connects directly to the Holdover clock CUST ALM 2 is not software supported at this time Cable P N 830 0435 xx is an optional cable that may go from the CUST ALM 1 C 20 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0527 xx RS232 Cables Standard Purchased part Serial port connected to an optional second asynchronous maintenance modem and connections between the TTYA and a VT 520 terminal Table C 7 RS232 P N 830 0527 xx Figure C 16 RS232 P N 830 0527 xx 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Part Number Length Length feet meters 830 0527 01 15 4 57 830 0527 02 25 7 62 830 0527 03 50 15 24 830 0527 04 75 22 86 830 0527 05 100 30 48 8300527 06 125 38 10 830 0527 07 150 45 72 14 1 Male P1 P2 n 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 830 0527 C 21 Cables 850 0514 01 Serial I O Transition Card Figure C 17 Serial I O Transition Card P N 850 0514 01 COVER THIS RECTANGLE AND TEXT WITH SERIAL 4 STICKER HAVING SAME TEXT ROTATION TEKELEC 1998 TRNAS CARD PTC344 SERIAL I 0 EOAP NTW 850 0514 _ 22 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0531 03 Serial Interface Adapter MODEM Figure C 18 Serial Interface Adapter MODEM P N 830 0531 03 PIN 25 P1 P2 PIN 1 INA P1 P2 DB25F DB25M
181. control shelf cable tie bar at the rear of the shelf Pull the slack out of the cable towards the holdover clock Dress the cable neatly and tie wrap to the cable tie bars at the side of the frames NOTE Allcables must be laced no tie wraps to the top traverse arms and above to the cable rack Prepare the cable for wire wrapping by removing the outer insulation of the cable even with a point two inches from the left end of the lower holdover clock cable tie bar Apply a 1 1 2 inch length of shrink wrap tubing Center the tubing on the end of the cable insulation before shrinking tubing with a heat gun Wire wrap a 24 gauge jumper wire between the minor and major common alarm connector pins as shown in Figure 5 46 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 11 Cut the wires to length strip and wire wrap to the holdover clock at the locations shown in Figure 5 46 Figure 5 46 Holdover Clock Alarm Connections NC NO CRITICAL Cable connector Holdover clock pin numbers alarm cable Orange To J28 Not used Not used dock alarm conn Cable P N 830 0543 01 12 Tie wrap the alarm cable to the lower holdover clock cable tie bar 13 Ensure that each tie wrap strap is cut flush with the tie wrap head so that no sharp edges are exposed BITS Clock Source Cables This cable connects the holdover clock to the central office Buildin
182. databases in the current FD CRNT and the backup FD BKUP partitions of the active MASP match rept stat db display version The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 27 03 46 39 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 DATABASE STATUS gt gt lt lt TDM 1114 ACTV TDM 1116 STDBY LEVEL TIME LAST BACKUP LEVEL TIME LAST BACKUP FD BKUP Y 43 03 08 14 03 02 18 EST Y 43 03 08 14 03 02 18 EST FD CRNT Y 43 Y 43 MDAL 1117 RD BKUP Y 4 CARD APPL LOC C T LEVEL TIME LAST UPDATE VERSION STATUS TDM CRNT 1114 Y N 43 03 08 27 00 56 30 121 000 000 NORMAL TDM BKUP 1114 43 03 08 14 01 10 46 121 000 000 NORMAL TDM CRNT 1116 Y N 43 03 08 27 00 56 30 121 000 000 NORMAL TDM BKUP 1116 43 03 08 14 01 10 46 121 000 000 NORMAL MDAL 1117 Y 43 03 08 27 00 56 30 121 000 000 NORMAL 6 Verify card to be replaced is STBY before continuing Enter the following command on the active GPSM II card to force it to become standby if the TDM to be replaced is not STBY init card loc x where x is the card location 1113 or 1115 from Step 3 7 Repeat Step 3 if necessary if Step 6 was performed to display card status 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 37 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 38 10 11 12 NOTE Step 8 through Step 10 are only necessary for OAP equipped EAGLEs Enter the following command to retrieve the terminal types and terminal numbers rtro trm
183. dollies are returned to Tekelec 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Acronyms 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Ampere Application Processor Code Loader Applications Communications Module Advanced Intelligent Networks Application Interface Applique American National Standards Institute Application Processor Application Processor DCM bootstrap code Application Interface Application Services Module Asynchronous Transfer Mode Building Integrated Timing System Buss Master Cognitronics Bill Of Materials Board Prom Board Prom DCM Bit per second Carrier Advanced Intelligent Network Configuration and Control Communication amp Application Processor Corrective Action Report Compliance European Comite Internationale Special des Perturbations Radioelectrique European Compliance International Special Committee on Radio Interference Class A CAP Downloadable Utility Control Frame Common Language Location Identifier Clock Interface Card Calling Name Delivery Service 1 25 Introduction COTS Commercial Off the Shelf Communications Processor ePCL2 compact International Telecommunications Union International Point Code COR Customer Service Request nS Database Communication 1 Gigabyte Expansion Memory Module DB aaa Database Tasu ie Database Communications
184. epe etl pen tei 1 20 Table 1 2 RMA Reasons for Return entren 1 20 Table 2 L NSD Components aep repe Ec rio dnb n pad v le MO ERR 2 2 Table 3 1 Frame Labels and Part Numbers 3 27 Table 3 2 Shelf Labels and Part Numbers 3 28 Table4 1 Frame Types 4 3 Table 4 2 Power Cable Conductor Sizes 4 9 Table 4 3 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm oen 4 9 Table 4 4 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm Flags e 4 22 Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations eese 4 24 Table 5 1 E1 T1 MIM Release Compatibility 2 reete teens 5 6 Table 5 2 ACM Card Backplane Interface 5 22 Table 5 3 Feature Requirement Matrix nee deine 5 84 Table 5 4 A Clock Connectors 5 103 Table 5 5 B Clock Connectors a sn n a Sa Sun nnne 5 103 Table 5 6 Holdover Clock Wire Colors and Connections 5 110 Table 5 7 E1 T1 MIM Release Compatibility eee 5 120 Table 5 8 E1 T1 MIM and Channel Cards 5 121 Table 5 9 E1 T1 and Channel Cards 5 126 Table 5
185. filler card to be removed slots 1 2 3 7 and 8 8 Remove faceplates from hard drive and CD ROM drive bays 3 and 4 by loosening the captive screws by hand until they no longer engage the threads in the floating fasteners on the drive bay faceplates NOTE The heads on the captive fasteners should spring outward when freed Figure 6 39 Hard Drive and CD ROM Drive Faceplates Faceplate and Captive 4 Screws of Hard Drive and CD ROM Drive 9 Examine Interior Backplane Connectors for each card to be installed Use your flashlight to examine the pins of the EOAP backplane connectors for any misalignment evidence of shorts or other signs of damage Figure 6 40 EOAP Backplane Connector Pins Prior to inserting the card a check connectors for any kind of damage lt lt Card guides Cards removed for clarity If any of the connectors on the backplane show any damage discontinue with the upgrade to the dual configuration and contact Tekelec Technical Support for assistance see Chapter 1 Introduction Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 You have removed the necessary filler cards and faceplates and examined the interior backplane connectors Start installing the cards next Install EOAP Cards and Drives Use this procedure to install the EOAP cards required for the dual configuration Refer to Table 6 13 for a picture of each card to be installed and to Table 6 14 for a list of tools a
186. in pockets when working on system equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices pb b 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 PP P P gt gt gt Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of these systems must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION These are redundant systems to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and takes down the systems CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor CAUTION After the frame has been shipped or moved remove all cards prior to applying power Reset all cards carefully to avoid possible faulty connections To remove or install a card use the module locking tabs at the top and bottom of the card faceplate See to Figure 5 1 Figure 5 1 Removing a Card WARNING Do not use tie wraps on or above the top traverse arms on a frame Always trim tie wrap flush and turn the trimmed tie wrap to the rear of the cable
187. installation 6 23 expansion shields 3 16 EXT ALM C 20 Extension Frame 4 35 Extension frame 3 27 Extension frame 01 3 27 Extension frame 02 3 27 Extension frame 03 3 27 Extension frame 04 3 27 extension shelf power connectors B 61 external alarm cable installation 5 87 external alarm connector B 35 external tooth washer 5 69 F Fan Assembly 5 54 fan power cables install 6 42 fan support 6 14 fan switch set to OFF 6 69 6 75 FAP 4 8 5 164 FAP JB Jumper Board 4 6 Feature Manuals 1 14 features fan 6 74 finish cables backplane 6 53 Floor Layout 3 12 floor plan 3 12 Floor Preparation 3 14 floor preparation 3 11 3 20 FORCE parameter Index 3 chg oap config 6 113 Frame Anchoring 3 16 frame for EOAP shelf 6 23 Frame Side Panels 3 33 fuse 4 21 5 142 fuse alarm verification 5 163 Fuse Amp 4 9 Fuse and Alarm Panel 4 5 fuse and alarm panel P N 804 0007 06 5 144 Fuse Flag Color 4 9 Fuse Holders 4 7 Fuse Location 4 24 fuse panel shelf power connectors B 68 Fuse Positions 4 23 G general purpose relay connector 01 B 38 general purpose relay connector 02 B 39 Global Timing Interface 2 5 GMT 5 117 gray flag 4 23 green cable 4 19 ground bar 4 15 Ground Cable 4 15 ground cable 4 15 ground cable installation 4 19 ground plane 4 13 Ground Window 4 14 grounding 4 13 H hardware descriptions 3 1 4 1 5 1 Hardware Manual 1 14 Hardware Operational Test Manual 2 11 hardware return 1 20 Heading 1 5 1 hea
188. is powered AMBER flashing CD ROM is being accessed GREEN CD ROM disk is inserted GREEN Fan is powered RED Power supply failure Eoapfrnt detail led LEDs 15 LEDs General Purpose Service Module GPSM II GPSM ID P N 870 2360 01 cards with Upgraded Daughter boards 1 Gigabyte UD1G P N 850 0527 02 03 Figure A 13 GPSM II P N 870 2360 01 LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Critical alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm IMTA RED Major alarm condition detected AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm IMTB RED Major alarm condition detected AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm PORT A GREEN PORT A is the active PORT RED PORT A is inactive PORT B GREEN PORT B is the active PORT RED PORT B is inactive A 16 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 GR 376 Processor Figure A 14 GR 376 LEDs RESET ABORT moOzo o RUN BM MIC HD PH 000 w gt r mumo ODA 0 1 pEKELEC mL o 5 ASSEMBLY ETHERNET _ Interface 0 gt B Interface REV Processor card P N 870 1523 02 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs
189. need replacing return the plastic panels that were removed for this procedure to original locations Put all plastic panels back in place 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Procedure Replacing B Frame Clock Cables This procedure explains the replacement of one B frame clock cable The steps show the replacement of one frame clock cable and are repeated for every frame clock cable that is to be replaced 1 If necessary panels may be removed for the previous procedure remove the plastic panels from the back of all shelves that require the frame clock cables replaced 2 If necessary pin protectors may have been installed for the previous procedure install Pin Protector Assembly P N 830 0880 01 all shelves that require the frame clock cables replaced The pin protectors are placed over the ID pins directly to the right and left of the B CLK IN cables connectors on each shelf Shelf ID pins must be covered with Pin Protector Assembly P N 830 0880 01 If contact is made with the ID pins the shelf may lose its identity 3 Connect a laptop or access by way of a monitor the EAGLE system and start ProComm or a terminal emulator program 4 Open a captured file by entering Alt F1 Name the file the last four digits of the NT xxyyzz CAP Example 2641E1T1 A cap 5 Issue the command to report clock status rept stat clk 6 Response to the clock status command is displayed tek
190. next With P N 870 2320 01 FAP prepare the wires and terminate them on each side of the FAP as follows a Place a terminal ring P N 502 0040 01 over each wire end and fasten it with a crimping tool b Usea small straight or Phillips screw driver and remove the terminal screw from the RETURN RTN terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the blue wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it c Remove the terminal screw from the 48V terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the brown wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it d Remove the terminal screw from the CHASSIS GROUND terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the green wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 Figure 6 33 shows the rear layout of the FAP P N 870 2320 01 NOTE Form the wires together to their proper location and then break them out of the form 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Figure 6 33 FAP Rear View P N 870 2320 01 48V 48V o SA e ALARM INTERFACE 48V 12181920 B Return A R
191. of restricted means the EOAP is communicating to the EAGLE however the X 25 is FAULT second EOAP is connected rept stat seas will display both EOAP s if the X25 Config in the EOAP s DEFAULT file is set to L1P3 rept stat seas tekelecstp 96 01 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 24 0 0 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM OOS MT Fault eee TDM Port 8 IS NR Active TDM Port 9 IS NR Active A 024 006 000 IS NR Active enmi EOAP B 024 006 000 IS NR Active Sane X25 Link Al OOS MT Fault eS X25 Link B1 OOS MT Fault SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS C 0349 SEAS unavailable SEAS EOAP A STATUS No Alarms X25 Link A1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 Al PVCs IS NR X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 B1 PVCs IS NR X25 B1 PVCs OOS MT Command completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP LoopbackTest of the Test X 25 Interface An Aurora loopback plug is connected to each of the X 25 ports on the X 25 interface This test confirms correct operation of each port and the cable Test 8 1 From the EOAP terminal login as root Console login Password XXXXXX Verify the Login was successful Aug 9 07 27 42 tekelec 327 login ROOT LOGIN dev console Last login Wed Aug 9 07 25 42 on console Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 5 1 Generic May 1996 tekelec XX root Password XXXXXX tekelec XXX root
192. one is being updated the force yes parameter must be specified with the act oap config command unless the c g sng1 parameter was specified with the chg oap config command If only one EOAP is being updated perform steps a and b in Method A for the specific EOAP If the c g 2dua1 parameter was specified with the chg oap config command both EOAPs must be updated Use one of the following methods Method A updates one EOAP at a time using the force yes parameter This method allows SEAS and LNP traffic to continue being sent to the system while the EOAP configuration is being updated It can take up to 15 minutes to update the configuration of the EOAP during which time the EOAP being updated will be out of service Method B updates both EOAPs at the same time using the 11 parameter This method will take both EOAPs out of service and may interrupt all SEAS and LNP traffic to the system This is NOT recommended Method A is the preferred method Method A Perform steps a through d in this method for each EOAP one EOAP at a time a Update EOAP A by entering this command act oap config oap a force yes After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD b Wait 15 minutes then enter either the rept stat seas if only the SEAS feature is on or rept stat 1sms if only the LNP feature is on comma
193. oo 0 0 o m H E BOWERS FAN B FAN A PWR A POWERINA oC OAPRST A BCLKOUT A S e q PORT 1B PORT 2B PORT 1A PORT C 830 0759 01 dll c PORT 3B PORT 4B RT 3A PORT 4 lt RST B BCLKOUT B o els Co LL t 5 4 EOAPbackcables P O LO O O ONO O OO O wo e jo 270 PORT 10B PORT 5A PORTIO PORT 9B PORT6A PORT 9A PORT 7A PORT 8A 5 PORT 8B SORT TE 830 0609 01 To Fan Tray B Power 11 When the power cables are connected onto the backplane route the power cable from the connector POWER IN A down and across the bottom cable tie down rod to the right side of the frame Secure the cable using ties every three to four inches 6 157 EOAP 6 158 12 Route the power cable from connector POWER IN B down and across the bottom tie down rod and route the cable to the left side of the frame Use cable ties to secure the cable to the frame every three to four inches refer to Figure 6 62 Figure 6 62 GR 376 EOAP P N 890 1050 02 Side Frame Alarm Panel A fan cable to GR 376 EOAP connector FAN A POWER A A Fan cable EI 830 0609 01 gt GR 376 EOAP B Fan cable to GR 376 EOAP connector FAN B POWER B B Fan cable 830 0609 01 FAN B POWER B fan connector B he FAN A POWER A
194. or GPSM Fuse 15B 1Amp 5310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 5313 5314 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 17B 3Amp Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse 5317 5318 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 151 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Extension Frame 04 EF 04 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 70 Fuse 1A 3Amp 6101 6102 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 2A 3Amp 6105 6106 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3A 1Amp 6109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 6111 6112 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 5A 3Amp Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A dummy fuse Fuse 8A dummy fuse Fuse 9A dummy fuse Fuse 10A dummy fuse Fuse 11A dummy fuse Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A dummy fuse Fuse 14A dummy fuse Fuse 15A dummy fuse Fuse 16A dummy fuse Fuse 17A dummy fuse Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse 6115 6116 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Extension Frame 04 EF 04 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B see Figure 5 70 Fuse 1B 3Amp 6103 6104 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM
195. or software particularly CDU for software and manufacturing diagnostics from hardware For software EMAP EMAP for Anything to do with the EMAP Eagle Measurement GR 376 495 Application Processor IP Internet Anything derived or originating from the product Protocol line Includes everything maintenance database upgrade etc MEAS Measurements Anything to do with measurements collection and reporting including the associated database and retrieval commands Also includes Measurements Platform but not the FTP component see UI below MPS Multi Server Anything to do with MPS applications both ELAP Platform Eagle Local Network Portability Application Processor and EPAP Eagle Provisioning Application Processor EOAP OSS Anything to do with the E Embedded OAP Operations Support System Application Processor OS Operating Anything to do with any of the many the operating Systems systems running on the EAGLE plus all boot proms 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 31 Introduction PROT Protocol Anything protocol application related including 557 SCCP GWS STPLAN LNP INP G Flex G Port etc unless otherwise specified Note that this does NOT include the database maintenance or measurements functions related to these applications SURV Surveillance Any Maintenance function that deals with collecting and reporting UIMs UAMs and status of devices REPT STAT xxx unless otherw
196. personal safety to minimize possible service interruptions and to warn of the potential for equipment damage TOPPLE This icon and text indicate the possibility of personal injury and equipment damage DANGER This icon and text indicate the possibility of personal injury CAUTION This icon and text indicate the possibility of service interruption WARNING gt P P This icon and text indicate the possibility of equipment damage TOPPLE Always read and understand instructions thoroughly and completely before working on moving raising or lowering the frame any portion of the frame or attachments to the frame or equipment TOPPLE Never try to unpack any frame from the shipping container without at least two people to steady any movement of the frame and related components At least two people are required to safely move and position any frame TOPPLE Never pull out the shelf of any frame that is not anchored properly Some frames are required to be attached to over head ladder racks before shelves are extended DANGER Atleast two people are required to safely move and position the frame DANGER No commercially AC powered equipment be used placed within 7 ft of 48V equipment This may create a shock or current loop that can be severely hazardous to personnel and equipment DANGER Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry or carry exposed metal keys or tools
197. power cable and plug one end onto the EOAP backplane connector marked POWER IN B Figure 6 19 shows both power cables connected to the POWER IN ports on one end and the three wires fanned for the FAP on the other end Loosely route the first power cable A power cable from the connector POWER IN A down and across the bottom cable tie down rod to the right side of the frame Refer to Figure 6 20 Figure 6 20 Route Power Cables on EOAP Shelf Cable tie down rods o oo ooo o O O O O O O O O O FAN B PWR A FAN APWR A e POWER IN B POWER IN A gt 2 R CJ 25 h A BCLKIN A BCLKOUT A U d PORT 1B PORT 3 PORT 147 PORT2A um 567 pobres FANBPWR B FANAPWR B E oa PORTA lt TRE 5 a OAPRST B BCLKIN B BCLKOUT B 5 lt p w Y S O O GO GO O O GO OO enne A 0 0 Power cables P N 830 0699 01 4 Loosely route the second power cable B power cable from connector POWER IN B down and across the second tie down rod Route the B power cable to the left side of the shelf Refer to Figure 6 20 On each side of the frame route the respective power cable around the side of the shelf along the outside of a traverse arm extender but on the inside of the traverse arm and then
198. rails Refer to Figure 6 7 Step 3 11 Replace the fan filter by setting it against the front of the fan assembly Refer to Figure 6 5 NOTE Point the air flow arrows stamped on top and bottom edge of filter towards the fan assembly 12 Replace the fan grill by placing it back over the filter on the front of the assembly Hand tighten the thumb screws Refer to Figures 6 5 You have installed the fan assembly for the EOAP shelf Install the cooling duct next 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 19 EOAP 6 20 Install Cooling Duct Procedure Install Cooling Duct 1 Remove the cooling duct from the shipping container 2 Determine the location for the cooling duct to be installed 3 From the rear of the frame place the cooling duct on top of the fan assembly Figure 6 8 Position Cooling Duct on Fan Assembly Cooling duct Holes for mounting bracket 4 A mounting bracket is attached to each side of the cooling duct Insert two screws through the mounting bracket and into the frame rail Tighten the screws WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 You have now installed the cooling duct This procedure completes the installation of the fan assembly for the EOAP shelf Cable power up and test the fan assembly after the EOAP shelf is installed These procedures are described in sections EOAP Shelf on page 6
199. receives an ID address from the OAM The HMUX card stores this address in on board memory in register FF Every five seconds the OAM re sends the same addresses to the HMUX cards which compare the re send with the address they previously received and stored in memory If the address sent to an HMUX card by OAM does not match the stored address the HMUX Illegal Address Error alarm will cause the Shelf LED color to change to RED 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs ILE1 Integrated Link Interface Module 1 Integrated Link Interface Module E1 P N 870 2423 01 Figure A 16 ILE1 LEDs LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Critical alarm condition EKELEC PROC detected GREEN No alarm IMTA RED Major alarm condition APPL detected mra GREEN No alarm O soma IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm PORTA GREEN PORT A is the active PORT RED PORT A is inactive Serial PORT B GREEN PORT B is the active PORT RED PORT B is inactive TOTTI Revision number Part number 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 19 LEDs IPMX Inter processor Message Transport Multiplexer For EAGLE 30 0 must be replaced with HMUX P N 870 1965 04 IPMX P N 850 0188 xx or P N 870 1171 03 Figure A 17 IPMX LED LED Descriptions TEKELEC 5V ALARM Seria number CLEI code 0123456789 RED Illumi
200. separate central processing unit to bottleneck traffic throughput The application and interface cards are designed to provide plug and play type functionality that facilitates future growth The Eagle STP s application and interface cards generally do not have specific shelf or frame limitation allowing you to fully customize and define how your STP is configured The Eagle STP also supports a variety of interface cards to support connectivity to a wide range of network elements The Eagle STP provides connectivity interfaces for Internet Protocol IP Asynchronous Transfer Module ATM Digital Signal Level 0 Applique DS0 A Voice transmission standard V 35 Office Channel Unit OCU European Standard E1 North American Standard T1 Multi Channel Interface Module MIM protocols and Expanded Services Platforms ESPs Secure Gateway EOAP The Secure Gateway is a signaling gateway It receives and sends Switched Circuit Network SCN native signaling at the edge of the IP network The signaling gateway function may relay translate or terminate Signaling System 7 SS7 signaling in an SS7 Internet gateway The signaling gateway function may also be co resident with the media gateway function to process Switched Circuit Network SCN signaling associated with line or trunk terminations controlled by the media gateway The Embedded Operations Support System Application Processor EOAP is a general purpose interface module
201. side of the shelf c Route the cable around the side of the shelf along the outside of a traverse arm extender but on the inside of the traverse arm and then to the frame rail Route the cable up the frame rail to the FAP Secure the cable with a cable tie near the FAP 2 Finish power cable A at the FAP Butt the cable at 1 and 1 2 inch beyond the frame rail The butted cable exposes three wires blue brown and green with a yellow tracer Fan out the wires and attach them to the FAP as described next 3 With P N 870 2320 01 FAP prepare the wires and terminate them on each side of the FAP as follows a Place terminal ring P N 502 0040 01 over each wire end and fasten it with a crimping tool b Usea small straight or Phillips screw driver and remove the terminal screw from the RETURN RTN terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the blue wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it c Remove the terminal screw from the 48V terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the brown wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it d Remove the terminal screw from the CHASSIS GROUND terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the green wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 910
202. side A refer to Figure 4 19 Fuse 1A 3Amp 4101 4102 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 2A 4105 4106 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3A 1Amp 4109 HMUX Fuse 3Amp 4111 4112 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 5A 3Amp 4115 4116 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 6A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7A 3Amp 4201 4202 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 8A 3Amp 4205 4206 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 9A 1Amp 4209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 4211 4212 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 11A 3Amp 4215 4216 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13A 3Amp 4301 4302 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 14A 3Amp 4305 4306 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 15A 1Amp 4309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 4311 4312 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17A 3Amp 4315 4316 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 18 dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19A dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20A dummy fuse OPEN 4 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses Card Location
203. sotto tn ptt teen bayu 1 16 Product Packaging and Delivered oet pase ovo 1 17 Tekelec Technical Sup port ken esed 1 17 Installation Supporten a e adopt dta 1 17 Tekelec Technical SUpport s is iiris irs erret eno tee eee 1 17 Hardware Repair and Return ee tiet tnlit een 1 20 Repair and Return Shipping Instructions sees 1 21 etu tins 1 25 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 1 Introduction Doc Assignments from Software perspective 1 31 1 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Safety Information These icons and text throughout this manual are to alert the reader to assure personnel safety to minimize service interruptions and to warn of potential equipment damage NOTE personnel must be aware of and conform to the safety information provided in each Safety Information section of this manual Table 1 1 Safety Icons TOPPLE DANGER This icon and text indicate the possibility of personnel injury and equipment damage DANGER This icon and text indicate the possibility of personnel injury CAUTION This icon and text indicate the possibility of service interruption and personnel injury WARNING gt P P This icon and text indicate the possibility of equipment damage and personne
204. tete B 61 Power Connector uuu nia aa aun B 62 Rack Alarm Connector ener nnne B 63 Rack Alarm Connector ener nnn B 64 Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Connector B 65 Row Alarm Connector B 66 Serial Port Connector en iE B 67 Shelf Power Connector ua a a sesenta B 68 TDM Backplan ToD tectae pee esq B 70 TDM Backplane Pin outs Bottom esee B 72 Local Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0231 xx C 9 Row Alarm Cable P N 830 0232 xx C 10 Remote Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0233 xx C 11 Hazard Ground Cable P N 830 0257 xx 2202 C 12 Power Cable P N 830 0315 xx rerit trt C 13 XXV xxvi List of Tables Table C 6 Interface Cable P N 830 0366 C 14 Table C 7 R5232 P N 830 0527 xx 21 Table C 8 BNC to Open P N 830 0625 C 32 3592 iioc dedisset ibo ete ade e ER C 36 Table C 10 MMI Port Cable P N 830 0708 xx C 37 Table C 11 Patch Panel Crossover DCM P N 830 0789 xx C 47 Table C 12 Null MODEM for Terminal P N 830 0859 xx
205. that provides the Eagle STP system with a generic platform to develop and run software for feature specific interfaces to the Eagle STP These interfaces for example include the optional Signaling and Engineering Administration System SEAS and the optional Local Service Management System LSMS The EOAP is a modular unit with field replaceable components The EOAP shelf is designed for a split system consisting of an EOAP A and an EOAP B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 11 Introduction Documentation About this Manual This section describes the organization safety issues and conventions used throughout the Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle manual This document is organized into the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction provides information about the manual Tekelec products and installation support Chapter 2 General Installation Information lists Tekelec Signaling Products components that make up the systems explains in general how to label cables and how to install a module Chapter 3 Frames and Shelves describes the unpacking floor preparation Installation anchoring and labeling of frames and shelves Chapter 4 Fuses and Alarm Panels describes fuse and alarm panels and circuit breaker installation and cabling for power and grounding This chapter also provides information on fuse verification Chapter 5 Eagle STP Secure Gateway Assemblies describes Eagle and
206. the boot process The system now prompts you for the root password Root password eagle ENTER Re enter root password eagle ENTER 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 After the processing of the System Identification Procedure has completed the system completes the boot process and return to the console login prompt NOTE X25 and OSI license daemons will fail to find valid license keys They will be configured in the next step 5 Login root enter these commands Console login root Password eagle 6 Start the clone configuration script 4 scripts CloneConfig sh The Clone Configuration Menu appears gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Platform Installation Menu lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Option 7 In the Option field type 1 and press ENTER 8 Load the driver for the type of serial port installed Follow the instructions on the screen For an Artecon driver perform step a for an Aurora driver perform step b a Foran Artecon driver perform these steps At the following prompt enter a11 Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default all q all ys Answer yes or y to all questions and accept the default directory locations when prompted 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 105 EOAP 6 106 Answer the configuration questions as follows Ent
207. the bracket assembly to the Extension Shelf using six Phillips screws and six lock washers Figure 5 52 1 Backplane P N 890 1037 01 Typical E1 and T1 backplane attach or detach by screws and washers backplane attach or detach by screws and washers E1 and T1 is attached in the outer most screw holes to prevent center connector interference 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Installing E1 T1 Patch Cables E1 T1 Interface patch cables Figure 5 53 are installed in the locations specified on the Installers Cable Running List in the Equipment Specification specific to this site The E1 T1 Patch cables P N 830 0605 02 are connected to the E1 T1 backplane connectors J1 through J64 and the backplane port B per provisioning instructions NOTE Cabling for is identical to the cabling for E1 NOTE Cable configuration 1 1 Backplanes Patch Cables P N 830 0605 02 Figure 5 53 E1 T1 Backplane Patch Cables Extension shelf backplane Tie wrap cable to bar Upper E1 and T backplane N Detail E Tie wrap cable to bar Lower E1 and T1 backplane
208. the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug Figure 4 8 Ground Bar and Logic Ground Installation Cable must fill and be visible in lug window Metal Disc non oxidizing grease non oxidizing grease 7 Double crimp the lugs onto the cable end using the embossing crimper 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 11 Fuses and Alarm Panels 8 Slide the one inch length of clear tubing over the crimped lug and heat shrink the one inch length of clear tubing 9 Fasten the lugs of the cables to the power on the Fuse and Alarm Panel Torque to 25 inch pounds 10 Verify correct connection with a multimeter by running continuity check 11 Replace the clear plastic cover on the back of the fuse and alarm panel 12 Secure the power cables to the cable rack with lacing cord NOTE Where the cable leaves the cable rack the cable must be protected with fiber paper through out the system 4 12 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Frame Ground and Logic Ground Cabling Procedures This section covers these procedures Ground Frame on page 4 14 Connect Ground Cable to Control Frame on page 4 15 Connect Logic Ground to System Ground Bar on page 4 16 Run Logic Ground Cables on page 4 19 Grounding Requirements DANGER Strictly observe all grounding requirements to reduce the risk of electric shock The system operates as a digita
209. the maintenance poll NOTE 1 A maximum of two EOAP ports be assigned For the location of the serial ports please refer to Figure 6 51 on page 6 81 NOTE 2 EAGLE terminal X was used for this example Any configurable terminal can be used From the Eagle STP command terminal enter the following commands to configure the Eagle STP for use with an EOAP If site is SEAS only INH TRM TRM X CHG TRM TRM X TYPE OAP ALL YES ALW TRM TRM X RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X NOTE X denotes the terminals identified as OAP 5 Disconnect the AURORA Serial Port 3B cable from the EAGLE terminal PORT X 6 From the EAGLE terminal enter the following commands RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X A terminal failure indication should be displayed on the EAGLE terminal screen after disconnection of AURORA Serial Port 3B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 87 EOAP 6 88 Enter the EOAP Configuration This procedure will Enter and Activate the OAP configuration NOTE HostName tekelec xxx should be located on the rear of the if they are not identified contact Test 7 1 Issue the command to configure the For Single EOAP Configuration enter chg oap config aname tekelec xxx cfg sgl 25 DTE x25ps 7 For Dual EOAP Configuration enter chg oap config aname tekelec xx bname tekelec xx cfg dual 25 DTE x25ps 7 Range one alphabetic characte
210. to customer documentation based on problem reports or to announce the re release of customer documentation System Overview Provides high level information about the system Technical Bulletins Contain updates to methods or procedures used to maintain the system Upgrade Procedures Contains the procedures for upgrading the system from older software releases to the software release supported by this documentation suite 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Master Glossary Contains an alphabetical listing of terms acronyms and abbreviations relevant to the system Cross Reference Index Lists all first level headings used throughout the documentation suite 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 15 Introduction Documentation Packaging Delivery and Updates References Customer documentation is provided with each system and is shipped to the sites specified by the customer The number of documentation sets provided are in accordance with the contractual agreements Customer documentation is updated whenever significant changes are made that affect system operation or configuration Updates may be issued in the form of an addendum or a reissue of the relevant documentation The document part number is shown on the title page along with the current revision of the document and the date of publication The bottom of each page contains the document s date of publication revision and the document s
211. to prevent toppling Procedure Attach Unistrut Overhead Support 1 Using the Cable Rack Mounting kit P N 804 1571 01 comprised of ladder hooks threaded rods and insulators place the assembly directly above the frame for overhead support 2 Secure the top of the frame to the overhead cable ladder rack using a threaded rod with hardware as shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Heavy Duty Frame Installation With Cable Rack Nut Auxiliary Bar 3 KE P N 804 1571 01 Nut 1 2 EI threaded rod P N 804 0219 01 Mounting Kit Cable Rack P N 804 1571 01 Expanded view 3 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Heavy Duty Panels and Rear Covers Removing Heavy Duty Frame Panels Procedure Remove Heavy Duty Frame Panels Frames and Shelves 1 Pull down on the upper panel clips and pull the panel away from the frame 2 Pull down on the lower panel clips and pull the panel away from the frame 3 Grasp the handle in the middle panel and lift the panel off of the frame bracket shown in Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 Heavy Duty Frame Panels Bracket hanger 4 places on the side panel 22 N p 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005
212. to the frame rail Route the cables up the frame rail to the FAP Secure the cables on each side with a cable tie near the FAP Refer to Figure 6 21 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Figure 6 21 Route Power Cables to FAP To Cable Rack FAP Cable tie Power cable i 830 0699 01 Traverse arms I Power cable 830 0699 01 d Power cable B 830 0699 01 Traverse arm extenders 97376 frmside eoap You have now connected both power cables P N 830 0699 xx to the EOAP and routed them near the Finish these cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 41 EOAP 6 42 Install Fan Power Cables Use two fan power cables P N 830 0609 xx to connect the fan assembly P N 890 1038 01 to the EOAP shelf backplane P N 850 0488 xx Procedure Install Fan Power Cables 1 Take the first fan cable P N 830 0609 xx and plug one end onto the connector designated FAN A PWR A located at the top center of the EOAP backplane Refer to Figure 6 22 for connector location Figure 6 22 Install EOAP Fan Cables P N 830 0609 xx Cable tie down rods O 0 G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U O U PWR A J
213. towards the cross connect panel 4 Dress cable bundles neatly and tie to the cable tie bars at the side of the frame 5 Lacethe bundles to the cable rack NOTE Allcables must be laced onto the top traverse arms of each frame Only lacing is used from the top traverse arms and above on the frame and on the cable rack NOTE Where the cable leaves the cable rack the cable must be protected with fiber paper through out the system Preparing Cables for Wire Wrap Procedure Preparing Cables for Wire Wrap 1 Remove the insulation from the cable where it is even with the bracket of the associated cross connect panel as shown in Figure 5 6 NOTE Do not remove the inner sheath 2 Attach the label for the cross connect end of the cable approximately two inches above the end of the insulation 3 Apply a 1 Y 2 inch length of 1 4 inch shrink wrap tubing taking care to center the tubing on the end of the cable insulation Use heat gun to shrink tubing NOTE Do not overheat the cable 4 Runthe interface cable wires through the cross connect panel cable tray 5 Remove the cable sheathing directly below the cross connect jack 6 Cutthe wires to length strip and wire wrap to the cross connect panel 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 19 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 7 Cutthe cable tie strap flush with the cable tie head Figure 5 6 Interface Cable Cross Connect Panel Connection Rear view cross
214. used Cable routed on top of the bracket All cable routed on this traverse arm must be laced with lacing cord tie wraps cannot be used on this traverse arm and above Clock cable routed behind traverse arm I cable frm routing Clock cable Procedure Install Output Panel Clock Cable 1 Connect one Building Integrated Timing System BITS High Speed Clock Cable P N 830 0873 07 to the PRIMARY BITS connector J49 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 and a SECONDARY BITS clock cable to the SECONDARY BITS connector J48 on the control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 06 see Figure 5 36 and Figure 5 37 WARNING Metal points on Printed Circuit Boards conducts 48VDC and AN can cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly 5 104 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Figure 5 37 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Control Shelf P N 850 0330 06 BITS Connectors APOWER SECONDARY A FAN POWER TOP E PEE WEE WEN 2 888 J31 PORTIA PORT1B TO SR Ser Cy m Fuss of PORT2A PORT 2B oo o wass B WW WE _ 7297 PORT 38 ee ee X27 0897 O g Ue c PORT 4A PORT 4B 141 155 777
215. where GR 376 EOAP P N 890 1050 02 will be installed 2 Place piece of fiber paper on the top of the shelf below where GR 376 EOAP is to be installed to ensure that nothing will drop into the area and equipment below 3 Unpack the fan assembly The mounting flanges have been removed for shipping Remove the grill and the filter from the fan assembly The fan is shipped with the side flange not attached Figure 6 58 Fan and Filter Assembly Installation directional arrow on filter 2 flange Fan assembly 8 fans 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 Install the fan assembly from the front of the frame and secure the assembly to the frame with the four screws P N 600 0193 01 and external tooth washers P N 606 0062 01 that are shipped with the fan assembly refer to Figure 6 59 Figure 6 59 Fan Assembly Mounting Screws flange a Fan assembly o 8 fans NOTE The filter is stamped on the edge to indicate the direction of the AIR FLOW The arrow should be pointing into the fan unit 5 Moveto the rear of the frame and install rear mounting flanges to the sides on the fan unit P N 652 0954 01 Secure the flanges to the frame using four screws P N 600 0193 01 and external tooth washers P N 606 0062 01 refer to Figure 6 60 From the rear of the frame place the cooling duct on the top of the fan unit Secure the cooling duct to the frame using screws P N 600 0193 01 and external tooth washers
216. wrap strap is cut flush with the tie wrap head so sharp edges are not exposed 7 Attach any necessary adapter to the end of the cable see step 1 of this procedure and then attach cable or cable plus adapter to the device Connect terminal cable adapter P N 830 0535 to modem P N 830 0531 04 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 107 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Holdover Clock Installation Card Placement The holdover clock option and its associated output panel are normally factory installed in a miscellaneous frame Use the following procedures to complete the holdover clock installation The holdover clock cards must be installed in the positions illustrated in Figure 5 39 Check that the proper cards are installed in the indicated locations Figure 5 39 Holdover clock MCA card MIS card V OUTPUT E 6 DIGITAL CLOCK DISTRIBUTOR TO TO4 TO5 TO7 TO9 TO10 HS1 HS2 DCD 523 513 BLANK 573 BLANK OCA MIS TOCA 4 a d N Nn C 9 JC 23 KE 2 di C NX gt 2 DC C J V NN munie CI cards ST3 cards TOCAcards Optional
217. xxvii List of Procedures Install EOAP X 25 Modem Cables 6 51 Install EOAP to Customer Network Cable 6 58 Install Ethernet Cable for DCM DSM and 5 25 Install Fan Cables nore ent e oh dda ote Wee sees 5 64 Install e a Toe 5 73 Install Fan Power Cables essen enne 6 42 Install GR 376 eese ener nennen 6 154 Install Holdover Clock Alarm Cable 5 112 Install Interface Cable Connector 5 12 Install LAN Ethernet Cable for ACM 5 21 Install NEBS Frame Side Panels eee 3 33 Install Output Panel Clock Cable pier nte reete 5 104 Install Power Cables rie nere o aun ened ERES 4 11 Install Power Cables aee test gane 6 39 Installing the Interface Cable ette erre tte tengan 5 18 Label FAP Faceplate aco 2 10 Label Frame with Shelf Labels 3 29 Label Br mes sau eade ed ahua hu 3 27 Mark and Label Cables essen enne nennen nnn 2 8 Markand LEabelCabl s ein ttt eh m ER Ei
218. 0 Power Connector Extension B 61 Power Connector Control Backplatie 2e B 62 Rack Alarm Alarm Interface B 63 Rack Alarm Control Backplane see B 64 Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Control Backplane B 65 viii 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table of Contents Row Alarm Control Backplane B 66 Serial Port Control 67 POW eR cheese tte bene B 68 Shelf Power Connector P1 P2 P3 B 68 Terminal Disk Module Control B 70 Appendix C Cables Cables by Part Numbers a deinde du AER 1 Labeling decia talea ento mei at 4 Cable Labeling icis eiie ort et etie 4 Introduction i n IER ie aide eet dee led see Oa au C 6 503 0029 0T MPL Card Diagnostic C 7 804 0176 01 Converter 0 4 000000 000200000040 7 830 0224 xx Drive Power Cable C 8 830 0231 xx Local Maintenance Center C 9 830 0232 xx Row Alarm 2 C 10 830 0233 xx Remote Maintenance Center C 11 830 0257 xx Hazard Ground Cab
219. 0 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 11 Remove the new fan tray from the container The fan tray is shipped with the three fans already installed Figure 5 19 Fan tray Fan Filter Replaceable Fans 12 Insert the fan tray into the the fan tray bracket You might need to tilt the fan tray up as it is pushed in so that it is completely inserted into the bracket After insertion be sure the front of the fan tray is recessed in 1 2 inch with respect to the front frame rails Figure 5 20 Fan tray inserted into fan tray bracket in the frame front view 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 61 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 13 When the fan tray is aligned and in place attach the fan tray to the fan tray bracket by tightening the screws on the left and right sides of the rear of the fan tray bracket There are two screws on each side These screws must be tightened from the rear of the frame Figure 5 21 Tighten rear fan tray screws Tighten rear fan tray screws est 5 62 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 14 At this time check and tighten all screws including the screws holding the side brackets to the frame The side bracket screws should be tightened fully from the rear of the frame Use a long hex driver or flat head screw driver Figure 5 22 Tighten fan side bracket screws 15 Remove th
220. 0 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 7 Pushin the top and bottom inject eject clamps This locks the card in place and ensures a strong connection with the pins on the target shelf backplane Figure 5 12 Push in Inject Eject Clamps Push in the inject eject clamps to lock the card in place 8 Verify that both IMT bus LEDs are green 9 Record the activity in the site maintenance log 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 53 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Fan Assembly Installation and Cabling WARNING Do not carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets or on belts when working on or around system equipment WARNING Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry on wrists or hands when working on system equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices gt gt CAUTION Be sure to install the fan assembly 890 0001 01 before N installing the HCMIM card This section shows how to install the optional Fan Assembly 890 0001 01 and Fan Assembly 890 1038 01 890 1038 02 of these fan assemblies can be installed in the standard frame and the Heavy Duty Frame Be sure to determine which type of frame you have before performing these procedures Installing Fan Assembly 890 0001 01 NOTE Beginning with EAGLE software rel
221. 0 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 iii Table of Contents Application Service Module ASM to Transaction Service Module TSM 256 or higher Upgrade for ES o uada ledit breue ten 5 32 Terminal Disk Module TDM Upgrade 5 36 Measurement Collection and Polling Module MCPM 5 45 Removing a Card an Existing EAGLE System 5 51 Fan Assembly Installation and Cabling sss 5 54 Installing Fan Assembly 890 0001 01 eee 5 54 Irstalling Fan i 5 64 Powering Up the Fan Assembly ios wise ien de EE 5 66 Installing Fan Assembly 890 1038 01 or 890 1038 02 5 68 Installing Pari ablesc essc er tette ertet 5 73 Powering Up the Fan Assembly asset 5 75 Testing the Fan Assembly redde 5 77 Clock Cable Installation a L n Du a s Sus 5 79 Testing teuer a UBER 5 80 Master Timing Eagle STP oo sed t eb e b 5 81 Master timing OV CL VI OW usc na eontra Paseo tede 5 81 Master Timing Site 5 83 Master timing Feature Requirement Matrix 5 83 Termination of Alarm Clock Supply and Terminal Cables 5 85 Recorimended Lo0ls tete et Ie 5 85 Alain Cables 5 tenet bnt
222. 0 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 111 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 44 Holdover Clock FAP P N 870 2320 01 Connections 48V 48V ER 48V 11 ku pa u Je 48V 12181920 12181920 RTN eJe ele A RTN LOGIC 121819 20 12181920 LOGIC GND lt k Chassis 3 GND TORQUE TO open ground le eee TORQUE TO 025 IN LBS 12181920 12181920 25 INLBS Taprear 870 1606 01 Rearview B side Fuse position Fuse position A side Output Panel Connections The following output panel connections are made during installation Connections on the system backplane First Building Integrated Timing System BITS clock cable P N 830 0873 xx to Primary BITS connector on J42 and connector J49 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 J49 Second BITS clock cable P N 830 0873 xx to the SECONDARY BITS connector J48 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Clock Output Connections The composite BITS clock cables P N 830 0873 xx are used to transmit the clock outputs from the holdover clock output panel to the control shelf backplane Holdover Clock Alarm Connections 5 112 The installation connections are shown in the wiring layouts in Figure 5 46 and Figure 5 47 A holdover clock ala
223. 000000000000000000000000000000018 8 8 s lt EH gt m Table 16 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND 01 LGND 01 EBI XA02 201 EBI 14 A02 50 02 LGND C02 EBI XA03 D02 EBI 15 A03 50 LGND EBI XA04 203 EBI XA16 A04 LGND B04 LGND C04 EBI XA05 D04 EBI XA17 A05 B05 LGND C05 EBI XA06 205 EBI XA18 A06 B06 LGND C06 EBI_ XA07 D06 EBI XA19 A07 LGND B07 LGND C07 EBI XA08 D07 EBI XA20 A08 ASEL 08 C08 EBI XA09 D08 EBI XA21 A09 B09 C09 EBI XA10 D09 EBI XA22 A10 AMUXIN B10 C10 D10 EBI XA23 11 LGND B11 AIN C11 D11 EBI XA24 A12 B12 LGND C12 D12 EBI XA25 A13 B13 LGND C13 D13 EBI XA26 A14 LGND B14 LGND C14 D14 EBI XA27 A15 50 B15 LGND C15 D15 A16 ASERI _50 B16 LGND C16 D16 A17 LGND B17 LGND C17 D17 B 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Table B 16 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A18 B18 C1
224. 01 01 Revision D May 2005 Part Number Part of 830 0699 01 blue conductor Table 6 7 Dual EOAP Cable Legend 830 0257 01 Note On items 3 4 and 5 If using the FAP P N 870 2320 01 use terminal ring P N 502 0040 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Part of 830 0699 01 Brown Conductor Part of 830 0699 01 green yellow conductor 830 0638 xx Supplied w modem Supplied w modem 830 0710 xx 830 0657 xx 804 0176 01 830 0528 01 830 0708 xx 830 0709 xx 830 0609 01 850 0496 01 830 0651 01 830 0224 02 830 0656 01 830 0421 02 850 0514 01 850 0763 01 for install only For reference only EOAP Quantity Required Length units Comments System 1 5ft 457m Logic ground RTN 10 ft 3 05m Dress from OAP to fuse panel Strip and terminate 48 VDC 10 ft 3 05m Dress from OAP to fuse panel 108 3 05m 2 Strip and terminate CGND 2 Dress from OAP to fuse panel Strip and terminate 2 2 ft 609 m Terminal convert cable 6 ft 1 829 From OAP backplane to 10 254mm CPCI power backplane 3 5in 88 9 Drive power cable 5 3 134 6 2 5 63 5 Cable legend Clock in out fan pwr cable Force transition card 48V power cable 2 50 pos signal cable Hard drive cable in out CD ROM cable Serial I O transition card 6 27 EOAP Figure 6 13 Backplane Cable Connections Dual Configuration Misc Fuse Panel To
225. 01 Revision D May 2005 Index 870 0774 10 5 6 5 91 870 0774 15 2 5 870 1824 01 5 63 870 1965 01 5 6 5 91 870 1984 02 5 25 870 1984 03 5 25 870 1984 04 5 25 870 1984 xx 5 25 870 2062 02 5 133 870 2197 01 5 25 870 2198 XX 5 125 870 2360 01 5 6 5 91 870 2372 01 5 25 890 0001 01 5 54 890 1037 01 5 122 5 123 5 128 890 1038 01 5 68 890 1038 02 5 68 890 1050 01 6 22 890 1050 03 6 22 A A side 4 23 ACM 2 2 5 21 4 act oap config parameters performance impact 6 114 Administration Manuals 1 14 AIPADDR parameter chg oap config 6 112 air management card 5 63 alarm cable installation 5 86 alarms EOAP 6 124 6 139 American Wire Gage 4 9 ANAME parameter chg oap config 6 112 anchor and frame 3 15 anchor bolt 3 22 ANMASK parameter chg oap config 6 112 Appendix A LEDs 1 12 Appendix B Connectors 1 12 Appendix C Cables 1 12 Appendix D Power Cords to Peripherals 1 12 Application Communication Module 5 21 Index 1 AROUTER parameter chg oap config 6 112 ASM 2 2 A 5 ASM TDM and MCPM upgrade procedures 5 28 ASM TSM GLS card replacement 5 32 ASM TSM SCCP card replacement 5 28 ATM 5 81 5 82 A 6 ATM LIM 5 81 AWG 4 9 B Bside 4 23 backing up changes chg db 6 133 6 148 backplane control shelf B 19 backplane extension shelf B 25 BIPADDR parameter chg oap config 6 112 BITS 5 85 5 88 5 104 5 115 BITS cable installation 5 88 5 104 BITS clock connectors B 9 black and white flag 4 23 blue flag 4 23 BNAME para
226. 02 1 5 02 F LU 1 4 P2 5 90 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Replacing A and B Frame Clock Cables This will be removed Reference VP005046 doc Internal documentation only NOTE Beginning with EAGLE STP Software Release 30 0 IP 8 0 all IPMX cards must be replaced by High speed Multiplexer HMUX P N 870 1965 01 cards All MCAP cards must be replaced by GPSM 1 cards P N 870 2360 01 and all Terminal Disk Modules TDM cards must be P N 870 0774 10 or later for this release These cards are installed at the factory or by Tekelec Technical Support These cards are not installed by customers of Tekelec Replacing A and B Frame Clock Cables Introduction The purpose of this section is to provide a procedure to replace the A and B frame clock cables P N 830 0404 xx with frame clock cables P N 830 0398 xx When the EAGLE system is going to be converted from IPMX cards to HMUX cards any frame clock cables or B in the system with P N 830 0404 xx must be replaced with P N 830 0398 xx This is because the older P N 830 0404 xx frame clock cables are not compatible with HMUX Replacing A and B Frame Clock Cables Description EAGLE systems in the field may still be using the older P N 830 0404 xx frame clock cables to distribute frame A and B clocking between the shelves in each frame Before the IPMX cards in the system can be upgraded to HMUX cards any frame clock cable P N 830 040
227. 0866 C 52 Power DC Router P N 830 0869 xx C 53 Power DC RAID P N 830 0872 xx C 54 Multi Port DSO P N 830 0892 C 55 Power Ring P N 830 0908 xx etre teretes C 56 Adapter Cable HMUX P N 830 0857 01 C 57 Switch to Frame Ground Cable P N 830 0884 01 C 58 CAT 5 RJ45 RJ45 P N 830 0888 C 59 CAT 5 RJ45 RJ45 P N 830 0889 C 60 T1 to MPL Cable Adapter P N 830 0895 01 C 61 Alarm NETRA Server Cable P N 830 0900 C 62 TAS Alarm Cable P N 830 0901 xx C 63 830 0917 01 Adapter RJ 45 to 9 C 64 830 0932 01 1 MIM 22 AWG 65 E1 T1 MIM LIM 4 Port P N 830 0948 01 C 66 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 xxi List of Figures Figure C 59 E1 T1 MIM LIM To MPL Adapter P N 830 0949 01 C 67 Figure C 60 Force Transition Card P N 850 0496 01 C 68 xxii 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Tables Table Lb Icons etie dota Sa in operit quM runi dme ca uode 1 3 Table 1 2 Safety COS Gaston inte ushata OA va enl ERES UNUS 1 13 Table LT Types cai
228. 0m below sea level at ambient temperature of 30 C to 4000m above sea level at ambient temperature of 40 C subjected to extreme temperatures or variations in humidity such as air transport allow 6 hours for the components to aclimatize to your site conditions before operating WARNING If components arrive in containters that might have been 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 2 11 General Installation Information Eagle STP and IP SG Post Installation Inspection 2 12 This section describes a general Eagle STP and IP SG Secure Gateway system inspection after installation Procedure Inspect Eagle STP and SG System After Installation Verify the following 1 Allitems listed in the Equipment Specification have been installed 2 Shipping container is properly packed with ramp and frame dollies shipped 3 Cabling is neatly installed and the labels are correct and easily readable 4 Power cabling does not run through a cable rack 5 Power cabling is not be routed together with any other cables and has at least six inches of clearance 6 Racks have protective paper between the rack and any cables that would otherwise touch the rack 7 The main central office ground cable is correctly labeled and is marked TO and FROM with the Do Not Remove tag installed on both ends of the cable at the central office grounding bar 8 The 48VDC power feeds are correctly labeled at the central office powe
229. 1 February 1999 and applicable Physical Protection requirements in GR 63 CORE Issue 2 April 2002 Tekelec products comply with the relevant directives and harmonized standards in support of the products CE mark required in Europe These products are in conformity with the requirements of RTTE Directive 1999 5 EC Radio Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as tested to the relevant standards identified in the Official Journal of the European Communities These products are in conformity with the relevant standards in EMC directive 89 336 EEC These products comply with the relevant standards in Safety directive 73 23 supported by Certified Body CB Test Certificates US 5923 UL or US 5451 UL issued by the National Certification Body as tested to IEC 60950 with national differences for European countries These products are UL listed under UL File E200146 for USA and c UL for Canada C UL US LISTED G ermany 5 GS D Demko for Denmark Additional country marks will be added pending reviews 1 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Environmental Requirements The environmental conditions for the system must be maintained to the following specifications Temperature Variation Typical environmental conditions are temperature and humidity controlled With loss of environmental control the equipment covered in this manual complies with these conditions Operating 5 C to 40 41
230. 1 L 25 25 DRAIN LENGTHzt 12 830 0859 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 51 Cables 830 0866 xx Power Cable Breaker To Terminal Strip Table C 13 Power Cable to Breaker Strip P N 830 0866 xx Length Length r r Part Number 7405 5 Long Long Label A usage Label B usage inches meters Lead Lead 830 0866 01 48 5 14 78 Black Red BP 1 POS 1B TB1 POS 3 and 4 830 0866 02 51 5 15 69 Black Black BP 2 POS1B TB2 POS 3 and 4 830 0866 03 53 5 16 30 Black Red BP 1 POS 1A TB3 POS and 4 830 0866 04 46 5 14 17 Black Black 2 POS 1B POS 3 and 4 830 0866 05 86 0 26 21 Black Red BP 2 POS 3B TB2 POS 3 and 4 830 0866 06 88 0 88 0 Black Black 1 TB3 POS 3 and 4 Figure C 44 Power Cable to Breaker Strip P N 830 0866 xx P2 RING TERMIALS 1 75 38 m P1 RING TERMIALS 258 1 75 10 62 X C 52 LENGTH 1 41 Lud 830 0866 xx rev B dwg 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0869 xx Power DC Router Table C 14 Power DC Router P N 830 0869 xx Cables
231. 10 E1 T1 MIM and Channel Cards 022 5 126 Table 5 11 E1 T1 MIM and Channel Cards 5 127 Table 5 12 1 1 Configuration Form d bond 5 132 Table 5 13 Summary of Ranges for Port Parameters 5 133 Table 5 14 Part Numbers nnne 5 137 Table 5 15 Physical Conditions 5 138 Table 5 16 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm Flags see 5 144 Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations 5 145 Table 6 1 EOAP Tools and Equipment eoe entes 6 6 Table 6 2 EOAP Installation Order eese 6 9 Table 6 3 EOAP Installation Equipment Required 6 11 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 xxiii xxiv List of Tables Table 6 4 Fan Assembly Installation Order 2 2 6 14 Table 6 5 Fan Assembly Tools and Equipment 6 15 Table 6 6 Tools and Equipment EOAP Shelf se erre tns 6 22 Table 6 7 Dual Cable Legend d 6 27 Table 6 8 EOAP Port Labels and Functions 6 32 Table 6 9 External Interfaces System A 6 33 Table 6 10 External Interfaces System 6 34 Table 6 11 Installation Order for Single to Dual EOAP Conf
232. 10 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Operations Administration and Maintenance Operations Administration and Maintenance Operations System Support Applications Processor Operations System Support Applications Processor Frame Office Channel Unit Original Equipment Manufacturer Out of Service Out of Service Maintenance Disabled Operations Support System Operations System Peripheral Maintenance task Protocol Public Switched Telephone Network Random Access Memory Return Material Authorization Service Control Point 557 Network Signal Connection Control Part System Configuration Manager Switched Circuit Network Small Computer Systems Interface Signaling Engineering and Administration Center Signaling Engineering and Administration System Secure Gateway Session Initiation Protocol Signaling System Seven Service Switching Point 557 Network Sentinel Transport Cards Signal Transfer Point 557 Network Signaling Transfer Point Local Area Network 1 29 Introduction SURV nn Surveillance The North American telecommunications standard defining a circuit that multiplexes and switches 24 channels and operates at speeds of 1 544 Mbps TAS Tone and Announcement Server TBS Be Specified Ro AUS Table Creation Utility TOP aeuo eaten cete Transport Control Protocol Transmission C
233. 1203 024 001 000 LIMDSO 557 5 IS NR Active 1205 024 001 000 LIMDSO CCS7ITU IS NR Active M BIP ERR 1207 024 001 000 LIMATM ATMANSI IS NR Active 1211 024 001 000 LIMATM ATMANSI IS NR Active ALMINH 1212 024 001 000 ASM GLS IS NR Active ALMINH Command Completed NOTE The new TSM cards will still be listed as ASM type in the output 7 Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for each ASM GLS card identified in Step 1 To upgrade a spare ASM GLS go to Step 8 otherwise go to step Step 12 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 33 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 34 10 11 To upgrade your spare ASM remove the spare ASM card from the spare card storage shelf and place it into an ESD container Next identify the slot of the last TSM GLS card upgraded and enter the following command to remove that TSM GLS from service Do not use the force command unless this is the last TSM GLS card in service GLS service should be maintained at all times If there are more than one TSM GLS cards in service enter the following inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the TSM GLS card location If this is the only TSM GLS card enter the following inh card loc xxxx force yes where xxxx is the TSM GLS card location Remove the TSM GLS card per the card replacement procedure described in Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 Place the removed TSM card into the spare card storage shelf Place th
234. 13 FANBALM B 16 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Clock B Out Extension Shelf Connector J42 Figure B 11 Clock B Out Extension Shelf Connector 9 5 09 9 00 6 2 QU 6 6 69 6 amp 9 69 9 2 9 9 9 Table B 12 Clock B Out Extension Shelf Connector Pin Number Signal Pin Number Signal 1 FANAALM 14 SH2B56KHZ 50 2 15 SH2B56KHZ 50 3 16 SH2B8KHZ 50 4 17 SH2B8KHZ 50 5 18 SH3B56KHZ _50 6 19 SH3B56KHZ _50 7 FANCNTRL 20 SH3B8KHZ 50 8 21 SH3B8KHZ 50 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 FANBALM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 17 Connectors Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Figure B 12 Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 PORT 1A PORT 1B lo 2 ACLK OUT O A J38 Jo A J52 O OS FA i OMEO PoRT 28 ONBCLKOUT J6 J72O lt ACLKIN ERE J37 J51 OP _ o ind o d 4 42 PORT 3A PORT3B OVBCLKIN J59 O m N
235. 16 Fuse 1A 3Amp 1101 1102 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 2A 3Amp 1105 1106 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3A Amp 1109 HMUX Fuse 3Amp 1111 1112 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 5A 3Amp 1115 1116 MASP B TDM and MCAP Fuse 6A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7A 3Amp 1201 1202 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 8A 3Amp 1205 1206 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 9A 1Amp 1209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 1211 1212 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 11A 3Amp 1215 1216 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13A 3Amp 1301 1302 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 14A 3Amp 1305 1306 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 15A 1Amp 1309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 1311 1312 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17A 3Amp 1315 1316 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 18A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19A dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20A dummy fuse OPEN Control Frame 00 CF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B refer to Figure 4 16 Fuse 1B 3Amp 1103 1104 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse
236. 2 Table B 8 Clock B In Connector on Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 B 13 Table B 9 Clock B Out Connector on Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 B 14 Table B 10 Clock Out Extension Shelf Connector B 15 Table B 11 Clock B In Extension Shelf Connector B 16 Table B 12 Clock B Out Extension Shelf Connector B 17 Table B 13 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector B 20 Table B 14 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector 22 Table B 15 Backplane Pin Out Symbols B 23 Table B 16 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector B 28 Table B 17 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector B 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Tables 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 18 Table B 19 Table B 20 Table B 21 Table B 22 Table B 23 Table B 24 Table B 25 Table B 26 Table B 27 Table B 28 Table B 29 Table B 30 Table B 31 Table B 32 Table B 33 Table B 34 Table B 35 Table B 36 Table B 37 Table B 38 Table B 39 Table B 40 Table B 41 Table B 42 Table B 43 Table B 44 Table B 45 Table B 46 Table B 47 Table B 48 Table B 49 Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 Table C 5 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Out Symbols B 31 Ext
237. 2 50 50 0 4 MBUSORX 5 11 MBUS2TX 18 56 21 5 25 A8KHZ2 50 0 50 0 5 MBUSORX 12 MBUS2RX _5 19 A56KHZI 5 50 0 0 6 MBUSITX 5 13 MBUS2RX _ 20 21 50 0 50 7 MBUSITX _ 14 56 70 5 21 A8KHZI 50 50 0 850 0330 03 1 8 MBUSARX 15 A56KHZ3 _ 22 A56KHZ5 04 50 50 250 D 2 MBUS3TX 9 MBUS4RX 16 23 23 A56KHZ5 _ 850 0330 06 50 90 50 50 J21 3 MBUS3TX 10 MBUSSTX 17 ASKHZ3 _5 24 ASKHZ5 _ _50 50 0 50 4 MBUS3RX 11 5 18 A56KHZ4 25 A8BKHZ5 5 50 _50 _50 0 5 MBUS3RX 12 MBUSSRX 19 A56KHZ4 _ _50 50 50 6 MBUS4TX _ 13 55 20 A8KHZ44 50 _50 50 7 MBUS4TX 14 56 73 21 ASKHZA 5 _50 _50 0 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 5 Connectors Table 2 Clock 0 Through A Clock 5 Connectors Continued Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 850 0330 03 1 8 MBUS7RX 15 A56KHZ6 22 A56KHZ8 04 50 50 _50 J15 MBUS6TX _ 9 MBUS7RX 16 26 23 A56KHZ8 _ EF00 50 _50 50 50 rack 1 850 0330 06 3 56 10 MBUSSTX 17 A8KHZ6 _5 24 ASKHZ8 _ 120 250 50 0 50 4 MBUS6RX 11 MBUS8TX 18 A56KHZ7 25 ASKHZS8 5 50 50 _50 0 5 MBUS6RX 12 MBUS8RX 19 A56KHZ7 _ _50 50 50 6 MBUS7TX _50 13 8 50 20 A8KHZ7 _50 7 MBUS7TX _50 14 A56KHZ6 _50 21 A8KHZ7 _50 850 0330 03 04
238. 2 4kg average Life Minimum 20 000 insertion withdrawal cycles Environmental Humidity To 9576 operating an non operating Moisture Resistance Per MIL STD 202F Method 201A Salt Spray Per MIL STD 202F Method 101D Temperature 40 to 149 F 40 to 65 C operating 67 to 185 F 55 to 85 non operating Thermal Shock Per MIL STD 202F Method 107Ds 5 138 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 62 120 Ohms Converter Rear 5 90 o Cole 0000 Rear 120 ohms to 75 ohms converter Figure 5 63 Converter Rear Detail Converter Rear Coax Cable 750 Wire Wrap Cable 1200 l ok 120 to 75 converter rear detail 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 139 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Hardware Acceptance Introduction AN A 5 140 This chapter is intended for installation and test personnel This chapter does not attempt to cover testing of the system software DANGER No commercially AC powered equipment may be used or placed within 7 ft of 48V equipment This may create a shock or current loop that can be severely hazardous to personnel and equipment Hardware operational testing is designed to verify the functionality of the finalized const
239. 20 Install EOAP Shelf on page 6 23 Cable Single Configuration EOAP on page 6 35 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 Dual configuration Packed shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system Install EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 16 Install Cooling Duct on page 6 20 Install EOAP Shelf on page 6 23 Dual Configuration Cabling on page 6 38 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 Single configuration Preinstalled shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system Cable Single Configuration EOAP on page 6 35 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 Dual configuration Preinstalled shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system 2 WAND QI gt QI gt Q Dual Configuration Cabling on page 6 38 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 If You Are Cabling Single to Dual complete the installation in this order For existing single configuration EOAP WN Change Cabling t
240. 20 connector adapter for VT 520 terminal for connection of the terminal to Ports 1A 1B and or 2A 2B e AURORA synchronous loopback plug EAGLE terminal cable 830 0708 XX for connection from the EAGLE STP MMI ports to the EOAP backplane ports 3A 3B and or 4A 4B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Hardware Connections See Figure 6 51 for locations of ports and their destinations Refer to the NSD Installation Manual for EOAP frame connection and installation procedures Figure 6 51 Connection Diagram L1 EAGLE Terminal Session EAGLE STP EOAP Tests Connect the EOAP as shown in Figure 6 51 and power it up before executing any tests Start the first test procedure at the first login prompt displayed by the EOAP 1 The customer is required to have a CLLI NOTE2 The EOAP is frame mounted equipment Utilize the installation and power up procedure outline in the NSD Installation Manual for the proper cabling and fuse assignments 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 81 EOAP Verify Aurora Serial Port Devices This test will verify that the Aurora device drivers are correctly installed Test 1 1 Enter the command to check the Aurora device drivers pkginfo grep AURA Compare your output to the following output Your output should contain the three packages shown here in BOLD tekelec XXX ccsproj 440 pkginfo grep AURA System AURAase Auror
241. 2049 REV XX A 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs CI Clock Interface Card Holdover Clock CI P N 804 0165 01 Figure A 4 Holdover Clock CI Card LEDs DCD N LEDs Descriptions AX FAIL RED This card or its input has failed The card s BLANK No card or input failure detected output is disabled and a minor alarm is generated 51 GREEN 051 source is present BLANK 051 source is not present CC GREEN CC composite clock source is present BLANK CC source is not present FAIL SRC ACTIVE GREEN The card is on line providing a DCD O DS1 reference to ST3 and output cards CC BLANK Card is in standby mode SRC ACTIVE XFR 1 544 REF O GND Cl 40010 01 ISS 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs DCM and DSM Database Communications and Service Module DCM part numbers are 870 1671 04 K6 DCM the original card 870 1945 03 6 required for 200 TPS 870 1984 01 DCMX 6 equivalent primary board DSM primary board plus memory boards part numbers are 870 1984 02 DSM 1G 870 1984 03 DSM 2G 870 1984 04 DSM 3G 870 1984 05 DSM 4G Figure A 5 DCM and DSM LEDs LEDs Descriptions O APPL RED Critical alarm condition TEKELEC PROC detected GREEN No alarm o APPL IMTA RED Major alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm
242. 25 LGND B25 C25 EBI XSP4 D25 EBI XSP5 26 amp IF2 60 B26 C26 EBI XA11 D26 A27 LGND B27 C27 XA12 027 28 amp 60 B28 amp 1 10 60 C28 EBI XA13 028 LGND A29 LGND B29 amp IF19 60 C29 EBI BREQ D29 A30 amp IF4 60 B30 amp IF20 60 C30 EBI BG D30 LGND A31 amp IF5 60 B31 amp IF21 60 C31 EBI XIRQ D31 A32 amp IF6 60 B32 amp IF22 60 C32 EBI HOSISAN D32 LGND A33 amp IF7 60 B33 23 60 C33 EBI GSTSAN D33 A34 amp IF8 60 B34 amp IF25 60 C34 amp IF24 60 D34 LGND A35 amp IF9 60 B35 amp IF18 60 C35 amp IF26 60 D35 E2 LGND UMP to logic ground for slots 2 P16 4 P14 6 P12 8 P10 only 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 21 Connectors ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector Table B 14 Pinouts for ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Control Shelf Backplane bottom connectors P22 P23 and P25 through P32 Figure B 15 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector n 000000000000000000000000000000000008 8OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O0OO0000000000000000 8 2000000000000000000000000000000000008 5 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO00000000000008 com o Table B 14 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Sig
243. 2B 3Amp 1107 1108 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3B 1Amp 1110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 1113 1114 MASP A TDM and MCAP Fuse 5B 3Amp 1117 1118 MDAL Fuse 6B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7B 3Amp 1208 1204 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM 4 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 4 5 Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 8B 3Amp 1207 1208 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM Fuse 9B 1Amp 1210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 1213 1214 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 11B 3Amp 1217 1218 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13B 3Amp 1303 1304 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 14B 3Amp 1307 1308 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 15B 1Amp 1310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 1313 1314 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17B 3Amp 1317 1318 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 18B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19B dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20B dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 00 EF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A refer to Figure 4 17 Fuse 1A 3Amp 2101 2102 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 2A 3Amp 2105
244. 3 11 installing the heavy duty frame a raised floor using overhead racks flat washers and nuts and Cable Rack Mounting Kit P N 804 1571 01 Figure 3 12 installing the heavy duty frame on a raised floor using Unistruts and the Cable Rack Mounting Kit P N 804 1571 01 Refer to Figure 3 10 Raised Floor Installation Elements on page 3 17 Figure 3 11 Raised Floor With Washers and Nuts on page 3 18 and Figure 3 12 Raised Floor Installation With Unistrut on page 3 19 when installing the frames Procedure Anchor Heave Duty Frame on Raised Floor 1 Ifnecessary remove the tiles and finish drilling the anchor holes in the concrete using an 18 mm diameter masonry bit 2 Insert the expansion shields with anchor assembly including the threaded rod into the drilled holes in the concrete floor 3 Tighten anchor assembly locking the expansion shield into the concrete with a flat washer and nut as shown in Figure 3 13 4 Use washers and nuts on the underside of the raised floor Thread the nut on the top of the floor first finger tight Position the hold down plate against the bottom of the floor tile Refer to Figure 3 11 DO NOT Over Tighten when tightening the nuts in the frame above the raised floor This will prevent the floor from warping NOTE Tighten ONLY until the washer and nuts are flush with the bottom of the floor tile DO NOT Over Tighten causing the tile or frame to tilt 5 Two people are nee
245. 3 xx master and composite a time installed clock cables an adapter cable if necessary GPSM Il cards Replace MASP Contact Tekelec Technical Always P N 870 2360 01 GPSMII TDM 10 or Support start with TDM P N 870 0774 10 later as needed standby or later Beginning with MASP EAGLE STP Software Release 31 6 TDM cards must be P N 870 0774 15 to support Global Timing Interface TDM GTI ATM LIM card or E1 T1 Install ATM LIM card Contact Tekelec Technical MIM installed or E1 T1 MIM Support ATM card or E1 T1 Configure ATM LIM Contact Tekelec Technical MIM configured card or E1 T1 MIM Support 5 84 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Termination of Alarm Clock Supply and Terminal Cables of the alarm and clock supply cables are shielded and contain wires with solid conductors They are intended for wire wrap terminations at the customer end The terminal cables have connectors on both ends Termination information for the alarm Building Integrated Timing System BITS and terminal cables is furnished in the Cable Running List in the Equipment Specification for the site NOTE Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling electronic equipment Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identifi
246. 30 0699 xx 1 EOAP to customer network Ethernet cable 830 0710 xx 2 Converters for terminal cables 804 0176 01 4 Terminal cables two each 830 0528 xx 830 0709 xx 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 11 EOAP 6 12 Table 6 3 Installation Equipment Required Continued Check 2 25 modem cables 830 0709 2 Dial up modem cables 830 0709 xx 2 25 modem cables 830 0709 xx Individual components necessary for dual configuration of EOAP Cards and Drives 1 management 870 1524 01 1 CD ROM drive 870 1515 03 1 Hard drive 870 1514 03 1 Power supply card 870 1521 01 1 Processor card 870 1523 01 1 Serial card 870 1522 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Refer to Figure 6 3 for component location in the OAP frame Figure 6 3 EOAP Front Fuse and alarm panel ED EOAP i Hard drive cards aO _ Cooling duct lt Fan switch 19 e Li Fan unit BIN Grill E30 Frame with EOAP Front View NOTE is fused at 10As red providing power to both the EOAP unit and the fan 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 13 EOAP EOAP Fan Assembly Refe
247. 4 must be replaced with frame clock cables P N 830 0398 xx The P N 830 0404 xx frame clock cables have not been in production for several years however some of the older installed bases may have a mix of both frame clock cables due to more resent extension frame installations Also later systems that have not had any hardware changes may have P N 830 0404 xx frame clock cables This procedure describes how to replace frame clock cables in the system First the A frame clock cables will be replaced and then the B frame clock cables are replaced Base on the location of the P N 830 0404 xx clock cables in the system when preforming the replacement procedure CLK cables A and B only the existing P N 830 0404 xx frame clock cables need to be replaced This procedure can be used to replace the A or B frame clock cables in a system regardless of the original part number The procedure could be used if a frame clock cable is identified as defective Pin Protector Assembly P N 830 0880 01 is necessary for this procedure 66 minimum for a six frame system The pin protectors are placed over the ID pins directly to the right and left of the A CLK IN cables connectors 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 91 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 92 Procedure Replacing A Frame Clock Cables This procedure explains the replacement of one A frame clock cable The steps show the replacement of one frame clock cable and are repea
248. 4 14 15 T DRAIN WIRE WIRING DIAGRAM UNTERMINATED This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0901 xx Tone and Announcement Server Alarm Cable Figure C 55 TAS Alarm Cable P N 830 0901 xx TELCO 50 990 090 P1 P2 2 50 MAJOR ALARM 1 T T MINOR ALARM 1 COM 2 WHT SRG MINOR ALARM 2 COM 3 ORG WHT This end of the cable is not MINOR ALARM 3 4 WHT GRN equipped with a connector MINOR ALARM 3 9 GRN WHT in manufacturing MINOR ALARM 1 NC 10 WHT BRN The wires must be cut dressed and MAJOR ALARM NC 26 BRN WHT connected at the site specific location MINOR ALARM 1 27 WHT GRY MINOR ALARM 2 0 28 CRY WHT MINOR ALARM 3 0 29 RED BLU MINOR ALARM 2 C 54 BL RED MAJOR ALARM NO 35 C 8 Teuz NOT USE 5 8 NOT USED 11 25 NOT USED 30 33 NOT USED 36 50 T DRAIN WIRE 2 WIRING DIAGRAM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 63 Cables 830 0917 01 Adapter RJ 45 to 9 Pin Figure C 56 830 0917 01 Adapter RJ 45 to 9 Pin RJ 45 to DB9 ADAPTER P N 830 0917 01 Ld 830 0917 01 REVA S J
249. 4 CARD 1207 GLS Card database is inconsistent 5043 0048I TERMINAL 9 Terminal failed 5044 0048 TERMINAL 10 Terminal failed 5045 0048 TERMINAL 11 Terminal failed 5046 0145 HS Clock A for card failed B normal 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5051 0155 DLK 1101 A STPLAN connection unavailable 5053 0175 SECULOG 1116 LOGBUFROVFL SECULOG upload required 5054 0013I CARD 1202 SS7ANSI Card is isolated from the system 5055 0013 CARD 1203 SS7ANSI Card is isolated from the system 5056 0013 CARD 1204 SS7ANSI Card is isolated from the system 5057 0013 CARD 1206 SS7GX25 Card is isolated from the system 55064 0318I LSN 151201 REPT LKSTO link set prohibited 5065 0318 LSN 151202 REPT LKSTO link set prohibited 5068 0308 C SYSTEM Node isolated due to SLK failures 5069 0331 C SCCP SYSTEM SCCP is not available 5070 0153 C SLAN SYSTEM STPLAN not available Command Completed 7 After you have replaced all B clock cables P N 830 0404 xx with B clock cables P N 830 0398 xx install the fan assembly below the shelves where the temperature control is needed 8 Route the clock cables from the control shelf and up the left side of the control frame Route the cable behind the cable horn and under the cable bracket attached to the top of each frame Run the cable down the right side of each extension frame as shown in Figure 5 35 9 Connect the clock cable to the backplane conne
250. 4 Capacity Threshold 100 CARD CPU TOTAL CLASS 0 CLASS 0 CLASS 1 USAGE MSU RATE TVG RATE LB RATE LB RATE 1217 54 850 770 50 30 1218 31 490 400 40 50 4118 5 80 0 40 40 4211 5 80 0 80 0 AVERAGE USAGE CLASS 0 34 CLASS 0 LIM 6 CLASS 1 LIM 4 AVERAGE MSU USAGE 44 AVERAGE CPU USAGE 24 TOTAL MSUS 1500 TOTAL ERRORS 5 Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 2 Physically inspect the cards in the locations identified in Step 1 and read the labels on the cards to determine the location of ASM cards providing 5 NOTE Step 3 and Step 4 are only necessary for equipped EAGLEs 3 Enter the following command to retrieve the terminal types and port numbers rtrv trm 4 Enter the following command to inhibit each OAP terminal displayed in the output from Step 3 inh trm trm x force yes where x is the terminal number assigned as type OAP 5 Enter the following command to remove the ASM SCCP from service Do not use the force command unless this is the last ASM SCCP card in service SCCP service should be maintained at all times If there are more than one ASM SCCP cards in service enter the following inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the ASM SCCP card location If this is the only ASM SCCP card enter the following inh card loc xxxx force yes where xxxx is the ASM SCCP card location 6 Remove the ASM SCCP card per the card r
251. 5 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 3 When the fans are powered up and running a test must be conducted to ensure proper service Go to the system terminal 4 Check to see if the fan feature is activated At the terminal enter the command gt rtrv feat If the fan feature is off go to Step 5 Otherwise go to Step 6 5 At the terminal enter the command gt chg feat fan on With this command the user will perform the tests beginning with Step 7 6 At the terminal enter the command gt Rept stat trbl Check to see that there are no fan errors Specifically check that there are no 302 Cooling Fan Failure errors Next perform the tests beginning with Step 6 7 Fan Verification perform Step 7 through Step 12 for each fan assembly Move to the rear of the frame and remove the A POWER cable from the FAN unit Result Fan 2 and Fan 3 LEDs will blink as the fans speed up to maximum speed This may take up to 15 seconds Once maximum speed has been reached Fan 2 and Fan 3 LEDs on the Fan Controller card will be solid green Fan 1 LED should be red The controller LED should be blinking green Fan 1 should stop running and the MINOR LED is lit 8 At the system terminal enter the command gt Rept stat trbl This step is repeated for each fan Test each fan to ensure that the alarm and the units are working correctly Result The terminal reports 302 Cooling Fan Normal 9 Replace the A PO
252. 5 Mode DCE DCE Active LSMS main main Main LSMS NSAP Main LSMS SSEL Main LSMS PSEL Shadow LSMS NSAP 198 102 115 105 198 102 115 105 Shadow LSMS SSEL shws shws Shadow LSMS PSEL shws shws 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 198 102 115 125 emss emsp 198 102 115 125 emss emsp 6 141 EOAP 13 For the EOAPs to be updated by the act oap config command the EOAP ports must be in service Return the EOAP ports to service that were inhibited in step 5 Use the rst trm command For this example enter these commands rst trm trm 4 rst trm trm 10 After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 15 08 45 EDT Rel 26 0 0 Allow message sent to terminal 14 Verify that the EOAP ports are returned to service by entering the rept stat trm command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 IS NR Active 2 IS NR Active 3 IS NR Active 4 IS NR Active 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active Jg IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 10 IS NR Active 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 IS NR Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Active 16 IS NR Active Command Completed If the entry IS NR is not shown in the field of the rept stat trm output the EOAP port has not be
253. 50 0330 02 03 04 or P N 850 0330 06 Control shelf 11 1101 A through 1108 A P N 850 0330 06 connectors 45 through J38 1101 B through 1108 B P N 850 0330 06 connectors J59 through J52 1111 A through 1112 A P N 850 0330 06 connectors J37 and J36 1111 B through 1112 B P N 850 0330 06 connectors J51 and J50 Extension shelf 12 1201 A through 1208 A connectors J24 through J17 1201 B through 1208 B connectors J40 through J33 1211 A through 1218 A connectors J16 through J9 1211 B through 1218 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 13 Backplane P N 850 0356 03 1301 A through 1308 A connectors J24 through J17 1301 B through 1308 B connectors J40 through J33 1311 A through 1318 A connectors 16 through J9 1311 B through 1318 B connectors J32 through J25 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 13 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Extension Frame EF 00 Extension shelf 21 2101 A through 2108 A connectors J24 through J17 2101 B through 2108 B connectors J40 through J33 2111 A through 2118 A connectors J16 through J9 2111 B through 2118 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 22 2201 A through 2208 A connectors J24 through J17 2201 B through 2208 B connectors J40 through J33 2211 A through 2218 A connectors J16 through J9 2211 B through 2218 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 23 2301 A through 2308 A connectors J24 through J17 2301 B through 2308 B connectors J40 throug
254. 58 0374 01 Label General Purpose Frame 3 28 P N 658 0604 01 2 10 P N 658 0604 02 2 10 P N 658 0604 03 2 10 P N 690 0108 07 4 15 P N 690 0131 01 4 19 P N 803 0229 01 C 7 P N 804 0165 01 A 7 P N 804 0166 01 A 32 P N 804 0173 01 28 P N 804 0175 01 A 24 P N 804 0219 01 3 16 3 18 3 19 Index 5 P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N P N 804 0228 01 4 19 804 0229 01 window clear heat shrink 4 15 804 0817 02 4 8 4 18 4 19 4 20 804 0977 01 long barrellug 4 15 830 0226 xx 5 83 830 0543 01 5 113 C 20 830 0609 01 C 29 830 0657 xx 6 44 830 0709 xx 6 32 830 0846 01 5 83 830 0873 xx 5 83 840 0017 02 3 33 850 0188 01 A 20 850 0330 03 3 B 4 B 18 850 0330 03 04 B 3 850 0330 05 5 22 B 3 B 4 B 19 850 0330 05 06 B 3 B 19 C 29 850 0356 01 B 25 B 61 850 0356 03 B 26 B 27 B 61 850 0488 xx 6 44 870 0243 08 B 37 870 0259 02 3 33 870 0773 XX A 23 870 0774 10 1 6 870 0774 xx A 29 31 870 1008 xx A 4 870 1009 xx 5 134 9 25 26 870 1010 27 870 1011 5 870 1012 33 870 1013 22 870 1014 6 870 1171 03 20 870 1293 6 870 1307 04 22 870 1379 xx 5 120 6 A 11 12 870 1484 xx A 6 870 1606 01 2 10 5 154 5 155
255. 6 17 18 19 4A 1B 1C 1D 1E 8 11 2 3 The Extension Frame EF accommodates up to three extension shelves each shelf capable of supporting up to 16 Link Interface Module LIMs Application Service Module ASMs Translation Service Module TSMs or Application Communication Module ACMs any combination 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 157 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies The system is delivered with customer specific locations for the Database Communications Module DCM and EDCM cards The entire system can have up to five Extension Frames EF 00 to EF 04 EF 04 supports only one extension shelf Figures 5 66 through 5 70 show the numbering of the card locations on the extension frames Figure 5 66 Extension Frame EF 00 Numbering Plan DIP switch Wire Extension Shelf frame 2 shelf 1 21 identification identification 2 1 Lsp SHELF Card 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 gt 0 eon 4111 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 601 11111111 o 11213145 6 7181411121 31 4 5 61 7 8 6 MSB M 1 GRD 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 0 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F Extension Shelf frame 2 shelf 2 22 identification identification SHELF ID 2200 gt SHELF e Card LSB D e location BIT 00 numbers N IMT addresses 30 39
256. 6 103 Configuring EOAP System Parameters 6 103 BOAP Initial Implementation quita deae 6 104 TRE EO VAS IONIC ueste econtra ede aufs 6 134 Changing the EOAP Configuration sse 6 134 Example of EOAP Configuration Changes 6 134 GRz376 BOND Gta ERR NER ERBEN ER UE Rte 6 149 6 149 GR 376 EOAP Installation 6 154 VI Editor Quick 2 2 enne 6 164 Appendix A LEDs Circuit Card a us 3 Introduction teen er a A 3 ACM Application Communication Module A 4 ASM Application Service Module da esee dete A 5 ATM LIM AINF LIM E1 LIM EILA ILA A 6 CI Clock Interface Card Holdover Clock A 7 DEM and OSM dtt tte eee tutus A 8 DSOA LIM Digital Signal Level 0 LIM eee A 9 E1 ATM Link Interface Module A 10 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table of Contents E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 01 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 02 EDCM Double Slot Enhanced DCM
257. 6 49 terminal configuration displaying rtrv trm 6 120 6 135 Terminal Disk Module TDM 5 81 Termination of Alarm 5 85 test fan operation 6 74 Index 7 Tie wrap 4 16 tinned ground 4 16 TOCA 2 5 5 109 TOLA Card 5 109 tools and equipment EOAP shelf 6 15 6 22 6 60 6 64 6 65 TSM 2 5 B 20 two holelug 4 8 U Unistrut 3 19 Unistrut Overhead 3 24 unit separator bracket 3 26 unpacking 3 4 Update EOAP Method A 6 129 6 144 Method 6 132 6 147 update EOAP configuration 6 129 6 143 Updates 1 16 updating EOAP 6 114 Updating the EOAP 6 117 Upgrade Procedures 1 14 V 35 5 12 Vacuum cleaner 3 20 verification 4 21 Index 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005
258. 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 List of Figures E1 T1 Interface Backplane Connector Diagram 5 129 E1 Interface Backplane Connections 5 130 T1 Interface Backplane Connections 5 131 iade buen 5 134 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable P N 803 0029 01 5 135 Miscellaneous Frame with 120 Ohm Converter 5 136 120 Ohms Converter and Shelf 2 5 137 120 Ohms Converter Front 5 138 120 Ohms Converter Rear 5 139 Converter Rear Detail 5 139 Fuse Holder Locations on 5 156 Control Frame CF 00 Numbering Plan 5 157 Extension Frame EF 00 Numbering Plan 5 158 Extension Frame EF 01 Numbering Plan 5 159 Extension Frame EF 02 Numbering Plan 5 160 Extension Frame EF 03 Numbering Plan 5 161 E
259. 7 REF INPUTA J26 OFFICE ALARMS SHELF STATUS CONTROL CLOCK STATUSA NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO MAJSIPRTA BATTALM ST _ HOLDOVER UNLOCK AUD O O O O O O O O O O O O QO O O O O O O O O MINOR MAJOR CRITICAL MINSI CRTSI CLKL ACO REF LOCK FREERUN INPTOL NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO MAJSIPRTA BATTALM ST RTN HOLDOVER UNLOCK IC VW OG O O O O O O O Q O O QO O O O O O O Q O MINSR CRTSR CLKLRTN ACORTN REFRTN LOCKFREERUN INPTOL Toldover clock T Alarm connections SW1 SW2 SW3 Secondary BITS clock Source input TB12 Secondary BITS clock source input 13 The Fuse and Alarm Panel FAP P N 870 2320 01 connections for the Holdover Clock are shown in Figure 5 43 Figure 5 43 Holdover Clock FAP Connections Upper cable 830 0315 04 Mid cable 830 0315 05 Low cable 830 0315 06 Upper cable 830 0315 04 Mid cable 830 0315 05 Low cable 830 0315 06 48V ALARM INTERFACE 748 EZ uu 9 olaa 48V D 1218 1920 B A 12181920 5 elelele gt RET 121819 20 12181920 LOGIC Chassis SND ground 12181920 12181920 w 870 1606 02 Rearview B side Fuse position Fuse position A side misc misc 91
260. 7 BSERIK 50 D17 LGND A18 BSERIF 50 18 LGND C18 50 D18 LGND A19 LGND B19 BINF C19 LGND D19 BINK A20 BSEROE 50 B20 LGND C20 D20 LGND 21 50 B21 LGND C21 D21 LGND A22 LGND B22 BSELE C22 LGND D22 A23 BSERIE 50 23 LGND C23 D23 LGND A24 50 B24 LGND C24 D24 LGND A25 LGND B25 BINE C25 LGND D25 26 BSEROD 50 B26 LGND C26 BSEROL 50 D26 LGND A27 BSEROD _50 B27 LGND C27 BSEROL _50 D27 LGND A28 LGND B28 BSELD C28 LGND D28 BSELL A29 BSERID 50 B29 LGND C29 BSERIL 50 D29 LGND A30 BSERID _50 B30 LGND BSERIL _50 D30 LGND A31 LGND B31 BIND C31 LGND D31 BINL A32 BSEROC 50 B32 LGND C32 D32 LGND A33 5 _50 B33 LGND C33 D33 LGND A34 LGND B34 BSELC C34 LGND D34 A35 BSERIC 50 35 LGND C35 D35 LGND A36 BSERIC _50 B36 LGND C36 D36 LGND A37 LGND B37 BINC C37 LGND D37 A38 BSEROB 50 B38 LGND C38 D38 LGND A39 50 B39 LGND C39 D39 LGND A40 LGND B40 BSELB C40 LGND D40 41 BSERIB 50 B41 LGND C41 D41 LGND A42 BSERIB _50 42 LGND C42 D42 LGND A43 LGND B43 BINB C43 LGND D43 A44 BSEROA 50 B44 LGND C44 D44 LGND B 44 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 28 Control Shelf HMUX B Backplane Pin Outs Continued Connectors Pin Signal Pin
261. 7 GND GND GND Jb Heo cies 4p P1 P2 850 0710 EOAP GR 376 Router Hub Network 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 39 Cables 830 0711 xx DCM 100 BASE TX Interface Figure C 32 DCM 100 BASE TX Interface P N 830 0711 xx DASH NUMBER LENGTH FEET METERS 850 0711 01 15 4 57 850 0711 02 25 7 62 850 0711 03 35 10 66 850 0711 04 50 15 24 850 0711 05 75 22 86 850 0711 06 100 30 48 850 0711 07 150 45 72 850 0711 08 200 60 96 850 0711 09 250 76 2 850 0711 10 328 99 99 22 9 UNTERMINATED P1 C 8 1 A POS 10 POSTIS This end of the cable is not P1 equipped with a connector in manufacturing DB 26 MALE The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site N 2 specific location TX 23 zT BLU gt d RUN S WHT ORG Rx 6 LORS M gt lt gt lt DRAIN 8 NOT USED 4 21 24 L 26 22 I Llll 2c J C 40 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0723 xx CAT 5 Crossover Cable Figure C 33 CAT 5 Crossover Cable P N 830 0723 xx Cables
262. 7 XX 830 0398 20 830 0398 21 Control Extension Extension Control cable routing 5 102 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies NOTE The clock cable part numbers are the same if the equipment extension frames are placed either to the right or the left of the control frame Table 5 4 Clock Connectors Control Frame Backplane Connectors Cable Part ACLK IN ExtensionFrame Backplane A CLK 850 0330 06 Number Shelf Connections J7 830 0398 21 00 12 Aclk1 J20 830 0398 11 EF 00 21 5 Aclk2 J21 830 0398 13 EF 01 31 5 Aclk3 65 830 0398 14 EF 02 41 Aclk4 64 830 0398 04 03 51 Aclk5 J72 830 0398 19 EF 04 61 5 Table 5 5 B Clock Connectors Control Frame Backplane Connectors Cable Part B CLK IN Extension Frame Backplane B CLK 850 0330 06 Number Shelf Connections 3 830 0398 21 CF 00 12 J41 Bclk1 J18 830 0398 11 EF 00 21 J41 Bclk2 J16 830 0398 13 EF 01 31 J41 63 830 0398 14 EF 02 41 J41 4 62 830 0398 04 03 51 J41 5 70 830 0398 19 EF 04 61 J41 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 103 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 36 Clock Cable Routing Alarm clock Alarm cable only on bracket must be laced with lacing cord tie wrap cannot be
263. 7 on page 5 145 6 Check that LEDs of the applicable cards are on 7 Pullthe fuse 8 Check that the LEDs of the cards in the specified locations are not illuminated 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 143 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Frame Fuse Assignments The fuse assignments for the Control Frame CF 00 and five Extension Frames EF 00 through EF 04 are shown in the following table See Table 5 17 on page 5 145 Control frame A Side Control frame B Side Extension Frame 00 A Side Extension Frame 00 B Side Extension Frame 01 A Side Extension Frame 01 B Side Extension Frame 02 A Side Extension Frame 02 B Side Extension Frame 03 A Side Extension Frame 03 B Side Extension Frame 04 A Side Extension Frame 04 B Side Table 5 16 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm Flags Fuse Amp Fuse Flag Color Fuse Amp Fuse Flag Color 0 18A Orange Red 2A Orange 0 2A Black Red 2 5A White Orange 0 25A Violet 3A Blue 0 33A Yellow Green 3 5A White Blue 0 375A White Green 4A White Brown 0 5A Red 5A Green 0 65A Black 7 5A Black White 0 75A Brown 10A Red White 1A Gray 12A Yellow Green 1 33A White 15A Red Blue 1 5A White Yellow 5 144 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 lists fuse and card locations
264. 777 OE w J40 J54 BORTGA PORTSB z V 2267 eos Forres LN 939 Wy 1 amp 7 PORT7B gt gt g 3 0257 88 Vus VERMES le 138 J52 8 PORT8B E _________ J51 ie 2 PORT 118 136 450 PORT 12 PORT 128 ROW ALM 133 u 1 2 15 RMC LMC V J61 7 168 m SECONDARY __ RALM1 RALM4 M5 5 TE B 7 l 532 Ve 7 TEF J67 PRIMARY RALM2 RALM3 RALM6 RALM7 m wo Ves fe og 482 E fs X38 81 E 08 Mum g 58 480 ws 508 1 379 Z 05 2 L 78 EGS WB 55 g82 oo J76 OAPALM Warning Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT Metal points on printed circuit boards conducts 48VDC and can cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 ASSY 850 0330 06 CONTROL SHELF BACKPLANE 850 0330 06 j48 49 BOTTOM 5 105 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 106 2 Route the cables up the left side of the control frame viewed from the rear over to the miscellaneous frame containing th
265. 8 132 064 001 Config dual dual SEAC CLLI RLGHNCXB14Y RLGHNCXB14Y X25 Packet Size 8 8 X25 Mode DTE DTE Active LSMS main main Main LSMS NSAP 198 102 115 125 198 102 115 125 Main LSMS SSEL emss emss Main LSMS PSEL emsp emsp Shadow LSMS NSAP Not configured Not configured Shadow LSMS SSEL Not configured Not configured Shadow LSMS PSEL Not configured Not configured 15 For the EOAPs to be updated by the act oap config command the 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP ports must be in service Return the EOAP ports to service that were inhibited in step 5 Use the rst trm command For this example enter these commands rst trm trm 4 rst trm trm 10 After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 15 08 45 EDT Rel 26 0 0 Allow message sent to terminal 6 127 EOAP 6 128 16 Verify that the EOAP ports are returned to service by entering the 17 rept stat trm command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 IS NR Active 2 IS NR Active 3 IS NR Active 4 IS NR Active 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active 5 IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 10 IS NR Active 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 IS NR Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Activ
266. 8 D18 A19 LGND B19 5 50 C19 LGND D19 A20 B20 MBUSSRX 50 C20 D20 LGND A21 LGND B21 MBUSSTX 50 21 MA56KHZ _50 D21 A22 B22 MBUSSTX 50 C22 MA56KHZ 50 D22 LGND A23 LGND B23 C23 MA8KHZ _50 D23 A24 60 B24 C24 MA8KHZ 50 D24 LGND A25 LGND B25 C25 XSP4 D25 EBI XSP5 A26 amp IF2 60 B26 C26 EBI 11 D26 A27 LGND B27 C27 EBI XA12 D27 28 amp IF3 60 B28 amp IF10 60 C28 EBI XA13 D28 LGND A29 LGND B29 amp IF19 60 C29 EBI_ABREQ D29 A30 amp IF4_60 B30 amp IF20_60 C30 EBI BG D30 LGND A31 amp IF5 60 B31 amp IF21 60 C31 EBI XIRO D31 A32 amp IF6 60 B32 amp IF22 60 C32 032 LGND A33 amp IF7 60 B33 amp IF23 60 C33 EBI GSTSAN D33 A34 amp IF8 60 B34 amp IF25 60 C34 amp IF24 60 D34 LGND A35 amp IF9 60 B35 amp IF18 60 C35 amp IF26 60 D35 E2 LGND Connection to logic ground for slots 2 P16 4 P14 6 P12 8 P10 only 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 29 Connectors Table B 17 lists Pinouts for ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Extension Shelf Backplane Bottom Connectors P18 through P25 and P27 through P34 Figure B 20 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector 0 8 O00000000000000000000000000000000008 8OOO0O000000000000000000000000000000008 000000000000000000000000000000000008 000000000000000000000000000000000008 4
267. 830 0605 xx C 28 E 1 Cable P N 830 0622 xx 2 C 30 Cable Assembly BNC to BCN P N 830 0624 xx C 31 Cable BNC Open End P N 830 0625 xx C 32 Filter Rack Alarm Cable P N 830 0638 xx C 33 48 Power Cable P N 830 0651 01 C 34 Fifty Position Hard Drive I O P N 830 0656 01 C 35 Man Machine Interface Port Cable P N 830 0708 01 C 37 Modem Terminal Cable P N 830 0709 C 38 Network Cable P N 830 0710 xx C 39 DCM 100 BASE TX Interface P N 830 0711 xx C 40 CAT 5 Crossover Cable P N 830 0723 xx 22222242 41 CAT 5 Straight Through P N 830 0724 22022222221 C 42 Null Modem Cable P N 830 0759 xx C 43 Loop Back Cable Adapter P N 830 0763 01 C 44 Multi Port DSO P N 830 0772 xx C 45 Straight Through P N 830 0788 C 46 Patch Panel Crossover Cable P N 830 0789 xx 47 Multi Port Power Cable P N 830 0814 xx C 48 HS Master Timing Adapter P N 830 0846 01 C 49 051 Cable P N 830 0849 C 50 Null MODEM for Terminal P N 830 0859 01 C 51 Power Cable to Breaker Strip P N 830
268. 9 9 e 9 gt p 9 R1 A i CLR 5 c OU 2 ko qo ol IO I I lg I I 5 I 1 122 18861 I 188 ENS rafi p4 I pal p4 P5 Ipe P9 Pio P142 Ipi3l P14 2151 IP 1 7 I I I Av I I I 1 IMT I I pe I OUT 1 Port 1 Port Port iPorti Port Porti Port Port Pot Port 16 15A 14A BA 12A HA 104 9A 8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A J71 J8 c c 225 lt Lm x x x x x N N N N N o a O IPMXA N N em Came 1 c e 5 N N m ES 5 R o x Port Port Per Pot 1 Pot Port Port 16B 15B 748 138 12B 118 0B 9B 88 78 6B 58 4B 3B 2B 1 I I I IB ELK IN N I 1481 P49 201 P21 221 231 241 p25 P26 p27 P281 P29 30 P311 P32 P33 p34 R4 l 043 44 I I pod 5 o o I o I I I 51 L L L 10 0 10 01 10 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 4 m 5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 IMT IMT Zo IN mmm IPMXB 10 850 0356 03 Warning Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT Metal poi
269. A Server C 62 830 0901 xx Tone and Announcement Server Alarm Cable 63 830 0917 01 Adapter RJ 45 to 9 Pin 64 930 0992 01 E1 T1 MIM 22 AWG cierre ror mr naa 65 830 0948 01 E1 T1 MIM LIM 4 Port 24 66 830 0949 01 E1 T1 MIM LIM to MPL C 67 850 0496 01 Force Transition Card eene 68 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 3 Cables Labeling This section provides general labeling instructions for cables Cable Labeling Before installing any cable use this procedure to label the cables to ensure connection to the proper ports and ease of future maintenance Tools e Installer s Cable Running List cables listed in Installer s Cable Running List non Tekelec cables e Cable labels including blank labels for non Tekelec cables Fine point marker Procedure Mark and Label Cables 1 Locate the Installer s Cable Running List in the Equipment Specification for the site Refer to Figure 0 1 for an example Figure 0 1 Installer s Cable Running List Example Item number Cable type FROM TO column column column columns INSTALLER S CABLE RUNNING LIST CABLE TYPE ckr FEET or PART NO FROM FRAME LOCATION BEES ITERM LINK INTERCONNCTS CONTROL FRAME CF 00 EXTENSION SHELF SH2
270. ANA POWER IN B POWER IN A _ 52469 y y BCLKIN A JBCLKOUT A T Ponr 1 port 28 PORT PORT 2 e Y R FAN PWR B PWR B ORT POETA q 830 0609 01 To Fan Tray d OAP RST B LKIN B BCLKOUT B Power lo O 00000000000 O O O O O O DO O O 0 0 0 0 g E E a 830 0609 01 To Fan Tray B Power 2 Plug the other end of the first fan cable fan power cable onto the FAN A PWR connector on the back of the fan assembly Refer to Figure 6 22 for connector location Tighten the connectors 3 Take the second fan cable and plug one end onto the backplane connector marked FAN B PWR B located at the bottom center of the EOAP backplane Refer to Figure 6 22 for connector location 4 Plug the other end of the second fan B fan power cable cable onto the FAN B PWR connector on the back of the fan assembly Refer to Figure 6 22 for connector location Tighten the connectors You have now connected both fan cables P N 830 0609 xx to the EOAP and fan assembly Finish these cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Install Clock In Out Cable EOAP Use the EOAP clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx to connect ports BCLKOUT A and BCLKIN B on the EOAP shelf backplane This cable provides the syst
271. B Greece 804 1185 01 220 230 50 Hong Kong 804 1185 03 200 50 D G Hungary 804 1185 01 220 50 A Iceland 804 1185 01 220 50 B India 804 1185 06 220 250 50 G Ireland 804 1185 03 220 50 Israel 804 1185 12 230 50 B H Italy 804 1185 07 220 230 50 B I Ivory Coast 804 1185 01 220 50 B Japan 804 1185 10 100 50 and 60 LM D 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Power Cords to Peripherals Country Part Number Voltage Frequency Plug Pattern Latvia 804 1185 01 220 50 A B Liechtenstein 804 1185 11 220 50 L Lithuania 804 1185 01 220 50 Luxembourg 804 1185 01 220 230 50 A B Malaysia 804 1185 03 240 50 Malta 804 1185 03 240 50 Mexico Cord provided 127 60 K N Monaco 804 1185 01 220 50 Netherlands 804 1185 01 220 230 50 A B New Zealand 804 1185 02 230 50 C Norway 804 1185 01 220 230 50 Peru 804 1185 01 110 120 50 60 B Philippines Cord provided 115 60 K N Poland 804 1185 01 220 50 Portugal 804 1185 01 220 230 50 A B G Romania 804 1185 01 220 50 A B Russia 804 1185 01 220 50 A Saudi Arabia Cord provided 127 220 50 60 A F K Singapore 804 1185 03 230 50 D G Slovakia 804 1185 01 220 50 B F South Africa 804 1185 06 220 250 50 G South Korea 804 1185 01 220 60 Spain 804 1185 01 220 230 50 B F Sweden 804 1185 01 220 230 50 A B Switzerland 804 1185 11 220 230 50 L Taiwan Cord p
272. B H 6 11 top P7 8A 8 4A D 8A 8 11 bottom P23 8B 8 4A 8B I 8 12 top P6 9A 9 4A C 9A 8 12 bottom P22 9B 9 4A 9B J 8 B 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Extension Backplane P N 850 0356 01 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 01 Figure B 16 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 01 B power A power primary B fan power o A fan power primary e poto o o D o o o Q5 O O e e O o CLK 5 clki IOUT J5 R2 J6 5 l 1 nar P1 P3 P4 P5 Pe P7 P8 P9 45 I IMTI IMT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORTOUT INPORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT 16A 15A 14 13A 12A 10 9A a 8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17 J18 J19 J20 J21 J22 J23 J24 Q Q Q 7 J8 O 9 Q LO IPMX A Q Q PORT PORT PORT PORT PO
273. BUSRX SH3MBUSTX SHSMBUSTX FAN SH3MBUSRX SH3MBUSRX NC NC NC NC SH2_56KHZ SH2_56KHZ SH2_8KHZ SH2_8KHZ SH3_56KHZ SH3_56KHZ SH3_8KHZ SH3_8KHZ Eagle Release 30 0 ML Mn Cable P N 830 0404 xx 830 0404 01 See Figure 5 32 on page 5 90 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 lt co Lr I RS X X RX X X X FAN RX Se C 0 0 CO CD RX SH 56KHZ SH 56KHZ SH 8KHZ SH 8KHZ SH3 56KHZ SH3 56KHZ SH3 8KHZ SH3 8KHZ 5 89 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 32 Cable P N 830 0398 xx Cable P N 830 0404 xx will not support HMUX and must be replaced by Cable P N 830 0398 xx for Eagle Release 30 0 PART NUMBER LENGTH L INCH PART NUMBER LENGTH L INCH 830 0398 01 96 0 830 0398 11 132 0 830 0398 02 144 0 830 0398 12 164 0 830 0398 03 192 0 830 0398 13 176 0 850 0398 04 2400 830 0398 14 208 0 830 0398 05 288 0 850 0398 15 224 0 830 0398 06 360 0 830 0398 16 232 0 830 0398 07 18 0 830 0398 17 252 0 830 0398 08 48 0 850
274. C 1114 Standby CARD LOC 1116 Active PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Idle SECONDARY BITS Idle HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS SECONDARY CLK Idle HS SECONDARY CLK Idle PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 93 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 15 16 17 18 19 5 94 Cards using CLK A 7 Cards with bad CLK A 000 Cards using CLK B 0 Cards with bad CLK B 000 Cards using CLK I 0 Command Completed PST SST AST HS SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards with bad HS CLK A Cards with bad HS CLK Cards using HS CLK A Cards using HS CLK Cards using HS CLK I o lo e Command Completed Verify that both BITS clocks are either in IDLE or ACTIVE state on both ACTIVE and STANDBY MASP underlined cards with bad CLK values should equal zero If any other A frame clock cables need to be replaced in the system repeat steps 5 through 14 After all the A frame clock cables in the system are replaced secure the cables with tie wraps or lacing cord according to specifications If any B frame clock cables need to be replaced move to the next Procedure Replacing B Frame Clock Cables in this document If no other frame clock cables are to be replaced and if the pin protectors are needed remove the ID pin protectors If no other frame clock cables
275. CLEI code IMT Bus A RED LIM OCU is off IMT bus A AMBER LIM OCU is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN LIM OCU is on IMT bus A BLANK Communication processor is not operating 0123456789 0123456789 Status IMT B IMT Bus B RED LIM OCU is off IMT bus B AMBER LIM OCU is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN LIM OCU is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating Status PORTA Port A RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service Status PORTB Port B RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service Revision number Part number X gt 5 o o 5 LIM OCU 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 A 27 LEDs ST3 Stratum 3 Clock Card Holdover Clock ST3 P N 804 0173 01 Figure A 25 Holdover Clock ST3 Card LEDs LEDs Descriptions FAIL RED This card has failed BLANK No card failure detected LOCK RED Input has failed BLANK No input failure detected REF GREEN Card is tracking the output of clock input card A BLANK Not tracking output of clock input card A REF GREEN Card is tracking the output of clock input card B BLANK Not tracking output of clock input card B NOTE If the FAIL and LOCK LEDs are both illuminated the ST3 is in holdover mode and the card has not failed
276. CM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 5B 3Amp 2117 2118 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B 3Amp 2203 2204 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 8B 3Amp 2207 2208 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 9B 1Amp 2210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 2213 2214 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11B 3Amp 2217 2218 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 12B dummy fuse Fuse 13B 3Amp 2303 2304 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM DCM or EDCM Fuse 14B 3Amp 2307 2308 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or EDCM Fuse 15B 1Amp 2310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 2313 2314 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 17B 3Amp 2317 2318 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse Extension Frame 01 EF 01 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 67 Fuse 1A 3Amp 3101 3102 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 2A 3Amp 3105 3106 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3A 1Amp 3109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 3111 3112 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 147 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse
277. CM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 2B 3Amp 2107 2108 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 3B 1Amp 2110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 2113 2114 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 5B 3Amp 2117 2118 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 6B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7B 3Amp 2203 2204 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 8B 3Amp 2207 2208 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 9B 1Amp 2210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 2213 2214 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 11B 3Amp 2217 2218 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 12B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13B 3Amp 2303 2304 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 14B 3Amp 2307 2308 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM II Fuse 15B 1Amp 2310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 2313 2314 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17B 3Amp 2317 2318 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 18B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19B dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20B dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 01 EF 01 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A refer to Figure 4 18 Fuse 1A 3Amp 3101 3102 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 2A 3Amp 3105 3106 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM
278. Card Location Type Fuse 3B dummy fuse Fuse 4B dummy fuse Fuse 5B dummy fuse Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B dummy fuse Fuse 8B dummy fuse Fuse 9B dummy fuse Fuse 10B dummy fuse Fuse 11B dummy fuse Fuse 12B dummy fuse Fuse 13B dummy fuse Fuse 14B dummy fuse Fuse 15B dummy fuse Fuse 16B dummy fuse Fuse 17B dummy fuse Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B 10 A EOAP A B power FAP P N 870 2320 01 Fuse 20B 10 A B power P N 870 2320 01 Figure 4 15 shows the location of the fuse holders on FAP P N 870 2320 01 for heavy duty frames Figure 4 15 Fuse Holder Locations on FAPs Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 Screw Fuse holders Fuse holders Screw N IILI TEKELEC 4 34 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Card Locations in Control and Extension Shelves Figures 4 16 through 4 21 show the card locations in Control and Extension shelves Figure 4 16 shows the numbering of the shelves with the shelf identification DIP switch settings and backplane wiring and card locations on the Control Frame CF and Extension Frame EF Figure 4 16 Control Frame CF 00 Numbering Plan Control Shelf frame 1
279. D MPL is off IMT bus B Port A2 AMBER MPL is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete PORT A3 GREEN MPL is on IMT bus B Q PORT B BLANK Communication processor is not operating 2 PORTA RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition serial number PORT A1 RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align CLEI GREEN Link is aligned and in service code RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition PORT A2 RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition T RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition PORTB RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition PORT B1 RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is alig
280. D30 LGND A31 LGND B31 AINA C31 LGND D31 AINI A32 B32 LGND C32 ASEROJ 50 D32 LGND A33 B33 LGND 50 D33 LGND A34 LGND B34 C34 LGND D34 ASELJ A35 B35 LGND C35 ASERIJ 50 D35 LGND A36 B36 LGND C36 ASERIJ _50 D36 LGND A37 LGND B37 C37 LGND D37 AINJ A38 B38 LGND C38 ASEROK 50 D38 LGND A39 B39 LGND C39 ASEROK _50 D39 LGND A40 LGND B40 C40 LGND D40 ASELK 41 41 LGND C41 ASERIK 50 D41 LGND A42 B42 LGND C42 50 D42 LGND A43 LGND B43 C43 LGND D43 AINK A44 B44 LGND C44 ASEROL 50 D44 LGND A45 B45 LGND C45 ASEROL 50 045 LGND A46 LGND B46 C46 LGND D46 ASELL A47 B47 LGND C47 ASERIL 50 D47 LGND 48 B48 LGND C48 ASERIL 50 D48 LGND A49 LGND B49 C49 LGND D49 AINL A50 AIMTIN _78 B50 LGND C50 AIMTOUT _78 D50 LGND B 42 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Table B 27 Control Shelf HMUX A Backplane Pin Outs Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A51 AIMTIN _78 B51 LGND C51 AIMTOUT 78 D51 LGND A52 LGND B52 LGND C52 LGND D52 LGND A53 B53 MBUSSRX 50 53 MBUSSRX 50 D53 A54 54 MBUSSTX _50 54 MBUSSTX 50 054 LGND 55 CHASSIS GND B55 CHASSIS C55 CHASSIS GND 055 CHASSIS GND E2 P3A48RTN Control Shelf HMUX B Backplane P24 Figure B 30 Control Shelf HMUX B Pin Outs
281. DCM Fuse 18A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19A dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20A dummy fuse OPEN Extension Frame 03 EF 03 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B refer to Figure 4 20 Fuse 1B 3Amp 5103 5104 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 2B 3Amp 5107 5108 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3B 1Amp 5110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 5113 5114 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 5B 3Amp 5117 5118 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 6B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7B 3Amp 5203 5204 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 8B 3Amp 5207 5208 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 9B 1Amp 5210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 5213 5214 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 11B 3Amp 5217 5218 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13B 3Amp 5303 5304 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 14B 3Amp 5307 5308 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 15B 1Amp 5310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 5313 5314 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 17B 3Amp 5317 5318 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII 4 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations
282. ED TX RNG 4 1 0 OR REP 4 IX RING 4 TX TIP 4 2 r lt 2 lt 3 TX TIP 4 RX RINC 4 3 2 RX RING 4 Rie Tie 4 REBZDRS gt C lt RED ORG 4 RX TIP 4 BLU RED BLU RED TX RING 3 9 9 TX RINC 3 Tx Tip 3 7 RED BLU p gt lt RED BLU 7 TX TIP 3 RX RING 3 6 Fete LL C 6 RX RING 3 RX TIP 3 5 5 RX TIP 3 Ps 10 10 NOT USED USED 17 17 19 19 TX RING 2 24 24 TX RING 2 sei m CH SO B RX RING 2 26 26 RX RINC 2 Rx Tip 2 18 WHIZGRN WHI GRN 18 Rx TIP 2 ORN WHT ORN WHT TX RING 1 20 20 TX RING 1 TX TIP 1 21 E S 21 1 RX RiNc 1 22 BL 22 RX RING 1 RX TIP 1 23 ET BLU WHT BLU 23 RX TIP 1 Y Y L DRAIN 4 J WIRING DIAGRAM 830 0895 01 This Cable adapter has been replaced by P N 830 0949 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 61 Cables 830 0900 xx Alarm NETRA Server Cable Figure C 54 Alarm NETRA Server Cable P N 830 0900 xx DB 1 SYSTEM NO SYSTEM NC SYSTEM ALARM 1 NO ALARM1_NC ALARM1_COM ALARM2_NO ALARM2_NC ALARM2_COM NOT USED C 62 P2 PF LENGTH 1 850 0900 XX D 5 MALE P2 n WHT BLU a BLU WH 6 WHT ORG 7 ORG WHT WHT GRN 8 x GRN WHT 9 WHT BRN ds BRN WHT WHT GRY xl GRY WHT je RED BLU BLU RED _ 2 3
283. EOAP Cards and Drives on page 6 65 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 1 2 3 Change Cabling to Dual Configuration on page 6 69 4 5 Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 59 EOAP Figure 6 35 Dual EOAP Overview EOAP A hard drive CD ROM Processor card Serial I O card Power supply Embedded Operations Support System Application EOAP B hard drive CD ROM Cooling duct e Processor card Serial I O card Power supply Fan Assembly eight fans located below EOAP Remove Filler Cards and Drive Slot Covers from EOAP B Table 6 12 Tools and Equipment EOAP Cards and Drives Check Tools and Equipment Small Phillips head screwdriver Flashlight to view back panel interior Procedure Remove Filler Cards and Hard Drive Slot Covers 1 Locate EOAP B on the right side of the EOAP shelf Refer to Figure 6 36 2 Identify slots for processor card slots 1 and 2 serial card slot 3 and power supply card slots 7 and 8 Slots 1 to 8 are initially occupied by air management cards filler cards Do not remove the air management cards in slots 4 5 and 6 Also locate the drive bays for the hard drive bay 3 and CD ROM drive bay 4 Drive bays 3 and 4 are covered by faceplates Remove the necessary filler cards and face plates next 6 60 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Figure 6 36 Dua
284. ES NO YES YES YES 16 NO NO NO NO YES NO YES 6 120 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 Verify the status of the EOAP ports displayed in step 3 An out of service EOAP port is shown by the entry oos MT DSBLD in the field This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 IS NR Active 2 IS NR Active 3 IS NR Active 4 IS NR Active 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active 7 IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 10 IS NR Active 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 IS NR Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Active 16 IS NR Active Command Completed If either EOAP terminal is not out of service go to step 5 If both EOAP terminals are out of service go to step 7 5 Take the terminal out of service using the rmv trm command and specifying the ports Enter these commands rmv trm trm 4 rmv trm trm 10 After successful completion of each command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Inhibit message sent to terminal rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Command Completed 6 Verify that the terminal that was placed out of service in step 5 is in the OOS MT DSBLD state by entering the rept stat trm command This is an example of the possible output 910 4601 01 Revision D M
285. Frame 2 4 15 Connect Logic Ground to System Ground Bar 2 2 4 16 Finish Backplane Cables terre e 6 53 Ground Frame en ete e e e nere ette te 4 14 INCIP ntn hene 5 7 Inspect Eagle STP and SG System After Installation 2 12 Install and Retrofitting Fans tte torpedo 5 54 Install and Retrofitting Fans oos odd 5 68 Install B Clock Cable eire roh c e tts 5 99 Install BITS Clock Source Cable 5 115 Install Brackets With Stud essere 3 26 Install Clock Connection Cable 6 44 Install Clock In Out Cable a 6 43 Install Cooling DUCE a n ater Aie te e ge 6 20 Install E1 T1 Cables muu EA a nnne 5 128 Install EOAP Asynchronous Modem Cables 6 51 Install EOAP Cards and Drives eese 6 65 Install EOAP Fan Assembly tipico tren ien Ge pt 6 16 Install EOAP MMI X Cables 2 2 2 00200 00000000 0000000000000000000000000000000 6 52 Install BOAP Shelton ume Pea hee Rec 6 23 Install EOAP Terminal Cables 6 48 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005
286. Fuse 10A 3Amp 4211 4212 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 11A 3Amp 4215 4216 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A 3Amp 4301 4302 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14A 3Amp 4305 4306 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 15A 1Amp 4309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 4311 4312 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 17A 3Amp 4315 4316 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse Extension Frame 02 EF 02 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B see Figure 5 68 Fuse 1B 3Amp 4103 4104 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 149 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 2B 3Amp 4107 4108 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3B 1Amp 4110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 4113 4114 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 5B 3Amp 4117 4118 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B 3Amp 4203 4204 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 8B 3Amp 4207 4208 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 9B 1Amp 4210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 4213 4214 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 11B 3Amp Fuse 12B dummy
287. GLS 1 Enter the following command to identify how many ASM GLS cards presently configured for this application rept stat card The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 98 02 04 12 57 21 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 CARD VERSION TYPE APPL PST SST AST 1101 024 001 000 ASM GLS IS NR Active 1113 024 102 000 MASP OAM IS NR Active 1114 TDM IS NR Active 1115 MASP OAM OOS MT Isolated 1116 TDM OOT MT Isolated 1117 MDAL IS NR Active 1201 024 102 000 LIMOCU CCS7ITU IS NR Active 1202 024 001 000 LIMDSO 57 IS NR Active M BIP ERR 1203 024 001 000 LIMDSO 557 5 IS NR Active 1205 024 001 000 LIMDSO 57 IS NR Active M BIP ERR 1207 024 001 000 LIMATM ATMANSI IS NR Active 1211 024 001 000 LIMATM ATMANSI IS NR Active ALMINH 1212 024 001 000 ASM GLS IS NR Active ALMINH Command Completed 2 Physically inspect the cards in the locations identified in Step 1 and read the labels on the cards to verify the location of ASM GLS cards 3 Enter the following command to remove an ASM GLS card from service Do not use the force command unless this is the last ASM GLS card in service GLS service should be maintained at all times If there is more than one ASM GLS card in service enter the following inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the ASM GLS card loca
288. GRY WHT GRY WHT WHT GRY WHT GRY BRN WHT BRN WHT WHT BRN WHT BRN GRN WHT GRN WHT WHT GRN WHT GRN ORN WHT ORN WHT WHT ORG WHT ORG BLU WHT BLU WHT WHT BLU WHT BLU DRAIN t P2 This end of the cable is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing The wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location C 55 Cables 830 0908 xx Power Ring Table C 16 Power Cable P N 830 0908 xx Part Length Length cn an Number inches meters Label A Usage Label A Usage 830 0908 01 42 0 12 80 To switch 1 A from BP1 2A BP1 2A from switch 1 A 830 0908 02 44 0 13 41 To switch 1 B from BP1 2B To BP2 2B from switch 1 B 830 0908 03 43 0 13 10 To switch 2 A from BP1 2A To 2 2 from switch 2 A 830 0908 04 46 0 14 02 switch 2 B from BP1 2B To BP1 2B from switch 1 B Figure C 48 Power Ring P N 830 0908 xx P 1 RING TERMIALS P2 1 50 1 62 STRIPPED AND TINNED 4 5 25 25 2X BN 1 50 _ T LENGTH 1 2 00 P 3 50 12 C 56 830 0908 rev A dwg 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0857 01 Adapter Cable HMUX Figure C 49 Adapter Cable HMUX P N 830 0857 01
289. HZ4 5 0 7 R2FANCTR 14 B56KHZ3 21 BBKHZ4 _50 L _50 850 0330 03 1 1 8 15 B56KHZ6 5 22 B56KHZ8 _ 04 13 0 50 EE 2 9 16 B8KHZ6 _5 23 B56KHZ8 5 rack 1 0 0 850 0330 06 J18 3 10 17 B8KHZ6 50 24 8 78 _5 0 4 11 18 B56KHZ7 _ 25 B8KHZS8 50 50 5 12 19 56 77 _5 0 6 13 RIFBALM 20 BBKHZ7 _5 0 7 RIFANCTR 14 B56KHZ6 21 BBKHZ7 _50 L 50 850 0330 03 not currently supported 04 J54 J55 Je2 850 0330 06 not currently supported J62 63 J70 B 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors BITS Clock JA1 42 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J48 J49 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 3 BITS Clock Connector OOO OO o gt Table B 4 BITS Clock Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 BITSIN 60 5 BITSIN _60 13 6 7 8 14 15 P for primary BITS clock J42 S for secondary BITS clock J41 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 9 Connectors Clock A In Out Clock A In Connector J9 J10 J59 J60 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Figure B 4 Clock A In Connector on Backplane 20 000000900 6 69 amp 9 69 69 7 9 69 9 Table B 5 Clock A In Connector on Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 14 MA56KHZ _50 2 MBUSSTX _50 15 MA56KHZ _50 3
290. IG GND B55 5 100 C55 DCD11 D55 DCD15 B 74 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables Cables by Part Numbers De vete tese C 4 ka C 6 803 0029 01 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable Pete C 7 804 0176 0T Conv erter iiir ERE Feet o e Ee C 7 830 0224 Drive Power Cable C 8 830 0231 xx Local Maintenance Center Cable C 9 830 0232 Row Alarm Cable ete reete tr C 10 830 0233 xx Remote Maintenance Center Cable C 11 830 0257 xx Hazard Ground C 12 830 0315 xx Power Fen ed C 13 830 0366 xx Interface Cable C 14 930 0398 x B Clock Cable a npe C 15 830 0404 xx B Clock Cable sie fero RO t pur C 16 830 0421 xx CD ROM Cable a ra aU AS C 17 830 0425 01 Adapter 15 Pin to 26 C 18 830 0435 xx External Alarm Cable Custom C 19 830 0543 xx Alarm Holdover Clock Cable C 20 3830 0527 XX RS23 2 aedi eidem C 21 850 0514 01 Serial I O Transition Card eerte ten
291. IMDSO ASM LIMATM CCS7ITU G Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 5 LS IS NR IS NR IS NR IS NR Active Active Active Active M BIP ERR NOTE The new TSM cards will still be listed as ASM type in the output 12 Enter the following command to return the OAP terminals to the in service state alw trm trm x where x is the terminal number of the inhibited OAP terminal 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 35 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Terminal Disk Module TDM Upgrade Description This procedure upgrades a Terminal Disk Module TDM with the TDM 15 TDM GTI This procedure should be performed for all TDM cards in the system NOTE Beginning with EAGLE Release 31 6 the optional TDM cards must be P N 870 0774 15 to support Global Timing Interface TDM GTI The TDM contains the fixed disk drive the terminal processor for the 16 serial I O ports and an interface to the maintenance disk and alarm MDAL card Procedure Upgrade TDM 1 Before beginning this procedure make sure there is a copy of the current release GPLs on a removable cartridge on hand 2 Insert the removable cartridge with the current release GPLs into the MDAL Create a backup of the database on the removable cartridge see Backup the Database Daily in the Maintenance Manual for procedures 3 Enter the following command to display the card
292. IMRD 1 YES YES NO YES YES 2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 3 YES YES YES NO YES YES YES 4 NO NO NO NO NO NO YES 5 NO YES NO NO NO NO YES 6 NO NO YES NO NO NO NO 7 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 8 NO NO NO NO YES NO YES 9 NO YES NO NO NO YES NO 10 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 11 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 12 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 13 NO YES NO NO NO NO YES 14 NO NO YES NO NO NO NO 15 YES YES YES NO YES YES YES 16 NO NO NO NO YES NO YES 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 135 EOAP 6 136 2 Verify the status of the EOAP terminal s to be inhibited For a dual configuration EOAP both terminals must be out of service This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 IS NR Active 2 IS NR Active 3 IS NR Active 4 IS NR Active 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active 7 IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 10 IS NR Active 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 IS NR Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Active 16 IS NR Active Command Completed If the EOAP terminal is not out of service go to step 3 If the EOAP terminal is out of service go to step 5 Take the terminal out of service using the rmv trm command and specifying the ports Enter these commands rmv trm trm 4 rmv trm trm 10 After successful completion of each c
293. IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm i PORTA GREEN PORT A is the active PORT RED PORT A is inactive PORT B GREEN PORT B is the active PORT RED PORT B is inactive JTAG Serial number CLEI code SERIALIZATION A 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 DS0A LIM Digital Signal Level 0 LIM LEDs DSOA LIM P N 870 1009 xx and P N 870 1014 xx Figure A 6 DSOA LIM LEDs TEKELEC Descriptions RED Application processor is not running or is failing diagnostics AMBER LIM DSOA is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN LIM D50A is running application RED LIM DSOA is off IMT bus A AMBER LIM DSOA is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN LIM DSOA is on IMT bus BLANK Communication processor is not operating RED LIM DSOA is off IMT bus B AMBER LIM DSOA is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN LIM DSOA is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service LEDs APPL PROC Serial IMTA CLEI code IMTB PORT A PORT B RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service Revision number Part
294. IMT bus B AMBER ASM is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN ASM is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating LEDs ATM LIM AINF LIM E1 LIM EILA ILA ATM LIM P N 870 1293 xx E1 LIM P N 870 1379 01 EILA P N 870 2049 xx ILA P N 870 1484 xx LIM P N 870 1014 xx Figure A 3 LIM LEDs LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Application processor is not SEEN PROC running or is failing diagnostics AMBER is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance of service condition Ot GREEN LIM is running an application RED GREEN Operational no QPonrB communication with MASP IMTA RED LIM is off IMT bus A AMBER LIM is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN LIM is on IMT bus A serial number BLANK Communication processor is CLEI not operating code IMTB RED LIM is off IMT bus B AMBER LIM is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN LIM is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating PORTA RED Link is out of service AMBER Link is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B RED Link is out of service AMBER Link is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service revision number part number EILA 870
295. ING 1 20 TT WHORE RACING L XX IRR 1 DRAIN C 50 P2 OAL UNTERMINATED Th e o 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0859 xx Null MODEM for Terminal Table C 12 Null MODEM for Terminal P N 830 0859 xx Feet Inches Meters ut da M Feet Inches Meters um 830 0859 01 5 6 0 152 JA 830 0859 09 75 900 2286 830 0859 02 10 120 3 48 830 0859 10 100 1200 30 48 830 0859 03 15 180 4 57 A 830 0859 11 125 1500 3810 830 0859 04 20 240 6 96 830 0859 12 150 1800 4572 830 0859 05 25 300 7 62 830 0859 13 200 2400 6096 830 0859 06 30 360 9 14 A 830 0859 14 6 0 72 1 82 A 830 0859 07 35 420 1066 830 0859 15 7 0 84 2 13 A 830 0859 08 50 600 1524 Figure 43 Null MODEM for Terminal P N 830 0859 01 P1 P2 DB 25 MALE DB 25 MALE P WHT BLU WHT BLU 7 m AF BLU WHT gt gt C BLU WHT 5 WHT ORG WHT ORG gt up 7 ORG WHT gt gt C ORG WHT WHT GRN WHT GRN _ alg GRN WHT gt gt C GRN WHT 2 cTs 5 5 CTS ner WHT BRN WHT BRN DCD 8 BRN WH XC BRN WH 8 DCD ve lon WHT GRY WHT GRY 20 Dm lp eRv wHr gt gt C GRY WHT Ms RED BLU RED BLU 9 9 BLU RED gt C gt C BLU RED NCH 19 19 HNC 21 2
296. INTA D22 EBI 011 A23 B23 LGND C23 EBI XRDY D23 EBI XD12 A24 LGND B24 LGND C24 EBI XCASO D24 EBI XD13 A25 BSERIG 50 B25 LGND C25 EBI 51 D25 014 A26 BSERI _50 B26 LGND C26 EBI XCAS2 D26 XD15 A27 LGND B27 LGND C27 D27 A28 B28 C28 D28 LGND A29 LGND B29 C29 D29 A30 B30 C30 D30 LGND A31 LGND B31 C31 MB56KHZ 50 D31 2 B32 C32 MB56KHZ 50 D32 LGND A33 LGND B33 C33 MB8KHZ _50 033 A34 B34 C34 MB8KHZ 50 D34 LGND A35 CHASSIS B35 CHASSIS C35 CHASSIS GND 035 CHASSIS GND GND GND Table B 15 lists the signal symbol values used in Table B 13 through Table B 18 Table B 15 Backplane Pin Out Symbols Slot Connector Interface Address Signal Symbol Values ERN A 1 top P16 0A 0 1A L 0A 0 1 bottom P32 OB 0 1A OB A 0 2 top P15 1A 1 1A K 1A 0 2 bottom P31 1B 1 1A 1B B 0 3 top P14 2A 2 1B J 2A 2 3 bottom P30 2B 2 1 2 2 4 top P13 3A 3 1B I 3A 2 4 bottom P29 3B 3 1B 3B D 2 5 top P12 4A 4 2A H 4A 4 5 bottom P28 4B 4 2A 4B E 4 6 top P11 5A 5 2A G 5A 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 23 Connectors Table B 15 Backplane Pin Out Symbols Continued Slot Connector Interface Address Signal Symbol Values Port m amp X 6 bottom P27 5B 5 2A 5B 4 7 top P10 6A 6 2B F 6A 6 7 bottom P26 6B 6 2B 6B G 6 8 top P9 7A 7 2B E 7A 6 8 bottom P25 7B 7 2 7
297. IRX 50 11 8KHZ11 _50 C11 MBUSIARX 50 D11 12 11 50 12 8 711 50 12 MBUSIARX 50 112 8KHZ14 50 A13 MBUS11TX _50 B13 56 711 50 C13 MBUSIATX 50 013 8KHZ14 _50 14 11 50 B14 56KHZ11 _50 C14 MBUSIATX 50 014 56KHZ14 50 A15 B15 C15 MBUS13RX _50 D15 56KHZ14 _50 16 10 50 B16 8KHZ10 _50 C16 MBUS13RX _50 D16 8KHZ13 50 17 10 50 B17 8KHZ10 _50 C17 MBUS13TX _50 017 8KHZ13 _50 18 10 50 B18 56KHZ10 50 C18 MBUS13TX _50 018 56KHZ13 _50 19 MBUSIOTX 50 B19 56KHZ10 _50 C19 MBUS12RX _50 019 56KHZ13 _50 20 9 50 20 8KHZ9 50 C20 MBUS12RX _50 D20 8KHZ12 50 A21 MBUS9RX 50 B21 8 79 50 C21 MBUS12TX _50 D21 8KHZ12 50 A22 9 50 B22 56KHZ9 50 C22 MBUSI2TX 50 D22 56KHZ12 50 A23 MBUS9TX 50 B23 56 79 50 C23 D23 56 712 50 A24 EBI XD00 B24 EBI XBEO C24 EBI XSP2 D24 EBI XSP3 A25 EBI XD01 25 1 25 D25 LGND A26 XD02 B26 EBI XBE2 C26 D26 A27 EBI XD03 B27 EBI XBE3 C27 LGND D27 SPARE2 A28 EBI XD04 B28 EBI_ XBS8 C28 LGND D28 TPWR A29 EBI XD05 B29 EBI XBS16 C29 D29 AUDCTOFF A30 XD06 B30 EBI ADSO C30 D30 ALMTRANS A31 XD07 B31 EBI ADSI C31 SDBO 100 D31 AMS BMS A32 EBI XD08 B32 EBI
298. LEDs Report No Errors on the EOAP 10 Test Modem Logical 11 Identify EOAP GPL 12 Verify EOAP to SEAS Connection Status 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 99 EOAP 6 100 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP EOAP Provisioning This section provides initial EOAP provisioning procedures for implementing the EOAP and reprovisioning procedures for changes in the EOAP configuration The following procedures are described Initial Implementation Configuring EOAP System Parameters on page 6 103 Configure TDM Ports for EOAP at Eagle STP on page 6 107 Configuring the EOAP from the Eagle STP Terminal on page 6 112 Reprovisioning Changing the EOAP Configuration on page 6 134 Before You Start Read This Perform these procedures after the EOAP shelf has been powered up CAUTION EOAP s open system architecture allows access to the operating system Any undocumented changes to the files may cause the N system to become corrupted and unusable Making any undocumented changes on the EOAP including changes to the hardware operating system and or the components found therein will void the warranty NOTE 1 Perform all procedures logged in as root unless specified otherwise NOTE2 In the event of a failure repeat the section in which the failure occurred If the failure re occurs contact technical services for assistance 3 Some of the fol
299. LK OUT connector refer to step 8 Route the clock cable in the frame following the routing directions in this manual Connect the other end of the new P N 830 0398 xx frame clock cable from B CLK OUT refer to step 10 to the next shelf s B CLK IN connector Issue the command to report clock status rept stat clk Response to the clock status command is displayed tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel rept stat clk Command entered at termoinal 1 tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel CARD LOC 1114 Standby CARD LOC 1116 Active PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Idle SECONDARY BITS Idle HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS SECONDARY CLK Idle HS SECONDARY CLK Idle 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 15 16 17 18 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards using CLK A 7 Cards with bad CLK A 000 Cards using CLK B 0 Cards with bad CLK B 000 Cards using CLK I 0 Command Completed PST SST AST HS SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards using HS CLK A 1 Cards with bad HS CLK A Cards using HS CLK B 0 Cards with bad HS CLK B Cards using HS CLK I 0 I lo Command Completed Verify that both BITS clocks are either in IDLE or ACTIVE state on both ACTIVE and STANDBY MASP Allunderlined cards with bad CLK values sho
300. LKOUT B e CJ l 4 EOAPbackcables OL o ONO O O 0 0 00 OO HI PORT 10B PORT 5 Port 10 To VT 520 DSPLY A E SA PORT 5B PORT 7A PORT 8A PORT 8B PORT 7B 2 Attach a cable converter P N 804 0176 01 to the other end of the first terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx and tighten the connector screws Label the converter as EOAP PORT 1A 3 Take the second terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx Plug the ferrite end onto the connector marked PORT 1B located at the center left of the EOAP backplane Refer to Figure 6 28 Tighten the cable connector 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 Attach a cable converter P N 804 0176 01 to the other end of the second terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx and tighten the connector screws Label the converter as EOAP port 1B 5 Take the first terminal cable of P N 830 0709 xx a Plug one end onto the cable converter P N 804 0176 01 labeled EOAP PORT 14A Tighten the connector screws b Label the other cable end as EOAP port 1A 6 Take the second terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx a Plug one end onto the cable converter P N 804 0176 01 labeled EOAP PORT 1B Tighten the connector screws b Label the other cable end as EOAP PORT 1B 7 Loosely route these two extended terminal cables from each connector down to the third tie rod and across the rod toward the right side of the EOAP backplane Figure 6 29 Route Terminal Cables on EOAP Shelf Backplane
301. LSMS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc A1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Completed If alarms are shown for the EOAPs in either the rept stat seas or rept stat 1sms outputs contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 7 If you upgraded from a single configuration EOAP to a dual configuration EOAP configure the Eagle STP database with the new number of chg oap config config dual After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD 8 Configure the new hostname for example enter these commands chg oap config aname tekelec 22 chg oap config bname tekelec 23 where aname is a 14 character 1 alphabetic character followed by 1 to 13 alphanumeric characters hostname for EOAP A The value must be enclosed in quotes bname is 14 character 1 alphabetic character followed by 1 to 13 alphanumeric characters hostname for EOAP B The value must be enclosed in quotes 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 139 EOAP 6 140 10 After successful completion of each command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD Configure the IP n
302. Large washer LEN Isolation sheet Concrete flooring M In gt Raised floor Talsdfir hd Locknut washer Flat washer and nut WARNING Finger tighten nuts on threaded rods inside the frames above the raised floor before tightening the nuts below the raised floor 3 18 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Refer to Figure 3 12 when installing the heavy duty frame on a raised floor using Unistruts and the Cable Rack Mounting Kit P N 804 0219 01 Figure 3 12 Raised Floor Installation With Unistrut Nut Auxiliary bar Overhead rack _ Clip Threaded rod Isolator Ls Nut ae 1 1 2 threaded gt g Frame side Overhead rack mounting kit P N 804 1571 01 Nut Small washer Large washer Finger tighten nuts above 5 8 inches threaded rod raised floor before attaching nuts below raised floor Isolation sheet Raised floor Concrete floor Unistrut Channel nut with sping washer P N 804 0913 01 WARNING Finger tighten nuts on threaded rods inside the frames above the raised floor before tightening the nuts below the raised floor 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 19 Frames and Shelves gt
303. Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 5B 3Amp 6117 6118 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B dummy fuse Fuse 8B dummy fuse Fuse 9B dummy fuse Fuse 10B dummy fuse Fuse 11B dummy fuse Fuse 12B dummy fuse Fuse 13B dummy fuse Fuse 14B dummy fuse Fuse 15B dummy fuse Fuse 16B dummy fuse Fuse 17B dummy fuse Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse 4 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 4 5 Fuses Card Locations Continued Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 2A Fuse 3A dummy fuse Fuse 4A dummy fuse Fuse 5A dummy fuse Fuse dummy fuse Fuse 7A dummy fuse Fuse 8A dummy fuse Fuse dummy fuse Fuse 10 dummy fuse Fuse 11A dummy fuse Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A dummy fuse Fuse 14A dummy fuse Fuse 15A dummy fuse Fuse 16A dummy fuse Fuse 17A dummy fuse Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A 10 A EOAP A A power FAP P N 870 2320 01 for heavy duty frame Fuse 20A 10 A EOAP B A power FAP P N 870 2320 01 for heavy duty frame 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 33 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity
304. M MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 5A 3Amp 2115 2116 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A 3Amp 2201 2202 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 8A 3Amp 2205 2206 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 9A 1Amp 2209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 2211 2212 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11A 3Amp 2215 2216 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 12A dummy fuse Fuse 13A 3Amp 2301 2302 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14A 3Amp 2305 2306 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 15A 1Amp 2309 HMUX Fuse 16A 3Amp 2311 2312 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or 5 146 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 17A 3Amp 2315 2316 LIM ACM ASM TSM DCM or EDCM Fuse 18A dummy fuse Fuse 19A dummy fuse Fuse 20A dummy fuse Extension Frame 00 EF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B see Figure 5 66 Fuse 1B 3Amp 2103 2104 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 2B 3Amp 2107 2108 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or Fuse 3B 1Amp 2110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 2113 2114 LIMs ACM ASM ED
305. MBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned 005 RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned EXT PORT AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Master Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned OOS Out of service 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 127 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 128 Procedure Install E1 T1 Cables When the interface is provisioned the E1 T1 cards have hot swap capabilities The rear of the shelf is prepared by removing the inner cable tie wrap bars located at the top and the bottom rear of the shelf 1 Use diagonal cutters to remove any tie wraps used to secure cables to the tie wrap bars Be careful to limit the movement of cables and avoid damaging the cables Re tie the cables to one of the existing tie wrap bars Remove both the upper and lower inner tie wrap bars by removing the flat head Phillips screws holding the tie wrap bars to the shelf To position the E1 T1 backplane marked Lower and its bracket assembly see Figure 5 52 and install the bracket assembly to the Extension Shelf using six Phillips screws and six lock washers Position the E1 T1 backplane marked Upper and the bracket assembly and install
306. MBUSSTX _50 16 MA8KHZ _50 4 MBUSSRX _50 17 MASKHZ 50 5 MBUSSRX 50 18 SH2A56KHZ _50 6 SH2MBUSTX _50 19 SH2A56KHZ _50 7 SH2MBUSTX _50 20 SH2A8KHZ _50 8 SH2MBUSRX _50 21 SH2A8KHZ _50 9 SH2MBUSRX 50 22 SH3A56KHZ _50 10 SH3MBUSTX _50 23 SH3A56KHZ _50 11 SH3MBUSTX _50 24 SH3A8KHZ _50 12 SH3MBUSRX _50 25 SH3A8KHZ _50 13 SH3MBUSRX _50 B 10 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Clock A Out Connector J7 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J7 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 5 Clock A Out Connector 6 69 69 6 69 69 2 9 69 9 25 pin v Table B 6 Clock A Out Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 14 SH2A56KHZ 50 2 SH2MBUSTX 50 15 SH2A56KHZ 50 3 SH2MBUSTX 50 16 SH2A8KHZ 50 4 SH2MBUSRX 50 17 SH2A8KHZ 50 5 SH2MBUSRX 50 18 SH3A56KHZ _50 6 SH3MBUSTX _50 19 SH3A56KHZ 50 7 SH3MBUSTX 50 20 SH3A8KHZ 50 8 SH3MBUSRX 50 21 SH3A8KHZ 50 9 SH3MBUSRX _50 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 11 Connectors Clock A B In Out Extension Shelf Clock A B In Extension Shelf Connectors 5 J6 J41 J42 Clock A In Connector J5 Figure B 6 Clock A In Extension Shelf Connector 9 02 00 0 CO S 69 69 69 9 9 2 9 69 Table B 7 Clock A In Extension Shelf Connector Pin Signal
307. MCAP cards must be replaced by GPSM 1 cards P N 870 2360 01 and all Terminal Disk Modules TDM cards must be P N 870 0774 10 or later for this release These cards are installed at the factory or by Tekelec Technical Support These cards are not installed by customers of Tekelec This section describes an inspection of the general system installation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Procedure Perform General Installation Inspection Verify the following 1 Allitems listed in the Equipment Specification have been installed 2 Cabling is neatly installed and the labels are correct and easily readable 3 Power cabling does not run through a cable rack 4 Power cabling is not be routed together with any other cables and has at least six inches of clearance 5 Racks have Nomex paper between the rack and any power cables that would otherwise touch the rack 6 The main central office ground is correctly labeled and has the Not Remove tag installed on the central office grounding bar No double lugs are allowed Any bolt through a nut must show at least two threads beyond the nut but no more than four threads should be showing 7 The 48VDC power feeds are correctly labeled at the central office power distribution panel There should be an A feed and a B feed for each frame 8 The 48VDC returns are correctly labeled There should be an A return and a B return for eac
308. MCVMJNC 02 C02 D02 LMCVCOM A03 LMCVCRNC B03 LMCVMNNC 03 LMCVMJNO 003 LMCVMNNO A04 RBFANCTRL 04 C04 LGND D04 A05 RAFANCTRL B05 R4FBALM C05 RBCRNC D05 R3COM 06 06 R4FAALM C06 R3MJNC 206 A07 RBFBALM B07 C07 RBMNNC 007 R3MNNO B 58 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 38 MDAL Backplane Bottom Continued Connectors Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A08 R3FAALM 08 C08 208 A09 LGND B09 LGND C09 D09 LGND A10 B10 C10 RACRNC D10 RACOM A11 LGND 11 LGND C11 RAMJNC D11 RAMJNO A12 B12 C12 RAMNNC D12 RAMNNO A13 LGND B13 LGND R4CRNC D13 14 14 14 D14 A15 TPWR B15 LGND C15 D15 16 AUDCTOFF B16 C16 LGND D16 A17 ALMTRANS 17 LGND C17 R5FBALM D17 A18 5 5 18 SDBO 100 C18 R5FAALM 018 A19 MASBSAN 19 SDBI 100 C19 D19 A20 MASASAN 20 SDB2 100 C20 D20 A21 LGND B21 SDBS3 100 C21 D21 LGND A22 B22 SDB4 100 C22 D22 A23 823 SDB5 100 C23 D23 A24 B24 SDB6 100 C24 D24 A25 B25 SDB7 100 C25 D25 A26 B26 SDBP 100 C26 D26 A27 B27 SBSY 100 C27 D27 A28 B28 SATN 100 C28 5 028 5 29 B29 SACK 100 C29 R5MJNC D29 R5MJNO A30 LGND B30 SRST 100 C30 RBMNNC 030 RMNNO A31 LGND B31 SMSG 100 C31
309. MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 2B 3Amp 6107 6108 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3B 1Amp 6110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 6113 6114 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM 5 152 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 5B 3Amp Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B dummy fuse Fuse 8B dummy fuse Fuse 9B dummy fuse Fuse 10B dummy fuse Fuse 11B dummy fuse Fuse 12B dummy fuse Fuse 13B dummy fuse Fuse 14B dummy fuse Fuse 15B dummy fuse Fuse 16B dummy fuse Fuse 17B dummy fuse Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse 6117 6118 LIMs ACM ASM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM OAP Frame OAPF Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 64 on page 5 156 Fuse 1A 10Amp EOAP A A power FAP P N 870 2320 xx 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 153 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 2A Fuse 3A dummy fuse Fuse 4A dummy fuse Fuse 5A dummy fuse Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A dummy fuse Fuse 8A dummy fuse Fuse 9A dummy fuse Fuse 10A dummy fuse Fuse 11A dummy fuse
310. May 2005 LEDs Descriptions APPL PROC RED Application processor is not running or is failing diagnostics AMBER LIM V 35 is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN LIM V 35 is running an application IMTA RED LIM V 35 is off IMT bus AMBER LIM V 35 is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN LIM V 35 is on IMT bus A BLANK Communication processor is not operating IMTB RED LIM V 35 is off IMT bus B AMBER LIM V 35 is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN LIM V 35 is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating PORTA RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service A 33 LEDs A 34 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Control Shelf Backplanes P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 B 3 A Clock 0 through A Clock een pite fpe aiite B 5 B Clock 0 through B Clock 5 7 BITS COGOR ocn uapa 9 Clock Ac e B 10 Clock In Out Extension Shelf B 12 Clock B Qut eee te eet tee B 13 Control Shelf Bac
311. Misc Fuse Panel MODEM B 830 0709 xx Part of 830 0699 01 To green yellow conductor VT 520 DSPLY To Chassis GND Part of 830 0699 01 green yellow conductor To Chassis GND To part of CF 00 1300 To 830 0528 01 Part of 830 0699 01 brown on uctor to Extension shelf backplane fan tray A power brown conductor to 830 0657 xx Part of 830 0699 01 blue conductor to ARTN Part of 830 0699 01 blue conductor to B RTN 830 0709 xx B clock out 830 0609 01 8044017601 VT 520 DSPLY 830 0528 01 804 0176 01 m 830 0709 xx 5 830 0709 xx 830 0708 01 RST B To 830 0708 Control Backplane ep Port Control Backplane 890 0191 03 GE d Port E EOAPbackcables 890 0190 03 LOL O 10 o PORT 108 PORT PORT AOA PORT 6B ms PORT6A PORT 9A PORT 5B PORTSB PORT 7A PORT 8A 14 PORT 7B 830 0709 s To X 25 MODEM B 830 0609 01 830 0709 xx To To Fan Tray B X 25 MODEMA Power 6 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Figure 6 14 Cable Connections Diagram Dual Configuration OAP Frame Control Frame B GND Bar m System Ground Bar L _ Fuse Panel Fuse Panel Logic Gnd Logic Gnd O Logic Gnd Logic Gnd q
312. N 870 2320 xx Front RR tete daher 4 5 Figure 4 4 Jumper Board beter tri eti ea 4 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 xiii xiv List of Figures Figure 4 5 Jumper Board FAP Fuse door ttes ctt 4 6 Figure 4 6 Jumper Board FAP Fuse Installation 4 7 Figure 4 7 Fuse and Alarm Panel Rear iier rea voee 4 8 Figure 4 8 Ground Bar and Logic Ground Installation 4 11 Figure 4 9 System Frame Grounding 5 reete tenerent 4 14 Figure 4 10 System Logic Ground Bar and Cable 4 17 Figure 4 11 System Logic Grounding 4 18 Figure 4 12 Ground Bar and Logic Ground Installation 4 20 Figure 4 13 System Logic Ground Connection 4 21 Figure 4 14 Alarm Cable Arm iaceret ete ep in 4 21 Figure 4 15 Fuse Holder Locations on FAPS ss 4 34 Figure 4 16 Control Frame CF 00 Numbering Plan 4 35 Figure 4 17 Extension Frame EF 00 Numbering Plan 4 36 Figure 4 18 Extension Frame EF 01 Numbering Plan 4 37 Figure 4 19 Extension Frame EF 02 Numbering Plan 4 38 Figure 4 20 Extension Frame EF 03 Numbering Plan 4 39 Figure 4 21 Extension Frame EF 04 Numbering Pl
313. NR Active SEAS Interfaces Configured 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active X 25 Link Al IS NR Active X 25 Link B1 IS NR Active SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link B2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 1 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 B1 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 Bl PVCs OOS MT X25 A2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 A2 PVCs OOS MT X25 B2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 B2 PVCs OOS MT Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 123 EOAP 6 124 10 rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Association Al IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active LSMS SYSTEM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms 0 3 Assoc 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Complete
314. No Alarms X25 Link B2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 1 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 Bl PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 Bl PVCs OOS MT X25 A2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 A2 PVCs OOS MT mcm X25 B2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 B2 PVCs OOS MT Command Completed rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Association Al IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active LSMS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms 0 3 Assoc 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Completed If alarms are shown for the EOAPs in either the rept stat seas or rept stat 1sms outputs contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 6 146 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Method B Perform steps a through d to update both EOAPs at the same time This method is NOT recommended a Enter the following command act oap config oap all After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD EST Rel 26 0 0 b Wait 15 minutes then enter either the rept
315. OTICE LAPB Down on link 0 The network has been stopped Enter the following command to execute the loopback test of synchronous port 6A tekelec XXX root syncloop t 2 ases3 Verify that the amount of packets sent is the amount of packets received NOTE Confirm that the test returns no errors Data device dev ases2 Control device dev ases ppa 2 speed 9600 loopback no nrzi no txc baud rxc rxc checking for quiet line Trying first packet Trying many packets 100 100 packets sent 100 received CRC errors Aborts Overruns Underruns In Drops Out 0 0 0 0 0 0 estimated line speed 9485 bps Enter the following command at the prompt to bring up the X 25 software on the links tekelec XXX root etc rc2 d S87x25net start 10 Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 for B side EOAP 5B and 6B if applicable 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Verify LEDs Report No Errors on the EOAP This test is a confirmation of the status of the LEDs All cables are connected to the EOAP and the EOAP is powered up Test 9 1 After power up verify the upper left LED Run LED on the EOAP processor card is GREEN Figure 6 52 Verify LED on EOAP Is Green LED is GREEN 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 93 EOAP 6 94 Test Modem Logical This test will verify that the modem software has been configured correctly The last line of the screen output shown in BOLD must be identical to
316. OWER IN A and the terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx PORT 1A on the A side of the EOAP Refer to Figure 6 31 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 16 Use a cable tie and secure all three cables to the bottom tie down rod without obstructing any ports 17 Form the cables along the rod and secure them with cable ties every three or four inches Refer to Figure 6 31 NOTE Notice that the clock in out cable BCLKOUT A to BCLKIN B is routed along the third tie down rod and then looped back along the bottom tie down rod to take away the slack from the cable 18 Wrap the cables with fiber paper at the point they are routed around the edge of the EOAP shelf toward the frame rail Refer to Figure 6 31 19 Secure all cables routed along traverse arm extender to frame rail first 20 At the frame rail break out the fan cables and secure them every three or four inches down the frame rail across the traverse arm to the back of the fan assembly Refer to Figure 6 32 Figure 6 32 Secure Cables from EOAP to Cable Rack To Cable Rack FAP Cable butt at this point three wires to FAP on each side EMAP to customer network cables 11 830 0710 cables Fan A power cable 8 P N 830 0609 01 11 __ A Power cable 830 0699 01
317. P B and the fan assembly are now powered up Test the fan operation next Refer to procedure Fan Operation Testing on page 6 74 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 73 EOAP Fan Operation Testing 6 74 Use this procedure to test the fan operation at the Eagle STP terminal and to ensure that the fan alarm is functioning NOTE For more information on the commands used in this procedure refer to the Eagle STP Commands Manual Procedure Test Fan Operation 1 Atthe Eagle STP terminal retrieve the feature options to ensure that the fan feature is turned on rtrv feat NOTE Once you have turned on the feature you cannot turn it off The feature applies to any and all fans installed within the system When replacing a fan assembly the feature should already be turned on The output displays a list of optional features and their status on the system rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EAGLE FEATURE LIST GTT on GWS X25G on LAN SEAS on LFS LNP on FAN WNP off CNCF TLNP off SCCPCNV X252000 off PLNP ITUMTPRS off SLSOCB EST Rel 26 0 0 on on off on on off zoff NRT off CRMD off MTPRS off DSTNA000 off LNP12MIL off TCAPCNV off NCR off EGTT 2 Enable the feature if necessary by entering the following command chg feat fan on where an is the parameter for turning on the fan feature After the program updat
318. P N 606 0062 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 155 EOAP 6 Unpack the GR 376 EOAP Assembly refer to Figure 6 60 Figure 6 60 Fans and GR 376 EOAP Mounting Flanges Flanges removed for shipping AAAAA Flanges removed for shipping 7 Install the mounting flanges on the side of the assembly refer to Figure 6 60 8 Install the GR 376 EOAP unit from the rear of the frame above the cooling duct and secure the GR 376 EOAP using screws P N 600 0193 01 and external tooth washers 606 0062 01 9 Doors are shipped with the GR 376 EOAP Mount the doors on the front of the frame and ensure that the doors will close securely and fasten 6 156 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 To VT 520 DSPLY 830 0528 01 mE 804 0176 01 11 830 0709 xx 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 10 Route the power cables P N 830 0699 01 from the Fuse and Alarm Panel FAP to the GR 376 EOAP Connect the GR 376 EOAP plug onto the backplane marked POWER IN A and the other GR 376 EOAP plug onto the backplane marked POWER IN B Refer to Figure 6 61 for cable and backplane diagram and Figure 6 21 GR 376 EOAP Cable Legend on page 6 153 for the Cable Legend Figure 6 61 GR 376 EOAP Backplane Cables To VT 520 DSPLY 830 0709 xx 804 0176 01 830 0528 01 2 O 0 000000000 00 i000 oo
319. P N 850 0330 06 or later connect the cables to J48 and J49 primary and secondary BITS and connect the other ends to the site clock sources NOTE 2 Control shelf backplane 850 0330 05 cannot pe used with the HMUX card required to implement the Large System feature ATM LIM card s or E1 T1 MIM s High speed clock source T1 or E1 T1 clock source 5422 compatible 1 544 MHz 200 Hz square wave output 1 clock source 5422 compatible 2 048 MHz 103 Hz square wave output Master timing Feature Requirement Matrix Use Table 5 3 to identify the hardware or software that is required to prepare your EAGLE STP for the HS Master Timing feature Perform the procedures in the order listed Skip any procedure that does not apply 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 83 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies NOTE Perform the procedures mentioned in this document during a maintenance window Table 5 3 Feature Requirement Matrix If you do not have do this Contact Tekelec Notes Technical Support Control shelf backplane Replace backplane or if Contact Tekelec Technical P N 850 0330 06 or later you havea control shelf Support with backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 install adapter cable P N 830 0846 01 and HS clock cable P N 830 0873 xx HS master and Replace composite Contact Tekelec Technical Replace composite clock cables clock cables with HS Support one cable at P N 830 087
320. P1 P2 P3 Figure B 47 Shelf Power Connector 0 00 9 49 9 9 CO QU 9 6 9 2 9 69 69 69 9 9 6 69 9 9 pin Table B 47 Shelf Power Connector Connector Fuse Position Pin Numbers Circuit Descriptions P1 1 3 and 12 48VDC E 2 and 11 48VDC return 2 1 and 10 48VDC 19 and 20 48VDC return 3 21 and 22 48VDC 4 and 13 48VDC return 4 23 and 24 48VDC 6 and 15 48VDC return 5 9 and 18 48VDC 8 and 17 48VDC return 6 7 and 16 48VDC 25 and 26 48VDC return B 68 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 47 Shelf Power Connector Continued Connectors Connector Fuse Position Pin Numbers Circuit Descriptions P2 7 3 and 12 48VDC 2 oe 2 and 11 48VDC return 8 1 and 10 48VDC 19 and 20 48VDC return 9 21 and 22 48VDC 4 and 13 48VDC return 10 23 and 24 48VDC 6 and 15 48VDC return 11 9 and 18 48VDC 8 and 17 48VDC return 12 7 and 16 48VDC 25 and 26 48VDC return P3 13 3 and 12 48VDC 2 ancy 2 and 11 48VDC return 14 1 and 10 48VDC 19 and 20 48VDC return 15 21 and 22 48VDC 4 and 13 48VDC return 16 23 and 24 48VDC 6 and 15 48VDC return 17 9 and 18 48VDC 8 and 17 48VDC return 18 7 and 16 48VDC 25 and 26 48VDC return P1 P2 and P3 5 and 14 logic ground All return pins are common NOTES A side and B side connectors fuse position
321. PC using PROCOMM with VT320 Emulation connected to the EAGLE STP MMI terminal ports These tests will report the status of the EOAP and the corresponding connections Unix commands should be entered into the EOAP via the VT 520 These tests will report the status of the EOAP and the corresponding connections 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 79 EOAP 6 80 EOAP support tests include the following test procedures 1 Verify each EOAP AURORA serial port device Verify the EOAP OSI and X25 processes Verify Hosts IP Address Verify all processes are running Verify EOAP single serial connection to the Eagle STP Verify EOAP dual serial connection to the Eagle STP Enter the EOAP configuration Loopback test of the X 25 interface Boum cs ow rog gt 19 Verify the LEDs report no errors on the Modem Test Logical EOAP GPL Identification Verify the Eagle STP reports the status of the SEAS Eagle STP to EOAP connection N c Test Setup EOAP Connections The NSD Installation Manual describes how to connect the hardware pieces Figure 6 51 details the connections required for this test VT 520 e Eagle STP e modem Test Equipment Below is the required test hardware for the EOAP For the complete list of EOAP hardware and current part numbers see the BOM of the EOAP being tested e VT 520 terminal or PC running PROCOMM PLUS e RS232C terminal cable 830 0709 XX with VT 5
322. Part Numbers Frame Label Label Part Number Control frame CF 00 658 0486 01 Extension frame 00 EF 00 658 0486 02 Extension frame 01 EF 01 658 0486 03 Extension frame 02 EF 02 658 0486 04 Extension frame 03 EF 03 658 0486 05 Extension frame 04 EF 04 658 0486 06 Miscellaneous frame 00 MF 00 658 0374 01 Miscellaneous frame 01 MF 01 658 0374 02 OAP frame OAPF 658 0486 08 Heavy Duty Frame GPF 658 0374 01 Procedure Label Frames 1 Remove the protective backing from the frame label 2 Firmly press the label into place as shown in Figure 3 18 on page 3 29 and Figure 3 20 on page 3 31 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 27 Frames and Shelves Shelf Labeling Apply shelf labels to the frames of the system as shown in Figure 3 18 Refer to Figure 3 21 for exact placement Refer to Table 3 2 for the proper label for each shelf Table 3 2 Shelf Labels and Part Numbers Frame Shelf Label Label Part Number Control Frame 1 112 Frame 1 and Shelf 1 658 0490 01 PN Frame is 2 12 Frame 1 and Shelf 2 658 0490 02 always he EISOT rame eg 13 Frame 1 and Shelf 3 658 0490 03 Extension Frame EF 00 1 21 Frame 2 and Shelf 1 658 0490 04 eee ip 22 Frame 2 and Shelf 2 658 0490 05 2 E 23 Frame 2 and Shelf 3 658 0490 06 Extension Frame EF 01 1 31 Frame and Shelf 1 658 0490 07 32 Frame and
323. RQUE 25 IN LBS 12181920 o o 12181920 Rearview B side Fuse position Fuse position A side Figure B 25 Alarm Interface Connector Table B 23 Alarm Interface Connector Pin Circuit Descriptions 1 2 3 4 5 Critical Alarm 6 7 8 Fuse Normally Closed 9 10 Minor Alarm 11 Major Alarm 12 Common 13 14 Test 15 Fuse Normally Open 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 37 Connectors General Purpose Relay Connector 01 J75 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J71 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 26 General Purpose Relay Connector 01 C ee 09 05 09 00 09 Table B 24 General Purpose Relay Connector 01 Pin Signal 4 8 10 15 not used General Purpose Relay 0 Normally Open GPRCOMO General Purpose Relay 0 Common GPRNCO General Purpose Relay 0 Normally Closed 1 General Purpose Relay 1 Normally Open General Purpose Relay 1 Common General Purpose Relay 1 Normally Closed NIT w NN Logic ground OAP1_RST OAP 1 reset OAP1_RST OAP 1 reset OAP2_RST OAP 2 reset OAP2_RST 2 reset B 38 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors General Purpose Relay Connector 02 J73 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J75 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 27 General Purpose Relay Conne
324. RT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT 16B 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31 J32 J33 J34 J35 J36 J37 J38 J39 J40 ow n Ca qao ed oi pere qur ie ae a EE Ue ue E WE um I I B IB I I I GLKI J42 E I I ge Zi TII SS 52181 P1i9I 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 26 27 28 29 0 P31 P32 331 P34 IMT IMT ail M z I I LQ LO LQ LQ 01 01 Ne men J43 J44 IPMXB ASSY 850 0356 REV 19 EXTENSION SHELF BACKPLANE 850 0356 01 NOTE Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 25 Connectors Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 03 Figure B 17 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 03 B POWER BPOWER A POWER A POWER PRIMARY SECONDARY B FAN POWER POWER SECONDARY PRIMARY Vn 7 257 Ez Xase7 1247 27 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ats Z 1 ie 9
325. Rel 26 0 0 ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD b Wait 15 minutes then enter either the rept stat seas if only the SEAS feature is on or rept stat 1sms if only the LNP feature is on commands to make sure that there are no alarms for the EOAPs If both the SEAS and LNP features are on then enter both commands to verify that there are no alarms for the EOAPs This is an example of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report IS NR Active SEAS Interfaces Configured 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active X 25 Link Al IS NR Active X 25 Link B1 IS NR Active 6 132 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 SEAS SYSTEM OAP A OAP B X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 Link A1 Link A2 Link B1 Link B2 Al PVCs Al PVCs B1 PVCs B1 PVCs A2 PVCs A2 PVCs B2 PVCs B2 PVCs ALA ALA ALA ALA Z Z Z IS NR OOS M IS NR OOS MT 3 IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT Command Completed rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 STATUS No Alarms STATUS No Alarms STATUS No Alarms STATUS No Alarms STATUS No Alarms STATUS No Alarms STATUS No Alarms
326. Remove Jumpers for normal operation Monitor Printed circuit board diagnostics Personal computer System test testing links Palm held computer future Front of Front connector ront O connector Connectors used only P N 803 0029 01 Pi ALPHA N ribbon cable ione red wire equals pin one To front of board P N 870 2061 01 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 135 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Ohms Converter International Market 5 136 The ohms converter is use mostly outside of North America The converter Super Multiple Interface Cross Connect SuperMIX is a modular device for cross connecting patching and monitoring these digital signal rates 1 2 048 Mb s at 120 Ohms impedance e 51 1 544 Mb s at 100 Ohms impedance e DS1C 3 152 Mb s at 100 Ohms impedance The SuperMIX modules backplanes will be configured to accommodate a variety of input output I O termination connector types Any combination or mix of backplanes in one chassis is acceptable Refer to Telect SUPER MULTIPLE INTERFACE CROSS CONNECT SUPERMIX USER MANUAL 110339 issue A Rev 1 Figure 5 59 Miscellaneous Frame with 120 Ohm Converter Fuse and alarm panel
327. SION TYPE PST SST AST 1107 P 101 9 000 MCPM IS NR Active IP LInk A IS NR Active Available 1109 101 9 000 MCPM OOS MT Fault IP Link A OOS MT Fault Unavailable CARD 1107 ALARM STATUS No Alarms CARD 1109 ALARM STATUS Card is isolated from the system Command Completed 2 Verify the location of the primary and secondary MCPM The primary is noted by the P beside the location in the output of rept stat meas Upgrade the secondary MCPM first 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 45 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 46 Enter the following command to remove the secondary MCPM card from service Do not use the force command unless this is the only MCPM card in service MCPM collection and reporting service should be maintained at all times NOTE Removing the last MCPM or only MCPM from service will cause loss of measurements data If there is more than one MCPM card in service enter inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the secondary MCPM card location If there is only one MCPM card in service enter inh card loc xxx force yes where xxxx is the secondary MCPM card location Remove the MCPM card See Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 for removal procedures Place the removed MCPM card into an ESD container do not put it into the spare card storage shelf Place the new MCPM EDSM card into its place Be sure the revision numbers of the card is compatible with the EAGLE
328. Secure the connector 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 65 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Powering Up the Fan Assembly fans are fused at blue per feed the fan does not contain any empty slots Install the air management card in any empty slots See Eagle STP and SG Module Installation on page 2 6 for general card installation guidelines WARNING Before powering up the fans ensure that the shelf above Procedure Power up Fan Assembly 1 After the fan is installed the powering up process depends on the shelf location The fuse card located on the Fuse and Alarm Panel are marked FAN A and FAN B fuse positions 6 12 and 18 are marked correct locations on the FAP faceplate Fuse position 6 is for the fan unit directly below the x100 shelf Fuse position 12 is for the fan directly below the x200 shelf Fuse position 18 is for the fan directly below the x300 shelf All fans are to be fused at 3As with blue flags per feed Fill out the fuse card completely 2 Fifteen seconds after both the A side and B side power is connected to the fan assembly all of the LEDs on the fan controller card located on the left side of the front of the fan assembly are green Ds o Figure 5 23 Fan card with LE n front of fan assembly Fan ea Eme R Fan controller Fan 1 LED 21 Fan 3 LED 5 66 910 4601 01 Revision D May 200
329. Serial Interface Connector 01 GPSI Pin Signal 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 Not used 13 14 15 4 RX_HO Holdover Clock Receive Data 5 TX_HO Holdover Clock Transmit Data 6 DTR_HO Holdover Clock Data Terminal Ready 7 Logic ground B 40 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 High Speed Message Multiplexer Control Shelf J8 J24 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J23 J31 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Control Shelf HMUX A Backplane P8 Figure B 29 Control Shelf HMUX A Pin Outs Connectors 8 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001 5 i 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 E 8 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOS 800000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000008 M Table B 27 Control Shelf HMUX A Backplane Pin Outs Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND 01 LGND 01 LGND D01 LGND A02 ASEROD 50 02 LGND C02 50 D02 LGND A03 ASEROD _50 B03 LGND C03 50 003 LGND A04 LGND B04 ASELD C04 LGND D04 ASELE A05 ASERID 50 B05 LGND C05 ASERIE 50 205 LGND A06 ASERID _50 B06 LGND C06 50 D06 LGND A07 LGND B07 AIND C07 LGND D07 AINE A08 ASEROC 50 08 LGND C08 50 D08 LGND A09
330. Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A22 B22 LGND C22 EBI XINTA 022 EBI XD11 A23 B23 LGND C23 EBI XRDY D23 EBI XD12 A24 LGND B24 LGND C24 EBI XCASO D24 EBI XD13 A25 50 B25 LGND C25 EBI XCASI D25 EBI XD14 A26 BSERI _50 B26 LGND C26 XCAS2 026 EBI XD15 A27 LGND B27 LGND C27 D27 A28 B28 C28 D28 LGND A29 LGND 29 29 D29 A30 B30 C30 D30 LGND A31 LGND B31 C31 MB56KHZ _50 031 A32 B32 C32 MB56KHZ 50 D32 LGND A33 LGND B33 MB8KHZ _50 033 A34 B34 C34 MB8KHZ _50 D34 LGND A35 CHASSIS B35 CHASSIS C35 CHASSIS GND 035 CHASSIS GND GND GND 1 P 48VDC E2 LGND Table B 18 lists the signal symbol values used in Table B 13 through Table B 18 Table B 18 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Out Symbols Slot Connector Interface Address Signal Symbol Values amp A 1top P17 0A 0 1A P 0A 0 1 bottom P34 OB 0 1A P OB 0 2 top P16 1A 1 1A O 1A 0 2 bottom P33 1B 1 1 1 0 3 top P15 2A 2 1B N 2A 2 3 bottom P32 2B 2 1B N 2B 2 4 top P14 3A 3 1B M 3A 2 4 bottom P31 3B 3 1B M 3B 2 5 top P13 4A 4 2A L 4A 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 31 Connectors Table B 18 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Out Symbols Continued
331. Shelf2 658 0490 08 33 Frame 3 and Shelf3 658 0490 09 ine up numbering continues in additional frames Extension Frame EF 02 1 41 658 0490 10 2 42 658 0490 11 3 43 658 0490 12 Extension Frame EF 03 1 51 658 0490 13 2 52 658 0490 14 3 53 658 0490 15 Extension Frame EF 04 1 61 658 0490 16 OAP Frame OAPF EOAP EOAP 658 0499 05 Heavy Duty Frame As As needed 658 0374 01 needed 3 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Procedure Label Frame with Shelf Labels 1 Remove the protective backing from the shelf label 2 Firmly press the label into place as shown in Figures 3 18 through 3 21 Figure 3 22 shows frame label locations for the heavy duty frame NOTE The procedure for the placement of labels is the same on most of the frames Typically the system is pre labeled Figure 3 18 Frame and Shelf Label Locations Unit separation panel Frame labels Frame labels CF 00 op Side I panel 4 11 9 Shelf labels 12 9 13 Trameshe
332. T XX GRY WHT RED BLU RED BLU ia s D 15 BLU RED XX BLU RED oe BUS zr RED ORN RED ORN a lene Ob ORN RED XX ORN RED 15 56 0 56KHZ 0 15 SED IGEN RED GRN 16 8KHZ 0 GRN RED GRN RED i akuz o 0 17 RED BRN RED BRN BRN RED XX BRN RED TS SEKE 1718 RED GRY RED GRY 20 Re Lt eo GRY RED DX gt GRY RED vi ds OKNZIS BLK BLU BLK BLU Peers oer BLU BLK XX BLU BLK 34 BLK ORN em 24 8KHZ 2 ORN BLK LX ORN BLI HEIC 8KHZ 2 25 25 n 1 2 UNUSED WHT BLU WHT BLU 4 3 UNUSED BLU WHT BLU WHT WHT ORN WHT ORN 40 psi 051 10 ORN WHT XC 4 ORN WHT 3 peta 051 11 T i dj y 1 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 WIRING DIAGRAM PIN 1 C 49 Cables 830 0849 xx DS1 Cable Figure C 42 DS1 Cable P N 830 0849 xx LENGTH PART NO FEET METERS 830 0849 01 15 4 57 850 0849 02 20 6 09 830 0849 03 25 7 62 830 0849 04 30 9 14 850 0849 05 55 10 66 830 0849 06 50 15 24 850 0849 07 75 22 86 830 0849 08 100 30 48 850 0849 09 125 38 1 850 0849 10 150 45 72 850 0849 11 175 53 34 830 0849 12 200 60 96 830 0849 13 250 762 DB 26 MALE 830 0849 14 300 91 44 830 0849 15 500 1524 830 0849 16 650 198 12 NOT USED 19 24 25 UNTERMINATED 26 TXOR
333. TN LOGIC 12 1819 20 GND gt P4 e LOG TORQUE TO 25 69 ud NLB 12181920 o Rear view Bae Fuse position Fuse position A side MIS MIS 27 Connect the 1 0 American Wire Gauge AWG cable from the control frame system ground bar to the I Isolated section of the ground window by way of Htaps if needed NOTE the miscellaneous frame is intended to house terminals printers and modems or other equipment that require commercial AC this frame must have a separate frame ground to the ground window in the customer location NOTE If no ground window exists it is the responsibility of the customer to inform the installer where to terminate the ground and sign a waiver for the responsibility of that connection 28 Frame ground 6 AWG cable from the frame and Htapped with another 6 AWG cable or with a 1 0 cable will also terminated at the I section of the ground window The difference in the wire size is determined by the distance to be covered by the length of the wire run NOTE reason for the separate 6 AWG cable to separate frame grounds is to allow removal of a frame from the lineup without interrupting the rest of the system grounds NOTE The only grounds that are to be terminated on the system ground bar are the logic grounds from the fuse and alarm panel 29 Go to the BCLOCKOUT port of the last extension shelf backplane in the control frame Secure the clock connecti
334. TOM Warning O Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT Metal points on printed circuit boards conducts 48VDC and can cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 19 Connectors Control Shelf Modules ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Control Shelf Backplane top connectors P6 P7 and P9 through P16 and bottom connectors P22 P23 and P25 through P32 This section details the backplane circuit board connectors used for Application Communication Modules ACMs Application Service Modules ASMs Database Communications Modules DCMs and Database Services Modules DSMs Enhanced Integrated Link Interface Modules Appliques EILAs Integrated Link Interface Modules Appliques ILAs Link Interface Modules LIMs Multi Port LIMs MPLs Translation Service Modules 5 5 ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector Table B 13 lists pinouts for connectors P6 P7 and P9 through P16 on the control shelf Refer to Table B 15 on page B 23 for signal symbol values and Figure B 14 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector r OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0000000000000000000000000000000000 8 us m 9 00000000000000000000000000000000000 8 9 8OOO00000000000000000000000000000000 8 Table B 13 Con
335. TRL D gt at the prompt Verify that both the calling and receiving modems are turned on and plugged into a working telephone jack Configure the calling modem and the communication software for 9600 baud 7 data bits even parity and 1 stop bit 7 E 1 Verify that the maintenance modem is capable of supporting the communication parameters shown in Step 3 Set the maintenance modem to Auto Answer Plug the maintenance modem into Artecon port 3 Verify that the maintenance modem answers the call and the modems attempt to establish communication 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP EOAP Test Procedures Overview These procedures test EOAP operation for a single configuration EOAP A Test a dual configuration by rerunning this procedure for The test verifies the hardware associated with the EOAP and not the actual connection to the SEAC LSMS 1 EOAP checklist must be completed and signed by the tester and the customer before these test cases can be performed NOTE 2 The test procedures in this document are intended to test EOAP Release 30 0 and later WARNING Commands in this document are CASE SENSITIVE Use care when typing in commands passwords and any other alphanumeric data This data includes anything typed into the VT520 terminal attached to the Command interface and input locations are Eagle STP commands should be directed to the EOAP via aVT520 terminal or
336. Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle Table of Chapters Table of Contents List of Figures List of Tables List of Procedures Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 General Installation Information Chapter 3 Frames and Shelves Chapter 4 Fuses and Breakers Chapter 5 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Chapter 6 EOAP Appendix A LEDs Appendix B Connectors Appendix C Cables Appendix D Power Cords to Peripherals Index 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Tekelec Signaling Products evision May 2005 2003 2004 2005 Tekelec Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Notice Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice Unauthorized use or copying of this documentation can result in civil or criminal penalties Any export of Tekelec products is subject to the export controls of the United States and the other countries where Tekelec has operations No part of this documentation may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying or recording for any purpose without the express written permission of an authorized representative of Tekelec Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies Trademarks The Tekelec logo EAGLE G Port and G Flex 1 7 1
337. WARNING Do not allow any metal shavings to remain in the equipment area This may occur from over tightened screws or bolts These small metal particles are hazardous to electronic equipment Be careful not to over tighten screws or bolts gt gt gt 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 3 Frames and Shelves Heavy Duty Frame Unpacking 3 4 Procedure Receiving Shipping Container Heavy Duty Frame DANGER Atleast two people are required to safely move and position the frames Read and understand this Procedure completely before continuing 1 Before opening any shipping container inspect for evidence of damage during shipment Report any damage to the carrier for investigation and possible claims Also report any damage to the Tekelec site supervisor 2 Check the packing slips against the equipment specification list for this installation site Report any discrepancies to Tekelec Production Control at 1 888 673 4827 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves 3 Usethe 9 16 inch wrench to remove all of the bolts that hold the front to the shipping container refer to Figure 3 2 Do not discard the bolts Remove the shipping container front panel Place the bolts inside of the bag provided inside the shipping container The shipping container will be returned before and separately from the dolly holding the frame in place The dolly is used to move and position the frame Save all bolts and hardware Figure
338. WE Traverse arms 5 LJ 5 P 4 Power cable 12 830 0699 01 Traverse arm extenders re o eoap side cabling 6 46 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 4 After both EOAPs have been integrated into the system plug the other end of the clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx onto the connector marked BCLKOUT 42 located at the lower right side of the last extension shelf backplane in the control frame Refer to Figure 6 27 Tighten the connector screws CAUTION Do Not connect this P N 830 0657 xx cable to the Eagle N STP until both sides of the EOAP have been integrated into the system NOTE extension shelf is present cable to connector B CLK 5 J70 on control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 03 or connector B CLK 7 J17 on control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure 6 27 Route Clock Connection Cable 830 0398 19 1 830 0898 04 _ _ _ LLL T Rear view Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension 830 0398 11 e 1 e 1 9 1 xtension GR 376 EOAP B CLKIN A 830 0398 20 830 0398 2 4 Extension 4 Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension Control frame frame frame frame frame fr
339. WER cable on the back of the FAN unit and secure the connector Result All fans are running and the MINOR LED is not lit Terminal reports alarm 303 Cooling Fan Normal 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 67 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 10 11 12 13 Remove the B POWER cable from the FAN unit Result Fan 1 and Fan 2 LEDs will blink as the fans speed up to maximum speed This may take up to 15 seconds Once maximum speed has been reached Fan 1 and Fan 2 LEDs will be solid green Fan 3 LED should be red The fan controller LED should be blinking Fan 3 should stop running and the MINOR LED is lit At the system terminal enter the command gt Rept stat trbl Test each fan to ensure that the alarms and the unit is working correctly Result The terminal reports 302 Cooling Fan Normal Replace the B POWER cable on the back of the FAN unit and secure the connector Result The fans are running and the MINOR LED is not lit The terminal reports alarm 303 Cooling Fan Normal Repeat steps 7 through 12 for each fan unit installed This procedure is complete Installing Fan Assembly 890 1038 01 or 890 1038 02 Tools needed 1 Flat screwdriver 2 Philips screwdriver long Fiber Paper Approximately 2 x 3 Tie Wraps Procedure Install and Retrofitting Fans 1 5 68 Determine where the fan assembly will be installed and be aware of hardware that needs to be retained or i
340. XA19 14 50 B14 8KHZO 50 C14 EBI XA08 D14 EBI XA20 15 MBUSOTX _50 B15 8KHZ0 _50 C15 EBI XA09 D15 EBI XA21 16 50 B16 56KHZ0 50 C16 XA10 D16 EBI XA22 A17 B17 56KHZ0 50 C17 CUFA13 D17 EBI XA23 A18 LGND B18 C18 CUFA14 D18 EBI XA24 A19 CUFA3 B19 CUFA9 C19 HST GST D19 EBI XA25 A20 CUFA4 B20 CUFA10 C20 D20 EBI XA26 A21 LGND B21 LGND C21 LGND D21 EBI XA27 B 70 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 48 TDM Backplane Top Continued Connectors Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A22 CUFA5 22 CUFA11 C22 D22 MBUS8RX _50 A23 CUFA6 B23 CUFA12 C23 LGND D23 8KHZ8 50 A24 LGND B24 LGND C24 CUFA15 D24 MBUS8RX 50 A25 CUFA7 B25 LGND C25 CUFA16 D25 8KHZ8 _5 0 A26 CUFA8 B26 LGND C26 MBUS8TX _50 D26 56KHZ8 5 0 A27 LGND B27 C27 MBUS8TX 50 D27 56KHZ8 _ 50 A28 XSP5 B28 RIFA C28 MBUS7RX _50 D28 8KHZ7 _50 A29 EBI XSP4 B29 RIFA C29 MBUS7RX 50 D29 8KHZ7 _5 0 A30 EBI XA11 B30 XA12 C30 MBUS7TX _50 D30 56KHZ7 5 0 A31 XA13 B31 EBI BREO C31 MBUS7TX 50 D31 56KHZ7 _ 50 A32 EBI BG
341. XW R C32 SDBI 100 D32 MASASAN A33 XD09 B33 XM IO C33 SDB2 100 D33 MASBSAN A34 EBI XD10 B34 EBI XSP1 C34 SDB3 100 034 RBFA A35 EBI XD11 B35 EBI XINTA C35 LGND D35 R5FA A36 EBI XD12 B36 EBI XRDY C36 RTS8 D36 RTS12 A37 EBI XD13 B37 EBI 50 C37 CTS8 D37 CTS12 A38 EBI_ XD14 B38 EBI XCASI C38 TX8 D38 TX12 A39 XD15 B39 EBI XCAS2 C39 RX8 D39 RX12 A40 LGND B40 C40 DCD8 D40 DCD12 41 41 C41 RTS9 D41 RTS13 A42 LGND B42 SDB4 _100 C42 CTS9 D42 CTS13 A43 B43 SDB5 100 TX9 D43 TX13 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 73 Connectors Table B 49 TDM Backplane Pin outs Bottom Continued Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A44 LGND B44 SDB6 100 C44 RX9 D44 45 MBUSI5RX _50 B45 SDB7 100 C45 DCD9 D45 DCD13 46 8KHZ15 _50 B46 SDBP 100 C46 RTS10 D46 RTS14 A47 MBUSI5RX _50 B47 SBSY 100 C47 CTS10 D47 CTS14 A48 8KHZ15 _50 B48 SATN _100 C48 TX10 D48 TX14 A49 MBUSI5TX _50 B49 SACK 100 C49 RX10 D49 14 50 56KHZ15 50 B50 5 5 100 C50 DCD10 D50 DCD14 A51 MBUSI5TX _50 B51 5 5 100 C51 RTS11 D51 RTS15 A52 56KHZ154 50 B52 SSEL _100 C52 CTS11 D52 CTS15 A53 12VB B53 SI O 100 11 D53 15 A54 SIG B54 SC D 100 C54 RX11 D54 15 A55 S
342. a 4 Perform General Installation Inspection esse 5 141 Powee Up BOAR as aa 6 73 Powerup Fan Assembly aaa sasana m uh amam ed tuat 5 66 Powerup Fan Assembly ulus 5 75 Power up Fan Assembly dst nasa u os 5 77 Power Up thie Sy Stems ci eee Deer Pee 5 163 Prepare a Concrete Floor for Heavy Duty Frame Installation 3 21 Drepare Floor u tepida tote te 3 12 Prepare Raised Floor for Anchors ere ete recte de bent 3 15 Preparing Cables for Wire Wrap dee e tede teneo 5 19 Preparing Crate and Dolly for Return to Tekelec 1 24 Preparing Shipping Container and Dolly for Return to Tekelec 3 10 Receiving Shipping Container Heavy Duty Frame 3 4 Remove Filler Cards and Hard Drive Slot Covers 6 60 Remove Heavy Duty Frame Panels cett bees e Re 3 25 Removing Card From an Existing EAGLE System 5 51 Replacing A Frame Clock Cables iss eti tt tte detener dou dites 5 92 xxviii 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Procedures Replacing B Clock Cables on Control and Extension Shelves 5 79 Replacing B Frame Clock Gables icto t 5 95 Run Logic Ground Gables ao net t 4 19 Running Terminal Cables do 5 107 Set Up Ma
343. a 2520 4020 4520 8520P CP 2000P 3000P Base Driver system AURAasea Aurora 2520 4020 4520 8520P CP 2000P 3000P Asynchronous Driver System AURAases Aurora 2520 4520 8520P CP 2000P 3000P Synchronous Driver Verify EOAP OSI and X25 Processes This test will confirm that the OSI and X25 processes are running Test 2 1 From the terminal issue the following commands ps ef grep osi tekelec XXX ccsproj 441 ps ef grep osi root 250 1 0 07 23 09 0 00 usr sbin osinetd root 251 250 0 07 23 09 0 00 usr sbin osilogd ps e grep x25 tekelec XXX ccsproj 442 ps ef grep x25 root 223 222 0 07 23 08 0 00 x25netd root 222 1 0 07 23 08 7 0 00 x25netd 2 Verify that the process names in the output matches the screen capture in step 1 If the processes are NOT running this may indicate the licenses are not installed correctly The processes shown in BOLD must be confirmed as present for this test to pass 6 82 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Verify Hosts IP Address This procedure will test and verify HOSTS address were installed in to the ETC HOSTS File Test 3 1 Enter the command to check the hosts address tekelec XXX ccsproj more etc hosts Compare the output to the screen shot to the right The output should contain the two address examples shown here in BOLD eoapi200a ccsproj more etc hosts 127 0 x x localhost 129 200 x x tekelec xx loghost Verify All Procesesses are Running
344. abase with the EOAP configuration information The system updates the EOAP by sending the information to the specified EOAP with the act oap con ig command The chg oap config command uses these parameters aname The name assigned to EOAP A consisting of one alphabetic character followed by 1 to 13 alphanumeric characters The value of the aname parameter must be enclosed in double quotes bname The name assigned to EOAP B consisting of one alphabetic character followed by 1 to 13 alphanumeric characters The value of the bname parameter must be enclosed in double quotes aipaddr The IP address of EOAP A bipaddr The IP address of EOAP B anmask The netmask of EOAP A bnmask The netmask of EOAP B arouter The IP address of the default router assigned to brouter The IP address of the default router assigned to The number of EOAPs being configured either a single EOAP sng1 or both EOAPs dua1 1sms The LSMS system identified as the current LSMS to associate the with either the main LSMS main or the shadow LSMS shadow 6 112 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP mnsap The IP address of the main L5MS mssel The session selector of the main LSMS mpsel The presentation selector of the main L5MS snsap The IP address of the shadow LSMS sssel The session selector of the shadow LSMS 1 The presentation selector of the shad
345. acement see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 Make sure that the four captive screws located in the inject eject handle brackets are partially backed out so they do not interfere with insertion Push all handles outward from the replacement card s faceplate top handle in the UP position bottom handle in the DOWN position 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 65 EOAP Figure 6 41 Card Handles bic Top handle in the UP position Bottom handle in the a DOWN position Photo does not represent actual customer configuration Components for EOAP B are installed on the right side of the card cage 5 Carefully align the card s edges with the channels in the top and bottom card guides Refer to Figure 6 42 Then push the card along the length of card guides until the rear connector on the card begins engaging the mating connector on the backplane Figure 6 42 Inserting the Card Push the card along the length of the card guides until the rear connector on the card begins engaging the mating connector on the backplane Photo does not represent actual customer configuration Components for EOAP B are installed on the right side of the card cage 6 Press the faceplate of the card using constant pressure until you feel the card s progress cease in order to mate the two connectors Any impact to the card s faceplate can damage the faceplate the pins in the backplane o
346. acuum cleaner to collect the shavings while drilling 3 Use a file to remove any sharp edges or protrusions from metal parts if applicable and vacuum 4 Return to the equipment area and replace the tiles making sure the holes match where the frames will be installed 5 Insert the raised floor marking tool into the anchor holes making sure that the tool is perpendicular with the hole If the hole is drilled at an angle the anchor and frame will not come together properly With a hammer tap the head of the star bit with enough force to mark the concrete floor Repeat this step for each hole associated with all frames 6 Remove the floor tiles for access to the concrete floor 7 Drill an 18 mm diameter hole in the concrete floor to a depth of 3 inches 7 7 cm Use a vacuum cleaner to collect the dust while drilling any hole and clean out each hole after the drilling is complete Cable Holes Mark holes and remove tiles from the equipment area using a carbide toothed hole saw of the appropriate diameter Drill any cable holes required in the raised floor tiles Replace tiles in the original tiles location 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 15 Frames and Shelves 3 16 Heavy Duty Frame Anchoring This section describes how to anchor a frame on a raised floor Following are examples but the installation depends on unique site conditions which are Figure 3 10 installing the heavy duty frame on a raised floor Figure
347. age that should appear when the command has executed and completed For this example the copy disk dloc 1116 command was entered Copy disk fixed from active 1114 to standby 1116 started Extended processing required please wait Copy disk fixed from active 1114 to standby 1116 completed Measurements collection may be turned on now if desired 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies The standby MASP is rebooted to load the data when the command completes successfully NOTE While this command is executing commands that affect the database configuration cannot be executed Any attempt to execute such a command will be rejected 26 Enter the following command to verify that the databases of both MASPs are coherent rept stat db The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 27 03 46 39 EST EAGLE 31 6 0 DATABASE STATUS gt gt lt lt TDM 1114 ACTV TDM 1116 STDBY C LEVEL TIME LAST BACKUP LEVEL TIME LAST BACKUP FD BKUP Y 43 03 08 14 03 02 18 EST Y 43 03 08 14 03 02 18 EST FD CRNT Y 43 43 MDAL 1117 RD BKUP Y 1 27 After the card has been reloaded a message appears to confirm completion of the load enter the following command to verify the database is consistent same level as the other cards in the system rept stat card This step completes the upgrade of the standby TDM 28 If you wan
348. al Port 4A Verify AURORA Serial Connections to Eagle STP Dual This procedure will test each of the AURORA serial ports connected to the EAGLE The Aurora card s serial ports 3A and 3B will be connected to an Eagle STP terminal connection on the backplane Refer to Figure 6 51 for connection example NOTE A maximum of two EOAP ports can be assigned For the location of the serial ports refer to Figure 6 51 Eagle STP terminal x was used for this example Any configurable terminal can be used Test 6 1 Test serial port 3A Connect the AURORA serial port 3A to the Eagle STP terminal port X and wait 5 seconds for the maintenance poll From the Eagle STP command terminal enter the following commands to configure the Eagle STP for use with an EOAP If site is SEAS only CHG FEAT SEAS ON CHG FEAT FAN ON If not already ON INH TRM TRM X CHG TRM TRM X TYPE OAP ALL YES ALW TRM TRM X RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X NOTE X denotes the terminals identified as OAP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 2 Disconnect the AURORA Serial Port 3A cable from the EAGLE terminal PORT X 3 From the EAGLE terminal enter the following commands RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X A terminal failure indication should be displayed on the EAGLE terminal screen after disconnection of AURORA Serial Port 3A 4 Test serial port 3B Connect the AURORA serial port 3B to the Eagle STP terminal port X and wait 5 seconds for
349. allation Rear of Control Shelf Cable tie bars 1OBASE 2 STPLAN Ethernet cable Single port MAU Ethernet transceiver 10BASE 2 P N 804 0059 01 Adapter Backplane interface P N 830 0425 01 connector NC T connector P N 507 0120 02 26 pin connector 15 pin connector Adapter Single port MAU Ethernet transceiver 10BASE 2 1OBASE T or P N 804 0144 01 10BASE T Terminator if last chain P N 507 0114 01 RJ45 connector To next STPLAN MAU 10BASE T STPLAN Ethernet cable 5 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies DCM and Fan Option EDCM DSM Cabling DCM and EDCM Modules The following cabling procedures apply to DCM EDCM and DSM cards in the latest Eagle STP and IP SG systems The following cabling procedures also apply to the double P N 870 2197 01 and single slot EDCM cards used in 1 7 SG systems The double slot and single slot P N 870 2372 01 Enhanced DCM EDCM an enhanced version of the DCM card is used in IP SG systems release 4 0 and later 1 The double slot and single slot EDCM is plug compatible with the existing DCM card in SG systems 8 0 SG systems the double slot EDCM card can be provisioned in any slot odd or even with the next higher slot left empty to allow for the width of the card DCM and EDCM cards cannot be pro
350. ame Labeling obe D d 3 27 Shelf rtm 3 28 Older Frame Side Panels ueteres erento peas 3 33 DOLES retten bte ro Hare 3 35 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 1 Frames and Shelves Safety and Cautionary Information gt P P bP bP TOPPLE DANGER Always read and understand instructions thoroughly and completely before working on moving raising or lowering the frame to any portion This applies to attachments to the frame or equipment TOPPLE DANGER Never try to unpack any frame from the shipping container without at least two people to steady any movement of the frame and related components At least two people are required to safely move and position any frame TOPPLE DANGER Never pull out the shelf of any frame that is not anchored properly Some frames are required to be attached to over head ladder racks before shelves are extended DANGER No commercially AC powered equipment be used or placed within 7 ft of 48V equipment This may create a shock or current loop that can be severely hazardous to personnel and equipment DANGER Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry or carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets when working on system equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic
351. ame OAP or GP EF 04 EF 03 EF 02 EF 01 EF 00 CF 00 frame Clock Connection Cable xdi You have now routed the clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx from the to the last extension shelf in the control frame Finish this cable as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 47 EOAP 6 48 Install EOAP Terminal Cables Use two EOAP terminal cables P N 830 0528 xx two converters P N 804 0176 01 and two terminal cables P N 830 0709 xx to attach VT 520 terminal to the EOAP Procedure Install EOAP Terminal Cables 1 Take the first terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx Plug the ferrite end onto the connector marked PORT 1 located at the center right of the EOAP backplane Refer to Figure 6 28 Tighten the cable connector Figure 6 28 Install EOAP Terminal Cables To VT 520 DSPLY To VT 520 DSPLY 2 830 0528 01 12 0528 2 830 0528 01 804 0176 01 Oo O0 Oo AT 804017641 O O OQ O J _________ 11 d 13 830 0709 xx 13 830 0709 xx 9 70 POWER IN B FAN BIPWIA POWER IN A e OAPRST A BCLKOUT A q PORT 1B PORT 2B PORT 1A PORT 2A E 3B gt 4B FAN P m Co OAPRST B BC
352. ame spaces have been laid out on the floor 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves 4 Use the felt tip pen to mark the anchor location in the middle of each slot and corners for each successive frame Figure 3 9 Isolation Sheet Template for Frame Heavy Duty Frame Insulator Template Template orientation information 25 7 8 inches ay ke ee epis 5141 lt 21 I Slots 5 x position template 12 inch minimum poston from existing telco equipment i This sidefront frame mounting seismic Front 6 inches spacing Lines defining front and starting end of lineup The next section describes how to prepare a raised floor for frame installation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 13 Frames and Shelves 3 14 Raised Floor Floor Preparation This section describes how to prepare a raised floor for a heavy duty frame installation with anchors Always get permission from facility personnel before drilling holes Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Rotary impact drill 18mm masonry drill bit e 1inch drill bit hole saw e Extension cord Vacuum cleaner an approved industrial
353. an 4 39 Figure 5 1 Removing a Card adn D bed 5 5 Figure 5 2 interprocessor Message Transport Cables 5 8 Figure 5 3 Three Frame Configuration treten tede 5 8 Figure 5 4 Six Frame Configuration tee ieri 5 10 Figure 5 5 Control Shelf Cabling cedentes 5 11 Figure 5 6 Interface Cable Cross Connect Panel Connection 5 20 Figure 5 7 Adapter Slide Latch 5 23 Figure 5 8 LAN Ethernet Cable Installation eee 5 24 Figure 5 9 DCM Family Cabling Enhanced Bulk Download 5 26 Figure 5 10 Interface Cable Routing Control Shelf 5 27 Figure 5 11 Interface Cable Routing Extension Shelf 5 27 Figure 0 1 Push Inject Eject Clamps Outward 5 52 Figure 5 12 Push in Inject Bject C lamps 5 53 Fig re 5 13 System Air Bate assegno 5 55 Figure 5 14 Attach side fan bracket to front frame rail 5 56 Figure 5 15 Slide the side fan brackets flush with the Frame 5 57 Figure 5 16 Side bracket mounting positions on fan tray bracket 5 58 Figure 5 17 Insert fan tray bracket usce tate hod 5 59 Figure 5 18 Attaching the fan tray bracket to the side brackets inside front
354. ance Modem dev term b 3A RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Asynchronous System s Terminal dev cua 0 Port 4A RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Asynchronous System s Terminal dev cua 1 Port 5A RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Synchronous X 25 port dev term 2 6A RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Synchronous X 25 port dev term 3 7A RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous 8A RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous 9A RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous 10A RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous Frontethernet 100BsT LAN connection 10 100BaseT Connection to LSMS Port RJ 45 via LAN 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 33 EOAP Table 6 10 External Interfaces System B Description Connector Signal software name in Type Usage Destination parentheses Power in A System 48VDC chassis gnd N A From fuse panel power 48VDCRTN Fan Fan A Fan power alarm control N A To fan assembly A PWR A power Fan B PWR A Fan B power Fan power alarm control N A To fan assembly BCLKIN A B clock Provides fan N A From last extension input alarm control to fan A shelf backplane BCLKOUT A B clock Provides fan N A To system B BCLKIN output alarm control
355. applying power Carefully reset cards to avoid possible faulty connections PPP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 5 Introduction Introduction NOTE For the Eagle STP Software Release 30 0 8 0 all IPMX cards must be replaced by High speed Multiplexer HMUX P N 870 1965 04 cards All Maintenance Communications and Applications Processor cards must be replaced by General Purpose Service Module II GPSM II cards P N 870 2360 01 for Eagle software release 30 0 and later Beginning with EAGLE release 33 0 all IPMX cards must be replaced by HMUX cards or High Speed IMT Packet Router HIPR cards P N 870 2574 01 NOTE All Terminal Disk Modules TDM cards for Eagle software release 30 0 or later must be P N 870 0774 10 or later Terminal Disk Modules Global Timing Interface TDM GTI cards for Eagle software release 31 6 or later must be P N 870 0774 15 or later These cards are installed at the factory by Tekelec Technical Support and are not installed by customers of Tekelec NOTE TDM GTlis not available to systems that include DSO cards The signal clocking for the DSO card is provided by system clocks derived from the Building Integrated Timing System BITS composite clock signal The Time Slot Counter TSC clock is shared with the clock that is used for 050 links Customers with 050 links can only use BITS clocks as the TSC synchronization clock source Products of Tekelec s Network Systems Division
356. assembly and cooling duct to be installed in an Frame OAPF Or Preinstalled in a frame and partially cabled Table 6 2 on page 6 9 lists the installation procedures in the typical order of installation Perform the installation in the order indicated to ensure that proper prerequisites are established Skip any procedure that does not apply For initial provisioning procedures of the refer to EOAP Provisioning on page 6 101 For replacement procedures for example the replacement of a processor card or card cage refer to the Maintenance Manual included with your system documentation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 3 list the equipment required for an initial installation of the EOAP Table 6 2 Installation Order If your EOAP was delivered with Single configuration Packed shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 complete the installation in this order Install B Clock Cable on page 5 99 Install EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 16 Install Cooling Duct on page 6 20 Install EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 16 Install EOAP Shelf on page 6 23 Cable Single Configuration EOAP on page 6 35 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 0 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 Dual configuration Packed shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398
357. ate of the correct frame If required affix labels to the main fuse bank with the label under the appropriate location 2 10 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 General Installation Information Hardware Operational Testing Hardware operational testing is designed to verify the functionality of the finalized construction of the hardware at the customer site The demarcation line for the testing is up to and including the patch panel directly connected to the system cabling alarm output clock input and other Tekelec equipment is also verified operational per the Hardware Operational Test Manual provided with the test equipment The environmental conditions for the system must be maintained to the following specifications Temperature Variation Typical environmental conditions are temperature and humidity controlled With loss of environmental control the equipment covered in this manual complies with these conditions Operating 5 C to 40 41 F to 104 Exceptional Operating Limit 5 C to 50 C 23 F to 122 F no more than 96 hours duration at extremes and at elevations less than 1800m e Storage 5 C to 50 23 F to 122 Relative Humidity Operating 5 to 85 non condensing maximum absolute humidity of 0 024 kg of water per kg of dry air Short Term Operating 5 to 90 non condensing maximum absolute humidity of 0 024 kg of water per kg of dry air Elevation Operating 6
358. ay 2005 6 121 EOAP rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 IS NR Active 2 IS NR Active 3 IS NR Active 4 OOS MT DSBLD Manual 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active 7 IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 10 OOS MT DSBLD Manual 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 IS NR Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Active 16 IS NR Active Command Completed 7 Display the current EOAP configuration by entering the rtrv oap config command The output will show the EOAPs not configured This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 OAP CONFIGURATION REPORT DATA OAP A OAP B Hostname Not configured Not configured IP Address Not configured Not configured IP Netmask Not configured Not configured Default Router Not configured Not configured Config Not configured Not configured SEAC CLLI Not configured Not configured X25 Packet Size Not configured Not configured X25 Mode Not configured Not configured Active LSMS Not configured Not configured Main LSMS NSAP Not configured Not configured Main LSMS SSEL Not configured Not configured Main LSMS PSEL Not configured Not configured Shadow LSMS NSAP Not configured Not configured Shadow LSMS SSEL Not configured
359. back of the frame 4 Runthe cable off the side of the cable rack on the correct side of the frame Route the cable down the traverse arms to the correct shelf location 5 Route the cable around the top edge of the shelf and connect it to the A connector of the odd numbered card slot where the DCM card is located see Figure 5 9 CAUTION Always trim tie wrap flush and turn the trimmed tie wrap to the rear of the cable bundle when facing the rear of the frame 6 Allcable ends must be labeled TO and FROM location information on both ends Figure 5 9 DCM Family Cabling Enhanced Bulk Download A Ports Connectors DCM cables for Enhanced Bulk Download Shelf cable tie bars Frame cable tie bars Rear of extension shelf 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 10 Interface Cable Routing Control Shelf Cables to connectors Cables to connectors J31 through J38 J29 and J30 e able tie bars Shelf NT N cable tie bars Cables to connectors J45 through J52 Cables to connectors J43 and J44 cable tie bars Rear of Control Shelf _______ Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 06 Figure 5 11 Interface Cable Routing Extension Shelf Cables to connectors Cables to connectors J17 through J24 J9 and J16 Shelf cable tie bars Shelf cable tie bars Cables to connectors J33 through J40 Cables to connectors J25 and J32
360. ble is cut to the appropriate length affix labels with the item number approximately two inches from the end of the cable insulation 8 For cables not ordered through Tekelec confirm source part number and origination destination points before labeling them NOTE Allcables must be labeled with TO and FROM destinations After you have labeled all cables you are ready for cable installation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 5 Cables Introduction The listing of all cables are in numerical order If a cable has been replaced a sentence referring to that replacement cable is on the same page The words NOT TERMINATED or UNTERMINATED refers to the end of the cable that is not equipped with a connector in manufacturing and the wires must be cut dressed and connected at the site specific location C 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 803 0029 01 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable Diagnostic Cable P N 803 0029 01 provides a terminal interface for on board diagnostic tests of the Multi Port Link Interface Module MPL card The MPL card supports eight Digital Signal Level 0 DS0 ports links per module Figure C 2 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable P N 803 0029 01 MPL Card P N 870 2061 01 Diagnostic Connection
361. bling End panel gt F Row alarm cable gt n n n n n nilai KNEE ayy 110 1010000 Row alarm cable a Port J27 Rack alarm Te cable ports La L 1 aoina innn L aco mr 1 Ea r3 ra Control Frame CF 00 rear view fap 1 alcable 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frame alarm panel Rack alarm cables IMT cables CAUTION Critical area where IMT cables cross between frames L 5 11 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Interface Cable Installation The procedure in this section is used to install the interface cables The interface cables one per signaling link contain solid conductor twisted pairs for both directions of transmission in a single shield They have con
362. cable to MMI x A port P N 830 0708 xx Control shelf DB 25 backplane left side PORT 3B MMI cable to MMI x B port P N 830 0708 xx Control shelf DB 25 backplane right side PORT 4A Unused EOAP backplane PORT 4B Unused EOAP backplane PORT 5A Modem cable to X 25 Modem A EOAP backplane DB 25 P N 830 0709 xx PORT 5B Modem cable to X 25 Modem B EOAP backplane DB 25 P N 830 0709 xx PORT 6A to PORT 10A Unused EOAP backplane PORT 6B to PORT 10B Unused EOAP backplane Power IN A Power cable A P N 830 0699 xx to PORT 2A of EOAP backplane Mate N Lo EOAP A ck 3 Pin Power IN B Power cable B P N 830 0699 xx to PORT 2A of EOAP backplane Mate N Lo EOAP B ck 3 Pin 6 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 9 External Interfaces System A Description Connector Signal software name in Type Usage Destination parentheses Power in A System 48VDC chassis N A From fuse panel power 48VDCRTN Fan Fan Fan power alarm control N A To fan assembly A PWR A power Fan B PWR A Fan B power Fan power alarm control N A To fan assembly BCLKIN A B clock Provides fan N A From last extension input alarm control to fan A shelf backplane BCLKOUT A B clock Provides fan N A To system B BCLKIN output alarm control to FAP B 1A RS 232 Processor Slot 1 Asynchronous VT 520 Terminal dev term a 2A RS 232 Processor Slot 1 Asynchronous Mainten
363. cables 8 Secure the cables to the back side of the traverse arms using tie wraps 9 Plug the other end of the cable onto the fan unit connector marked FAN B POWER Secure the connector 5 74 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Powering Up the Fan Assembly All fans are fused at 2A orange per feed except for GR 376 EOAP where the fan is powered from the GR 376 Procedure Power up Fan Assembly 1 After the fan assembly is installed the powering up process depends on the shelf location The fuse card located on the Fuse and Alarm Panel are marked FAN and FAN B fuse positions 6 12 and 18 are marked correct locations on the FAP faceplate Fuse position 6 is for the fan unit directly below the x100 shelf Fuse position 12 is for the fan directly below the x200 shelf Fuse position 18 is for the fan directly below the x300 shelf 890 1038 xx fans are to be fused at 2As with orange flags per feed Fill out the fuse card completely 2 When the fan units are powered up the switch in the middle front of the fan unit must be turned to the ON position Do not set the switch to the AUTO position Figure 5 29 Front Card Suite with Fan Switch MASP A MASP B 4 PROC PROC _ MDAL 13 14 15 16 17 18 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 kasi 00000 cmm TIT
364. cables P N 830 0605 02 see Figure 5 53 on page 5 129 E1 Interface backplanes P N 890 1037 01 see Figure 5 54 on page 5 129 Table 5 8 1 and Channel Cards Card Function 1 Connectivity of both E1 interfaces to a 120 Ohms 75 Ohms E1 interface An external adapter is required for the 75 Ohm interface Processing of a total of two time slots from the E1 interfaces Interface E1 port 1 through an external backplane to Channel cards for processing of additional time slots Channel Processing of two time slots from the E1 interface Interface through an external backplane to an 1 card to process up to two time slots Installing E1 Interface Module Kit Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Tie wrap tool Diagonal cutter Slotted screwdriver ESD wrist strap 32 Phillips screw driver grounding point when handling electronic card components WARNING Use the antistatic wrist strap connected to the wrist strap 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 121 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies gt gt gt 5 122 WARNING Do not use tie wraps on or above the top traverse arm on a frame Use lacing cord Contact Site Supervisor for site specific customer information WARNING Al
365. card alw card loc xxxx Where xxxx is the MCPM card location When the card has been successfully loaded there will be a response on the terminal that downloading is complete This can take up to 10 minutes 15 Enter the following command to verify the card is operational IS NR rept stat meas If the secondary MCPM card is operational go to Step 16 If it is not call Tekelec Technical Services 16 Enter the following command to remove the primary MCPM card from service Do not use the force command unless this is the only MCPM card in service MCPM collection and reporting service should be maintained at all times NOTE Removing the last MCPM or only MCPM from service will cause loss of measurements data If there is more than one MCPM card in service enter inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the primary MCPM card location If there is only one MCPM card in service enter inh card loc xxx force yes where xxxx is the primary MCPM card location 17 Remove the MCPM card See Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 for removal procedures Place the removed MCPM card into an ESD container do not put it into the spare card storage shelf Place the new MCPM EDSM card into its place Be sure the revision numbers of the cards are compatible with the EAGLE software release If they are not compatible you should go to Step 18 to flash the card to the software release level of the EAGLE system If your ca
366. cation wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Tie wrap tool Diagonal cutters Flush cutters Wire wrap gun and bit Slotted screwdriver with 1 8 inch blade and 8 inch shank Stripper Heat gun 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 85 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Alarm Cables The rack alarm cables P N 830 0638 xx lead from ports in the system control backplane and connect with other frames in the row WARNING Always trim tie wraps flush and turn the trimmed tie wraps A to the rear of the cable bundle when facing the back of the frame The backplane alarm potts are Frame and Alarm Panel in the control frame J13 on P N 850 0330 06 FAP extension frame 00 J15 on P N 850 0330 06 FAP extension frame 01 J32 on P N 850 0330 06 extension frame 02 46 on P N 850 0330 06 FAP extension frame 03 61 on P N 850 0330 06 extension frame 04 168 on P N 850 0330 06 End panel J34 on P N 850 0330 06 use cable P N 830 0232 01 J35 and J66 on P N 850 0330 06 to holdover clock J69 on P N 850 0330 06 to OAPF e LMC J47 on P N 850 0330 06 e RMCJ33 on P N 850 0330 06 5 86 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies From the rear of the frame these cables should be routed from the connector around the left side of the frame Route the cables up the side of the frame to the FAP and secure the cables with lacing cord to the cross arms
367. cified with the chg oap config command If only one is being updated perform steps a and b in Method A for the specific EOAP If the c g2dua1 parameter was specified with the chg oap config command both EOAPs must be updated Use one of the following methods Method A updates one EOAP at a time using the force yes parameter This method allows SEAS and LNP traffic to continue being sent to the system while the EOAP configuration is being updated It can take up to 15 minutes to update the configuration of the EOAP during which time the EOAP being updated will be out of service Method B updates both EOAPs at the same time using the 11 parameter This method will take both EOAPs out of service and may interrupt all SEAS and LNP traffic to the system This is not recommended Method A is the preferred method 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 143 EOAP 6 144 Method A Perform steps a through d in this method for each EOAP one EOAP at a time a Update EOAP A by entering this command act oap config oap a force yes After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD EST Rel 26 0 0 Wait 15 minutes then enter either the rept stat seas if only the SEAS feature is on or rept stat 1sms if only the LNP feature is on commands to make sure that there are no alarms for EOAP A If both the SEAS and LNP feat
368. ck cable P N 830 0398 xx 1 Atthe EAGLE terminal check the clock A status to ensure that the redundant clock is running Enter the following command rept stat clk CARD LOC 1114 Active CARD LOC 1116 Standby PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Active PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Idle Cards using CLK A 2 Cards with bad CLK A 0 Cards using CLK B 2 Cards with bad CLK B 0 Cards using CLK I 0 Command Completed where Cards using CLK A B I is the number of cards using clocks A B and I Cards using bad CLK A B is the number of cards using clock A or clock B when clock A or B is bad Contact Technical Services or NPI before continuing 2 The B clock cable is located at the upper left of the Control shelf at B CLK OUT and goes to the B CLK IN at the lower right of the Control shelf Then from B CLK OUT on the 1200 shelf on the Control shelf to the next Extension shelf 1300 were the clock cable is located at the lower right at BCLK IN and B CLK OUT cables other than P N 830 0398 xx for Clock B must be replaced with cable P N 830 0398 xx 3 Route the new cable P N 830 0398 xx in place before removing the P N 830 0404 xx cables Once in place unplug the B clock cable P N 830 0404 xx connectors and replace them with the B clock cable P N 830 0398 xx connectors Replace one cable at a time 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 79 Eagle STP
369. command inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the location of the standby GPSM II 22 Replace the Standby TDM See Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 for replacement procedures Unseat the standby GPSM card determined in Step 4 e Remove the standby TDM card determined in Step 4 Ifyou are upgrading the standby or active TDM place the removed TDM card into an ESD container do not put it into the spare card storage shelf Ifyou upgrading the spare TDM place the previously upgraded TDM into the spare storage shelf Insert the upgrade standby TDM 15 card Re seat the standby GPSM card NOTE UAMs are generated during this step An audible alarm is generated Wait for the standby GPSM spare TDM to come up to standby mode 23 Enter the following command to display the status of the standby GPSM rept stat card loc xxxx where xxxx is the standby GPSM from the output recorded in Step 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 41 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 42 24 25 The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 18 13 10 21 EST EAGLE 31 6 0 CARD VERSION TYPE APPL PST SST AST XXXX GPSM EAOM IS NR Standby DB DIFF ALARM STATUS No Alarms IMT VERSION 025 015 000 PROM VERSION 023 002 000 IMT BUS A Conn IMT BUS B Conn Command Completed NOTE Verify that backup goes to IS NR status Enter the foll
370. connect panel Cross connect cable bracket Wire wrap pins Interface cable Cable label Wire wrap pins Shrink wrap Cross connect Cable sheathing panel tray 8 Label DSX panel 5 20 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies LAN Ethernet Cable Installation for ACM This section contains the procedures for installing the Local Area Network LAN Ethernet cable see to Figure 5 8 for the location of equipment The LAN provides selected data to a remote host system through an Ethernet network In the system communications with the host is interfaced through an Application Communication Module ACM Communications with the ACM is accomplished through system backplane interface connector associated with that particular ACM e 15 pin to 26 pin adapter e single port Ethernet transceiver Media Access Unit MAU e 10 2 Thin net coax connection or 1OBASE T twisted pair connection to the Ethernet network Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Diagonal cutters Coax crimping tool Tie wrap tool Flush cutters Slotted screwdriver with 1 8 inch blade with 8 inch
371. control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 06 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Figure 6 18 Route Clock Connection Cable EOAP 830 0398 19 1 830 0598 04 830 039814 Il Rear view Extension Extensio Extension Extension Extension 111 830 0398 11 1 T Extension Extension Extensio GR 376 EOAP 5 B CLKIN A 830 0398 20 830 0398 20 830 0398 21 5 1 ee 4 Extension Extensi 830 0398 40 Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension Control frame frame frame frame frame frame OAP or GP EF 04 EF 03 EF 02 EF 01 EF 00 CF 00 frame Clock Connection Cable 8 Connect the modem terminal cables to the backplane a Connect one end of terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx to port 1A on the EOAP backplane attach the converter P N 804 0176 01 to the other end of this cable and then attach terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx to the converter This extended cable will attach to the COM 2 port of the VT 520 display unit connected to the b Connect one end of the dial up modem A cable P N 830 0709 xx to port 2A c Connect the X 25 modem A cable to port 5A of the EOAP backplane and to X 25 modem A d Connect the X 25 modem B cable to port 6A of the EOAP backplane and to X 25 modem B 9 Tighten all modem terminal cable connectors to th
372. ctor 02 3 02 OP 0009 00 69 69 amp 9 69 9 2 09 9 4 Table B 25 General Purpose Relay Connector 02 Pin Signal 1 2 13 14 not used 18 25 3 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 2 Normally Closed 4 GPRCOM2 General Purpose Relay 2 Common 5 2 General Purpose Relay 2 Normally Open 6 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 3 Normally Closed 7 GPRCOM2 General Purpose Relay 3 Common 8 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 3 Normally Open 9 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 4 Normally Closed 10 GPRCOM2 General Purpose Relay 4 Common 11 GPRNO2 General Purpose Relay 4 Normally Open 12 Logic ground 15 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 5 Normally Closed 16 2 General Purpose Relay 5 Common 17 GPRNO2 General Purpose Relay 5 Normally Open 19 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 6 Normally Closed 20 2 General Purpose Relay 6 Common 21 GPRNO2 General Purpose Relay 6 Normally Open 22 GPRNC2 General Purpose Relay 7 Normally Closed 23 GPRCOM2 General Purpose Relay 7 Common 24 GPRNO2 General Purpose Relay 7 Normally Open 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 39 Connectors General Purpose Serial Interface J76 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J73 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 28 General Purpose Serial Interface Connector 01 GPSI OOOO 090 09 9 QD 9 Table B 26 General Purpose
373. ctors specified on the cable labels as shown in Table 5 4 and Table 5 5 Tighten both connector screws 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 101 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 10 Dress cables and secure with cable ties Cut cable tie straps flush with the cable tie head and turn the trimmed portion to the rear of the cable NOTE Allcables must be laced onto the top traverse arms of each frame Only lacing is used from the top traverse arms and above on the frame and on the cable rack Figure 5 35 Clock Cable A and B clocks 830 0398 19 830 0398 04 830 0398 14 830 0398 13 Control Backplane P N 850 0330 06 Extension 830 0398 11 Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension i Extension Extension 830 0398 20 830 0398 20 830 0398 20 830 0398 20 Extension 830 0398 21 Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension 830 0398 20 Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension frame frame frame frame frame EF 04 EF 03 EF 02 EF 01 EF 00 Rear view This is a high level diagram Connections represent BOTH A and B frame cables Control Backplane 850 0330 04 Control Backplane P N 850 0330 04 requires additional and different cables to the first extension shelf Control frame OAP frame CF 00 830 065
374. cumxp 21 LVO WHT 1 1 gt lt gt lt VIO WHT 5 _ WHT GRY WHT GRY RXD 22 16 RXD GRY WHT GRY WHT RXD 23 1 17 RXD RFP 24 LAN BRN L TAN BRN 18 RFP 25 Ed TCU BRN TAN 10 NO CONTACT INSTALLED 26 UJ DRAIN T i J NS ER POS 20 POS 1 LENGTH L 4 5 0 C 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Cables 830 0609 01 Included Fan Assembly The fan cable P N 830 0609 01 is included with the fan assembly Plug one end of the cable P N 830 0609 01 into the J 9 on the backplane P N 850 0330 06 Route the cable to the left of the frame faced from the rear and to the assembly to the connection marked FAN A POWER For B fan power Plug one end of the cable P N 830 0609 01 into J 8 on the backplane P N 850 0330 06 Route the cable to the left of the frame faced from the rear and to the fan assembly to the connection marked FAN B POWER Form and dress the two cables together and check the security of all of the connections 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 29 Cables 830 0622 xx E1 Cable Figure C 23 E 1 Cable P N 830 0622 xx P2 Pin 1 Pin 10 P1 P2 DB 26 Male Unterminated Unterminated 2 E1N 60 WHT BLU Unterminated 2 E1P 60 Unterminated RX2 E1N 60 WHT ORG Unterminated RX2 E1P 60 Unterminated RX1 E1N 60
375. d If alarms are shown for the EOAPs in either the rept stat seas or rept stat 1sms outputs contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 17 If you upgraded from a single configuration to EOAP to a dual configuration EOAP configure the Eagle STP database with the new number of EOAPs chg oap config config dual After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD Configure the new hostname chg oap config aname tekelec 12 chg oap config bname tekelec 13 where aname is a 14 character 1 alphabetic character followed by 1 to 13 alphanumeric characters hostname for EOAP A The value must be enclosed in quotes bname is 14 character 1 alphabetic character followed by 1 to 13 alphanumeric characters hostname for EOAP B The value must be enclosed in quotes 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP After successful completion of each command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD 11 Configure the IP network for the LNP feature and optionally for the SEAS feature Enter the following command and parameter required chg oap config aipaddr 192 106 175 025 chg oap config bipaddr 192 106 175 026 where aipaddr is the EOAP A IP address network service acces
376. d Screws 10 11 12 13 14 P d Fan assembly o 8 fans Return to the back of the frame and tighten the screws in the mounting brackets into the side of the fan unit When the fan unit is aligned and in place tighten the screws in the brackets on the sides of the frame Reinstall the fan filter The filter has an arrow stamped on the top edge to indicate the direction of the air flow The arrow points toward the fans Install the fan grill placing it back on the front of the unit and FINGER TIGHTEN the thumb screws on the front of the grill Remove the piece of fiber paper on the top of the shelf below where the fan is to be installed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Installing Fan Cables AN On the control and extension shelf backplanes the connectors are marked A FAN POWER and B FAN POWER Control shelf On backplane P N 850 0330 06 the connectors are A FAN POWER J 9 and B FAN POWER J 8 These connectors are located at the upper middle of the backplane on both the control shelf and the extension shelves Extension shelf The backplane connectors are J 3 and J 2 For A fan power The fan cable P N 830 0609 01 is included with the fan assembly Plug one end of the cable P N 830 0609 01 into the J 9 on the backplane P N 850 0330 06 Route the cable to the left of the frame faced from the rear and to the assembly to the co
377. d by Tekelec gt 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Floor Preparation for Heavy Duty Frame This section describes how to lay out the floor plan for on site flooring and how to prepare a raised floor or a concrete floor for frame installation For specific types of flooring refer to Concrete Floor on page 3 20 or Attach Unistrut Overhead Support on page 3 24 General Floor Preparation The floor layout frame layout is site specific however the most typical frame layout is constructed with Extension Frames to the right of the Control Frame when viewed from the front The OAP Frame if applicable is typically on the left of the Control Frame Miscellaneous Frames and other support or feature specific frames are lined up to the left of the Control Frame Refer to Figure 3 7 Typically the aisle space from the rear of the frame to the front of other frames or equipment is three feet The end of the frame layout must be no less than 12 inches from other telco frames NOTE Therecommended minimum aisle spacing is 2 1 2 ft 75 cm front and rear Figure 3 7 Typical Frame Layout Rear E I I New Miscellaneous Control Extension 1 features i frame optional frame frame I I ml 4 ml 4 ml 14 gt e k inches inches inches inches inches Front Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Fie
378. damaged equipment by calling 1 888 673 4827 Shipping Manager Tekelec 26604 West Agoura Road Calabasas California 91302 818 880 7848 Tekelec Technical Support Tekelec technical support includes installation support hardware operational testing support and general technical service support Installation Support Tekelec Technical Services provides a point of contact through which support can be provided for problems that may be encountered during normal operation of the system To receive technical assistance call the Tekelec Technical Services department at one of the following locations Tekelec UK Phone 44 1784 467 804 Tekelec USA Phone within the continental US 888 FOR TKLC Phone outside the continental US 1 919 460 2150 Or you can request assistance by way of electronic mail at support tekelec com 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 17 Introduction Once a Customer Service Request CSR is issued Technical Services along with the customer determines the classification of the trouble Problems are reported using problem criteria as defined in the following sections and TL 9000 Quality System Metrics Book Two Release 3 0 The following sections list Problem Criteria as defined in this document and in Reference 1 Problem Critical Critical problems severely affect service capacity traffic billing and maintenance capabilities and requires immediate corrective action regardles
379. dby MASP to the area on the fixed disk For this example enter the following to copy the security log entries copy seculog slog stb dfile upg procC The following is an example of the message that should appear tekelecstp YY MM DD hh mm ss TTTT PPP XX x x YY y y Security log on TDM 111X copied to file upg28 procC on TDM 111Y tekelecstp YY MM DD hh mm ss TTTT PPP XX x x YY y y 0468 0177 SECULOG 111X Security log exception cleared Issue the following command to display the directory disp fta dir The following is sample output tekelecstp YY MM DD hh mm ss TTTT PPP XX x x YY y y File Transfer Area Directory of fixed disk 1114 FILENAME LENGTH LAST MODIFIED LBA YYMMDDs log 2560256 99 01 03 10 18 44 388769 YYMMDDa log 2560256 99 01 03 10 19 20 393770 m60 lnp csv 0 99 01 03 13 10 38 398771 3 File s 21093376 bytes free If there are any files that need to be saved they need to be removed by means of a file transfer If this is necessary contact Tekelec Technical Services for further information 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 20 Enter the following command to delete all files in the FTA area dlt fta all yes The system returns output similar to the following tekelecstp 00 01 07 07 26 18 EST Rel 31 6 0 dlt fta all yes Command entered at terminal 42 21 Inhibit the standby GPSM II card by entering the following
380. ded to position frame over threaded rod and install hold down plates washers and nuts in the bottom of the frame Securely tighten the nuts with a socket wrench 6 Replace tiles if necessary 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Figure 3 10 shows a heavy duty frame installed on a raised floor Figure 3 10 Raised Floor Installation Elements Frame side Locking nut Washer Finger tighten nuts above Holddown plate raised floor before attaching nuts below raised floor Isolation sheet 4 Subfloor marking tool Raised floor gt Concrete floor Large washer Flat washers Anchor assembly 77 Small washer and nuts with threaded rod Nut WARNING Finger tighten nuts on threaded rods inside the frames above AN the raised floor before tightening the nuts below the raised floor 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 17 Frames and Shelves Refer to Figure 3 11 when installing the heavy duty frame on a raised floor using overhead racks flat washers and nuts Cable Rack Mounting Kit P N 804 1571 01 Figure 3 11 Raised Floor With Washers and Nuts Nut Auxiliary Bar Overhead rack Clip Threaded rod Isolator Nut ndi 1 1 2 threaded rod N 804 1571 01 side 4 PLACES Nut Finger tighten nuts above raised floor before attaching nuts below raised floor Small washer
381. dure Configure TDM Ports for EOAP at Eagle STP EOAP 1 Verify that the and LNP features are turned on gtt on and 1np on using the rtrv feat command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 EAGLE FEATURE LIST GTT X25G SEAS LNP WNP TLNP X252000 ITUMTPRS on on on on off off off off GWS LAN LFS FAN CNCF PLNP SLSOCB SCCPCNV on on off on on off off on NRT CRMD MTPRS DSTNA 000 LNP12MIL EGTT If both features are turned on go to step 2 off off off off off off off off To turn on the LNP feature or to turn on the LNP and the GTT features refer to procedure Activating the LNP Feature in the Eagle STP Database Administration Manual LNP Then return to step 2 2 Display the values of all terminals using the rtrv trm command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM TYPE 1 VT320 2 KSR 3 KSR 4 VT320 5 VT320 6 VT320 7 PRINTER 8 KSR 1 9 VT320 10 VT320 11 VT320 12 PRINTER 13 VT320 14 VT320 15 VT320 16 VT320 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 OMM 9600 7 E 9600 7 E FC SW 2 o zs TMOUT MXINV DURAL 99 59 60 30 60 60 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 5 XO O LNP LNP INDEF
382. e 16 IS NR Active Command Completed If the entry IS NR is not shown in the field of the rept stat trm output the EOAP port has not been returned to service Contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 If the LNP feature is on display the LNP services in the database with the rtrv 1np serv command Before the EOAP configuration can be updated with the act oap config command the LNP translation type services CLASS LIDB CNAM and ISVM must be defined in the database This is an example of the possible output the required LNP services contained in the output example are shown in bold rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 SERV TT TTN DV ALIAS AIN 15 AINGTE TCAP 235 236 240 IN 30 INGTE TCAP 150 175 LIDB 20 LIDB SCCP 80 CLASS 25 CLASSGTE SCCP UDF1 201 UDF1 SCCP UFD3 100 UFD3 SCCP 40 45 WNP 50 WNP50 TCAP TT SERV TABLE IS 12 of 256 5 FULL 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP If the LNP translation type services CLASS LIDB CNAM and ISVM are not shown in the output of the rtrv 1np serv command go to procedure Adding an LNP Service in the Eagle STP Database Administration Manual LNP and add the required translation types to the database In this output example the ISVM and CNAM LNP translation type services are not in the database 18 Send the EOAP configuration data to the EOAP using the act oap config command If only
383. e EOAP 10 Connect the MMI X cables P N 830 0708 xx to the control shelf backplane P N 890 0191 03 a Connect the A cable to port 4A of the EOAP backplane and to the A port on the control shelf backplane of the Eagle STP b Connect the B cable to port 3A of the EOAP backplane and to the MMI X B port on the control shelf backplane of the Eagle STP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 37 EOAP 6 38 11 Route all new cables down to the bottom tie down rod and across the rod to the right side of the EOAP backplane Use cable ties to secure the cables to the tie down rod every three to four inches 12 Wrap the cables with fiber paper at the point they are routed around the edge of the EOAP shelf toward the frame rails 13 Route the cables up the frame rail onto the cable rack and from there to each of their destinations Form and dress the cables using cable ties to secure the cables to the frame rail and the traverse arms every three to four inches 14 Tighten all connectors at their destination 15 At the front of the locate the Ethernet port on the processor card Insert the Ethernet cable 16 Verify your cable connections using Figure 6 15 EOAP Backplane Cable Connections Single Configuration on page 6 30 or Figure 6 16 EOAP Cable Connections Diagram Single Configuration on page 6 31 You have completed the cabling for the single configuration Power up EOAP B next Refer to Procedure
384. e STP reports the following alarm 303 COOLING FAN NORMAL Connect the clock in out cable to ports BCLKOUT A and BCLKIN B Attach power cable B P N 830 0699 xx a Connect one end to port POWER IN B b Loosely route power cable B from connector POWER IN B down and across the second tie down rod Route the cable to the left side of the shelf c Route the cable around the side of the shelf along the outside of a traverse arm extender but on the inside of the traverse arm and then to the frame rail Route the cable up the frame rail to the FAP Secure the cable with a cable tie near the FAP Finish power cable B at the FAP Butt the cable at 1 and 1 2 inch beyond the frame rail The butted cable exposes three wires blue brown and green with a yellow tracer Fan out the wires and attach them to the FAP as described next 10 With P N 870 2320 01 FAP prepare the wires and terminate them on each side of the FAP as follows a Place terminal ring P N 502 0040 01 over each wire end and fasten it with a crimping tool 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP b Usea small straight or Phillips screw driver and remove the terminal screw from the RETURN RTN terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the blue wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip Reinsert the screw and tighten it c Remove the terminal screw from the 48V terminal strip Center the terminal ring of the brown wire over the screw hole in the terminal strip
385. e baffle in place b The brackets P N 652 0954 01 are installed from the rear of the frame using the screws provided with the brackets c When the brackets are attached secure them to the frame using four screws P N 600 0193 01 and external tooth washers P N 606 0062 01 2 Place a piece of fiber paper on the top of the shelf below where the fan is to be installed to ensure that nothing will drop into the area and equipment below 3 Remove the four screws two on each side from the mounting brackets on the frame that hold the baffle in place on both sides Place the screws in a safe place because they are used later in this procedure 4 Loosen the four screws two on either side that hold the mounting brackets to the frame This will allow the removal of the bracket Figure 6 4 Fan Baffle to be Removed Remove flange and save the screws Baffle 5 Remove the baffle through the front of the frame 6 16 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 6 Remove the fan assembly from the shipping container The fan is shipped with the side flange not attached 7 Remove the grill and filter from the fan assembly by loosening the two thumb screws on the grill faceplate Temporarily store all in a safe place Figure 6 5 Remove Grill and Filter from Fan Assembly Fan Assembly Filter Grill 8 From the front of the frame slide the fan assembly into the shelf Figures 6 6 shows a fan assembly inser
386. e bay carefully insert the card through the proper opening Align the edges of the card with the channels in the card guides Then push the assembly until the rear connectors on the drive begin engaging the mated connectors on the backplane Figures 6 45 shows the insertion of the hard drive Figure 6 45 Installing a Drive Assembly Align the edges of the card with the card guides 14 Press faceplate of assembly using constant pressure until connections are fully seated Figures 6 46 shows the faceplate of the hard drive Figure 6 46 Pressing the Faceplate Press the faceplate near the areas where the handle is in lt contact with the faceplate 6 68 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 15 Push in each head of the left and right captive screws on the faceplate until the threads make contact with the floating fasteners in the drive bay faceplate Use your fingers to firmly tighten each screw WARNING not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 You have now installed the EOAP cards and drives The hard drive is preloaded with software but must be provisioned at the Eagle STP after the EOAP installation is completed For provisioning procedures at the Eagle STP refer to Section EOAP Provisioning on page 6 101 Change the EOAP cabling to a dual configuration next Change Cabling from Single to Dual Configuration Use this pr
387. e dias Re 6 5 dis ose atate tia Sak Ge beste dia PUE a Rd 6 8 uana 6 8 BOAP Pati 6 14 EOAD Self aee testet dr i aede n atur 6 21 EQAP sasaqa pm n 6 26 FOAR Power 6 73 Fam Operation aa 6 74 Maintenance Modem Setups 6 77 EOAP Test Procedures uite ctp 6 79 6 80 Provisioning 6 101 EOAP Initial Implementation coude epe aet tree 6 104 TRE EVES po dtmifes 6 134 GR376 ie ette neben petet 6 149 GR 376 HO AP Installation 6 154 VI Editor Quick Reference essen eene 6 164 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Safety Information Tekelec uses these icons and text throughout this manual to alert the reader to assure personal safety to minimize possible service interruptions and to warn of the potential for equipment damage TOPPLE This icon and text indicate the possibility of personal injury and equipment damage DANGER This icon and text indicate the possibility of personal injury CAUTION This icon and text indicate the possibility of service in
388. e holdover clock and down the right side of the miscellaneous frame NOTE Run primary and secondary clock cables on separate racks to BITS clock 3 Tie wrap each cable to the control shelf cable tie bar located at the rear of the shelf 4 Pull any slack out of each cable towards the holdover clock output panel 5 Dress the cables neatly and tie wrap to the cable tie bars at the side of the frames NOTE Allcables must be laced to the top traverse arms and above on any frame 6 Prepare the cables for wire wrapping by removing the outer insulation of each cable even with the top of the output panel 7 Apply a 1 1 2 inch length of shrink wrap tubing Center the tubing on the end of the cable insulation before shrinking tubing with a heat gun 8 Cutthe wires to length strip and wire wrap to the output panel at the locations shown in Figure 5 38 Figure 5 38 Output Panel Clock Connections Control shelf primary BITS clock J40 or J49 connections Tip connection white blue 1 1 2 TO2 TO 1 Control shelf secondar BITS clock J41 or J48 connections Tip connection white blue S T 718 Ring connection blue white Ring connection blue white J2 J1 output panel 9 Ensure that
389. e new TSM card into the vacated slot Be sure the revision numbers on the card are compatible with the EAGLE software release If in doubt call Tekelec Technical Services Use the alw card command to put the new TSM card into service This command causes the MASP to begin downloading tables to the new TSM card Enter the following alw card loc xxxx where xxxx is the TSM card location When the card has been successfully loaded there will be a response on the terminal that downloading is complete This can take up to 30 minutes Enter the following command to verify the successful download of GWS data and to verify that the new card has returned to service rept stat card The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 98 02 04 12 57 21 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 CARD VERSION TYPE APPL PST SST AST 1101 024 001 000 ASM GLS IS NR Active 1113 024 102 000 MASP OAM IS NR Active 1114 IS NR Active TIIS aca MASP OAM OOS MT Isolated IIl6 T M OOT MT Isolated 241020 MDAL IS NR Active 1201 024 102 000 LIMOCU CCS7ITU IS NR Active 1202 024 001 000 LIMDSO CCS7ITU IS NR Active M BIP ERR 1203 024 001 000 LIMDSO SS7ANSI IS NR Active 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1205 1207 1211 1212 Command Completed 024 001 000 024 001 000 024 001 000 024 001 000 L
390. e piece of fiber paper on the top of the shelf below where the fan assembly was installed This procedure is complete above the fan does not contain any empty slots Install an air management card P N 870 1824 01 in any empty slots to ensure proper air flow These filler cards have no electrical connection to the system See Eagle STP and IP SG Module Installation page 2 6 for general card installation guidelines CAUTION Before powering up the fans ensure that the shelf directly 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 63 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Installing Fan Cables 5 64 On the control and extension shelf backplanes the connectors are marked A FAN POWER and B FAN POWER Control shelf On backplane P N 850 0330 06 the connectors are A FAN POWER J 9 and B FAN POWER J 8 These connectors are located at the upper middle of the backplane on both the control shelf and the extension shelves Extension shelf The backplane connectors J 3 and J 2 For A fan power The fan cable P N 830 0609 01 is included with the fan assembly Plug one end of the cable P N 830 0609 01 into the J 9 on the backplane P N 850 0330 06 Route the cable to the left of the frame faced from the rear and to the assembly to the connection marked FAN A POWER For B fan power Plug one end of the cable P N 830 0609 01 into J 8 on the backplane P N 850 0330 06 Route the cable to the right
391. e rack horn using lacing cord Label each cable TO and FROM for later use Figure 4 12 Ground Bar and Logic Ground Installation Cable must fill and be visible in lug window Metal Disc non oxidizing grease non oxidizing grease 5 Cables must be labeled 145C tags should have TO and FROM location information Example TO system ground bar Control Frame CF00 FROM MGB Main Ground Bar DO NOT double lug The practice of using one bolt through a lug and the ground bar and through another lug on the other side of the ground bar held in place by one nut A bolt through any nut must show at least two threads beyond the nut but no more than four threads should be showing 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Figure 4 13 System Logic Ground Connection 9 tam rund bar Figure 4 14 Alarm Cable Arm Alarm cable arm or Alarm cable horn is for alarm and clockcable only Cables must be laced in place Tie wraps are not allowed above top traverse arm Top traverse arm Rear of FAP Ground bar NOTE The alarm cable arm is for alarm cable which maybe a clock cable Fuse Verification For each fuse location verify that individual fuse failures affect only the circuits assigned to
392. e that you can expect after updating a group of EOAP parameters You do not need to perform the actions manually they are all automatic when the act oap config command is executed Table 6 16 Performance Impact of act oap config Parameters EOAP Action Bring Down Configured Bring Down and Parameter Restart Rebuild Bring Rebuild Q3 Total Time GU Restart piine Up and SEAS and SEAS Required p Q3 Links SEAS M gil pO Links Reboot Links in Links ano EOAP 7 seconds Links Reboot EOAP Group A X lt 65 mpsel spsel mssel sssel mnsap snsap serv Group B X 260 x25ps x25mode Group C X 320 clli seacclli Group D X 560 aname bname aipaddr bipaddr anmask bnmask arouter brouter Group A and B X 260 Groups and C X 320 6 114 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 16 Performance Impact of act oap config Parameters Continued EOAP Action Bring Down z d Parameter Restart BringPownQ3 Rebuild Total Time Restart and SEAS and SEAS Required P O3Links SEAS rin SC Links Reboot Links in Links links EOAP Reboot seconds EOAP Groups A and D X 560 Group A B and C X 320 Group A B and D X 560 Groups A C and D X X 620 Group B and C X 320 Group B and D X X 620 Group B C and D X X 620 Groups C and D X 620
393. e upgraded to accommodate 60 Amp feeds The FAPs required are P N 870 2320 01 with diode kit P N 870 1831 02 for heavy duty frames or 60 Amp FAP P N 870 1606 02 with diode kit 870 1831 01 for standard frames Customers do not perform FAP upgrade these upgrades are performed by Tekelec personnel For Input Power and Logic GND use ONLY straight two hole lugs 10 hole on 5 8 inch centers long barrel with windows P N 502 0085 01 for fuse and alarm panel connectors 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels connections to the FAP are 6 AWG number 6 American Wire Gage Table 4 2 shows the list of required wiring sizes based on the length of the cable run H tap to the main feed where larger gauge wire is required for long cable runs Use H taps at the fuse and alarm panel and power board to reduce the wire size to 6 AWG NOTE Specific wire sizes may be determined by the site requirements Table 4 2 Power Cable Conductor Sizes Cable Length 2 Size American Wire auge up to 40 ft 12 2 meters 6 up to 65 ft 19 8 meters 4 up to 100 ft 30 5 meters 2 up to 160 ft 48 8 meters 1 0 Table 4 3 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm Flags Fuse Amp Fuse Flag Color Fuse Amp Fuse Flag Color 0 18A Orange Red 2A Orange 0 2A Black Red 2 5A White Orange 0 25A Violet 3A Blue 0 33A Yellow Green 3 5A White Blue 0 375A White Green 4A White Br
394. each tie wrap strap is cut flush with the tie wrap head so that no sharp edges are exposed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Terminal Cables There are 16 I O ports on the control shelf backplane that are used to support external printers terminals or modems Use cable P N 830 0535 xx Different combinations of adapters are possible see Table 5 6 Refer to Appendix B Connectors for detailed cable and adapter connector information Procedure Running Terminal Cables 1 Seethe Cable Running List in the Equipment Specification to determine how to connect the external cables All cable ends must be labeled with TO and FROM location information from Port to Backplane 2 Place the cables on the cable rack Feed the cable ends with connectors down the side of the system outside the cable tie bars around the top or bottom edge of the control shelf and fan out to the connectors 3 Secure each connector to the designated receptacle on the control shelf backplane Plug the connector in start one of the connector screws fully tighten the second screw then fully tighten the first screw 4 Tie wrap each cable to the cable tie bar at the rear of the shelf 5 Dress the cables neatly and tie wrap to the cable tie bars at the side of the frame Pull the slack in the cable back toward the other end of the cables and lace to the cable rack 6 Ensure that each tie
395. ease 30 0 Table 1 1 MIM Release Compatibility E1 T1 MIM Release Release Release Release Release Part Number 28 x 29 0 29 0 2 29 1 29 1 1 870 2198 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 870 2198 02 No No Yes No Yes 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs EDCM Double Slot Enhanced DCM Card EDCM Double slot part numbers is 870 2197 01 Figure A 10 EDCM Double Slot LEDs LEDs Descriptions TEKELEC APPL RED Critical alarm condition PROC detected GREEN No alarm IMT A RED Major alarm condition APPL detected O PROC GREEN No alarm OIMTA ONTE IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected OPORTB GREEN No alarm Serial number PORT GREEN PORT A is the active PORT e RED PORT A is inactive code PORT B GREEN PORT B is the active PORT RED PORT B is inactive Revisic numbe Part number gt c F Sq o 870 2197 01 fp 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 13 LEDs EDCM Single Slot Enhanced DCM Card EDCM single slot part numbers is 870 2372 01 Figure A 11 EDCM Single Slot LEDs LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Critical alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm Proc IMTA RED Major alarm condition O mra detected GREEN No alarm MTB PORTA IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected O PoRTB GREEN No alarm PORT A GREEN
396. ease 33 0 all systems with HCMIM cards must have the 890 0001 01 fan assembly installed Tools needed e 1 Flat screwdriver 2 Philips screwdriver long Fiber Paper Approximately 2 x 3 5 16 ratchet socket wrench Tie Wraps Procedure Install and Retrofitting Fans 1 Determine which shelves will have HCMIM modules installed and be aware of hardware that needs to be retained or installed in a specific way 5 54 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 2 Place a piece of fiber paper on the top of the shelf below where the fan is to be installed to ensure that nothing will drop into equipment below the new fan 3 Make sure to pull both dummy fuses from the appropriate fuse locations for the A and B fan power Use the following guidelines to determine fuse locations The fuse card located on the Fuse and Alarm Panel is marked FAN A and FAN B Fuse positions 6 12 and 18 are the correct locations on the FAP faceplate Fuse position 6 is for the fan unit directly below the x100 shelf Fuse position 12 is for the fan directly below the x200 shelf Fuse position 18 is for the fan directly below the x300 shelf All fans are to be fused at 3As with blue flags per feed Fill out the fuse card completely 4 If you are installing the fan assembly into an existing frame remove the four screws two on each side that attach the air baffle to the mountin
397. ease is not needed on a tin ground bar where the lug contacts the ground bar 5 Crimp a 6 AWG lug with a window on the cable Use an embossing crimper The stripped cable must fill lug completely to the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug WARNING logic ground connections must be made to the system AN ground bar Figure 4 10 System Logic Ground Bar and Cable System Control Frame CF 00 rear view lt System logic ground cable B 00000000 B 22 JO sss Bep System ground bar z aa 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 17 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 18 NOTE It may be necessary to drill the central office ground window bar to accept the 3 8 inch bolts on one inch centers Apply the 145C cable tags see Figure 4 12 on page 4 20 provided to both ends of the ground cable including the Do Not Disconnect Install the logic ground cable lugs P N 804 0817 02 using the 1 4 inch 20 copper plated hardware provided refer to Figure 4 11 Tighten the bolts to 68 inch pounds Figure 4 11 System Logic Grounding 400A 2000A Ground window Producers Neutral id Isolated IN E E 3 yr L gt a o 2 MAX RESET MAX AC DC 2o gt 588 lt o Coppe
398. elecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel rept stat clk Command entered at termoinal 1 tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel CARD LOC 1114 Standby CARD LOC 1116 Active PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Idle SECONDARY BITS Idle HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS SECONDARY CLK Idle HS SECONDARY CLK Idle PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards using CLK A 7 Cards with bad CLK A 000 Cards using CLK B 0 Cards with bad CLK B 000 Cards using CLK I 0 Command Completed PST SST AST HS SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards using HS CLK A 1 Cards with bad HS CLK A 0 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 95 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 96 10 11 12 13 14 Cards using HS CLK B 0 Cards with bad HS CLK B 0 Cards using HS CLK I I Command Completed Verify that both BITS clocks are either in IDLE or ACTIVE state on both ACTIVE and STANDBY MASP underlined cards with bad CLK values should equal zero For the B frame clock cable being replaced remove all tie wraps or lacing cord securing the cable in the frame Remove the B frame cable from the shelf s B CLK OUT connector Remove the other end of the frame clock cable from the next shelf s B CLK IN connector Select a new frame clock cable P N 830 0398 xx and connect it to the B C
399. em with the fan alarm Procedure Install Clock In Out Cable 1 Takethe EOAP clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx and plug one end onto the backplane connector marked BCLKOUT A located at the top center of the EOAP backplane 2 Plug the other end of the clock in out cable onto the BCLKIN B connector at the bottom center of the EOAP backplane Tighten the connectors Figure 6 23 shows the clock in out cable connected to the EOAP backplane Figure 6 23 Install EOAP Clock In Out Cable P N 830 0609 xx 0 POWER IN C H PORT1A PORT2A raro 3A lt gt A d OAPbackcables POWER IN B FAN BPWR A FANA PWR A A RST A BCLKOUT A CO PORT 18 PORT 2B 830 0609 01 Clock In Out for fan alarm FAN B 8 APWR B gt RST B f BCLKIN B B c 01 Q Oi E A E m CR WENT PORT 6B PORT 9B PORT 8B PORT 7B PORT 5B PORT 10B PORT SA V 10A TH R 9A PORT 7A PORT 8A You have now connected the BCLKOUT A and BCLKIN B ports on the back of the EOAP with the clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx Finish this cable with the other cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 910 4601 01 Re
400. ems representative who initiates the design engineering evaluation Once the evaluation and repair if applicable is complete the results are documented and the PCB returned to NSG QA Returning a Crate Use the following procedure to return a shipping crate and dollies to Tekelec 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 23 Introduction 1 24 Procedure Preparing Crate and Dolly for Return to Tekelec 1 Replace the retaining brace 2 Replace the shipping container front panel using the bolts saved previously and arrange the return shipment by contacting Shipping Manager TEKELEC Attn RMA Department 5200 Paramount Parkway Morrisville NC 27560 assigned by Tekelec gt 3 After the frame is positioned and the dollies are removed from the frame the dollies are returned to the same address as the shipping container listed above If the equipment is being immediately installed ship the dollies back to Tekelec in the crate after use After installing the equipment bolt the dollies securely in the crate and return to Tekelec OR If the equipment is not being immediately installed ship the dollies back to Tekelec in the box supplied with the crate After unpacking the equipment return the crate to Tekelec and retain the box to return the dollies After installing the equipment remove the dollies and return to Tekelec in the supplied box It is the site supervisor s responsibility to assure the crate and
401. en returned to service Contact the Tekelec Technical Support department see Tekelec Technical Support on page 1 17 15 If the LNP feature is on display the LNP services in the database with the rtrv 1np serv command Before the EOAP configuration can be updated with the act oap config command the LNP translation type services CLASS LIDB CNAM and ISVM must be defined in the database 6 142 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP This is an example of the possible output the required LNP services contained in the output example are shown in bold rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 SERV TT TTN DV ALIAS AIN 15 AINGTE TCAP 235 236 240 IN 30 INGTE TCAP 150 175 LIDB 20 LIDB SCCP 80 CLASS 25 CLASSGTE SCCP UDF1 201 UDF1 SCCP zt UFD3 100 UFD3 SCCP 40 45 WNP 50 WNP50 TCAP por TT SERV TABLE IS 12 of 256 5 FULL If the LNP translation type services CLASS LIDB CNAM and ISVM are not shown in the output of the rtrv 1np serv command go to procedure Adding an LNP Service in the Eagle STP Database Administration Manual LNP and add the required translation types to the database In this output example the ISVM and CNAM LNP translation type services are not in the database 16 Send the EOAP configuration data to the EOAP using the act oap config command If only one is being updated the force yes parameter must be specified with the act oap config command unless the c g sng1 parameter was spe
402. ension Shelf Interface Connector Pins and Signals 33 Connectors Ports and Card Slots B 34 External Alarm Connector a B 35 Fan Power ConnectOr centem crue peine B 36 Alarm Interface Connector B 37 General Purpose Relay Connector 01 B 38 General Purpose Relay Connector 02 B 39 General Purpose Serial Interface Connector 01 GPSI B 40 Control Shelf HMUX A Backplane Pin Outs B 41 Control Shelf HMUX B Backplane Pin Outs B 43 HMUX Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs P9 and P26 B 46 Interface Connector Pins and Signal sss B 49 Interface Connectors Ports and Card Slots B 50 IPMX Connector Pins zitiert B 51 IPM Connector rete hn 52 Local Maintenance Center Alarm Connector B 53 Backplane Pin outs Iano B 54 Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connectors B 55 ius ne teint B 57 MDAL Back plane Bottom aea Qao B 58 OAP Alarm Connecctor a B 60 Power Connector ete
403. eplacement procedure described in Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 Place the removed ASM card into a ESD container do not put it into the spare card storage shelf Place the new TSM card into its place Be sure the revision numbers on the card are compatible with the EAGLE software release If in doubt call Tekelec Technical Services 7 Use the alw card command to put the new TSM card into service This command causes the MASP to begin downloading tables to the new TSM card Enter the following alw card loc xxxx where xxxx is the TSM card location When the card has been successfully loaded there will be a response on the terminal that downloading is complete This can take up to 30 minutes 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 29 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 10 11 5 30 Enter the following command to verify the card is operational and providing SCCP services rept stat sccp The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 98 02 07 16 10 50 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 SCCP SUBSYSTEM REPORT IS NR Active SCCP Cards Configured 1 Cards IS NR 1 Capacity Threshold 100 CARD VERSION PST SST AST MSU USAGE CPU USAGE 1212 024 001 000 IS NR Active ALMINH 47 32 SCCP Service Average MSU Capacity 47 Average CPU Capacity 32 Command Completed Repeat this procedure beginning with Step 5 for any additional ASM SCCP cards in service as identified in Step 1 T
404. er supply from slot 7 Performing a hardware reset runs a HIGH RISK of corrupting the operating system to the point of rendering it unusable If this occurs the operating system and system software must be reloaded A hardware reset also runs the RISK of causing the hard drive to fail If this occurs the hard drive must be replaced 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Introduction This chapter describes the installation cabling and provisioning procedures for the EAGLE Embedded Operations Support System Application Processor and the GR 376 EOAP including the fan assembly supporting the EOAP or GR 376 EOAP hardware components including disk drives may be removed and reJinserted with the power on but they are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE at the operating system level Before any hardware component is removed from the EOAP the operating system MUST BE HALTED To halt the system log in as root then at the command line type usr sbin init 0 When the ok prompt appears it is safe to remove the component Table 6 1 list tools and equipment required for the fan assembly installation 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 5 EOAP Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Table 6 1 EOAP Tools and Equipment Check Tools and Equipment Safety glasses Tie wrap tool tie
405. er the number of ArtePort boards 1 1 Type gt 4 1 Do you want to continue with the installation of this package y n Y NOTE During the ARTEport driver installation alarms may sound related to the installation Select q when the installation is complete Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default all q Installation of ARTEport Complete Continue with Step 9 For AURAacs AURAacsa and AURAacss drivers perform these steps At the following prompt enter a11 Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default all q all Answer yes or to all questions and accept the default directory locations when prompted Answer the configuration questions as follows Installation of AURAacss was successful Continue with Step 9 9 When the script completes the system configuration you will be returned to the configuration menu Enter 4 to return to the shell prompt 10 Reboot the newly configured EOAP a Shut down the EOAP application first using the following command ccsmr all down b Shut down the running process and the database using the following command usr sbin init 6 The EOAP automatically reboots after this command The reboot process is completed when your screen shows The system is ready andreturns you to the login prompt 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Proce
406. er to Figure 6 31 Secure both cables to the bottom tie down rod without obstructing any ports Form the cables and secure them along the rod every three or four inches stopping short of the EOAP RST B port Refer to Figure 6 31 Continue now with the EOAP A power cable Locate the power cable P N 830 0699 xx POWER IN B on the B side of the Refer to Figure 6 31 Secure the B power cable with cable ties to the bottom tie down rod of the backplane without obstructing any of the ports Continue securing the cable every three or four inches until it reaches the frame rail Wrap the B power cable with fiber paper at the point where it is routed around the edge of the EOAP shelf toward the frame rail Refer to Figure 6 31 Route the B power cable up the frame rail to the FAP Temporarily secure the cable to the cable rack until the A power cable is ready for wiring NOTE Do not form power cables on traverse arms On the bottom center of the EOAP shelf backplane locate the Fan B power cable P N 830 0609 xx FAN B PWR B and the clock in out cable P N 830 0609 xx BCLKIN B Refer to Figure 6 31 Secure the cables to the bottom tie down rod without obstructing any ports Form these cables along the rod with the cables coming from the B side of the EOAP Secure the cables with cable ties every three or four inches stopping short of the A ports on the A side of the EOAP backplane Locate the A power cable P N 830 0699 xx P
407. er towards the fan assembly 9 Replace the fan grill by placing it back over the filter on the front of the assembly Hand tighten the thumb screws 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 75 EOAP 6 76 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 At the rear of the frame remove the A power cable from the A fan assembly Both fan LEDs are off The Minor LED at the FAP is lit The fans for EOAP A stop running Other fan assemblies if installed are not affected At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 302 COOLING FAN FAILURE Replace the A power cable on the rear of the fan assembly and secure the connector The Active and Alarm LEDs are green The Minor LED at the FAP goes out The A fans start running At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 303 COOLING FAN NORMAL For a single configuration EOAP this procedure is completed For a dual configuration EOAP continue with Step 14 At the rear of the frame remove the B power cable from the B fan assembly Both fan LEDs are off The Minor LED at the FAP is lit The fans for EOAP B stop running Other fan assemblies if installed are not affected At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 302 COOLING FAN FAILURE Replace the B power cable on the rear of the fan assemb
408. ere x is the terminal number Enter the following command to return the OAP terminals inhibited in Step 9 to the in service state alw trm trm x where x is the terminal number 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Measurement Collection and Polling Module MCPM Description This procedure upgrades DSM cards loaded with the MCPM application 870 2371 03 to EDSM cards with 32 MB FSRAM and 2 GB RAM loaded with the MCPM application 870 2372 03 Note 5 and EDSM cards loaded with the MCPM application will be referred to as MCPM cards The Primary MCPM card performs all measurements collection and reporting functions and provides on card RAM storage for collected data and scheduled reports The Secondary MCPM provides a redundant backup for the Primary module and assumes collection and reporting responsibilities on the loss of the Primary TCP IP connections are used to deliver measurement reports from the Primary MCPM card to the customer via an FIP client The FTP configuration can be customized to support automatic transfer of scheduled reports from the client to the server Procedure Upgrade MCPM 1 Enter the following command to determine the status and number of the MCPM cards rept stat meas The following is an example of the possible output PST SST AST MEAS SS OOS MT Fault ALARM STATUS 0516 MEAS degraded with card out of service CARD VER
409. erials 4 13 red and white flag 4 23 Release Documentation 1 14 Release Notice 1 14 Remote Maintenance Center RMC Appendix B page B 3 5 87 remote maintenance center cable installation 5 87 remove grill and filter 6 17 Repair and Return Shipping Instructions 1 23 Replace tiles 3 15 Requirements ATM or E1 LIM card s 5 83 backplane P N 850 0330 04 5 83 backplane P N 850 0330 05 5 83 Feature Matrix 5 83 software release 26 0 or later 5 83 T1 or E1 clock source RS 422 5 83 TDM card 870 0774 06 or 870 0774 08 or later 5 83 return cables 4 11 return shipment 1 24 3 10 Returning a Crate 1 23 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 risk of electric shock 4 13 RMC connector B 65 Rotary impact drill 3 20 route clock connection cable 6 45 terminal cable 6 49 row alarm cable installation 5 87 rtrv oap config command 6 122 6 137 S Safety glasses 3 20 screws 5 69 Seismic Frame 3 24 shipping container 1 17 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Shipping Manager 1 17 3 10 side panel 3 33 SNSAP parameter chg oap config 6 113 SPSEL parameter chg oap config 6 113 SSSEL parameter chg oap config 6 113 28 stop bits 6 108 System Ground 4 16 System Overview 1 14 T TCOA A 32 TDM 2 5 TDM GTI 2 5 Technical Bulletins 1 14 Technical Services 1 18 Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle 1 14 Tekelec Technical Services 1 19 terminal cable installation 5 107 Terminal Cables 5 107 terminal cables install 6 48 route
410. es the system returns output similar to the following RLGHNCXA03W 00 06 11 11 34 04 CHG FI EAT MASP A COMPLD EST Rel 26 0 0 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 3 Atthe fan assembly toggle the fan switch on the grill panel to the OFF position The fan assembly stops running The Active LED is off and the Alarm LED is red The Minor LED at the FAP is lit Other fan assemblies if installed are not affected Figure 6 50 Set Fan Switch to OFF Set fan switch to OFF Thumb screw Thumb screw FANS OFF III 4 Atthe Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 302 COOLING FAN FAILURE 5 At the fan assembly turn the switch back to the ON position refer to Figure 6 49 The Active and Alarm LEDs are green The Minor LED at the FAP goes out The fan assembly starts running 6 At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 303 COOLING FAN NORMAL 7 With a flashlight check that all fans are running Remove the grill and filter from the fan assembly by removing the two thumb screws from the grill faceplate see Figure 6 50 Temporarily store all in a safe place Visually check the movement of the fans 8 Replace the fan filter by setting it against the front of the fan assembly NOTE Point the air flow arrows stamped on top and bottom edge of the filt
411. es general labeling instructions for cables frames shelves and fuse and alarm panels Cable Labeling Before installing use this procedure to label the cables to ensure connection to the proper ports and ease of future maintenance Tools e Installer s Cable Running List All cables listed in Installer s Cable Running List e Any non Tekelec cables Cable labels including blank labels for non Tekelec cables Fine point marker Procedure Mark and Label Cables 1 Locate the Installer s Cable Running List in the Equipment Specification for the site Refer to Figure 2 2 for an example Figure 2 2 Installer s Cable Running List Example Item number Cable type FROM TO column column column columns INSTALLER S CABLE RUNNING LIST CABLE TYPE TO TO or PART or PART NO NO FROM FRAME LOCATION LINK INTERCONNCTS CONTROL FRAME CF 00 EXTENSION SHELF SH2 32 1 830 0366 02 4204A CF 00 105 09 SH2 J24 RR 106 03 PNL 1 JK 13 T1RI RCV 2 pues TR XMT 830 0366 02 1201B CF 00 105 09 SH2 J40 RR 106 03 PNL 1 JK 14 R RCV 2 Locate the labels included with the cable shipment 3 Take one cable and identify the cable s part number in the Cable Type column of the cable running list 2 8 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 General Installation Information 4 Match the cable with its corresponding pair of labels a
412. es up with an system slot Also note that there are always two 1 backplanes available at the rear of the shelf the upper E1 backplane and the lower E1 backplane The upper and lower backplanes are identical 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies E1 T1 MIM European E1 and North American T1 standard for signaling and channels Multi channel Interface Module MIM P N 870 2198 XX Figure 5 51 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 XX po ui LJ T 1 0 lt OPROC S O IMTA K L d O MTB E3 LJ F d LJ 1 4 Jove pre O PORT O E 9 Te HZ E qe o lt Serial o number _ code REV XX
413. ess Skip the steps that do not apply to your configuration NOTE The chg oap config command is valid only if either the SEAS or the LNP feature is turned on Example of EOAP Configuration Changes The examples in this procedure are used to change a dual configuration EOAP with the settings shown in Table 6 20 For a single configuration EOAP configure EOAP A only Table 6 20 Example EOAP Initial Configuration Description Parameter EOAPA EOAP B Hostname oam tekelec 22 tekelec 23 bname IP Address saipaddr 495 106 175 005 192 106 175 006 bipaddr IP Netmask 255 255 255 001 255 255 255 001 bnmask Default Router farouter 125 132 064 005 128 132 064 005 brouter Configuration cfg dual dual SEAC CLLI 111 RLGHNCXBI18Y RLGHNCXBI18Y X 25 Packet Size 25 7 7 X 25 Mode x25mode DCE DCE Shadow LSMS lsms shadow shadow Shadow LSMS NSAP smnsap 198 102 115 105 198 102 115 105 Shadow LSMS SSEL sssel shws shws Shadow LSMS PSEL spsel shwp shwp 6 134 When configuring the EOAP the system generates a UAM 0364 because the EOAP configuration in the database does not match the EOAP configuration on the EOAP rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 11 28 EST Rel 26 0 0 1501 0364 OAP A Configuration data checksum mismatch 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 The alarm is cleared when a maintenance poll returns a checksum that matches the Eagle STP
414. ete tenes 22 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 1 Cables 830 0531 03 Serial Interface 23 830 0531 01 Serial Interface Converter 24 830 0528 01 Terminal Converter Cable eese C 25 830 0531 02 Serial Interface Terminal and Printer Adapter C 26 830 0535 xx Terminal Printer eoe treten dee 27 830 0605 EF Patch Cable etude dte boues AN 28 830 0609 01 Included Fan Assembly rtt nitet C 29 830 0622 E1 Cable u etr icri t e e Rete C 30 830 0624 xx Cable Assembly BNC to C 31 830 0625 xx Cable BNC Open End C 32 830 0638 xx Filter Rack Alarm Cable eese C 33 830 0651 xx ASV Power Cable esee ttt terrre err tes npe C 34 830 0656 01 Fifty Position Cable Hard Drive I O C 35 830 0657 AX Clock Connection rr obire eR ia MU 36 830 0708 xx MMI C 37 830 0709 Modem Terminal Cable C 38 830 0710 xx Network 39 830 0711 xx 100 BASE TX 2 40 930 0723 C AT 5 Crossover tte C 41 830 0724 CAT 5
415. etwork for the LNP feature and optionally for the SEAS feature For example enter these commands chg oap config aipaddr 192 106 175 005 chg oap config bipaddr 192 106 175 006 where aipaddr is the EOAP A IP address network service access point bipaddr is the EOAP B IP address network service access point The following parameters may or may not be required for both LNP and SEAS features depending on your network configuration amask Or bmask is the the netmask for or EOAP B If you are unsure as to whether your network requires this configuration check with your Information Services department arouter Or brouter is the IP address of the default router assigned to or If you are unsure as to whether your network requires this configuration check with your Information Services department After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD Configure the SEAS network For example enter these commands chg oap config seacclli z rlghncxb18y x25ps 27 x25mode zdce where 111 is the 11 character 1 alphabetic character followed by 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters common language location identifier CLLI of the SEAC that the EOAP is connecting to The value must be enclosed in quotes x25ps is the x 25 package size for the link to the SEAC The value i
416. f major NSD systems components in alphabetical order For a detailed hardware description refer to the Hardware Manual included with your system documentation Table2 1 NSD Components Acronym Function Fant Note y Number ACM Application Ethernet 870 1008 xx Communication 10 access Module to remote hosts ASM Application Gateway 870 1011 xx Obsolete as of Service Module Screening EAGLE 31 6 Loading CI Clock Interface Input signal 804 0165 xx Card Holdover redundancy Clock DCM Database IP connectivity 870 1671 04 original Communications 870 1945 03 6 200 TPS Module 870 1984 01 DCMX DSM Database Service Large capacity 870 1984 02 DSM 1G Module Signaling 870 1984 03 DSM 2G Connection 870 1984 04 DSM 3G Control Part 870 1984 05 DSM 4G SCCP database EDCM Enhanced IP connectivity 870 2197 xx double slot double Database IP SG 4 0 and slot Communications later Module EDCM Enhanced IP connectivity 870 2372 xx single slot single Database SG 4 0 and slot Communications later Module EILA Enhanced Provides 1 or 2 870 2049 xx Integrated Link DSOA Interface Module V 35 interfaces Applique for SS7 links using 586 processor 2 2 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 NSD Components Continued General Installation Information Part Acronym Name Function Number No
417. fuse 4217 4218 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 13B 3Amp 4303 4304 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14B 3Amp 4307 4308 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM Fuse 15B 1Amp 4310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 4313 4314 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 17B 3Amp Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse 4317 4318 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Extension Frame 03 EF 03 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 69 Fuse 1A 3Amp 5101 5102 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 2A 3Amp 5105 5106 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 3A 1Amp 5109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 5111 5112 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 5A 3Amp 5115 5116 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 6A dummy fuse Fuse 7A 3Amp 5201 5202 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 8A 3Amp 5205 5206 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or Fuse 9A 1Amp 5209 HMUX Fuse 10A 3Amp 5211 5212 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or 5 150 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 5 17 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type
418. g brackets Do not remove the screws holding the side brackets to the frame at this time Support the baffle while you remove the screws Figure 5 13 System Air Baffle Remove screws attaching baffle before removing side brackets Baffle 5 Remove the baffle through the front of the frame Then remove the two screws holding the left and right side baffle brakets to the frame and remove the brackets 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 55 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 6 Install the new side brackets P N 652 0015 01 for the new fan tray into the frame The side brackes are installed from the front of the frame just below the shelf containing that cards that require the fan Use the 12 24 x1 2 screws provided to attach the brackets to the left and right front frame rails The top screw hole is 5 16 inch below the shelf containing the cards Be sure not to completely tighten the brackets at this time Figure 5 14 Attach side fan bracket to front frame rail ue 5 56 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 7 Slide the brackets in towared the center of the frame so the outside of the bracket is flush with the side of the frame as shown in Figure 5 15 Figure 5 15 Slide the side fan brackets flush with the Frame Align edge of bracket with frame 8 Verify whether the frame type is a standard or heavy duty so that you can ensure the fan tray bracket w
419. g Integrated Timing System BITS clock sources Procedure Install BITS Clock Source Cable 1 Connect the cables to the primary and secondary central office BITS clock sources 2 Route the cables to the system s miscellaneous frame containing the holdover clock 3 Route the cables down the right side viewed from the rear of the frame 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 115 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 4 Pullthe slack out of the cable towards the holdover clock 5 Dress the cable neatly and tie wrap to the cable tie bars at the side of the frame NOTE Allcables must be laced no tie wraps onto the top traverse arm and above to the cable rack 6 Remove the outer insulation of each cable even with the top of the output panel 7 Apply a 1 1 2 inch length of shrink wrap tubing Center the tubing on the end of the cable insulation before shrinking tubing with a heat gun 8 Cutthe wires to length strip and wire wrap to the holdover clock at the locations TB12 and TB13 see Figure 5 38 See Figure 5 42 for locations of these connectors Figure 5 47 BITS Clock Source Connections OOOOO S OOOOOO o TB13 TB12 OOOOOO o CCK bits clock F Primary BITS cable ring connection Primary BITS cable tip connection Primary BITS cable ring connection Primary BITS cable tip connection 9 Ensure that each t
420. g a Card From an Existing EAGLE System 1 Locate the card to be removed NOTE To ensure no loss of service be sure to check that the green LED on the card is not lit when you remove the card 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 51 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 52 2 Push the inject eject clamps outward from the card s faceplate top clamp in the UP position bottom clamp in the DOWN position Pull the levers away from the shelf until they are parallel to the floor Gently pull the card towards you until the card clears the shelf Figure 0 1 Push Inject Eject Clamps Outward Place the card you have removed in an electrostatic discharge ESD protective container or place the card in the spare card storage shelf Be sure that the replacement card has the same Tekelec part number and revision number as the card you have just removed unless this is an upgrade Open the ejector levers on the replacement card Carefully align the card s edges with the top and bottom card guides Then push the card along the length of the card guides until the rear connectors on the card engage the mating connectors on the target shelf backplane Press the front of the card s faceplate using constant pressure until you feel the card s progress cease WARNING Do not impact the faceplate in order to mate the connectors Any impact to the card s faceplate can damage the faceplate the pins or the connectors 91
421. gt Cable ties Clock connection cable Clock connection cable P N 830 0657 74 P N 830 0609 01 Clock in out cable Terminal cabl 830 0609 01 P T 3 P N 830 0709 Terminal cables le 5 l4 Clock in out cable P N 830 0709 xx P N 830 0609 01 B Power cable B fan 830 0699 01 power A Power cable 7 F 830 0699 01 5 5 Fan B power cable ENE P N 830 0609 01 eS Ie J IR eoap frmside 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 55 EOAP 6 56 21 22 23 24 25 26 On the back of the fan assembly secure the two fan cables to the closest tie down rod Pull any unnecessary slack in the fan cables toward the frame rail or traverse arm At the frame rail secure the remaining power cable with cable ties along its route up the frame rail Refer to Figure 6 32 Near the break out the A power cable and retrieve its end from the cable rack where it was stored earlier On the other side of the retrieve the end of the B power cable from the cable rack where it was stored earlier For each power cable butt the cable at one and one half 1 inches beyond the frame rail Refer to Figure 6 32 The butted cable exposes three 3 wires blue brown and green with a yellow tracer Fan out the wires and attach them to the FAP as described
422. gure 4 9 System Frame Grounding Ground window Producers Neutral Absorbers Isolated 54 imm E E 5 8 g amp meter test area System frame ground Htap 6AWG 6AWG 6AWG or 1 OAWG on brackets Continous aisle ground Htap Htap Htap Bracket Bracket Bracket Bracket Branch Frame Frame Gnd bar P N 830 0715 01 Frame gnd 6 FAP EAP EAE typical OAPF Embedded Operation Control NI Extension Miscellaneous Support System Frame Frame Frame Application Processor Brackets cable rack horns as required 3 Secure the cable to the cable brackets with lacing cord 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 Cables must be labeled 145C tags should have TO and FROM location information Example FROM MGB Main Ground Bar TO system ground bar Control Frame CF00 5 DO NOT double lug The practice of using one bolt through a lug and the ground bar and through another lug on the other side of the ground bar held in place by one nut 6 Aboltthrough any nut must show at least two threads beyond the nut but no more than four threads should be showing Procedure Connect Ground Cable to Control Frame CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed N conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor
423. gure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 Figure A 6 Figure 7 Figure A 8 Figure A 9 Figure A 10 Figure A 11 Figure A 12 Figure A 13 Figure A 14 Figure A 15 Figure A 16 Figure A 17 Figure A 18 Figure A 19 Figure A 20 Figure A 21 Figure A 22 Figure A 23 Figure A 24 Figure A 25 Figure A 26 List of Figures GR 376 EOAP P N 890 1050 02 Assembly 6 150 Routing Ethernet Cables re eerte etos 6 151 GR 376 EOAP eee 6 152 Fan and Filter 6 154 Fan Assembly Mounting Screws 6 155 Fans and GR 376 EOAP Mounting Flanges 6 156 GR 376 EOAP Backplane 6 157 GR 376 EOAP P N 890 1050 02 Side 6 158 FAP P N 870 2320 01 Rear 6 159 GR 376 Backplane Cabling 6 161 GR 376 EOAP Cable Routing 6 162 ether DS 4 eet rre e ehe md A 5 vet IRSE 6 Holdover Clock CI Card LEDS A 7 DCM and DSM LEDS eterne A 8 DSOA LIM LEDS a n aa u imalata A 9 ELATM LEDS Can L y y u mn a maupun unai A 10 E1 T1 MIM P
424. h J33 2311 A through 2318 A connectors J16 through J9 2311 B through 2318 B connectors J32 through J25 5 14 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Extension Frame EF 01 Extension shelf 31 3101 A through 3108 A connectors J24 through J17 3101 B through 3108 B connectors J40 through J33 3111 A through 3118 A connectors J16 through J9 3111 B through 3118 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 32 3201 A through 3208 A connectors J24 through J17 3201 B through 3208 B connectors J40 through J33 3211 A through 3218 A connectors J16 through J9 3211 B through 3218 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 33 3301 A through 3308 A connectors J24 through J17 3301 B through 3308 B connectors J40 through J33 3311 A through 3318 A connectors J16 through J9 3311 B through 3318 B connectors J32 through J25 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 15 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Extension Frame EF 02 Extension shelf 41 4101 A through 4108 A connectors J24 through J17 4101 B through 4108 B connectors J40 through J33 4111 A through 4118 A connectors J16 through J9 4111 B through 4118 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 42 4201 A through 4208 A connectors J24 through J17 4201 B through 4208 B connectors J40 through J33 4211 A through 4218 A connectors J16 through J9 4211 B through 4218 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension s
425. h frame 9 Frames are level 10 Earthquake bracing if any is properly installed 11 Adequate floor clearances have been maintained 12 Rear panels are installed 13 Cable connections are tight at the backplane connections 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 141 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Fuse Verification 5 142 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Cable sheets are properly marked and located in door pocket documentation has been received and is available Terminals and printers connected to the system are operational Data cartridges have been received and are properly stored Any attached modems are operational Any attached MAUs are operational with power indicator on Shipping container is properly packed with ramp and frame dollies prepared for shipment The area is clean and unused material has been properly disposed of For each fuse location verify that individual fuse failures affect only the circuits assigned to the specific fuse location For those fuse locations that do not yet have circuit cards assigned use fuses and circuit cards assigned to other locations for the test procedure and then remove them Verify each fuse using the following tools Procedure Verify Individual Fuse Positions on page 5 143 to perform the verification WARNING Use the antistatic wrist strap connected to the wrist strap grounding point on the frame when performing these procedu
426. hanges to the hardware operating system and or the components found therein will void the warranty 1 Verify that the modem port is configured correctly Console login root Password eagle pmadm 1 The system returns output similar to the following the last line bold indicates the port to be used with the maintenance modem ttymonO ttymon 0 ux root dev term 0 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 0 ttymonO ttymon 1 ux root dev term 1 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 1 ttymon0 ttymon 2 ux root dev term 2 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 2 ttymonO ttymon 4 ux root dev term 4 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 4 zsmon ttymon ttya u root dev term a I usr bin login 9600 ldterm ttcompat ttya login tvi925 y t zsmon ttymon ttyb u root dev term b I usr bin login 9600 ldterm ttcompat ttyb login tvi925 y zsmon ttymon 3 u root dev term 3 usr bin login 9600E ldterm ttcompat login 3n 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 77 EOAP 6 78 NOTE Thecommand output shows this format if the line wrap option is set You can set the line wrap option through the Setup menu If no login prompt appears try each of the following Press return several times b Switch the maintenance modem from Artecon port 3 to 2 or vice versa Cycle power on the maintenance modem If the login prompt appears in all CAPITAL letters press lt C
427. hat all breakers that provide power to the system are open gt gt P Verification of Fuse Alarm Function This procedure verifies that appropriate fuse alarms are generated by the system 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 163 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 164 WARNING Use the antistatic wrist strap connected to the wrist strap grounding point when performing these procedures Procedure Verify Fuse Alarms Ensure that all fuses have been removed Use a multi meter to ensure that each frame has 48VDC power see Figure 5 71 Insert a blown fuse see Figure 5 73 into fuse bank A of the Fuse and Alarm Panel FAP on the control frame Fuse alarm and major alarm Light Emitting Diodes LEDs of that frame should light and an audible alarm should sound Remove the blown fuse The fuse alarm should immediately go out the major alarm should go out after a few seconds and the audible alarm should stop Repeat steps 3 and 4 for fuse bank B of the control frame and for fuse banks A and B of each extension frame and EOAP frame Figure 5 73 Fuse GMT Brand Name Fuse position for fuse and alarm panel P N 870 2320 01 Fuse flag colors gray 1 amp blue 3 amp black white 7 5 amp red white 10 amp Blown position Q Blown fuse 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Safety Information our a sasan 6 2 InttoducHon tdem bd bubus ute iu
428. he DSO OCU V35 or E1 interfacing Two port LIM B All supported link applications except ss7gx25 25 signaling link atmansi ATM HSL signaling link or ss ipgw IP signaling link Multi port LIM ss7ml GPL with 050 interface at 56Kb running the 1 ss7ansi application only A2 B2 A3 B3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 133 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 57 MPLT LEDs P N 870 2062 02 TEKELEC LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Application processor is not running or is PROC failing diagnostics AMBER MPL is loading an application or is being APPL polled may be prevented from loading by us maintenance out of service condition GREEN MPL is running an application IMTA RED MPL is off IMT bus A Pra AMBER MPL is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete x GREEN MPL is on IMT bus A Si BLANK Communication processor is not operating Bo IMTB RED MPL is off IMT bus B AMBER MPL is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN MPL is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating PORTA RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service Seria number PORT A1 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service 4 CLEI PORT A2 RED Link is out of service code APPLICATION TERMINAL 0123456789
429. he commands used and the error messages generated by these commands The Commands Manual contains software commands for the system a general description of the terminals printers and the disk drive used For quick reference a pocket guide may be included The Database Administration Manual s contain s procedural information required for configuring the system and the system database Feature Manuals that each describe a single feature supported on one of the platforms The Hardware Manual contains hardware descriptions and specifications The Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle manual contains cabling requirements schematics and procedures for installing the systems The Maintenance Manual contains procedural preventive and corrective maintenance information required for maintaining the system For quick reference pocket guides for maintenance procedures or emergency recovery may be included The Release Documentation may contain the following sections for a specific release of the system Feature Notice Contains a description of the features contained in the specified release This section is also available on the customer secured web site with the most current information Release Notice Describes the changes made to the system for the specified release This section is also available on the customer secured web site with the most current information Documentation Bulletins Provide updates
430. he module into the appropriate slot Using the module slot guides in the shelf slide the module into the shelf until the connectors on the module seat with the connectors on the backplane The EAGLE Signaling Transfer Points STP frames are configured with card modules that provide specific functions and services Cards are connected to the shelf backplane through connectors located on the rear of the card Cam out lock in levers mounted on the front edge of the card assist in insertion and removal of the card Part numbers LEDs text and bar codes CLEI and serial number are also located on the faceplate of the cards 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 General Installation Information To remove a card use both hands to open injector ejector module locking tabs out from the faceplate of the card To insert a card align the card in the slot push slowly in until the connectors engage and seat Press both tabs in until they lock the card in place To ensure proper seating the tabs must be held in the release position until the locking tabs can engage with the upper and lower flange on the shelf Once the locking tabs on the levers engage the shelf plane the tabs are pressed to the card faceplate and must be flush with the faceplate when the card is completely seated Figure 2 1 Removing an Eagle STP and SG card 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 2 7 General Installation Information Labeling This section provid
431. he row alarm one of each type of alarm cable is supplied for each system One rack alarm cable is supplied for each Control Extension or Frame present in the system One row alarm cable for each system equipped with an alarm end panel containing alarm indicator lamps The rack alarm cable for the control frame may be factory installed at both ends or the row alarm cable may come from the factory installed at the alarm end panel only Integrated Timing System Clock Supply Cables The Building Integrated Timing System BITS clocks come directly from the central office BITS clock source or indirectly from an optional holdover clock installed in the system See Holdover Clock Installation on page 5 108 for optional holdover clock installation information Refer to BITS Clock on page B 9 for cable connector information 5 88 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Replacing A and B Frame Clock Cables Replace all A and B clock cables P N 830 0404 xx from the control shelf and those coming in from an extension shelf with A and B frame clock cable P N 830 0398 xx containing alarm alert capabilities Perform the replacement during a maintenance window and prior to fan assembly installation Figure 5 31 Cable P N 830 0404 xx Cable P N 830 0404 xx will not support HMUX and must be replaced by Cable P N 830 0398 xx for NC SH2MBUSTX SH2MBUSTX SH2MBUSRX SH2M
432. helf 43 4301 A through 4308 A connectors J24 through J17 4301 B through 4308 B connectors J40 through J33 4311 A through 4318 A connectors J16 through J9 4311 B through 4318 B connectors J32 through J25 5 16 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Extension Frame EF 03 Extension shelf 51 5101 A through 5108 A connectors J24 through J17 5101 B through 5108 B connectors J40 through J33 5111 A through 5118 A connectors J16 through J9 5111 B through 5118 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 52 5201 A through 5208 A connectors J24 through J17 5201 B through 5208 B connectors J40 through J33 5211 A through 5218 A connectors J16 through J9 5211 B through 5218 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension shelf 53 5301 A through 5308 A connectors J24 through J17 5301 B through 5308 B connectors J40 through J33 5311 A through 5318 A connectors J16 through J9 5311 B through 5318 B connectors J32 through J25 Extension Frame EF 04 Extension shelf 61 6101 A through 6108 A connectors J24 through J17 6101 B through 6108 B connectors J40 through J33 6111 A through 6118 A connectors J16 through J9 6111 B through 6118 B connectors J32 through J25 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 17 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Recommended Tools 5 18 Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label
433. holes Faceplate screw holes ror e CRITICAL C Pwa rear MAJOR O Fee O O PWRALARMB opmanr O PWR TEST POINT le o FAP_DB_A FAP_JB FAP_AB FAP DB B u PWR TEST POINT FUSEBANK A FUSEBANK B TEKELEC A side Frontview B side e ALARM INTERFACE 12181920 Return 12181920 TORQUE TO Seer Chassis EE 25 IN LBS 12181920 ground o 1218 Rearview B side Fuse position Fuse position reside Caution Redundant 48VDC on A and B sides use caution when servicing Caution This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor See Installation instruction 4 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 and P N 870 2320 02 Figure 4 3 shows front view of FAP P N 870 2320 xx for the heavy duty frame FAP 870 2320 01 Rev A through I handles 40 Amp feeds FAP 870 2320 02 Rev J handles 60 Amp feeds 870 1606 xx is the same as the 870 2320 xx except that it is installed into standa
434. hrough a lug and the ground bar and through another lug on the other side of the ground bar held in place by one nut bolt through any nut must show at least two threads beyond the nut but no more than four threads should be showing 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuse and Alarm Panel Overview Fuses and Alarm Panels The Fuse and Alarm Panel FAP is located at the top of the frame Refer to Figure 4 1 for location Currently there are different types of FAPs Different types of FAPs that are designated by different part numbers and may be used in different types of frames Table 4 1 Frame Types Part Number Use Frame Type 860 0434 01 Control Frame Heavy Duty Extension Frame Misc Frame OAP Frame Figure 4 1 Fuse and Alarm Panel Location Fuse and EE alarm panel zz lem 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 3 Fuses and Alarm Panels Figure 4 2 Fuse and Alarm Panel Details Faceplate screw
435. iation 1 IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active LSMS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms A A 0 3 Assoc 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Completed 6 130 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 c Update EOAP B by entering this command act oap config oap b force yes EOAP After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD EST Rel 26 0 0 d Wait 15 minutes then enter either the rept stat seas if only the SEAS feature is on or rept stat 1sms if only the LNP feature is on commands to make sure that there are no alarms for EOAP B If both the SEAS and LNP features are on then enter both commands to verify that there are no alarms for EOAP B These are examples of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report SEAS Interfaces Configured IS NR 2 Active Interfaces IS NR 2 SEAS SYSTEM TDM Port TDM Port OAP OAP 25 25 Link Link SEAS SYSTEM OAP OAP X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 A B Al Al B1 B1 A2 A2 B2 B2 Link A1 Link A2 Link B1 Link B2 PVCS PVCs PVCs PVCs PVCS PVCS PVCS PVCS
436. ide of your box Ship the defective component to the return address listed on the packing slip If the item is a repair return the Technical Services engineer arranges for shipment of the replacement item to the customer a Package the defective component in a suitable package for shipping Use proper static handling procedures Label the outside and inside of the box with your RMA number clearly visible Include a packing slip with all the information from Step 1 along with the RMA number 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction c Ship the defective component to the following address TEKELEC Attn RMA Department 5200 Paramount Parkway Morrisville NC 27560 assigned by Tekelec gt d Wait for the repaired component to arrive Specifically Targeted PCBs Manufacturing may be involved in the investigations In certain unique circumstances the capture of an individual for evaluation can be initiated through a customer request For any reason the Director of Quality with input from other groups such as NSG Customer Service Hardware Systems Repair and Maintenance Support RMS and or Manufacturing can authorize a board type to be captured and sent to the North Carolina facility for evaluation and analysis NSG QA receives the board s records board information such as part number serial number and problem description on the appropriate forms Next NSG sends the PCB to a Hardware Syst
437. ie wrap strap is cut flush with the tie wrap head and turned to the rear of the cable so that no sharp edges are exposed Replacing Holdover Clock Rear Cover When all connections are complete slide the holdover clock rear cover back onto its mounting screws and then tighten the screws 5 116 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Holdover Clock Fuses Install 7 5A black and white flag GMT fuses in positions A1 and B1 of the miscellaneous frame fuse and alarm panel that contains the holdover clock 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 117 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies E1 T1 Interface gt P P CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of these systems must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION These are redundant systems to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and take down the system CAUTION After the frame has been shipped or moved remove all cards prior to applying power Reset all cards carefully to avoid possible faulty connections To remove or install a card use the module locking tabs at the top and bottom of the card faceplate See Figure 5 48 Figure 5 48 Removing a Ca
438. iguration 6 59 Table 6 12 Tools and Equipment EOAP Cards and Drives 6 60 Table 6 13 EOAP Cards and Drives 6 64 Table 6 14 Tools and Equipment EOAP Cards and Drives 6 65 Table 6 15 Fuse Panel Items and Description ite pers 6 71 Table 6 16 Performance Impact of act oap config Parameters 6 114 Table 6 17 Fields Displayed for the RTRV OAP CONFIG Command 6 116 Table 6 18 Updating the EOAP Configuration eee 6 117 Table 6 19 Example EOAP Initial Configuration eee 6 118 Table 6 20 Example EOAP Initial Configuration 6 134 Table 6 21 GR 376 EOAP Cable Legend i edi tero ttt 6 153 Table A 1 E1 T1 MIM Release Compatibility A 12 Table B 1 Control Shelf Backplanes P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 B 3 Table B 2 A Clock 0 Through A Clock 5 Connectors B 5 Table B 3 B Clock 0 through B Clock 5 Connectors sss B 7 Table 4 BITS Clock Connector eese enne B 9 Table B 5 Clock A In Connector on Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 B 10 Table B 6 Clock Out Connector B 11 Table B 7 Clock In Extension Shelf Connector B 1
439. igure C 28 Fifty Position Hard Drive I O P N 830 0656 01 850 0656 01 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 C 35 Cables 830 0657 XX Clock Connection Connect the clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx to port BCLKIN A of the EOAP backplane and to port BCLKOUT 42 located at the lower right side of the last extension shelf backplane in the control frame Use one EOAP clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx to connect the EOAP shelf backplane P N 850 0488 to the last Eagle STP extension shelf backplane in the control frame CAUTION Do Not connect this P N 830 0657 xx cable to the Eagle STP until both sides of the EOAP have been integrated into the system Refer to the procedure Connect the clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx to port BCLKIN A of the EOAP backplane and to port BCLKOUT 42 located at the lower right side of the last extension shelf backplane in the control frame Tighten the cable connectors NOTE extension shelf is present cable to connector B CLK 5 J70 on control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 03 or connector B CLK 7 J17 on control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 06 Table 3 9 Port Label Function Location Connector Type BCLKIN A Clock connection EOAP backplane DB 9 cable P N 830 0657 xx to las
440. iguring the TDM Ports for EOAP Enter the rtrv feat command s the GTT feature on No Turn on the GTT and or the LNP feature s Refer to procedure Activating the LNP Feature in Chapter 2 of this manual No LNP feature on Enter the rtrv trm command Enter the rmv trm command Enter the rept stat trm command Enter the chg trm command Enter the rtrv trm command Enter the rst trm command Enter the chg db action backup dest fixed command 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 111 EOAP Procedure Configuring the EOAP from the Eagle STP Terminal Use this procedure to configure the EOAP for the SEAS and or LNP feature using these commands chg oap config e act oap config NOTE These commands enable you to configure the EOAP from the Eagle STP terminal After the initial configuration is performed you should no longer perform EOAP configuration from a terminal directly connected to the EOAP This procedure can be used to configure the Texas Micro OAPs or the Embedded OAPs EOAPs This procedure cannot be used to upgrade the EOAP software Upgrading the EOAP software is covered in the EOAP Upgrade Procedures in the Release Documentation manual and is beyond the scope of this procedure Configuring the EAGLE STP Database Use the chg oap config command to configure the dat
441. ill be mounted correctly Use the following mounting positions e Use the side holes on the fan tray bracket that are closest to the front of the frame if you are installing in a standard frame e Use the holes closest to the rear of the frame if installing in a heavy duty frame 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 57 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 16 Side bracket mounting positions on fan tray bracket 5 58 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 9 Insert the fan tray bracket P N 652 0012 01 into the space left by the baffle under the card shelf The untightened side brackets will slide outward slightly to accomodate the fan tray bracket as it is inserted They should remain flush against the fan tray bracket Figure 5 17 Insert fan tray bracket vu a 9 v RT BATTU HEP Manu mme MP wa QU A e 42 NOTE When inserting the fan tray bracket be sure not to pinch cables between the bottom of the shelf and the fan tray bracket 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 59 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 10 From inside the frame screw the fan tray bracket to the side brackets with one hand while using the other hand to support the fan tray bracket Use two 8 32 phillips screws for each side bracket See Figure 5 18 Figure 5 18 Attaching the fan tray bracket to the side brackets inside front 5 60 91
442. ing CLK B 000 Cards with bad CLK B 009 Cards using CLK I 000 PST SST AST HS SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR ACTIVE ALMINH Cards using HSCLK 001 Cards with bad HSCLK A 000 Cards using HSCLK B 000 Cards with bad HSCLK B 002 Cards using HSCLK I 000 Command Completed where Cards using CLK A Lis the number of cards using clocks A B and I Cards using bad CLK A B is the number of cards using clock A or clock B when clock A or B is bad If all cards are using clock A you can physically remove the B clock cables Ignore any error messages 2 Locate the B clock cables P N 830 0404 xx that are routed from B clk 0 on control and extension shelves to B IN of the next extension shelf Cut out the existing cord laces 3 Unplug the B clock cable P N 830 0404 xx connectors and replace them with the B clock cable P N 830 0398 xx connectors containing alarm alert capabilities Replace one cable at a time 4 Usenew cord laces to cable in the new B clock cables P N 830 0398 xx 5 Atthe system terminal reenter the clock status command to ensure both clocks are active rept stat clk See Step 1 for display information 6 Optionally you can check for any remaining alarms by entering rept stat trbl The output will show any minor major critical C and inhibited I alarms using alarm indicators as shown in the following display RLGHNCXAO03W 96 11 19 15 01 14 EST Rel 25 0 0 5034 003
443. ing MMI X cables P N 830 0708 xx a Remove the B cable from port 3A and reconnect it to port 3B b Remove the A cable from port 4A and reconnect it to port 3A 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 71 EOAP 6 72 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Connect the modem terminal cables to the EOAP B backplane a Connect one end of terminal cable P N 830 0709 xx to port 1B on the EOAP backplane attach the converter P N 804 0176 01 to the other end of this cable and then attach terminal cable P N 830 0528 xx to the converter This extended cable will attach to the COM 3 port of the VT 520 display unit connected to the b Connect one end of the dial up modem B cable P N 830 0709 xx to port 2B c Remove the existing X 25 modem B cable from port 6A and reconnect it to port 5B Tighten all modem terminal cable connectors to the Route all new cables except power cable B down to the bottom tie down rod and across the rod to the right side of the EOAP backplane Use cable ties to secure the cables to the tie down rod every three to four inches Wrap the cables with fiber paper at the point they are routed around the edge of the EOAP shelf toward the frame rails Route the cables up the frame rail onto the cable rack and from there to each of their destinations Form and dress the cables using cable ties to secure the cables to the frame rail and the traverse arms every three to four inches Tighten al
444. intenance Modem cssc 6 77 Test Fam Operation asua aasan aasan ra tbe teretes 6 74 Upgrade o 5 45 tegis pole tu 5 36 Upgrading ASNEGLDS z aa aaa 5 32 Upgt ding ASM SCOP J a enc 5 28 Verify Fuse Alaris o oe RN Ned dae 5 164 Verify Individual Fuse Positions terrere tto eerta petite queas 4 23 Verify Individual Fuse Positions tm ee redes 5 143 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 xxix List of Procedures 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Safety Information dede e det 1 3 TOC CO a u QS lim um ukasa 1 6 Regulatory Safety Compliance and Certification 1 8 Environmental Requirements 1 9 Scope and Audience inei ea EEEa 1 10 Tekelee Signaling Products Systems tete 1 10 Eagle STI 1 11 Gat Way M ties 1 11 i WM 1 11 Documentation e peer p er C e RE 1 12 About this eee tt tei dra P 1 12 Documentation SBT ua sn aun ete eerte 1 13 Documentation Packaging Delivery and 1 16
445. inued Part Acronym Name Function Number Note OAP Operations Provide 870 1142 xx EAGLE only Support System Signaling Applications Engineering and Processor Administration System SEAS interfacin between the EAGLE system and a SEAS console TDM Terminal Disk Hard disk 870 0774 xx 870 0774 10 Module storage and 870 0774 11 eee for EAGLE release 30 0 Beginnin with EAGLE Release 31 6 TDM cards must be 870 0774 15 to support Global Timing Interface TDM GTI TOCA Timing Output Clocks outputs 804 0166 xx Composite 1 and TO2 Automatic for A and B Holdover through the Clock system control shelf TSM Translation SCCP 870 1289 xx TSM 1G Service Module 870 1291 xx TSM 3G 870 1292 xx TSM 4G 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 General Installation Information Eagle STP and SG Module Installation The frame arrives configured with the modules cards in place After installing the frame in its final location remove all cards for powering up Reinstall all printed circuit board modules carefully in the control shelf extension shelves and other frames to avoid possible faulty connections WARNING Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling electronic cards or electrostatic sensitive devices Installing a module be aware of the possibility of electrostatic discharge or shorts Grasp the module at the top and bottom as shown in Figures 2 1 and slide t
446. ion D May 2005 5 81 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 82 The composite clock cables connect the site s composite BITS clocks with the EAGLE STP control shelf Implementation of the HS Master Timing feature requires the replacement of both composite clock cables with two new HS master clock cables 5422 compatible on control shelf backplane P N 850 0330 06 and later Only ATM LIM cards or E1 T1 MIM can be configured or re configured for the HS Master Timing feature Once the baseline hardware requirements for the HS Master Timing feature have been met see the Master timing Feature Requirement Matrix on page 5 83 install the cards CAUTION These are redundant systems to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and takes down the systems Install an ATM card add the card to the system database and enable it for the HS Master Timing feature ent slk atmtsel external or Install an E1 T1 MIM add the card to the system database and enable it for the HS Master Timing feature ent el eltsel internal Reconfigure any existing ATM LIM card or E1 T1 MIM to use the HS Master Timing feature LIM cards that will continue using the composite clock will not require any changes to the card provisioning NOTE The EAGLE STP terminal output screens refer to the composite clocks as Buildi
447. ion Frame 03 EF 03 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A refer to Figure 4 20 Fuse 1A 3Amp 5101 5102 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 2A 3Amp 5105 5106 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 3A 1Amp 5109 HMUX Fuse 5111 5112 1 8 ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 5115 5116 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 6A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7A 3Amp 5201 5202 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII Fuse 8A 3Amp 5205 5206 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSMHII 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 29 Fuses and Alarm Panels Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 9A 1Amp 5209 Fuse 10A 3Amp 5211 5212 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM GPSM II Fuse 11A 3Amp 5215 5216 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12A dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13A 3Amp 5301 5302 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 14A 3Amp 5305 5306 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 15A 1Amp 5309 Fuse 16A 3Amp 5311 5312 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17A 3Amp 5315 5316 LIM MPL E1 T1 ACM ASM TSM or E
448. ise specified UI User Interface Anything dealing with the parsing of command input and the processing of command and unsolicited output for both Human Machine HMI and Machine Machine MMI interfaces basically any data that comes and goes over one of the terminal types listed in CHG TRM Also includes Terminal Administration CHG RTRV TRM Terminal Echo ACT CANC ECHO Security Administration ENT CHG DLT RTRV SECU xxx Security Log xxx SECULOG and User ID and Password Administration xxx USER CHG PID Also includes anything related to IP services provided by the EAGLE including FTP and Telnet XLX Xilinx Used to include Xilinx changes by Hardware that need to be picked up by Software in a build 1 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 2 General Installation Information NSD Systems Components Overview eda dn abe Ud V 2 2 Eagle STP and IP SG Module Installation e 2 6 Meanie 2 8 Cable apelin ciann rra anite que rm ores nies 2 8 Fuse and Alarm Panel Labeling 2 10 Hardware Operational Testitig c ood eei duree 2 11 Eagle STP and SG Post Installation INS 2 12 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 2 1 General Installation Information NSD Systems Components Overview This section lists name function and part number s o
449. ision D May 2005 EOAP If site is SEAS only CHG FEAT SEASZON CHG FEAT FAN ON not already ON INH TRM TRM X CHG TRM TRM X TYPE OAP ALL YES ALW TRM TRM X RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X NOTE X denotes the terminals identified as OAP 2 Disconnect the AURORA Serial Port cable from the EAGLE terminal PORT X 3 From the EAGLE terminal enter the following commands RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X A terminal failure indication should be displayed on the EAGLE terminal screen after disconnection of AURORA Serial Port 3A 4 Test serial port 4A Connect the AURORA serial port 4A to the Eagle STP terminal port X and wait 5 seconds for the maintenance poll NOTE A maximum of two EOAP ports can be assigned For the location of the serial ports please refer to Figure 6 51 on page 6 81 From the Eagle STP command terminal enter the following commands to configure the Eagle STP for use with an EOAP If site is SEAS only INH TRM TRM X CHG TRM TRM X TYPE OAP ALL YES ALW TRM TRM X RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X NOTE X denotes the terminals identified as OAP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 85 EOAP 6 86 5 Disconnect the AURORA Serial Port 4A cable from the EAGLE terminal PORT X From the EAGLE terminal enter the following commands RTRV TRM TRM X REPT STAT TRM TRM X A terminal failure indication should be displayed on the EAGLE terminal screen after disconnection of AURORA Seri
450. it Result The fans stop running and the MINOR LED is lit At the system terminal enter the command gt Rept stat trbl 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies This step is repeated for each fan Test each fan to ensure that the alarm and the units are working correctly Result The terminal reports 302 Cooling Fan Normal 11 Replace the A POWER cable on the back of the FAN unit and secure the connector Result The fans are running and the MINOR LED is not lit Terminal reports alarm 303 Cooling Fan Normal 12 Remove the B POWER cable from the FAN unit Result The B powered fans stop running and the MINOR LED is lit 13 At the system terminal enter the command gt Rept stat trbl Test each fan to ensure that the alarms and the unit is working correctly Result The terminal reports 302 Cooling Fan Failure 14 Replace the B POWER cable on the back of the FAN unit and secure the connector Result The fans are running and the MINOR LED is not lit The terminal reports alarm 303 Cooling fan Normal 15 Repeat steps 6 through 14 for each fan unit installed Testing the Fan Assembly Secure Gateway software or 10x03 x04 must be installed before the EAGLE will report on the alarm conditions of the Fan Assemblies Therefore customers at a EAGLE release other than 10x03 x04 can only verify the Fan is operational by pulling the applicable fuses see to Ste
451. j 48VDC 48VDC RING 48VDC A 48VDC Bd 48VDC RTN 48VDC RTN rp 48VDC 48VDC A 48VDC 48VDCB rn Alarm INTFC GND Frame GND 5 PIA D ARTN RTN 1B 48VDC 48VDC 1B 3 p Alarm INTFC Control Backplane rnrPower RALMO ch 6 alarm Power A rr co 1 CO MMI X MMI XCH Last Extension Shelf VT 520 KYBD MME XCH7A Backplane in the Control Frame Keyboard HMMI X MMI Xcy B clock out q 115VAC 115VAC 115VAC 115VAC 115VAC X 25 MODEM B MODEM B MODEM A 25 MODEM Power Keyboard COM 1 D 115VAC Power
452. kplane P N 850 0330 03 04 B 18 Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 06 B 19 Control Modules 20 Extension Backplane P N 850 0356 01 curreret retten B 25 Extension Shelf Modules etre ite eret teenies erence 28 Extension Shelf aUe 33 External AT BO g u ese es see ae B 35 Pan Power o eas B 36 Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 B 37 General Purpose Relay Connector coeant B 38 General Purpose Relay Connector 02 e tte edes et B 39 General Purpose Serial Inf rface reete B 40 High Speed Message Multiplexer Control Shelf B 41 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 1 Connectors High Speed Message Multiplexer Extension Shellf B 46 Interface Backplane Control etr B 49 Interface Backplane Control B 49 Interprocessor Message Transport sese B 52 Local Maintenance Center Alarm B 53 MAS Communication Application B 54 Maintenance Disk and Alarm Card Control Shelf Backplane 57 OAP Alara back plane ic
453. l EOAP Card Slots and Drive Bays Processor Card Serial I O Card Air Management Cards Power Supply Card I Slots EOAP A Hard Drive CD ROM EOAP B 3 While facing the filler card to be removed locate the two captive screws attached to the top and bottom inject eject handle brackets on the faceplate 4 Using a small Phillips head screwdriver loosen the captive screws until they no longer engage the threads Do not remove the screws from the ejector handle brackets 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 61 EOAP Figure 6 37 Top Handle and Air Management Card Loosen the captive screws until they no longer engage the threads Close up of top inject eject handle with captive screw 5 Using the thumb and forefinger push the top handle up and the bottom handle down simultaneously until the card starts sliding easily from the card cage Figure 6 38 Freeing the Card from the EOAP Card Cage Push up Use thumb and forefinger to push top handle up Push the top handle up and the bottom handle down simultaneously until the card e starts sliding easily from the card cage 6 Pullthe card directly towards you until it clears the card guides and guide rails 6 62 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 7 RepeatSteps 2 to 6 for each
454. l Frame 4 35 Control frame 3 27 copper plated hardware 4 16 crimp 4 20 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 crimp thelugs 4 11 Crimping tool 4 13 critical problem 1 18 Cross Connect Panel 5 20 Cross Reference Index 1 15 Customer Service Report CSR 1 19 Customer Service Request 1 18 D Database Administration Manual 1 14 DCM 2 2 change features chg feat 6 74 DCM LED A 8 DCMX 5 25 DIP switch settings 5 110 displaying LNP services and translation type assignments rtrv Inp serv 6 128 6 142 OAP configuration 6 122 6 137 terminal configuration rtrv trm 6 120 6 135 Documentation Bulletins 1 14 dollies 3 9 Dolly Heavy Duty Frame 3 7 DSM 2 2 5 25 DSM LED A 8 DSX 5 12 5 18 E E1 5 118 5 120 5 121 5 123 5 125 5 129 A 6 A 11 A 12 E1 backplane 5 123 5 128 5 130 E1 Backplanes 5 121 1 Card 5 119 El interface 5 122 1 Interface Kit 5 122 E1 Patch Cables 5 129 E1 patch cables 5 122 E1 T1 Configuration Form 5 132 E1 T1 MIM 5 81 5 82 5 125 E1 T1 MIM 1 11 EAGLE 5SAS 1 6 Eagle STP 1 10 1 11 Ear protectors 3 20 EDCM 2 2 EILA P N 870 2049 01 2 2 A 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 electric shock 4 13 embossing dies 4 15 emergency response 1 19 EOAP 2 3 6 60 A 15 alarms 6 124 6 139 checksums and alarms 6 115 shelf 6 23 update configuration 6 129 6 143 updating 6 114 EOAP power cables 6 39 EOAP shelf tools and equipment 6 15 6 22 6 60 6 64 6 65 equipment required initial
455. l Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Tie wrap tool Flush cutters Slotted screwdriver 1 8 inch blade with 8 inch shank preferred Phillips screwdrivers 2 and 3 e Wrist strap Interprocessor Message Transport Cables The Interprocessor Message Transport IMT cables are specific lengths based on their application Termination information is furnished on the cable labels NOTE Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling electronic equipment Procedure IMT Cables 1 Route the cable and connect to the backplane connector specified on the cable label The IMT cables route down the left side of the frames see to Figure 5 5 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 7 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 2 For the IMT cables tighten the barrel securely on each connector Figure 5 2 interprocessor Message Transport Cables Control Shelf Extension Shelf Extension Shelf Simplified Cable Diagram 3 Dress each cable and secure with cable ties Ensure that each cable tie strap is cut flush with the cable tie head so that no sharp edges are exposed Figure 5 3 Three Frame Configuration 5 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Extension Frame 01 Extension Frame 00 Control Frame 00 Extension Shelf 21 Extension Shelf 31 Contro
456. l Shelf 11 Extension Shelf 22 Extension Shelf 32 Extension Shelf 13 Extension Shelf 23 Extension Shelf 33 IMT cable dia Note This is not a cable routing diagram this is a high level diagram 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 9 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 4 Six Frame Configuration Control Frame 00 Extension Frame 00 Extension Frame 01 Control Shelf 11 Extension Shelf 21 Extension Shelf 31 iium mum umm I E T I I I I I 3 p ss Extension Frame 04 Extension Frame 03 Extension Shelf 51 Extension Frame 02 Extension Shelf 61 Extension Shelf 41 ee Pe e ext cable dia Note This is not a cable routing diagram this is a high level diagram 5 10 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Rack Alarm and Row Alarm Cable Routing The rack alarm cable leads from ports in the control backplane and connects up to six frames in the row See Figure 5 5 on page 5 11 and Figure 5 36 on page 5 104 The row alarm cable leads from J34 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 on the control shelf backplane and terminates in the control frame end panel NOTE The clocking and fan control signals used to support frame 6 and frame 7 are eliminated in the 850 0330 06 version and later of the Control Shelf Backplane because those frames are no longer supported in the EAGLE 5 SAS STP system Figure 5 5 Control Shelf Ca
457. l connectors at their destination At the front of the EOAP locate the Ethernet port on the processor card Insert the Ethernet cable You have completed the cabling for the dual configuration Power up EOAP B next Refer to Procedure Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP EOAP Power Up WARNING EOAP and the same side fan tray use the same fuse When the EOAP is powered up the same side fan tray also receives power Take proper care to avoid injury or equipment damage near the fan blades WARNING The EOAP can operate without failure or component damage for up to one hour without the fan tray providing cooling After powering up the EOAP complete fan testing within this time frame Procedure Power Up EOAP 1 Make sure the switch on the front of the fan assembly is set to ON Figure 6 49 Fan Switch Set to ON e e ALARM FANS OFF AUTO FANS ON 2 Atthe FAP insert one EOAP fan assembly fuse for the B side of the EOAP WARNING Make sure you know exactly which fuses to insert A Reference the fuse card on the front of the FAP FAP P N 870 2320 01 offers four fuse positions on each side 17A through 20A and 17B through 20B The EOAP requires 10A fuses P N 517 0012 01 in the FAP for both A and B feeds of the EOAP 3 Atthe Eagle STP terminal the following message displays powered up and the machine boots The fans start running EOA
458. l injury TOPPLE DANGER Always read and understand instructions thoroughly before beginning work moving raising or lowering the frame or equipment TOPPLE DANGER Atleast two people are required to safely unpack A move and position any frame TOPPLE DANGER Frames are required to be attached to over head ladder racks before shelves are extended 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 3 Introduction gt DANGER No commercially AC powered equipment be used or placed within 7 ft of 48V equipment This may create a shock or current loop that can be severely hazardous to personnel and equipment DANGER Do not wear metal chains rings watches or jewelry or carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets when working on system equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components DANGER Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices WARNING not leave or allow unused metal objects such as screws or washers to remain anywhere within the equipment Remove all unused material from the equipment WARNING Do not allow any metal shavings to remain the equipment area This may occur from over tightened screws or bolts These small metal particles are hazardous to electronic equipment Be careful not to over tighten screws or bolts WARNING Do not use tie wraps on or above the top tra
459. l isolated ground plane system in a central office environment and requires a single connection to the central office ground window The system s ground cables must provide the sole grounding connection between the entire system and the central office grounding Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Power knife Cable cutters Cable stripper e Flush cutters Crimping tool with embossing dies test before using Socket wrench set 1 4 inch or 3 8 inch drive or open end wrenches Non oxidizing grease Lacing cord and nylon cable ties e Heat shrink gun hot air blower Torque wrench Fiber paper 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 13 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 14 Procedure Ground Frame 1 Install the continuous ground conductor to the Ground Window Run the conductor the length of the equipment lineup refer to Figure 4 9 The separate 6 American Wire Gauge AWG cable ground that runs to each frame will allow removal of a frame from the lineup without interrupting the grounding of other frames in the lineup 2 Install the branch ground conductor to the frame using screws and washers The continuous aisle ground conductor will be H tapped to the branch refer to Figure 4 9 Torque screws to 45 inch pounds Fi
460. l must be aware of and conform to the safety information provided starting on page 1 3 and through out this document This manual does not attempt to cover testing or system software Hardware operational testing is designed to verify the functionality of the finalized construction of the hardware at the customer site The demarcation line for the testing is up to and including the patch panel directly connected to the system installations are site specific therefore a comprehensive site survey is necessary for all installations For hardware descriptions or basic site engineering information refer to the Hardware Manual included with your system documentation For replacement procedures of existing hardware components refer to the Maintenance Manual included with your system documentation Tekelec Signaling Products Systems The Tekelec Signaling Products Installation Eagle manual describes the following Tekelec Signaling Products systems Eagle STP system Secure Gateway system subsystem 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP Introduction The Eagle Signaling Transfer Point STP is a large capacity multi functional fully scalable NEBS compliant GR 63 Network Equipment Building System STP Large capacity and scalability allow the Eagle STP to grow from a single shelf 80 link STP to a sixteen shelf 1024 link STP Due to the distributed processor design the Eagle STP does not have a
461. ld Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Chalk line with chalk Fiberglass tape measure Felt tip pen Isolation sheet template in mounting hardware kit to mount one frame 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 11 Frames and Shelves Procedure Prepare Floor Layout 1 Verify with a customer representative that the required area dimensions and equipment location corresponds to the marked floor plan 2 Use the floor plan provided with the engineering site file specifications to mark the front base line and the borders of the first frame with the chalk line refer to Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Typical Floor Layout for Frames End of first Rear floor layout OAP Miscellaneous frame Control Extension 23 5 8 frame optional frame frame inches Front base gt lt 25 7 8 6 257 8 6 25 7 8 6 I 25 7 8 inches inches inches inches inches inches inches Front 3 Align the frame isolation sheet template refer to Figure 3 9 along the chalk line to mark anchor location in the middle of each oval anchor slot and to mark the corners of the first frame Create another chalk line that allows 6 inches between each frame for correct spacing Align the template again against the chalk line and continue the process of aligning marking and moving the template until the site specific number of fr
462. le C 12 830 0315 xx Power Cable C 13 830 0366 xx Interface Cable C 14 830 0398 xx 15 830 0404 B Clock Cable C 16 830 0421 xx CD ROM Cakble C 17 830 0425 01 Adapter 15 Pin to 26 Pin ettet eren C 18 830 0435 xx External Alarm Cable Custom C 19 830 0543 xx Alarm Holdover Clock C 20 890 0527360 RS292 ua Sa Ete ha h C 21 850 0514 01 Serial I O Transition Card C 22 830 0531 03 Serial Interface C 23 830 0531 01 Serial Interface Converter 24 830 0528 01 Terminal Converter Cable C 25 830 0531 02 Serial Interface Terminal and Printer Adapter C 26 830 0535 Terminal Printer Cable C 27 830 0605 xx E1 Patch Cable C 28 830 0609 01 Included Fan Assembly
463. lf 1 31 SHELF ID 3100 ll oN 1 LSB SHELF e ID e Card 2 cation 3 BIT e00 numbers 4l 01 5 02 6 MSB 03 7 8 GRD IMT addresses 59 58 5 5D 5E DIP Switch Wire wrap Extension Shelf frame 3 shelf 2 32 SHELF ID 3200 ll 1 Lsg SHELF e Card 2 ID e location 3 BIT 00 numbers e01 e 02 03 6 MSB 2 7 GRD IMT 8 addresses 62 63 64 65 66 68 69 6A 68 6 60 6E 6 DIP switch Wire wrap Extension Shelf frame 3 shelf 3 33 identification Identification SHELF ID 3300 B ou SHELF e Card 1 LSB ID e location 2 BIT 00 numbers 3 01 4 02 5 03 6 MSB 7 GRD IMT 4 addresses 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 0 78 79 7B 7C 70 7 7F sh31 2 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 37 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 38 Card location numbers IMT addresses Card location numbers addresses 90 Card location numbers MT addresses AO A1 Figure 4 19 Extension Frame EF 02 Numbering Plan Extension Shelf frame 4 1 41 Q ON ZT O N QO N QONA wo Extension Shelf frame 4 shelf 3 43 O O O A2 A3 A4 A5 AB AC AD 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 DIP switch identification SHELF ID 4100 1 2 DIP switch identification SHELF ID 4200 Y 2 O Q
464. lf label Toc 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 29 Frames and Shelves Figure 3 19 Heavy Duty Frame Label Location Q 5 Handle TEKELEC logo Product name Door perferation pattern designated by product 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 30 Frames and Shelves Figure 3 20 Frame Label Location Detail Align left side of label DL 1 4 Fuse alarm panel frame lable detail Figure 3 21 Shelf Label Location Detail 8 1 4 Shelf Label S 1 4 shelf label detail 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 31 Frames and Shelves Figure 3 22 Heavy Duty Frame Label Location Q 5 E Handle TEKELEC logo Product name Door perferation pattern designated by product The heavy duty frame comes from manufacturing with the assembly information label in place NOTE 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 32 Frames and Shelves Older Frame Side Panels This section contains the procedures for installing the side panels unit separation panels and rear covers on the older system frames For more information of later frames and panels refer to Chapter 3 Frames and Shelves Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wra
465. ling duct Secure the EOAP using screws and external tooth washers P N 601 0010 01 Figure 6 12 Fan Assembly Under EOAP EOAP B Fan assembly 5 Doors are shipped with the EOAP Mount the doors on the front of the frame and ensure that the doors will close securely and fasten The EOAP shelf is mounted If you are upgrading from a single to a dual configuration install the cards into the shelf next Otherwise continue with installing the cables Refer to the procedures in section Maintenance Modem Setup on page 6 77 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 25 EOAP EOAP Cabling 6 26 This section describes how to cable the EOAP for a single configuration dual configuration or change the cables from a single to a dual configuration Refer to these sections e EOAP Cabling Overview on page 6 26 Single Configuration Cabling on page 6 35 Dual Configuration Cabling on page 6 38 Single to Dual Configuration Cabling on page 6 59 EOAP Cabling Overview This section provides cable legends port functions EOAP backplane connections and wiring diagrams for single dual or single to dual EOAP configurations Cable Legend and Port Functions Use this cable legend to locate the cables on the EOAP backplane Figure 6 15 or Figure 6 13 or the connection diagram Figure 6 16 or Figure 6 14 Refer to Table 6 8 for EOAP backplane labels and port functions 910 46
466. llow Green 1 33A White 15A Red Blue 1 5A White Yellow 4 22 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Procedure Verify Individual Fuse Positions 1 Ensure that all fuses have been removed 2 Ensure that all circuit cards have been unseated 3 Confirm that the system is receiving power from the 48VDC power source Ensure that voltage is present by checking it with a volt ohm meter At the one side at a time First on the A side remove a fuse Then on the B side remove a fuse Return to the A side an insert the fuse 4 Install a fuse of the rating specified for that position refer to Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations on page 4 24 fuse has a gray flag 2 fuse has an orange flag fuse has a blue flag 7 fuse has a black and white flag 10 fuse has a red and white flag 5 Install circuit cards appropriate for the slots powered by that fuse refer to Table 4 5 on page 4 24 6 Check that LEDs of the applicable cards are on 7 Pullthe fuse 8 Check that the LEDs of the cards in the specified locations are not illuminated after the removal of the fuse 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 23 Fuses and Alarm Panels Lists Fuse and Card Locations Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Control Frame 00 CF 00 F use and Alarm Panel side A refer to Figure 4
467. lock Cable Figure C 11 Clock Cable P N 830 0404 xx Cable P N 830 0404 xx will not support HMUX and must be replaced by Cable P N 830 0398 xx for Eagle Release 30 0 rA Cable P N 830 0404 xx P1 P2 NC SH2MBUSTX SH2MBUSTX SH2MBUSRX SH2MBUSRX SH3MBUSTX SH3MBUSTX FAN SH3MBUSRX SH3MBUSRX NC NC NC NC SH2_56KHZ SH2_56KHZ SH2_8KHZ SH2_8KHZ SH3_56KHZ SH3_56KHZ SH3_8KHZ SH3_8KHZ NC NC NC NC lt gt m 830 0404 01 16 NC SH2MBU SH2MBI STX USTX SH2MBUSRX SH2MBU SH3MBU SH3MB SH3MBU SH3MBU NC NC NC NC 5 2 56K SH2 56K SRX STX USTX FAN SRX SRX HZ HZ SH2_8KHZ SH2_8KH 7 SH3_56KHZ SH3_56KHZ SH3_8KHZ SH3_8KH NC NC NC NC 7 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0421 xx CD ROM Cable Figure C 12 CD ROM Cable P N 830 0421 xx PART NUMBER LENGTH INCHES CENTIMETERS 830 0421 01 3 50 8 87 830 0421 02 2 50 6 33 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 KEYING TAB 0 0 CONDUCTOR 1 850 0421 XX Cables C 17 Cables 830 0425 01 Adapter 15 Pin to 26 Pin Figure C 13 Adapter 15 Pin to 26 Pin P N 830 0425 01
468. lock Interface Panel Do not wire on the sleeve pin Output Panel Frame Ground Check that the output panel frame ground cable is installed between TB2 on the output panel and an output panel mounting screw see Figure 5 42 NOTE This cable P N 690 0009 consists of black 16 AWG and a terminal ring Power Connections Check that the holdover clock power connections are installed according to Table 5 6 for holdover clock and fuse and alarm panel connections 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 109 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies See Figure 5 41 on page 5 110 and Figure 5 42 on page 5 111 for holdover clock connector locations See Figure 5 43 and Figure 5 44 for fuse and alarm panel connector locations Table 5 6 Holdover Clock Wire Colors and Connections Holdover Clock Connector Wire Color FAP Connection TB1 48VDC Red B side 48VDC 1 TB1 RTN Black B side 48VDC return 1 TB2 48VDC Red A side 48VDC 1 TB2 RTN Black A side 48VDC return 1 TB1 GND White A side Chassis GND TB2 GND White B side Chassis GRD Figure 5 41 Holdover Clock Power Connector 48V O 48VDC RTN le 48VDC return GND O TB1orTB2 O O power connector Holdover Clock Switch Settings Set the switches on the back of the holdover clock to the following positions see Figure 5 42 SHELF MODE SW1 ST3 down POWER ALARM SW2
469. lowing steps require use of function keys To press function keys on a VT 520 terminal type Esc plus the number or use the corresponding PF key For example to press function key F2 type lt gt 2 or press the PF2 key A quick reference guide to 01 text editor commands is provided in Appendix A 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 101 EOAP 6 102 WARNING Make sure the terminal where the act oap config command is issued is attached to the correct Issuing the act oap config command to the wrong EOAP will cause the wrong configuration data to be sent causing the EOAP to go out of service NOTE When facing the front of the EOAP chassis EOAP A is on the left side and EOAP B the right side EOAPs are named and addressed according to their MMI port number on the EAGLE STP backplane EOAP A can use any MMI port as long as EOAP B is assigned to a higher numbered MMI port For example if the terminal connections are reversed and the EOAPs are updated with the act oap config command the configuration data for EOAP A as configured by the chg oap config command is delivered to EOAP B and the configuration of the data for EOAP B is delivered to EOAP A Depending on how the EOAPs are configured in the database this can present problems for the EOAPs including both EOAPs going out of service because the configuration information for the EOAPs is not correct CAUTION Update only one EOAP at a time In addition although
470. ly and secure the connector The Active and Alarm LEDs are green The Minor LED at the FAP goes out The B fans start running At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 303 COOLING FAN NORMAL You have tested the operation of the fan assembly and the fan alarm 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Maintenance Modem Setup Use the following procedure to set up the maintenance modem WARNING Solaris Console Port Break Issue A terminal or modem connected to the EOAP serial port and acting as the system console can halt the operating system bring it to the ok prompt if you turn off or unplug the terminal or unplug the modem or drop the connection When the system is halted in this manner it must be manually booted from the ok prompt to resume operation This problem affects EOAPs running Solaris 2 5 1 The problem is most often encountered when Tekelec support personnel use a modem to dial into the customer s system Solution After the modem connection has been dropped or the terminal has been disconnected use the Eagle STP console to issue a reboot command to the Procedure Set Up Maintenance Modem CAUTION The EOAP s open system architecture allows access to the operating system Any undocumented changes to the files may cause the system to become corrupted and unusable Making any undocumented changes on the EOAP including c
471. meter chg oap config 6 112 BNMASK parameter chg oap config 6 112 brace bolts 3 6 brackets 5 69 BROUTER parameter chg oap config 6 112 Building Integrated Timing System 5 85 5 88 Building Integrated Timing System BITS 1 6 bus 4 8 C Cable Arm 4 21 Cable Connector 5 12 cable ends 4 11 Cable Holes 3 15 cable list 6 11 Cable Rack Mounting Kit 3 16 3 18 Cable Running List 5 107 Cables 4 20 cables Index 2 labeling 2 8 C 4 Cables Adapter for 03 and 04 backplanes C 49 Capacity 4 24 Cautionary Information 3 2 central office ground 4 18 CFG parameter chg oap config 6 112 change features chg feat DCM 6 74 Channel 5 119 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 12 Chapter 2 General Installation Information 1 12 Chapter 3 Frames and Shelves 1 12 Chapter 4 Fuses and Breakers 1 12 Chapter 5 Eagle STP IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 1 12 Chapter 7 OAP EOAP 1 12 checksums and alarms EOAP 6 115 CI 22 A 7 CLOCK 5 110 clock 5 85 5 106 5 115 Clock Cable 5 104 clock cable 5 104 Clock Cable Diagram 5 102 clock cable installation 5 12 clock cables 5 101 5 112 clock connection cable install 6 44 C 36 route 6 45 clock connectors B 5 B 7 B 10 B 12 clock in out cable install 6 43 Clock Supply Cables 5 88 Clock Alarm 5 7 command rtrv oap config 6 122 6 137 Commands Error Recovery Manual 1 14 Commands Manual 1 14 Common Language Location Identifier 1 19 composite clock 5 82 concrete floor preparation 3 20 Contro
472. mp 1110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 1113 1114 MASP A TDM and MCAP Fuse 5B 1Amp 1117 1118 MDAL Fuse 6B dummy fuse Fuse 7B 3Amp 1203 1204 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 145 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Fuse 8B 3Amp 1207 1208 LIMs ACM ASM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 9B 1Amp 1210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 1213 1214 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 11B 3Amp Fuse 12B dummy fuse 1217 1218 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 13B 3Amp 1303 1304 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 14B 3Amp 1307 1308 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 15B 1Amp 1310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 1313 1314 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 or GPSM Fuse 17B 3Amp Fuse 18B dummy fuse Fuse 19B dummy fuse Fuse 20B dummy fuse 1317 1318 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Extension Frame 00 EF 00 Fuse and Alarm Panel side A see Figure 5 66 Fuse 1A 3Amp 2101 2102 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 2A 3Amp 2105 2106 LIMs ACM ASM EDCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM Fuse 3A 1Amp 2109 HMUX Fuse 4A 3Amp 2111 2112 LIMs ACM ASM EDC
473. n 5 7 Recommended Tools essere nnns 5 7 Interprocessor Message Transport Cables 5 7 Rack Alarm and Row Alarm Cable Routing 5 11 Interface Cable Installation 5 12 Interface Cable Installation Order 5 13 Control Frame CF 00 Backplane oc detti 5 13 Extension Frame EF 00 essere 5 14 Extension Frame EF 01 5 15 Extension Frame FF 02 5 16 Extension Frame EF 03 essere 5 17 Extension Frame FF 04 5 17 Recommended Tools essent 5 18 LAN Ethernet Cable Installation for ACM 5 21 Recommended 5 1 2 11204 40 00000000000000000000000000 5 21 DCM and Fan Option EDCM DSM Cabling 5 25 DCM and EDCM Modules 5 25 Database Communications 5 25 ASM and DSM MCPM Upgrade Procedures 5 28 Application Service Module ASM to Transaction Service Module TSM 256 or higher Upgrade for SCCP 5 28 91
474. n D May 2005 6 95 EOAP Command completed NOTE GPL of the EOAP may be different depending on the Eagle STP and EOAP release The PST may vary from IS NR to IS ANR depending on status of X 25 links An SST state of restricted means the EOAP is communicating to the Eagle STP however the X 25 is FAULT If a second EOAP is connected rept stat seas will display both EOAPs if the X25 Config in the EOAP s DEFAULT file is set to L1P3 6 96 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 2 Generate a summary report of the status of the SEAS subsystem on Eagle STP using two EOAPs Dual Mode or L1P3 set in the DEFAULT FILE rept stat seas tekelecstp 96 01 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 30 0 0 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM OOS MT Fault EI TDM Port 3 IS NR Active aaa TDM Port 9 IS NR Active 026 000 000 IS NR Active gt B 026 000 000 IS NR Active X25 Link Al OOS MT Fault X25 Link B1 OOS MT Fault SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS C 0349 SEAS unavailable SEAS EOAP A STATUS No Alarms X25 Link A1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 1 PVCs IS NR X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 B1 PVCs IS NR X25 B1 PVCs OOS MT Command completed NOTE GPL of the EOAP may be different depending on the Eagle STP and EOAP release The PST may vary from IS NR to IS ANR depending on status of X 25 links An SST s
475. n IMT bus A BLANK Communication processor is not operating IMTB RED MPL is off IMT bus B AMBER MPL is on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN MPL is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating PORTA RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT A1 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT A2 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT A3 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B1 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B2 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service PORT B3 RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 OCU LIM Office Channel Unit LIM LEDs OCU LIM P N 870 1010 xx and P N 870 1486 xx Figure A 24 OCU LIM LEDs TEKELEC Descriptions APPL PROC Applications Processor Status RED Application processor is not running or is failing diagnostics AMBER LIM OCU is loading an application or is being polled Guay be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN LIM OCU is running an application Status Seria number
476. n Suite e eee 1 13 Documentation Packaging Delivery and Updates 1 16 References dta ete E EI eto E T 1 16 Product Packaging and Delivery Lus ete rate Ip 1 17 Tekelec Technical Sup port bedeutete tetto tss 1 17 Installation SUP POLE s terit tetas deu 1 17 Problem Critical uae Acte tege de tee 1 18 Problemi MAIOE ae hasa Id Rm 1 18 Problem Minor ua kanan nennen nnne nennen 1 19 ed ipte REPAS IDA UL 1 19 Emergency ROS POISE tete ym antec taped D kasu usis 1 19 Hardware Repair ed det o e 1 20 Repair and Return Shipping Instructions ss 1 21 Specifically Targeted PCBs 1 23 Returning augu n 1 23 PRCT OMY INS ices E 1 25 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 i Table of Contents Doc Assignments from Software perspective 1 31 Chapter 2 General Installation Information NSD Systems Components Overview a 2 2 Eagle STP and IP SG Module Installation ees 2 6 2 8 Cable Labeling orare praeditos 2 8 Fuse and Alarm Panel Labeling a 2 10 Label Kit for Fuse and Alarm Panel 2 10
477. nal Pin Signal A01 LGND 01 amp IFl 60 01 amp IF10 60 D01 IN2 A02 amp IF3 60 B02 amp IF2 60 02 amp IF19 60 D02 LGND A03 LGND B03 C03 amp IF20 60 D03 LGND 04 amp IF4_60 B04 C04 amp IF21_60 D04 LGND A05 amp IF5_60 B05 C05 amp IF22_60 D05 LGND A06 amp IF6_60 B06 amp IF24_60 C06 amp IF23 60 D06 LGND A07 amp IF7_60 BO7 amp IF26 60 C07 D07 IF25_60 A08 amp IF8_60 08 amp IF9 60 08 amp IF18 60 D08 LGND A09 LGND B09 C09 D09 LGND A10 B10 C10 EBI XSP2 D10 EBI XSP3 LGND 11 LGND C11 EBI XBEO D11 EBI XD00 A12 BSEROQ 50 12 LGND C12 EBI XBEI 012 EBI 001 A13 BSEROQ 50 B13 LGND C13 EBI XBE2 D13 EBI XD02 A14 LGND B14 LGND C14 EBI XBE3 D14 EBI XD03 A15 B15 LGND C15 EBI XBS8 D15 EBI XD04 A16 B16 LGND C16 EBI XBS16 D16 EBI XD05 A17 LGND B17 LGND C17 EBI ADSO D17 EBI XD06 A18 BSEL B18 C18 EBI AADS1 D18 EBI XD07 A19 B19 C19 EBI AXW R D19 EBI XD08 A20 BMUXIN B20 C20 EBI XM IO D20 XD09 A21 LGND B21 BINQ C21 EBI XSP1 D21 EBI XD10 22 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 Connectors Table B 14 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Bottom Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A22 B22 LGND C22 EBI X
478. nates when there is no 5VDC output from the DC converter GREEN Illuminates when the 5VDC output is within an acceptable operating range BLANK No power is present REV X Revision number Part number IPMX 870 1171 XX ipmxledneb 20 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs MCA Matrix Controller Assembly Card Holdover Clock MCA P N 000 0028 01 Figure A 18 Holdover Clock MCA Card LEDs DCD A LEDs Descriptions FAIL RED This card has failed or there is a loss of all input references to this card BLANK No card or input reference failure detected AUTO GREEN Indicates output failure was protected automatically BLANK No failures detected O FAIL MAN GREEN Indicates output failure was protected manually AUTO BLANK No failures detected MAN O PORT ALARM 1 9 9 36 94 56 96 7698 96 10 MCA 5 45015 01 ISS 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 A 21 LEDs MCAP MAS Communications Applications Processor For EAGLE 30 0 must be replaced by GPSM II P N 870 2360 01 MCAP P N 870 1013 xx or MCAP 256 P N 870 1307 xx Figure A 19 MCAP LEDs LEDs Descriptions AN APPL PROC RED Application processor is Applications not running is failing Processor Status diagnostics or is starting up after insertion AMBER Application is loading GREEN Application is running IMTA IMT Bus
479. nd Alarm Card Control Shelf Backplane MDAL Control Shelf Backplane Top Connector P1 Figure B 37 Maintenance Disk and Alarm Connector Top 2 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O00000000008 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO000008 i 8 Table B 37 MDAL Backplane Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 BALMENO 01 BALMDO C01 D01 LGND A02 1 02 BALMDI C02 LGND D02 LGND A03 BALMEN2 B03 BALMD2 C03 LGND D03 A04 B04 BALMD3 C04 LGND D04 A05 B05 BALMD4 C05 D05 LGND A06 BALMCK B06 BALMD5 C06 D06 A07 BALMD7 07 BALMD6 C07 ROCRNC D07 LGND A08 ROFANCTRL 08 LGND C08 ROMJNC D08 ROCOM A09 AALMENO B09 AALMDO C09 ROMNNC D09 ROMJNO 10 AALMENI B10 AALMDI C10 ROBNC 010 ROMNNO 11 AALMEN2 11 AALMD2 C11 D11 ROBNO 12 B12 AALMD3 C12 LGND D12 LGND A13 AALMEN4 B13 AALMD4 C13 D13 LGND 14 AALMCK B14 AALMD5 C14 LGND D14 LGND 15 AALMD7 B15 AALMD6 15 D15 LGND A16 CHASSIS B16 CHASSIS C16 CHASSIS D16 CHASSIS GND GND GND GND A17 B17 LGND C17 D17 A18 LGND B18 LGND C18 LGND D18
480. nd confirm the following information before contacting the Tekelec Customer Contact Center Your name Company name Call back number Email address Which product you are calling about Site location CLLI number System serial number NT CE LM DS etc Complete software release e g 28 0 1 41 53 0 Upgrade forms WI005153 WI005154 WI005218 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 21 Introduction 1 22 NOTE WIO005219 W1005220 Tekelec card type e g ILA MPL DSM etc Tekelec card part number 870 999 Associated serial number 1021HHHHHHHI Reason for return or replacement isolated from system Full name of person the replacement card is being shipped to Shipping address If possible include associated alarms UAMs and a copy of the associated output capture file 2 Contact the Customer Care Center and request a Return of Material Authorization RMA Reference Tekelec Technical Support on page 17 3 If the item is a like for like advance replacement the Technical Services engineer arranges for shipment of the replacement item to the customer a b Wait for the replacement component to arrive Package the defective component in the box of materials you received with your replacement Use proper static handling procedures Label the outside and inside of the box with your RMA number clearly visible Place the packing slip from the received replacements on the ins
481. nd equipment 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 63 EOAP proper ESD grounding procedures to prevent damage to the equipment WARNING Prior to working on or around live equipment follow reference ESD Protection Procedure 907 0404 01 Table 6 13 EOAP Cards and Drives Air Management Card Power Supply Card Processor Card Serial Card P N 870 1524 01 P N 870 1521 01 P N 870 1523 01 870 1522 01 CD ROM Drive Card P N 870 1515 03 6 64 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 14 Tools and Equipment EOAP Cards and Drives Check Tools and Equipment P N Air Management Card 870 1524 01 CD ROM Drive 870 1515 03 Hard Drive 870 1514 03 Power supply card 870 1521 01 Processor card 870 1523 01 Serial Card 870 1522 01 Small Phillips head screwdriver Procedure Install EOAP Cards and Drives Ontheright side of the locate the installation position of the card to be installed Refer to Figure 6 36 Dual EOAP Card Slots and Drive Bays on page 6 61 for slot locations slots 1 and 2 in Remove the card from the shipping container Refer to Table 6 13 for a picture of each card and drive to be installed Examine the card including the pins of the rear connector for any signs of damage If the card is damaged discontinue with the installation of this card and contact Tekelec Technical Support for a repl
482. nds to make sure that there are no alarms for EOAP A If both the SEAS and LNP features are on then enter both commands to verify that there are no alarms for EOAP A 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 129 EOAP These are examples of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report IS NR Active SEAS Interfaces Configured 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active _ X 25 Link Al IS NR Active X 25 Link B1 IS NR Active SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms A X25 Link 82 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 1 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 1 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 Bl PVCs OOS MT Eden X25 A2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 A2 PVCs OOS MT X25 B2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 B2 PVCs OOS MT Command Completed rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Assoc
483. ne El configured card can be plugged into each bus on the backplane e When installing 1 cards on the shelf equipped with the E1 Interface Backplane ensure that none of the slots to be used are cabled to the backplane If a 1 card is installed in slot that is connected to the E1 backplane all E1 cards on that bus may fail The E1 backplane is impedance controlled for 120 Ohm and is designed for use with RS 485 transmission characteristics 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 123 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 124 Possible Configurations The 1 Interface Backplane is designed to allow the maximum number of possible customer setups It allows the customer to choose between several levels of diversity and convenience Configurations depend on the number of cards configured as E1 cards versus the number of cards configured as channel cards The level of diversity required by the customer also affects the configuration requirements Sample configurations are provided see Figure 5 55 All signals labeled E1 input may be one or two 1 ports depending on the cable used High Level Functional Description The E1 Interface Backplane P N 850 0459 01 provides a connection point from the backplane to an external E1 interface The backplane is populated with 64 high density connectors P N 500 0088 01 and 64 terminating resistors P N 104 0032 01 Note that each row is bused together and each column lin
484. nect it to PORT 3A located at the center right of the EOAP backplane Connect the other end to the control shelf backplane MMI X A port Tighten the cable connectors Take the second MMI cable P N 830 0708 xx and connect it to PORT 3B located at the center left of the EOAP backplane Connect the other end to the control shelf backplane MMI X B port Tighten the cable connectors Loosely route these two cables along the third tie rod and across the rod toward the right side of the EOAP backplane Route the two cables around the right side of the shelf to the center of the next traverse arm extender Then route the cable up to the top of the EOAP frame across the cable rack and down to the control shelf backplane You have now connected the two MMI X cables P N 830 0708 xx between the EOAP and the control shelf backplane Finish these cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Finish Backplane Cables This section describes how to finish the cabling on the backplanes of the EOAP shelf Finishing the cables includes the forming final routing tie down and connection if applicable for each cable NOTE Install all cable assemblies with dressed bend radii in accordance with Tekelec Cable Bend Radius Specification 906 0020 01 Procedure Finish Backplane Cables 1 Goto the backplane of the EOAP to finish the cables from the EOAP top center backplane
485. nectors at one end for connection to the system backplanes NOTE RunLink Interface Module LIM cables on traverse arms behind IMT and clock cables The ends without connectors are normally terminated on a DSX cross connect panel with wire wrap terminals Some V 35 cable uses a female V 35 connector on the patch panel end Procedure Install Interface Cable Connector 1 Secure the V 35 connector to the designated receptacle on the DSX panel 2 Plug the connector in and turn one of the connector screws to start the screw into the threaded hole 3 Start the other screw into the other threaded hole With both screws started alternate tightening the screws until both screws are snug finger tight Complete tightening to FIVE inch pounds only NO MORE or the screws will twist off and the connection can be broken NOTE Tightening must be done in an alternating pattern Termination information is furnished in the Cable Running List in the Equipment Specification for the site See the following section Interface Cable Installation Order on page 5 13 for a typical interface cable cross connect panel connection NOTE Allcable ends must be labeled TO and FROM location information from Port to Backplane 5 12 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Interface Cable Installation Order Interface cables should be installed in the following order Control Frame CF 00 Backplane P N 8
486. ned and in service RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition PORT B2 RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service T Revision RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition number V PORT B3 RED Link is out of service AMBER Link attached to Port is attempting to align GREEN Link is aligned and in service RED GREEN alternating Link attached to Port is in a loop back condition XX he lt Part number MPL 870 2061 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 25 LEDs MPLT Multi Port LIM with Taxi Component MPLT P N 870 2062 02 Figure A 23 MPLT LEDs TEKELEC APPL PROC O INTA PORTS JTAG APPLICATION TERMINAL Serial number CLEI 0123456789 870 2061 02 8 26 REV XX code Revision number Part number LEDs Descriptions APPL PROC RED Application processor is not running or 15 failing diagnostics AMBER MPL is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN MPL is running an application IMTA RED MPL is off IMT bus A AMBER MPL is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN MPL is o
487. nf fail clear daemon Process ysADO01 Host tekelec XXX PID 463 OS Contract OS to NE daemon Process ysAD01 Host tekelec XXX PID 494 UAL test msg echo Process ysT100 Host tekelec XXX PID 492 Process ysT200 Host tekelec XXX PID 493 Process ysA102 Host tekelec XXX PID 618 UAL X 25 PVC daemon Process ysA101 Host tekelec XXX PID 613 UAL X 25 PVC daemon Process ysA103 Host tekelec XXX PID 632 UAL X 25 PVC daemon Process ysTTOO Host tekelec XXX 644 Process emsAgent Host tekelec XXX PID 673 EMS AGENT Process emsStatusUpdate Host tekelec XXX PID 688 EMS Agent Status Verify AURORA Serial Connections to Eagle STP Single This procedure will test each of the AURORA serial ports connected to the EAGLE The Aurora card s serial ports 3A and 4A will be connected to an Eagle STP terminal connection on the backplane Refer to Figure 6 51 for connection example NOTE A maximum of two EOAP ports can be assigned For the location of the serial ports refer to Figure 6 51 Eagle STP terminal x was used for this example Any configurable terminal can be used Test 5 1 Test serial port 3A Connect the AURORA serial port 3A to the Eagle STP terminal port X and wait 5 seconds for the maintenance poll From the Eagle STP command terminal enter the following commands to configure the Eagle STP for use with an EOAP 910 4601 01 Rev
488. nfig command the EOAP ports must be out of service To find which terminal ports are the EOAP ports display the terminal configuration in the database using the rtrv trm command The EOAP ports are shown by the entry in the TYPE field as shown in bold in the example rtrv trm output This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM TYPE COMM EC TMOUT MXINV DURAL 1 VT320 9600 7 E 1 SW 30 5 99 59 59 2 KSR 9600 7 E 1 HW 30 5 INDEF 3 PRINTER 4800 7 1 HW 30 0 00 00 00 4 OAP 19200 7 E 1 SW 30 5 00 30 00 5 VT320 9600 7 O 1 NONE 30 5 00 00 30 6 VT320 9600 7 E 2 SW 30 9 INDEF 7 PRINTER 9600 7 N 2 HW 30 5 00 30 00 8 KSR 19200 7 E 2 BOTH 30 5 00 30 00 9 VT320 9600 7 E 1 SW 30 7 00 30 00 10 OAP 19200 7 E 1 SW 30 5 00 30 00 11 VT320 4800 7 E 1 HW 30 5 00 30 00 12 PRINTER 9600 7 1 HW 30 4 00 30 00 13 VT320 9600 7 O 1 NONE 30 5 00 30 00 14 VT320 9600 7 E 2 SW 30 8 00 30 00 15 VT320 9600 7 N 2 HW 30 5 00 30 00 16 VT320 9600 7 E 2 BOTH 30 3 00 30 00 TRM TRAF LINK SA SYS PU DB UIMRD NO YES YES NO YES YES 2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 3 YES YES YES NO YES YES YES 4 NO NO NO NO YES 5 NO YES NO NO NO NO YES 6 NO NO YES NO NO NO NO 7 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 8 NO NO NO NO YES NO YES 9 NO YES NO NO NO YES NO 10 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 11 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 12 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 13 NO YES NO NO NO NO YES 14 NO NO YES NO NO NO NO 15 YES YES Y
489. nfiguration Feature Data Required Before an EOAP can be Updated Either SEAS or System CLLI configured with the c11i parameter of the LNP features chg sid command LNP services class lidb cnam and isvm LNP configured with the serv parameter of either the ent lnp serv Or chg 1lnp serv command To keep EOAP parameters in sync with the EAGLE STP system a checksum is created using all of the EOAP configuration data stored on the system shown in Tables 6 19 and 6 20 The EOAP also calculates this checksum based on the data it has The EOAP returns this checksum with every maintenance poll The EAGLE STP system compares the checksums and generates the following alarm UAM 0364 within ten seconds of any mismatch rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 11 28 EST Rel 26 0 0 i 1501 0364 OAP A Configuration data checksum mismatch The alarm is cleared when a maintenance poll returns a checksum that matches the EAGLE STP system s checksum indicating that the databases are back in sync The system clears the alarm within five seconds The following UAM UAM 09365 clears the alarm rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 11 28 EST Rel 26 0 0 1502 0365 OAP A Configuration data checksum alarm cleared 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 117 EOAP Example EOAP Initial Configuration The examples in this procedure are used to initially configure a dual configuration EOAP with the settings shown in Table 6 19 For a single configu
490. ng conventions This type style indicates input by the user or a section of output that demonstrates a point to the user NOTE EOAP commands in this document are CASE SENSITIVE This typeface indicates output from the machine A section of output that demonstrates a point to the user is indicated in bold The following UNIX prompts appear throughout this document you are logged in as root o you are logged in as ccsproj ok the operating system is halted When describing components within a section which relates to multiple systems system specific components are clearly identified for example Eagle STP Only or IP SG Only Components that are specific to a release are labeled with the system and release number for example IP SG 8 0 or later Eagle 30 0 or later Documentation Suite Tekelec delivers with each system a documentation suite containing a minimum of all required documentation for the ordered system The documentation suite may include additional manuals for informational purposes The documentation suite typically includes these types of manuals 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 13 Introduction 1 14 Administration Manuals that describe how to administer application processors on the platform The Commands Error Recovery Manual contains procedures for logging into and out of the system a general description of the terminals printers and the disk drive used a description of all t
491. ng Integrated Timing Source BITS clocks In this document references to BITS and composite clocks are interchangeable 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Master Timing Site Requirements Implementation of the HS Master Timing feature requires the following software and hardware baselines EAGLE STP software release 30 0 or later NOTE Earlier software loads do not support the master timing capabilities of the following required TDM GPSM ll card pair TDM card P N 870 0774 10 or later Earlier versions do not support the HS Master Timing Feature GPSM Il cards P N 870 2360 01 Earlier versions do not support the HS Master Timing feature Control shelves with backplane P N 850 0330 03 or 04 if adapter cables P N 830 0846 01 are installed with HS clock cables P N 830 0873 xx NOTE Connect the adapter cables P N 830 0846 01 between connectors J57 and J56 ACLK3 and ACLK4 on the backplane and to the site HS clock source using HS clock cables P N 830 0873 xx Leave the existing composite clock cables P N 830 0226 xx connected to J42 and JA1 Primary and Secondary BITS Control shelves with backplane P N 850 0330 06 or later using HS master and composite clock cables P N 830 0873 xx 1 Replace the existing composite clock cables P N 830 0226 xx with RS422 compatible HS master and composite clock cables P N 830 0873 xx For control shelves with backplane
492. nk Interface Module LIM 5 81 LMC connector B 53 LNP services and translation type assignments displaying rtrv Inp serv 6 128 6 142 local maintenance center cable installation 5 87 LOGIC GROUND 4 19 Logic Ground 4 13 4 16 Logic ground 5 7 logic ground 4 17 4 19 logic ground cable 4 18 logic grounds 4 18 LSMS parameter chg oap config 6 112 M Main Ground Bar 4 15 Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor MASP 5 81 Maintenance Manual 1 7 1 14 major problem 1 18 MAS communications application processor MCAP 5 81 Masking tape 3 20 masonry drill bit 3 20 MASP 5 84 Master Glossary 1 15 Master Timing 5 81 MAU 5 21 5 23 5 142 MAU Media Access Unit 2 13 MDAL backplane connectors B 57 Media Access Unit MAU 2 13 Method A update EOAP 6 129 6 144 Method B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 update EOAP 6 132 6 147 minor problem 1 19 MIS A24 Miscellaneous frame 3 27 MNSAP parameter chg oap config 6 113 modem 5 107 MPSEL parameter chg oap config 6 113 MSSEL parameter chg oap config 6 113 N NEBS 3 33 non oxidizing grease 4 15 4 17 6 5 alarm installation 5 87 frame 3 27 parameter chg oap config 6 113 one inch diameter hole 3 15 OOS MT DSBLD state 6 109 6 121 6 136 orange flag 4 23 P P B 51 C 49 P N 000 0028 01 21 P N 502 0040 01 6 27 P N 502 0085 01 4 19 P N 654 0075 01 gray tinted Lexan rear covers with round holes 3 37 P N 6
493. nnection marked FAN A POWER For B fan power Plug one end of the cable P N 830 0609 01 into J 8 on the backplane P N 850 0330 06 Route the cable to the right of the frame faced from the rear and to the fan assembly to the connection marked FAN B POWER Form and dress the two cables together and check the security of all of the connections Procedure Install Fan Cables 1 Tocable the fan assembly plug a cable P N 830 0609 01 onto the shelf on backplane P N 850 0330 06 FAN A POWER and connector J9 Tighten the screws on the connector 2 When the cable is connected to the backplane route the cable to the top tie down rod and secure the cable with a tie wrap 3 Route the cable to the right side of the frame Run the cable between the shelf and the traverse arms CAUTION Do not form the cable with the LIM cables 4 Secure the fan cables to the back side of the traverse arm using tie wraps 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 73 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 Plug the other end of the cable onto the fan unit connector marked FAN POWER Tighten the screws on the connector 6 The other fan cable P N 830 0690 01 plugs into the backplane P N 850 0330 06 the connector J8 Tighten the screws on the connector 7 Route the cable out to the top tie down rod and secure it using a tie wrap Run the cable down between the shelf and traverse arm CAUTION Do not form FAN POWER cables with LIM
494. nnection will cause service interruption and take down the any system WARNING Before drilling holes in any flooring verify with facilities personnel that the area is free of gas or water pipes ventilation and electrical wiring conduits 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Procedure Prepare a Concrete Floor for Heavy Duty Frame Installation The personnel must have a thorough knowledge of telecommunication installation specifications and procedures If the holes are drilled at an angle the anchor and frame will not come together properly 1 Drill an 18 mm hole at the marked anchor location in the concrete floor to a depth of 3 inches 7 7 cm Use the vacuum cleaner to collect the dust while drilling holes Clean out each hole after drilling is completed NOTE If any obstruction is encountered while drilling the hole fill the unusable hole with pour stone or an equivalent product After allowing sufficient set time drill the hole in another spot within the marked area Check the hole to make sure the fully assembled anchors can be set into the concrete three inches The metal sleeve shown in Figure 3 13 must be below the floor Figure 3 13 Anchor Assembly 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Anchor Assembly Threaded rod Small steel Torque nut washer red plastic cover SZ Large steel QE washer Fiberglass washer Metal sleeve Nylon shoulder washer E
495. nnectors 5 105 Figure 5 38 Output Panel Clock Connections 5 106 Figure 5 39 Holdover clock reti tr ettet tret ette ueteres 5 108 Figure 5 40 Master Timing Leads eee 5 109 Figure 5 41 Holdover Clock Power Connector es 5 110 Figure 5 42 Holdover Clock and Output Panel Rear 5 111 Figure 5 43 Holdover Clock FAP Connections 5 111 Figure 5 44 Holdover Clock FAP P N 870 2320 01 Connections 5 112 Figure 5 45 CUST ALM 1 J35 and not supported CUST ALM 2 J66 Connectors on Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 06 5 113 Figure 5 46 Holdover Clock Alarm Connections 5 115 Figure 5 47 BITS Clock Source Connections 2 0 5 116 Figure 5 48 Removing a Card tertie 5 118 Figure 5 49 E1 T1 MIM 02 P N 870 2198 02 5 120 Figure 5 50 E1 T1 Interface Kit P N 890 1037 01 5 123 Figure 5 51 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 XX sese 5 125 Figure 5 52 1 Backplane P N 890 1037 01 5 128 Figure 5 53 1 Backplane Patch Cables 5 129 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5
496. no Refer to the Eagle STP Commands Manual for additional information on the act oap config command When facing the front of the EOAP chassis EOAP A is on the left side and the right side EOAPs are named and addressed according to their MMI port number on the EAGLE STP backplane can use any MMI port as long as is assigned to a higher numbered MMI port 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 113 EOAP When the are updated with the act oap config command the configuration data for EOAP A as configured by the chg oap config command is delivered to EOAP B and the configuration data for EOAP B is delivered to EOAP A Depending on how the EOAPs are configured in the database this can present problems for the EOAPs including both EOAPs going out of service because the configuration information for the EOAPs is not correct Update only one EOAP at a time In addition although the act oap con ig command completes immediately processing on the EOAP may take over 10 minutes depending on which parameters changed and which EOAP hardware is installed Also whenever parameters are changed the EOAP reboots to use the new data The reboot interrupts the connection between that EOAP and the SEAC or LSMS By updating only one EOAP at a time the system and the SEAC or LSMS will not be isolated as one EOAP is always connected to the SEAC or LSMS Table 6 16 shows the action and approximate completion tim
497. nsert text before cursor Entering Text open a new line below the current line O open a new line above the current line sx cm of characters after and including lt gt dd delete of lines including current line Changing Text D delete remainder of line to the right of cursor J join next line to the current line replace character with the next typed character 6 164 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Invoke vi by typing vi filename vi begins in command mode Start input mode with any of the Entering Text commands listed below Return to command mode by typing the command again Commands with a before them denote to repeat the command a number of times or to move to the line of the same number Function Command Description lt gt yy or it Y yank of lines including current line to Copying Changes clipboard p put line from clipboard below the current line u undoes last command Undoing Changes U undoes all changes made to current line before leaving line pattern search for next occurrence of pattern pattern search for preceding occurrence of pattern Searching and Replacing n repeat the last search in the same direction repeat the last search in the opposite direction iW write to disk and remain in vi q quit ignoring changes since last w eating s and q emphatic quit use when q fails wq write to disk and quit vi ZZ
498. nstalled in a specific way see Figure 5 25 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 2 Place a piece of fiber paper on the top of the shelf below where the fan is to be installed to ensure that nothing will drop into the area and equipment below a The fan unit is secured with the same screws that are removed from the frame holding the baffle in place b The brackets P N 652 0954 01 are installed from the rear of the frame using the screws provided with the brackets standard frame c When the brackets are attached secure them to the frame using external tooth washers P N 606 0062 01 and four screws P N 600 0193 01 12x24 500 cs zinc 3 Remove the four screws two on each side from the mounting brackets on the frame that hold the baffle in place on both sides This will allow the removal of the baffle Figure 5 24 System Air Baffle Remove flange and save the screws Baffle 4 Place the screws in a safe place because they are used later in this procedure 5 Remove the baffle through the front of the frame 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 69 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 6 Remove the fan unit from the container and remove the grill and filter from the unit assembly The fan is shipped with the side flange not attached Set the grill and filter in a safe location it will be used later in this procedure Figure 5 25 Fan Assembly with
499. nts DANGER Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry or carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets when working on system equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of this system must adhere to all safety precautions and protection equipment required to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices CAUTION This is a redundantly powered system to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and take down the system CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor CAUTION Always trim tie wrap flush and turn the trimmed tie wrap to the rear of the cable bundle when facing the back of the frame CAUTION not use tie wraps on or above the top traverse arms on a frame Use lacing cord Contact Site Supervisor for site specific customer information CAUTION not double lug The practice of using one bolt t
500. nts on printed circuit boards conducts 48VDC and can cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly B 26 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 04 Figure B 18 Extension Shelf Backplane P N 850 0356 04 B POWER B POWER A POWER A POWER PRIMARY SECONDARY BFANPOWER A FAN POWER SECONDARY PRIMARY r 1 1 1 1 1 uj EK IN UT i q P1 pe PS ys P4 PS P6 1 7 P8 IPO P10 Pili P121 P14 sar P1510 16 55 P12 ref T E s 5 Edd 35 Le EM al x o Oi ir mri 19 OUTI IN Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port L L L L L 1 i 18A 17 16 15 13 12A SA GA 4 2 22 L4 La J7 J8 La A c lt lt c lt c lt e lt lt lt lt Em ER E cm EL ia 5 N o lt M N S N N NI C N WI N 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 2B 1B L cdd P c C C e l
501. number 50 870 1009 REV XX 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs E1 ATM Link Interface Module E1 ATM P N 870 2455 01 Figure A 7 E1 ATM LEDs Descriptions RED Application processor is not running or is failing diagnostics AMBER ACM is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN ACM is running an application RED LIM DSOA is off IMT bus AMBER LIM DSOA is IMT bus but testing is not complete GREEN LIM DSOA is on IMT bus BLANK Communication processor is not operating RED LIM DSOA is off IMT bus B AMBER LIM DSOA is IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN LIM DSOA is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating RED Link is out of service GREEN Link is aligned and in service Not currently used LEDs APPL PROC TEKELEC Applications Processor Status APPL O O PORT A IMTA O RSRV lt Serial Tumbar IMTB 188 CLEI code PORT A RSRV Reserved gt lt gt lt 2 gt Revision number oc 5 2 lt Part number tuto 70 2544 01 atm 10 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 01 LEDs European and North American standard for signaling and channels MIM Multi channel In
502. o Dual Configuration on page 6 69 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 6 10 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP For a detailed list of tools and equipment required for individual procedures refer to the beginning of each procedure Table 6 3 EOAP Installation Equipment Required Check P N 1 OAP frame OAPF 1 Fanassembly per EOAP shelf 890 1038 01 1 EOAP shelf in single configuration 890 1050 03 EOAP dual configuration 890 1050 01 all cards are installed hard drive card preloaded with EOAP configuration software Cables single configuration x Bclock cables quantity site dependent 830 0398 xx 1 Clock connection cable 830 0657 xx 1 Clock in out cable 830 0609 xx 2 Fan power cables 830 0609 xx 1 EOAP power cable 830 0699 xx 1 EOAP to customer network Ethernet cable 830 0710 xx 1 Converter for terminal cables 804 0176 01 2 Terminal cables one each 830 0528 xx 830 0709 xx 2 25 modem cables 830 0709 xx 1 Dial up modem cables 830 0709 xx 2 MMI cables 830 0708 xx Cables dual configuration x Bclock cables quantity site dependent 830 0398 xx 1 Clock connection cable 830 0657 xx 1 Clock in out cable 830 0609 xx 2 Fan power cables 830 0609 xx 2 EOAP power cable 8
503. o upgrade a spare ASM go to Step 10 otherwise go to step Step 14 To upgrade your spare ASM remove the spare ASM card from the spare card storage shelf and place it into an ESD container Next identify the slot of the last TSM SCCP card upgraded and enter the following command to remove that TSM SCCP from service Do not use the force command unless this is the last TSM SCCP card in service SCCP service should be maintained at all times If there are more than one TSM SCCP cards in service enter the following inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the TSM SCCP card location If this is the only TSM SCCP card enter the following inh card loc xxxx force yes where xxxx is the TSM SCCP card location Remove the TSM SCCP card per the card replacement procedure described in Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 Place the removed TSM card into the spare card storage shelf Place the new TSM card into the vacated slot Be sure the revision numbers on the card are compatible with the EAGLE software release If in doubt call Tekelec Technical Services 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 12 Use the alw card command to put the new TSM card into service This command causes the MASP to begin downloading tables to the new card Enter the following alw card loc xxxx where xxxx is the TSM card location When the card has been successfully loaded there will be a re
504. ocedure to change the cabling to a dual configuration Procedure Change Cabling to Dual Configuration 1 Atthe EOAP backplane cut the tie wraps from all cables on the EOAP backplane 2 Atthe fan assembly toggle the fan switch on the grill panel to the OFF position The fan assembly stops running The Active LED is off and the Alarm LED is red The Minor LED at the FAP is lit Other fan assemblies if installed are not affected Figure 6 47 Set Fan Switch to OFF Set fan switch to OFF OFF RED 5 ALARM E FANS OFF AUTO FANS ON Grill 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 69 EOAP 6 70 At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagle STP reports the following alarm 302 COOLING FAN FAILURE At the rear of the frame remove the fan B power cable from port FAN B PWR A of the EOAP backplane and connect it to port FAN B PWR Secure the connector At the fan assembly turn the switch back to the ON position refer to Figure 6 49 The Active and Alarm LEDs are green The Minor LED at the FAP goes out The fan assembly starts running At the Eagle STP terminal type in this command rept stat trbl The Eagl
505. of the frame faced from the rear and to the fan assembly to the connection marked FAN B POWER Form and dress the two cables together and check the security of all of the connections Procedure Install Fan Cables 1 Tocable the fan assembly plug a cable P N 830 0609 01 onto the shelf on backplane P N 850 0330 06 FAN A POWER and connector J9 Tighten the screws on the connector 2 When the cable is connected to the backplane route the cable to the top tie down rod and secure the cable with a tie wrap 3 Route the cable to the right side of the frame Run the cable between the shelf and the traverse arms CAUTION Do not form the cable with the LIM cables 4 Secure the fan cables to the back side of the traverse arm using tie wraps 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 Plug the other end of the cable onto the fan unit connector marked FAN POWER Tighten the screws on the connector 6 The other fan cable P N 830 0690 01 plugs into the backplane P N 850 0330 06 the connector J8 Tighten the screws on the connector 7 Route the cable out to the top tie down rod and secure it using a tie wrap Run the cable down between the shelf and traverse arm CAUTION not form FAN POWER cables with LIM cables 8 Secure the cables to the back side of the traverse arms using tie wraps 9 Plug the other end of the cable onto the fan unit connector marked FAN POWER
506. oller Assembly Card Holdover Clock 21 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 LEDs MCAP MAS Communications Applications Processor 22 MDAL Maintenance Disk and Alarm 22 A 23 MIS Maintenance Interface System Card Holdover 24 MPL LIM Multi Port Link Interface Module 25 MPLT Multi Port LIM with Taxi Component 26 OCU LIM Office Channel Unit LIM 27 ST3 Stratum 3 Clock Card Holdover Clock 28 Terminal Disk Module eere 29 Holdover Clock ient A 32 V 35 LIM Link Interface Module retener A 33 A 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs Circuit Card LEDs Introduction This appendix contains Light Emitting Diode LED information for circuit cards in this system This appendix is designed to assist maintenance personnel in troubleshooting WARNING Use the antistatic wrist strap connected to the wrist strap grounding point when handling any card components The EAGLE STP frames are configured with card modules that provide specific functions and services Cards are connected to the shelf backplane through connectors located on the rear of the card Cam out lock in levers mounted on the front edge of the card assist in insertion and remo
507. ollowing output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD Configure the LNP LSMS network Enter the following command with these required parameters chg oap config lsms main mnsap 198 102 115 125 mpsel emsp ms sel emss where mnsap is the IP address network service access point of the main LSMS mpsel is the 1 to 4 alphanumeric character presentation selector of the main LSMS mssel is the 1 to 4 alphanumeric character session selector of the main LSMS If a shadow LSMS exists the following parameters are also required is the IP address of the shadow LSMS spsel is the 1 to 4 alphanumeric character presentation selector of the shadow LSMS sssel is the 1 to 4 alphanumeric character session selector of the shadow LSMS After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 14 EOAP Verify the changes in the database using the rtrv oap config command This is an example of the possible output The fields that have changed in this example are shown in bold rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 OAP CONFIGURATION REPORT EST Rel 26 0 0 DATA Hostname IP Address IP Netmask Default Router OAP A tekelec 12 192 106 175 025 255 255 255 000 128 132 064 001 OAP B tekelec 13 192 106 175 026 255 255 255 000 12
508. om Emergency response provides immediate coverage automatic escalation and other features to ensure a rapid resolution to the problem 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 1 19 Introduction Hardware Repair and Return Any system components being returned for repair or replacement must be processed through the Tekelec Return Material Authorization RMA procedures A hardware repair is defined as an item returned to Tekelec due to a failure with the returned item being repaired and returned to the customer It is essential that serial numbers are recorded correctly RMAs cannot be created without a valid serial number repair and quality information is tracked by serial number Table 1 1 lists the basic RMA types Table 1 1 Basic RMA Types Replacement Description Turnaround Type Priority Advance Customer requests the URGENT Sume Day Shibm nt Replacement replacement of a damaged product DTE Advance Customer request the replacement of Shipment Within 3 Business Replacement a damaged product Days Repai Customer will return a damaged Shipment Within 5 Days After epair Return product for repair Receipt A damaged part such asa cable is Depends on Urgency Expendable replaced but the Customer does not Shipment Within 3 Business return the damaged product Days Table 1 2 lists the RMA return reasons Table 1 2 RMA Reasons for Return Reason for Return Description Damaged by
509. ommand the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Inhibit message sent to terminal rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 Command Completed Verify that the terminal that was taken out of service in step 3 is in the OOS MT DSBLD state by entering the rept stat trm command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 00 57 31 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM PST SST AST 1 IS NR Active 2 IS NR Active 3 IS NR Active 4 OOS MT DSBLD Manual 5 IS NR Active 6 IS NR Active 7 IS NR Active 8 IS NR Active 9 IS NR Active 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 10 OOS MT DSBLD Manual 11 IS NR Active 12 IS NR Active 13 IS NR Active 14 IS NR Active 15 IS NR Active 16 IS NR Active Command Completed Display the current EOAP configuration by entering the rtrv oap config command This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 OAP CONFIGURATION REPORT EST Rel 26 0 0 DATA OAP A rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 OAP CONFIGURATION REPORT OAP B EST Rel 26 0 0 DATA OAP A OAP B Hostname tekelec 12 tekelec 13 IP Address 192 106 175 025 192 106 175 026 IP Netmask 255 255 255 000 255 255 255 000 Default Router 128 132 064 001 128 132 064 001 Config dual dual SEAC CLLI RLGHNCXB14Y RLGHNCXB14Y X25 Packet Si
510. on cable P N 830 0657 xx down to the next tie down rod of the extension shelf and across the rod to the left side of the frame 30 Go to the VT 520 terminal Secure the terminal cables connected to the COM2 and port so that the cables will not interfere with safety or proper terminal use 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 57 EOAP 6 58 31 Continue forming and securing the cables from the customer network end 32 Recheck the cable slacks Adjust if necessary and keep all unnecessary cable slack on the cable rack You have installed and finished the cables from the EOAP backplane Install the EOAP to Customer Network Ethernet cables that are connected to the front panel of each EOAP processor card next Install EOAP to Customer Network Cable Use two EOAP to customer network Ethernet cables P N 830 0710 xx to connect each side of the EOAP EOAP A and EOAP B to the customer IP network Procedure Install EOAP to Customer Network Cable 1 Goto the front of the EOAPand locate the Ethernet port on the front panel of the EOAP A processor card Figure 6 34 Locating Processor Card Ethernet port connects to customer network Processor Card 2 Take the first Ethernet cable P N 830 0710 xx and insert the end labeled into the Ethernet port of EOAP A 3 Take the second Ethernet cable P N 830 0710 xx and insert the end labeled EOAP B into the Ethernet port of EOAP B 910 4601 01 Revision D
511. on page 6 52 Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 Install EOAP to Customer Network Cable on page 6 58 Install EOAP Power Cables Use two EOAP power cables P N 830 0699 xx to connect the EOAP shelf backplane P N 850 0488 xx to the Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 Procedure Install Power Cables 1 Take the first power cable P N 830 0699 xx and plug one end onto the EOAP backplane connector marked POWER IN A Refer to Figure 6 19 Figure 6 19 Install EOAP Power Cables P N 830 0699 xx Misc Fuse Panel Misc Fuse Panel Part of 830 0699 01 Part of 830 0699 01 green yellow conductor green yellow conductor To Frame GND To Frame GND Part of 830 0699 01 Part of 830 0699 01 brown conductor to brown conductor to 48VDC 1A 48VDC 0 0 0 0 go Part of 830 0699 01 Part of 830 0699 01 blue conductor to blue conductor to cM Oe FAN B PWR A FANAPWR A POWER INA BCLKIN A BCLKOUT A d CO Ponr 18 PoRT28 PORTIA PORT2A i 830 0609 01 dco EIN I 4B Pm D ae gium T 3A gm 4 gt pris RST B e B A d EonPbacicaties d m 11 ovo d PORT 5A 10A E 6B M YA E 9A PORT 5B PORT 7A PORT 8A PORT 8B PORT 7B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 39 EOAP 6 40 2 Take the second
512. on the side of the frame Across the top of the frame secure the cables to the cross arms above the FAP with lacing cord also NOTE Alarm cables should not be formed with power cables and should have a lacing cord approximately every three inches There should be no less than two lacing cord ties between frames NOTE Ifthe end panel does not mount on the control frame the cable will route the same as alarm rack cables from port J34 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 from the rear of the frame up the left side of the frame across the top of the FAP and formed and dressed with the alarm rack cables to the end panel The following cables have connectors for termination on the control shelf The cables listed below are cross referenced to Appendix B for additional connector information Remote Maintenance Center RMC Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Connector on page B 7 e Local Maintenance Center LMC Local Maintenance Center Alarm Connector on page B 8 Rack Alarm RALMO RALM5 Rack Alarm Connectors on page B 9 Row Alarm ROW ALARM Row Alarm Connector on page B 10 e External Alarms XALM External Alarm Connector on page B 14 Operations Support Systems Application Processor Alarm OAPALM OAP Alarm Connector on page B 28 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 87 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Cables are supplied as follows With the exception of the rack alarms and t
513. ontinued Pin Signal Description 23 CUFA12 Signals a customer defined minor alarm trouble 12 to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or pin 11 24 CUFA6 Signals a holdover clock major alarm to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or PAB48RTN pin 11 25 CUFA5 Reserved 26 CUFA11 Signals a customer defined minor alarm trouble 11 to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or P4B48RTN pin 11 Fan Power J2 J3 on backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 and J8 J9 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 Figure B 23 Fan Power Connector 65 00 5 Co 0000 Table B 22 Fan Power Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 PF 48RTN 6 FAN ALM 2 PF 48RTN 7 3 8 CHASSIS GND 4 PF 48VDC 9 FANCNTRL 5 PF 48VDC A or B A fan power J3 or B fan power J2 B 36 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 Figure B 24 Control Extension FAP Rear View _48V 48V o o gj eee Ee 48V 1 Cee ALARM INTERFACE 48V 12181920 1218 RTN elelelol B lolo RTN 12181920 1218 TORQUE TO SENE rona LI TO
514. ontrol Protocol Internet Protocol Terminal Disk Module TDS isis tetti Traffic Database Server TEKOS d Tekelec Operating System TOC Timing Output Composite Automatic 1095488 Tekos Operating System for the 486 TOS4M vitis Tekos Operating System for the 486 implemented via MTOS tenis Mee ee Time Slot Counter Translation Services Module Unsolicited Alarm Output Rive may aa aa masa User Interface UIM Unsolicited Information Messages UDIG T Upgraded Database Communication 1 Gigabyte Expansion Memory Module ues ITU Interface Recommendation 35 VPN easet dir ventes Virtual Private Network WAIN erac rans Wide Area Network KEX MMC is Xilinx 1 30 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Doc Assignments from Software perspective Abbreviations Meanings Description C amp C Configuration Any Maintenance function that deals with taking devices and Control in and out of states INH ALW ACT CANC etc Also includes Upgrade DB Database Anything dealing with provisioning database entities ENT DLT CHG unless otherwise specified and the display of those entities in the database RTRV unless otherwise specified Also includes database maintenance CHG DB REPT STAT DB and audit AUD DATA DIAG Diagnostics Hardware
515. or site specific customer information WARNING not leave or allow unused metal objects such as screws or washers to remain anywhere within the equipment Remove all unused material from the equipment 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 3 EOAP gt P 6 4 WARNING Do not allow any metal shavings to remain in the equipment area This may occur from over tightened screws or bolts These small metal particles are hazardous to electronic equipment Be careful not to over tighten screws or bolts WARNING EOAP hardware components including disk drives may be removed and re inserted with the power on but they are NOT HOT SWAPPABLE at the operating system level Before any hardware component is removed from the the operating system MUST BE HALTED To halt the system log in as root then at the command line type usr sbin init 0 When the ok prompt appears it is safe to remove the component After a component is re inserted the system must be reset for Solaris to successfully detect the component To reset the system at the ok prompt type reset a11 The system should boot up If the system returns to the ok prompt after the reset a11 command has executed type setenv auto boot true Then type reset all WARNING Ifthe system still does not boot as a LAST RESORT perform a hardware reset by using a paperclip to press the ABORT and then RESET buttons on the faceplate or by removing and reinserting the cPCI pow
516. orm upgrade OAP Platform upgrade Syscheck Enhancement EOAP 16 Tekelec build 08 20 2002 7 2 Tekelec bulild 10 25 2001 7 3 Tekelec bulild 11 21 2001 7 4 Tekelec bulild 02 04 2002 for OAP 1 0 3 Tekelec Build 11 21 2001 Application TKLCsysck Syscheck Core Engine 1 0 4c Tekelec build 10 25 20001 amp Generic Modules compiled 9 NOTE This output is only an example of a particular Release Verify EOAP to SEAS Connection Status Initial conditions All cables from the Eagle STP to the EOAP are connected The SEAS feature in Verify Procesesses are Running on page 6 83 was turned on The EOAP TDM ports are allowed No X25 links are available Test 12 1 Generate a summary report of the status of the SEAS subsystem on the Eagle STP using one EOAP or L2P3 set in the DEFAULT FILE rept stat seas tekelecstp 96 01 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 30 0 0 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM OOS MT Fault Port 3 IS NR Active 026 000 000 IS NR Active X25 Link A1 OOS MT Fault mmm X25 Link B1 OOS MT Fault ursa SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS C 0349 SEAS unavailable SEAS EOAP A STATUS No Alarms X25 Link A1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS 0343 X 25 Link unavailable X25 A1 PVCs IS NR X25 1 PVCs OOS MT X25 B1 PVCs IS NR X25 B1 PVCs OOS MT 910 4601 01 Revisio
517. ot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 11 61 Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 1 5 131 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies LIM E1 T1 Card Installation When the interface is provisioned the E1 T1 cards have hot swap capabilities E1 T1 Configuration Form Use the form provided below to record your E1 T1 configuration An example of the required input is shown in italics under each column heading Table 5 12 E1 T1 Configuration Form Card location Time E1 T1 E1 T1 MIM Adjacent Link set SLC and port slot number 1201 point code STIME 1 1201 A 1 1 4001 5 132 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Multi Port LIM MPL MPLT Multi Port Link Interface Module with Taxi Component MPLT P N 870 2062 02 The Multi Port LIM MPL provides eight DSO ports transporting 557 traffic in a single EAGLE card slot Link Fault Sectionalization LFS logic on the MPL provides diagnostic capabilities through network interfaces on ports A and B LFS tests are extended to all eight ports in release 27 2 The MPL is backward compatible with existing two port LIMs using the provisioning rules shown in Table 5 13 Summary of Ranges for Port Parameters Card Port Supported Application Two port LIM A supported link applications The two port LIM supports t
518. over Clock FUSES esee 5 117 Er ist de 5 118 ET Introductions eee oai 5 118 Configured as an LIM F1 Card 5 119 Configured as a Channel Card i cos 5 119 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 2 5 119 Installing E1 Interface Module Kit 5 121 Recommended Tocols 5 121 Design Considerations for El aeterne retinent 5 123 External Interface Descriptions sese 5 123 Possible us voee eio II A 5 124 High Level Functional Description 5 124 PET M M tite deett eet kta Sone eevee oes 5 125 Installing E1 T1 Patch Cables t uto 5 129 LIM E1 T1 Card Installation 5 132 E1 T1 Configuration FOrm 5 132 Multi Port LIM MPL 1 22 2020000000000000000000000000000000000000505044 5 133 MPL Card Diagnostic Cable wc Ud 5 135 Ohms Converter International Market 5 136 Hardware Acceptance a usun c se tra tenuate 5 140 Introd ction ziehen 5 140 Fuse Verification srecni e a e a A E E 5 142 Frame Fuse Assignments etie dette 5 144 Control and Extension Shelves
519. ow LSMS 11 The common language location identifier CLLI of the SEAC the EOAP is connecting to x25ps The X 25 package size for the link to the SEAC either 7 or 8 x25mode The mode of the X 25 link to the SEAC either DCE or DTE NOTE chg oap config command allows you to change the parameters one at a time or several at a time in no specific order Refer to the Eagle STP Commands Manual for additional information on the chg oap config command Updating the EOAP command the EOAP configuration data must be configured in the database as shown in Table 6 17 on page 6 116 and Table 6 18 on page 6 117 or the specified EOAP may lose SEAS and LNP connectivity CAUTION Before an EOAP can be updated with the act oap config Use the act oap config command to update the EOAPs with the configuration data entered into the database The act oap config command uses these parameters oap The EOAP being updated A a EOAP B b or both EOAPs a11 Because the act oap config command may take the EOAP out of service it is highly recommended that only one EOAP be updated at a time so do not use the all parameter A more detailed explanation of this recommendation is given below If only a single EOAP was specified with the c g 2sng1 parameter of chg oap config command the 11 only updates EOAP A force Force the system to update only one EOAP in a dual configuration yes or
520. owing command to retrieve GPL versions rtrv gpl The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 27 03 46 48 EST EAGLE 31 6 0 GPL Auditing ON APPL CARD RELEASE APPROVED TRIAL REMOVE TRIAL EOAM 114 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX EOAM 116 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX SS7ANSI 14 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX SS7ANSI 16 XXX XXX XXX SCCP 114 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX SCCP 116 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX GLS 1114 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX GLS 116 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX MPLG 114 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX MPLG 116 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Copy the database from the active TDM to the upgraded standby TDM Enter the following copy disk command along with the card location of the standby TDM shown by the indicator STDBY in the rept stat db command output in Step 5 that the data is being copied to This command can take from 33 minutes to 1 hour 46 minutes to execute It can take even longer depending on other system activity in progress when this command is entered copy disk dloczxxxx format no force yes Where xxxx is the card location of the standby TDM The following is an example of the mess
521. own 0 5A Red 5A Green 0 65A Black 7 5A Black White 0 75A Brown 10A Red White 1A Gray 12A Yellow Green 1 33A White 15A Red Blue 1 5A White Yellow 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 10 Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Tool Identification label P N 658 0941 01 or Field Tool Identification wrap P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Multimeter Lacing cord Cable cutters Cable stripper Crimping tool embossing dies Socket wrench set with 1 4 inch or 3 8 inch drive or open end wrenches Heat shrink gun hot air blower Torque wrench Fiber paper 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Procedure Install Power Cables 1 Apply cable tags provided with the system to both ends of the supply and return cables 2 Ensure that power is off at the central office power distribution board for the circuits being wired Use a multimeter 3 Remove the clear plastic cover from the back of the fuse and alarm panel 4 Run form and dress the cable from the power distribution board over the cable racks to the fuse and alarm panel 5 Strip the cable ends slide a one inch length of clear heat shrink tubing over and past the portion of stripped cable 6 Apply non oxidizing grease to the stripped end of the cable and install the lug The stripped cable must fill lug completely to
522. oxidizing grease is not needed 5 Install the ground cable lug using the 3 8 inch 6 copper plated hardware provided Use the attachment sequence shown in Figure 4 11 6 Tighten the bolts to 15 5 foot pounds of torque 7 Use the lacing cord to secure a NOT DISCONNECT LEAD tag at each end of the cable just beyond the lug NOTE 1 System Ground 1 0 cable from the system ground bar to the section of the ground window If no ground window exists the customer will designate the termination point 2 Frame Ground A cable 6 AWG from a frame is Htapped into another 6 cable or 1 0 cable and also terminates on the I section of the ground window NOTE 3 The size of the cable is determined by the overall length of the cable run Refer to the Site File Book Logic Ground Connections to the System Ground Bar Procedure Connect Logic Ground to System Ground Bar 1 Placea clear heat shrink on the cable 2 Butt strip the end of the cable and apply a small amount of non oxidizing grease to the conductor The stripped cable must fill lug completely to the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug 3 Crimp 6 American Wire Gauge AWG lug with window on the cable using an embossing crimper 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 Applya small amount of non oxidizing grease to the mounting holes on a copper system ground bar Non oxidizing gr
523. p P N 658 0941 02 Safety glasses Phillips screwdriver e 3 8 inch nut driver Side Panels Frame side panels mount at either end of the line of frames and are hung in place on the top and bottom frame support arms The two types of side panels present on an frames are Analarm side panel P N 870 0259 02 containing alarm indicator lamps P N 525 0036 02 on the end of the system lineup facing a main aisle Ablank side panel P N 840 0017 02 at the end of the system lineup away from the main aisle or at the end facing other equipment NEBS frame panels have slotted mounting hooks and matching screw holes in the frame support arms These hooks and screws ground the end panels directly to the frame making a separate grounding cable unnecessary Procedure Install NEBS Frame Side Panels 1 If present remove the AC outlet cover plate on the side panel 2 The alarm side panel is equipped with a cable stub that must be connected to the end of row alarm cable from the control shelf backplane Make sure that the connectors are locked 3 Position the side panel so that it is aligned at the front and rear of the frame and lift the side panel onto the support arms engaging the four hooks on the side panel see Figure 3 23 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 33 Frames and Shelves 4 Align the slotted holes on the hooks over their corresponding screw holes on the support arms 5 Insert screws and tighten
524. p 3 Procedure Power up Fan Assembly 1 Login and verify the FAN feature is on RTRV FEAT 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 77 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 2 If the FAN feature is off turn it on using the 3 Remove the applicable fuses one at a time associated with each Fan 6A 18A 68 12B and 188 Verify that with each fuse pulled the corresponding fans looses power IE 1 half of the 1100 fan 12A 1 half of the 1200 fan 18A 1 half of the 1300 6B 2 half of the 1100 fan 12B 2 half of the 1200 fan and 18B 2 half of the 1300 fan 4 Replace the fan grill by placing it back over the filter on the front of the assembly Hand tighten the grill thumb screws Figure 5 30 Fan Assembly with Grill and Filter Installation directional arrow on filter 5 Turn off the 1100 1200 and 1300 shelf fans and verify the EAGLE and Fan unit displays the alarm For the EAGLE use REPT STAT TRBL and for the fan unit verify the LED near the Fan switch is RED 10x03 x04 software must be installed 5 78 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Clock Cable Installation Procedure Replacing B Clock Cables on Control and Extension Shelves B clock cables provide fan alarm and control signals from the EAGLE to the fans Replace all B clock cables P N 830 0404 xx from the control shelf and extension shelves with a B clo
525. part number When a document is reissued the following information changes e The title page and revision number the date of publication and the new software release number if applicable The date of publication revision and the document part number if applicable on the bottom of each page Documentation Bulletins announce changes to customer documentation and include part number and revision level of the affected manual The bulletins are posted on the Customer Secure web site and distributed via electronic mail to customers on the distribution list The following document is referenced in this manual 1 TL 9000 Quality Management System Requirements Handbook Release 3 0 QuEST Forum March 2001 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Product Packaging and Delivery DANGER Atleast two people are required to safely move and position any frame Before opening any shipping container inspect for evidence of damage during shipment Report any damage to the carrier for investigation and possible claims Also report any damage to the Tekelec site supervisor Check the packing slips against the equipment specification list for this installation site Report any discrepancies to Tekelec Production Control at 1 888 673 4827 or if necessary call 919 460 2150 inside the USA Inventory the shipment to make sure that all items listed on the pick list have been received in good condition Report any discrepancies or
526. peed IMT Packet Router High speed Multiplexer Integrated Access Device IMT configuration manager task Integrated LIM Appliques IMT loader task Inter processor Message Transport IMT Control task Internet Protocol Tekelec s Internet Protocol to SS7 Interface IMT Processor DCM operational code IMT Power and Multiplexer card Integrated Services Digital Network In Service Normal Interrupt Service Routine International Telecommunications Union Kilobit Kilobyte Kilo Hertz 1000 Hertz Local Area Network 1 27 Introduction 1 28 Link Fault Sectionalization Link Interface Module Local Number Portability A LIM with a software selectable interface Local Service Management System 256 Megabyte Memory Expansion Card Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor Media Access Unit Maintenance Bus Matrix Controller Assembly Maintenance Communications amp Applications Processor Maintenance Disk and Alarm Card Miscellaneous Frame Measurements Media Gateway Media Gateway Controller Media Gateway Controller Protocol Maintenance Information Base utility Multi Channel Interface Module Machine Machine Interfaces Multi Port Link interface module Multi Purpose Sever 557 Message Signalling Unit Multi Tasking Operating System Industrial Programming Inc Network Equipment Building System Tekelec s Network Systems Division Network Time Protocol 9
527. r distribution panel There should be an A feed and a B feed for each breaker panel and 9 The 48VDC returns are correctly labeled Each frame has an A return and a B return for each breaker panel or FAP 10 Frames are level 11 Earthquake bracing if any is properly installed 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 General Installation Information Adequate floor clearances have been maintained Rear panels are installed Cable connections are tight at the backplane connections Cable sheets are properly marked and located in door pocket All documentation has been received and is available Terminals and printers connected to the system are operational Data cartridges have been received and are properly stored Any attached modems are operational Any attached Media Access Units MAUS are operational with power indicator on 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 2 13 General Installation Information 2 14 910 4601 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Safety and Cautionary aa asa 3 2 Heavy Duty Earle 3 4 3 4 Floor Preparation for Heavy Duty 3 11 Anchoring to Overhead Rack of Heavy Duty Frame 3 24 Heavy Duty Panels and 3 25 Fr
528. r 2 hole lug Clamp Amp meter with window test area P N 502 0085 01 6 str L B 2 hole 10 bolt System Logic Ground 5 8 O C copper with window Copper 2 hole lug 1 0 Green with window P N 804 0817 02 Logic grounds from Bracket Lodi d 6 str L B 2 hole 1 4 bolt Fuse Alarm Panels FAP cable rack horns groun 5 8 O C copper with window as required Bracket Bracket Bracket System ground bar Extension Miscellaneous Frame Frame Embedded Operation Control Support System Frame Application Processor Frame NOTE Theonly ground cables that are terminated to the system ground bar are the logic grounds from the fuse and alarm panel NOTE DO NOT run Logic Ground or Power Cables on the cable horns in the top middle of a frame The horn is for Row Alarm Cables only 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels WARNING All logic ground connections must be made to the system ground bar 7 Repeat steps Steps 2 3 and 4 on the fuse and alarm panel end NOTE 6 gauge lug P N 502 0085 01 must be used on the fuse and alarm panel end of the cable 8 Terminate the fuse and alarm panel end of the cable on the terminal strip at the position marked LOGIC GROUND 9 Tighten the nuts on the fuse and alarm panel terminal strip to 25 inch pounds Logic Ground Cables The logic ground cables are a part of the internal powe
529. r distribution They provide a ground connection between the backplane of each system shelf and the system ground bar in the Control Frame CF The logic ground is connected from each shelf to the fuse and alarm panel by the consolidated power cables cable 6 AWG P N 690 0131 01 terminal lug P N 804 0817 02 and heat shrink P N 804 0228 01 Procedure Run Logic Ground Cables 1 Run green cable 6 AWG P N 690 0131 01 2 Butt strip and apply non oxidizing grease to conductor The stripped cable must fill lug completely to the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug 3 Place clear heat shrink P N 804 0228 01 on butted end of wire below stripped end 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 19 Fuses and Alarm Panels 4 20 4 Placelug P N 804 0817 02 onto the stripped end of the cable and crimp the lug using embossing dies The stripped cable must fill lug completely to the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug NOTE Terminal lug P N 804 0817 02 must have two holes and with a window The stripped cable must fill lug completely to the end of the barrel of the lug and be visible in the end window of the lug a Toinstall the cable on the system ground bar wipe a small amount of non oxidizing grease at the mounting hole Attach the lug with the 1 4 inch 20 copper plated hardware provided Torque to 68 inch pounds b Secure the cable to cabl
530. r followed by one to 13 alphanumeric characters The value should be enclosed in quotes for example aname tekelec 10 Output for Single Configuration gt chg oap config aname tekelec xxx cfg sngl x25mode dte x25ps 7 Command Accepted Processing tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 47 09 EST EAGLES 46 33 1 chg oap config aname tekelec xxx cfg sngl x25mode dte x25ps 7 Command entered at terminal 1 tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 47 09 EST EAGLE5 46 33 1 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP B COMPLTD Output for Dual Configuration chg oap config aname tekelec xxx cfg dual bname tekelec xxx cfgz dual x25mode zdte x25ps 7 Command Accepted Processing tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 49 23 EST EAGLE5 46 33 1 8604 1149 CARD 1301 A INFO SLK Level 3 T19 timer expired Report Date 05 03 15 Time 14 49 23 tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 49 25 EST EAGLE5 46 33 1 chg oap config aname tekelec xxx cfg dual bname tekelec xxx cfg dual x25mode dte x25ps 7 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Command entered at terminal 41 tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 49 26 EST EAGLE5 46 33 1 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP B COMPLTD 2 Issue the command to retrieve EOAP configuration rtrv oap config gt rtrv oap config Command Accepted Processing tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 41 15 EST EAGLES 46 33 1 rtrv oap config Command entered at terminal 1 tekelecstp 05 03 15 14 41 15 EST EAGLE5 46 33 1 OAP CONFIGURATION REPORT
531. r the backplane itself WARNING Do not impact the faceplate 6 66 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 7 Using the thumb and forefinger together push the top inject eject handle down and the bottom handle up until both handles are in the locked position Figures 6 43 shows a close up of a top inject eject handle in the locked position Figure 6 43 Locking the Inject Eject Handles Handles in locked position Photo does not represent actual customer configuration Components for EOAP B are installed on the right side of the card cage 8 Using a small Phillips head screwdriver tighten all captive screws in the handle brackets until they seat against the handle bracket WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 Figure 6 44 Tightening Captive Screws Tighten the captive screws Close up of until they seat top inject eject against the handle with handle bracket captive screw 9 Repeat Figures 1 through 8 to install the remaining cards 10 Locate the installation position of the drive to be installed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 67 EOAP 11 Remove the drive assembly from the shipping container Refer to Table 6 13 for a picture of each drive to be installed 12 Use one hand to support the drive from underneath and the other hand to grasp the faceplate handle 13 While facing the front of the driv
532. r to this section if your fan assembly did not come preinstalled This section describes how to install a fan and cooling duct in the location below the EOAP shelf If the EOAP shelf was not preinstalled install fan assemblies prior to installing the EOAP shelf The shelf requires fan support for operation Each fan uses fan alarm cable B clock cable P N 830 0398 xx This cable also provides control signals from the control shelf to the corresponding extension shelves Verify that your system uses B clock cables P N 830 0398 xx throughout the system that will include the fan assembly to be installed If necessary replace all B clock cables Perform the replacement during a maintenance window and prior to any fan assembly installation For more information on replacing a B clock cable refer to Chapter 5 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies After replacing the B clock cables install the fan assembly see EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 14 Install the fan assemblies in the order listed in Table 6 4 skip any procedure that does not apply Table 6 4 Fan Assembly Installation Order Procedure Name and Location 1 eee 2 on page 5 99 Chapter 5 Eagle STP and y Assemblies 2 EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 14 3 Install Cooling Duct on page 6 20 6 14 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 5 list tools and equipment required for the fan assembly installation Table 6 5 Fan
533. rameter to the EOAP SEAS SEAC CLLI An entry is required if the SEAS 11 feature 18 on X25 Packet Size An entry is required if the SEAS x25ps feature 18 on X25 Mode An entry is required if the SEAS x25mode feature 18 on LNP Active L5MS An entry is required if the LNP lsms feature 18 on Main LSMS An entry is required if the mnsap NSAP 1sms main parameter is specified Main LSMS An entry is required if the mpsel SSEL lsms main parameter is specified Main LSMS An entry is required if the msse1 PSEL lsms main parameter is specified Shadow LSMS An entry is required if the snsap NSAP lsms shadow parameter is specified Shadow LSMS An entry is required if the spsel SSEL lsms shadow parameter is specified Shadow LSMS An entry is required if the sssel PSEL 1sms shadow parameter is specified Either Hostname An entry is required aname and bname SEAS LNP XE IP Address An entry is required if the LNP aipaddr and bipaddr feature feature 18 on IP Netmask An entry may be required anmask and bnmask depending on the network configuration Default Router An entry may be required arouter and brouter depending on the network configuration Config An entry is required cfg 6 116 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 18 shows other data not shown in the rtrv oap config command output that must be provisioned in the database before the EOAP configuration can be updated Table 6 18 Updating the EOAP Co
534. ration EOAP configure EOAP A only Table 6 19 Example EOAP Initial Configuration Description Parameter EOAPA EOAP B Hostname aname tekelec 12 tekelec 13 bname IP Address aipaddr 192 106 175 025 192 106 175 026 bipaddr IP Netmask anmask 255 255 255 000 255 255 255 000 bnmask Default Router arouter 128 132 064 001 128 132 064 001 brouter Configuration cfg dual dual SEAC CLLI seacclli RLGHNCXB14Y RLGHNCXB14Y X 25 Packet Size x25ps 8 8 X 25 Mode x25mode DTE DTE Active L5MS 1sms main main Main LSMS NSAP mnsap 198 102 115 125 198 102 115 125 Main LSMS SSEL sssel emss emss Main LSMS PSEL spsel emsp emsp When configuring the EOAP the system generates a UAM 0364 because the EOAP configuration in the database does not match the EOAP configuration on the EOAP rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 11 28 EST Rel 26 0 0 1501 0364 OAP A Configuration data checksum mismatch The alarm is cleared when a maintenance poll returns a checksum that matches the Eagle STP s checksum indicating that the databases are synchronized TheEagle STP clears the alarm within five seconds The following UAM clears the alarm RLGHNCXA03W 00 03 07 11 11 28 EST Rel 26 0 0 nnnn 0365 OAP A Configuration data checksum alarm cleared 6 118 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Procedure Configure EOAP from Eagle STP Verify that the SEAS and LNP features are turned on seas on gtt on and
535. rd NOTE 1 1 MIM Interface is an option and is not available on all installations This information is provided in the event the E1 T1 MIM Interface is added to an existing installation If systems are upgraded older cards may have dip switches that need to be addressed for the system to function properly El Introduction 5 118 This section describes the general procedure for the installation of the hardware necessary to support the E1 Interface application Systems ordered with the E1 Interface will have this hardware installed at the factory If DIP switches are needed the switches are under the applique viewed from the top of the card The E1 Channel applique provides a physical interface to the system The applique terminates or distributes 1 facility signals for the purpose of 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies processing the 557 signaling links carried by the E1 carrier The applique can be configured as an 1 card or as a channel card Configured as an LIM E1 Card Configured as an E1 card two separate and independent LIM E1 inputs can be terminated on an E1 Channel card From one or two bidirectional E1 facility inputs one or two bidirectional 64 K bits sec channels are extracted and processed as SS7 signaling links Implemented as E1 Link Interface Modules LIM up to 32 separate and independent E1 inputs can be terminated in an extension
536. rd frames 870 1606 02 Rev B handles 40 Amp feeds and 870 1606 02 Rev C handles 60 Amp feeds NOTE Beginning with EAGLE software release 33 0 all frames containing HCMIM modules are required to have 60 Amp power circuits and the FAP must be upgraded to accommodate 60 Amp feeds The FAPs required are P N 870 2320 01 with diode kit P N 870 1831 02 for heavy duty frames or 60 Amp FAP P N 870 1606 02 with diode kit 870 1831 01 for standard frames Customers do not perform FAP upgrade these upgrades are performed by Tekelec personnel Figure 4 3 FAP P N 870 2320 xx Front Faceplate screw holes Faceplate screw holes e PWR TEST POINT POS PWRALARMA PWR TEST POINT NEG e 8 CRITICAL O POS MAJOR opmant MNoR O russ POINT NEG e O PWRALARM B K Ki a PWR TEST FUSE BANK A side Jumper Board Fuse Installation FAP DB A FAP JB FAP AB Frontview FAP DB B FUSEBANK B B side TEKELEC front 1606 This section shows how to install or replace a blown fuse in the Fuse and Alarm Panel FAP P N 870 2320 on the jumper board 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Fuses and Alarm Panels Figure 4 4 Jumper Board FAP
537. rd is compatible with the EAGLE software release level proceed to Step 20 If in doubt about the compatibility of your new hardware call Tekelec Technical Services 18 Enter the following command to flash the card init flash loc xxxx code appr 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 49 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 50 19 20 21 22 Where xxxx is the location of the card The following is sample output rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 FLASH Memory Downloading for card 1105 Started rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 BPDCM Downloading for card 1105 Complete rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 Command Completed Enter the following command to activate the FLASH GPL on the act flash loc xxxx Where xxxx is the location of the card The following is sample output rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 FLASH Memory Activation for card 1105 Started rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 FLASH Memory Activation for card 1105 Completed rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 Command Completed Enter the following command to return the upgraded MCPM card into service This causes the MASP to begin downloading tables to the new MCPM card alw card loc xxxx Where xxxx is the MCPM card location When the card has been successfully loaded there will be a response on the terminal tha
538. rdous to personnel and equipment WARNING Do not carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets or on belts when working on or around electronic equipment Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry on wrists or hands when working on any electronic equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices WARNING Before performing the following procedures do the following Ensure that no power is being provided to the system from the 48VDC power source such as a power board Ensure that no circuit cards are installed in the shelves Remove all fuses from the fuse and alarm panels see Figure 5 71 Recheck wiring and connections for proper polarity Figure 5 71 Fuse and Alarm Panels Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 Screw Fuse holders Fuse holders Screw 4 Ww 4 o e30 fapfront fuses 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 72 Test Points FAP P N 870 2320 01
539. re 1 2 3 4 Configure EOAP System Parameters Install EOAP UAL Software Configure TDM Ports for EOAP at Eagle STP Configuring the EOAP from the Eagle STP Terminal Procedure Configure EOAP System Parameters 1 After a manual or automatic first boot the boots up in configuration mode Perform the System Identification Procedures with the following settings when prompted What type of terminal are you using 3 DEC VT100 Enter Read the screen navigation information F2 or Esc 2 A series of screens will request the following information Use function keys to complete screens and confirm selections To begin the System Identification select continue F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Hostname tekelec xxx F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Where xxx is the actual number for this GR 376 EOAP Networked x yes F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt IP Address Enter the loghost ip address F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Verify your selections F2 or Esc 2 Name service x none F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Verify your selections F2 or Esc 2 System part of a subnet x no F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Regions x United States F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Time zone x Eastern F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Date Time Use Default F2 or lt gt lt 2 gt Verify your selections F2 or Esc 2 The system will now complete
540. res Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations on page 5 145 to determine fuse and card locations NOTE Thecard location numbers in the table indicate the shelf and the slot for that card The left two digits indicate the shelf and the right two digits indicate the card slot in that shelf For example a location of 1215 indicates a card in shelf 12 slot 15 Figure 4 3 FAP P N 870 2320 xx Front on page 4 5 and Figure 4 7 Fuse and Alarm Panel Rear on page 4 8 to physically locate the fuse holders 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies e Figures 5 65 through 5 70 starting on page 5 157 to physically locate card in a shelf Procedure Verify Individual Fuse Positions 1 Ensure that all fuses have been removed 2 Ensure that all circuit cards have been removed 3 Confirm that the system is receiving power from the 48VDC power source Ensure that voltage is present by checking it with a volt ohm meter 4 Install a fuse of the rating specified for that position seeTable 5 16 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm Flags on page 5 144 and Table 5 17 Fuses and Card Locations on page 5 145 fuse has a gray flag A2A fuse has a orange flag fuse has a blue flag e has a green flag 7 fuse has a black and white flag 10 fuse has a red and white flag 5 Install circuit cards appropriate for the slots powered by that fuse see Table 5 1
541. rm cable is used to send alarms from the holdover clock to the control shelf backplane Procedure Install Holdover Clock Alarm Cable 1 Before using the following procedures loosen the screws holding the clear plastic cover on the back of the holdover clock and remove the cover by lifting it off of the screws 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 2 Connect the DB26 connector of the holdover clock alarm cable to the EXT ALM connector and CUST ALM 1 connector J35 66 on backplane P N 850 0330 06 on the system control shelf backplane see Figure 5 45 Secure connector screws 3 EXT ALM cable P N 830 0543 01 connects directly to the Holdover clock Cable P N 830 0435 xx is an optional cable that may go from the EXT ALM to a terminal block see Figure 5 46 WARNING Metal points on Printed Circuit Boards conducts 48VDC and cause shorts shocks and damage if not handled properly Figure 5 45 CUST ALM 1 J35 and not supported CUST ALM 2 J66 Connectors on Control Shelf Backplane P N 850 0330 06
542. rod to the right side of the GR 376 EOAP backplane Use cable ties to secure the cable to the tie down rod every three or four inches Wrap the fan power cables with fiber paper at the point they are routed around the edge of the GR 376 EOAP shelf toward the frame rails Form and dress the fan power cables with the other cables Use cable ties to secure the cable to the traverse arm The fan cable installation is complete Refer to Figure 6 65 for GR 376 EOAP Cabling Configuration 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Figure 6 64 GR 376 Backplane Cabling To VT 520 DSPLY 830 0709 xx 804 0176 01 GD 830 0528 01 2 O OO O O O O O O O O 00 00 0 O 830 0528 01 2 3 POWER IN B POWER IN A 804 0176 01 OAPRST A BCLKOUT A 830 0709 xx 13 CO PoRT 18 2 PORT 1A PORT 2A 830 0759 01 Allo PORT 3B PORT 4B HT 3A PORT4 E lt gt _ OAP RST B l 2 EORPbackcables 41010100 O O e O O O ONO O O O O 5 Q BOBTHOB PORT 5A PORT 10A PORT 6B SE PORTGA PORT GA PORT 5B PORT 7A PORT 8A Pon 830 0609 01 6 161 910 4601 01 Revision D 2005 EOAP Figure 6 65 GR 376 EOAP Cable Routing 25 26 27 6 162 Cable tie down rods
543. rovided 110 60 K N Turkey 804 1185 01 220 50 A B United Kingdom 804 1185 03 240 50 D G United Arab 804 1185 03 220 230 50 D G A BOLD letter designation example A B indicates most common usage indicates a change in voltage 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 D 3 Power Cords to Peripherals D 4 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 145C tag 4 15 600 0154 01 6 22 6 23 600 0193 01 6 16 6 17 600 0934 01 5 69 601 0010 01 6 25 606 0062 01 5 69 6 16 6 17 652 0841 01 6 22 6 23 652 0954 01 5 69 6 16 658 0941 01 5 121 658 0941 02 5 121 804 0176 01 6 11 6 48 830 0232 01 5 86 830 0398 xx 5 79 5 89 5 90 5 100 6 10 6 11 6 14 6 15 830 0404 5 79 5 89 5 100 6 9 830 0528 6 11 6 37 6 48 6 49 6 51 6 72 830 0531 04 5 107 830 0535 xx 5 107 830 0605 02 5 122 5 129 830 0609 01 5 64 5 73 830 0609 xx 6 11 6 15 6 32 6 38 6 42 6 43 6 53 6 54 830 0622 xx 5 119 830 0638 xx 5 86 830 0657 xx 6 11 6 32 6 36 6 44 6 47 6 53 6 57 6 162 830 0699 01 6 157 830 0699 xx 6 11 6 32 6 35 6 38 6 39 6 41 6 54 6 70 830 0708 xx 6 11 6 32 6 37 6 52 6 71 830 0709 xx 6 11 6 12 6 32 6 37 6 49 6 51 6 54 6 72 830 0710 xx 6 11 6 58 830 0772 xx 5 125 830 0788 xx 5 25 830 0873 07 5 104 830 0873 xx 5 83 830 0894 xx 5 125 830 0895 01 5 125 5 126 840 0016 02 6 22 850 0330 02 03 04 5 13 850 0330 06 5 11 5 13 5 64 5 73 5 86 5 104 5 105 850 0488 6 39 910 4601
544. ruction of the hardware at the customer site The demarcation line for the testing is up to and including the patch panel directly connected to the system The ability to route traffic through this system is verified using a Message Generator Traffic Simulator MGTS AII cabling alarm output clock input and other Tekelec equipment is also verified operational per the Hardware Operational Test Manual provided with the test equipment CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of this system must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION This is a redundant system to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and takes down the system The customer frame layout is site specific however the most typical frame layout is constructed with Extension Frames to the right of the Control Frame when viewed from the front The OAP Frame is normally on the left of the Control Frame Other frames Miscellaneous and other support or feature specific frames are lined up to the left of the Control Frame General Inspection NOTE Beginning with EAGLE STP Software Release 30 0 IP 8 0 all IPMX cards must be replaced by High speed Multiplexer HMUX P N 870 1965 01 cards
545. s OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc A1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Q 3 Assoc B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms Command Completed c Update EOAP B by entering this command act oap config oap b force yes After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 ACT OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD d Wait 15 minutes then enter either the rept stat seas if only the SEAS feature is on or rept stat 1sms if only the LNP feature is on commands to make sure that there are no alarms for EOAP B If both the SEAS and LNP features are on then enter both commands to verify that there are no alarms for EOAP B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 145 EOAP These are examples of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report IS NR Active SEAS Interfaces Configured 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active _ X 25 Link Al IS NR Active X 25 Link B1 IS NR Active SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS
546. s Continued Fuse Location Capacity Card Location Type Extension Frame 02 EF 02 Fuse and Alarm Panel side B refer to Figure 4 19 Fuse 1B 3Amp 4103 4104 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 2B 3Amp 4107 4108 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 3B 1Amp 4110 HMUX Fuse 4B 3Amp 4113 4114 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 5B 3Amp 4117 4118 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 6B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 7B 3Amp 4203 4204 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 8B 3Amp 4207 4208 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 9B 1Amp 4210 HMUX Fuse 10B 3Amp 4213 4214 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 11B 3Amp 4217 4218 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 12B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 13B 3Amp 4303 4304 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 14B 3Amp 4307 4308 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL 1 1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 15B 1Amp 4310 HMUX Fuse 16B 3Amp 4313 4314 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 17B 3Amp 4317 4318 LIMs ACM ASM E DCM MPL E1 T1 TSM or GPSM II Fuse 18B dummy fuse Designated for FAN 2A Fuse 19B dummy fuse OPEN Fuse 20B dummy fuse OPEN Extens
547. s and pins are identical 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 69 Connectors Terminal Disk Module Control Backplane Terminal Disk Module P2 P4 P18 P20 TDM Top Connectors P2 P4 Figure B 48 TDM Top 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 8 BOTTOM Table B 48 TDM Backplane Top Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND 01 ROFA C01 ALMENO D01 ALMDO A02 LGND B02 ROFA C02 ALMEN1 D02 ALMD1 A03 CUFA1 B03 2 D03 ALMD2 A04 CUFA2 B04 LGND C04 ALMEN3 D04 ALMD3 A05 MBUS2RX 50 B05 LGND C05 D05 ALMD4 A06 MBUS2RX _50 B06 8KHZ2 50 C06 SALMCK D06 ALMDS A07 MBUS2TX 50 BO7 8KHZ2 _50 C07 ALMD7 D07 ALMD6 08 MBUS2TX _50 B08 56KHZ2 50 C08 EBI XA02 208 EBI XA14 A09 MBUSIRX 50 B09 56KHZ2 _50 C09 XA03 D09 EBI XA15 A10 MBUSIRX 50 B10 8KHZI 50 C10 EBI XA04 D10 EBI XA16 A11 50 B11 8KHZ1 50 EBI 05 D11 EBI XA17 A12 MBUSITX 50 B12 56KHZI 50 C12 EBI XA06 D12 EBI XA18 A13 50 B13 56KHZ1 _50 13 XA07 D13 EBI
548. s of time of day or day of the week as viewed by a customer upon discussion with the supplier For example Aloss of service that is comparable to the total loss of effective functional capacity of an entire switching or transport system e A reduction in capacity or traffic handling capacity such that expected loads cannot be handled loss of safety or emergency capability for example 911 calls Problem Major Major problems cause conditions that seriously affect system operations maintenance and administration etc and require immediate attention as viewed by the customer upon discussion with the supplier The urgency is less than in a critical situations because of a lesser immediate or impending effect on system performance customer and the customer s operation and review For example Reduction in any capacity traffic measurement function loss of functional visibility and or diagnostic capability Short outage equivalent to system or subsystem outages with accumulated duration of greater than two minutes in any 24 hour period or that continue to repeat during longer periods Repeated degradation of 051 or higher rate spans or connections Prevention of access for routine administrative activity Degradation of access for maintenance or recovery operations Degradation of the system s ability to provide any required critical or major trouble notification significan
549. s checksum indicating that the databases are synchronized TheEagle STP clears the alarm within five seconds The following UAM clears the alarm RLGHNCXA03W 00 03 07 11 11 28 EST Rel 2 2 0 nnnn 0365 OAP A Configuration data checksum alarm cleared Procedure Change EOAP Configuration at Eagle STP EOAP 1 For the to be configured by the chg oap config command the EOAP ports must be out of service To find which terminal ports are the EOAP ports display the terminal configuration in the database using the rtrv trm command The EOAP ports are shown by the entry in the TYPE field as shown in bold in the example rtrv trm output This is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 TRM TYPE COMM FC TMOUT MXINV DURAL V T320 9600 7 E 1 SW 30 5 99 59 59 2 KSR 9600 7 E 1 HW 30 5 INDEF 3 PRINTER 4800 7 E 1 HW 30 0 00 00 00 4 OAP 19200 7 E 1 SW 30 5 00 30 00 5 VT320 9600 7 O 1 NONE 30 5 00 00 30 6 VT320 9600 7 E 2 SW 30 9 INDEF 7 PRINTER 9600 7 N 2 HW 30 5 00 30 00 8 KSR 19200 7 E 2 BOTH 30 5 00 30 00 9 VT320 9600 7 E 1 SW 30 7 00 30 00 10 OAP 19200 7 E 1 SW 30 5 00 30 00 VT320 4800 7 E 1 HW 30 5 00 30 00 12 PRINTER 9600 7 1 HW 30 4 00 30 00 13 VT320 9600 7 O 1 NONE 30 5 00 30 00 14 VT320 9600 7 E 2 SW 30 8 00 30 00 15 VT320 9600 7 N 2 HW 30 5 00 30 00 16 VT320 9600 7 E 2 BOTH 30 3 00 30 00 TRM TRAF LINK SA SYS PU DB U
550. s command If both the SEAS and LNP features are on enter both the rept stat seas and rept stat 1sms commands The following are examples of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report IS NR Active SEAS Interfaces Configured 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 GPL PST SST AST SEAS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active X 25 Link Al IS NR Active X 25 Link B1 IS NR Active SEAS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP A ALARM STATUS No Alarms OAP B ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link 2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link B1 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 Link B2 ALARM STATUS No Alarms X25 1 PVCs IS NR EUM X25 1 PVCs OOS MT Boe X25 B1 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 Bl PVCs OOS MT X25 A2 PVCs IS NR 1 2 3 X25 A2 PVCs OOS MT X25 B2 PVCs IS NR 1 253 X25 B2 PVCs OOS MT Eu ee Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Association Al IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active
551. s either 7 or 8 x25mode is the mode of the X 25 link to the SEAC 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 11 12 EOAP After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD Configure the LNP LSMS network Enter the following command with these required parameters chg oap config 1sms shadow snsap 198 102 115 105 spsel shwp sssel shws where snsap is the IP address of the shadow LSMS spsel is the 1 to 4 alphanumeric character presentation selector of the shadow LSMS sssel is the 1 to 4 alphanumeric character session selector of the shadow LSMS After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD Verify the changes in the database using the rtrv oap config command Confirm the correctness of all settings before continuing to the next step This is an example of the possible output The fields that have changed in this example are shown in bold righnexa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 OAP CONFIGURATION REPORT DATA Hostname IP Address IP Netmask OAP A tekelec 22 192 106 175 005 255 255 255 001 OAP B tekelec 23 192 106 175 006 255 255 255 001 Default Router 128 132 064 005 128 132 064 005 Config dual dual SEAC CLLI RLGHNCXB18Y RLGHNCXB18Y X25 Packet Size 7 7 X2
552. s on IMT bus B but testing is not complete GREEN ACM is on IMT bus B BLANK Communication processor is not operating RED Host is not available GREEN Host is available Not currently used LEDs APPL PROC Applications Processor Status A IMT Bus A Status Serial number CLEI code Bus Status HOST STAT Host Status RSRV Reserved Revision number Part number 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 ASM Application Service Module TEKELEC 0123456789 0123456789 2 x gt T e eo 5 A 11 asmledneb 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs ASM P N 870 1011 xx Beginning with EAGLE 31 6 ASM cards are obsoleted all ASM cards must be replaced with TSM cards Figure 2 5 LEDs Seria number CLEI code Revision number Part number LEDs Descriptions APPL PROC RED Application processor is not Applications running or is failing diagnostics Processor Status AMBER ASM is loading an application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN ASM is running an application IMT A IMT Bus A Status RED ASM is off IMT bus A AMBER ASM is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN ASM is on IMT bus A BLANK Communication processor is not operating IMT B IMT Bus B Status RED ASM is off
553. s point bipaddr is the EOAP B IP address network service access point The following parameters may or may not be required for both LNP and SEAS features depending on your network configuration amask Or bmask is the the netmask for or EOAP B If you are unsure as to whether your network requires this configuration check with your Information Services department arouter Or brouter is the IP address of the default router assigned to or If you are unsure as to whether your network requires this configuration check with your Information Services department After successful completion of this command the system returns the following output rlghncxa03w 00 06 07 11 34 04 EST Rel 26 0 0 CHG OAP CONFIG MASP A COMPLTD 12 Configure the SEAS network Enter the following command with these three required parameters chg oap config seacclli rlghncxb14y x25psz8 x25mode zdte where 111 is the 11 character 1 alphabetic character followed by 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters common language location identifier CLLI of the SEAC that the EOAP is connecting to The value must be enclosed in quotes x25ps is the x 25 package size for the link to the SEAC The value is either 7 or 8 x25mode is the mode of the X 25 link to the SEAC 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 125 EOAP 6 126 13 After successful completion of this command the system returns the f
554. same as wq repeat last change Miscellaneous u undo last change 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 165 EOAP 6 166 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Card d idest redes A 3 oo eee tme ere RIDERE nete heads A 3 ACM Application Communication Module ss 4 ASM Application Service Module uds t tetti 5 ATM LIM AINF LIM E1 LIM EILA ILA 6 CI Clock Interface Card Holdover 2 7 DCM atid DSM pid 8 DS0A LIM Digital Signal Level 0 9 E1 ATM Link Interface Module oerte treo sane A 10 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 01 A 11 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 02 op Pens A 12 EDCM Double Slot Enhanced DCM A 13 EDCM Single Slot Enhanced A 14 EOAP Embedded OAP anteriori te deeds A 15 General Purpose Service Module A 16 GR 376 PrOoCesSOt ete ere ee eer eris A 17 HMUX High Speed Multiplexer A 18 ILE1 Integrated Link Interface Module EI retener A 19 IPMX Inter processor Message Transport Multiplexer 20 MCA Matrix Contr
555. sensitive devices CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of these systems must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION These are redundant systems to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and takes down the systems CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves before powering up All cards must be reset carefully to avoid possible CAUTION After the frame has been shipped or moved remove all cards faulty connections To remove or install a card use the injector ejector module locking tabs at the top and bottom of the card faceplate Refer to Figures 3 1 Figure 3 1 Removing an Eagle STP IP SG Card WARNING Do not use tie wraps on or above the top traverse arms a frame Always trim tie wrap flush and turn the trimmed tie wrap to the rear of the cable Contact Site Supervisor for site specific customer information WARNING Do not leave or allow unused metal objects such as screws or washers to remain anywhere within the equipment Remove all unused material from the equipment
556. ses Card location numbers addresses 90 location numbers MT addresses AO A1 Figure 5 68 Extension Frame EF 02 Numbering Plan Extension Shelf frame 4 1 41 Q ON T OONA wo Extension Shelf frame 4 shelf 3 43 O O O A2 A3 A4 A5 AB AC AD 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 DIP switch identification SHELF ID 4100 1 2 O P DIP switch identification SHELF ID 4200 m Y 2 O Q gt DIP switch identification SHELF ID 4300 m 2 O Wire identification LSB SHELF BIT 00 01 02 Wire wrap identification SHELF e LSB Wire wrap identification SHELF e LSB ID e e 00 01 02 03 MSB e GRD Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 69 Extension Frame EF 03 Numbering Plan Extension Shelf frame 5 shelf 1 51 Card location numbers IMT addresses B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 7 Extension Shelf frame 5 shelf 2 52 Card location numbers T addresses CO C1 C2 C4 C5 C6 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF Extension Shelf frame 5 shelf 3 53 Card location numbers T addresses DO D1 D2 D4 D5 D6 DA
557. shank Multimeter LAN Ethernet Cable Installation Procedure Install LAN Ethernet Cable for ACM 1 Run each 10BASE 2 Thin net coax cable or 1OBASE T twisted pair cable from the Ethernet network onto the cable rack 2 each cable down the respective side of the system outside the cable tie bars and around the top or bottom edge of the terminating shelf NOTE Use Table 5 2 to locate the ACM backplane interface connector for each Ethernet connection 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 21 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies The ACM location number in Table 5 2 consists of the shelf left two digits and the slot right two digits that contain the ACM For example an ACM location of 1108 indicates slot 08 of the Control Shelf shelf 11 For ACMs located in an Extension Shelf replace XX in the ACM location number with the number for that shelf 12 13 21 22 23 31 32 or 33 Table 5 2 ACM Card and Backplane Interface Backplane Shelf ACM Location P N 850 0330 03 04 06 Connector 1101 145 1102 J44 1103 J43 1104 J42 Control 1105 jal Shelf 1106 J40 1107 39 1108 138 1111 J37 1112 J36 Backplane P N 850 0356 03 XX01 24 XX02 123 XX03 J22 XX04 J21 XX05 J20 XX06 J19 XX07 J18 Som XX is shelf XX11 J16 location 12 J15 XX13 J14 XX14 J13 XX15 J12 XX16 J11 XX17 J10 XX18 19 5 22
558. shelf El cable P N 830 0622 xx Configured as a Channel Card In an extension shelf equipped with an F1 interface backplane an E1 configured card terminates or two 1 inputs and connects the E1 port 1 input to one of the available buses on the E1 interface backplane Other E1 Channel appliques configured as Channel cards also connected to the E1 cabling backplane are able to extract any two 64 Kbit sec signaling channels from the same 1 port 1 input In this manner up to 31 E1 channels can be used for signaling with the 32nd channel reserved for E1 synchronization If the installation is performed on existing equipment the hardware consisting of the LIM 1 Interface backplanes and LIM E1 patch cables be installed without affecting system service as long as the cables between the E1 Interface backplane and the system s backplane are not connected E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 02 European and North American standard for signaling and channels MIM Multi channel Interface Module Release 30 0 and later 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 119 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 49 E1 T1 MIM 02 P N 870 2198 02 LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Critical alarm condition detected PROC GREEN No alarm IMT A RED Major alarm condition detected O AROG GREEN No alarm OIMTA IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm PORT 1 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card
559. software release If they are not go to Step 5 to flash the card to the software release level of the EAGLE system If your card is compatible with the EAGLE software relelease level go to Step 7 If in doubt about the compatibility of your new hardware call Tekelec Technical Services Enter the following command to flash the card init flash loc xxxx code appr Where xxxx is the location of the card The following is sample output rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 FLASH Memory Downloading for card 1105 Started rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 BPDCM Downloading for card 1105 Complete rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 Command Completed Enter the following command to activate the FLASH GPL on the act flash loc xxxx Where xxxx is the location of the card The following is sample output rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 FLASH Memory Activation for card 1105 Started 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 FLASH Memory Activation for card 1105 Completed rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 Command Completed 7 Enter the following command to return the upgraded MCPM card into service This causes the MASP to begin downloading tables to the new MCPM card alw card loc xxxx Where xxxx is the MCPM card location When
560. sponse on the terminal that downloading is complete This can take up to 30 minutes 13 Enter the following command to verify the card is operational and providing SCCP services rept stat sccp The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 98 02 07 16 10 50 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 SCCP SUBSYSTEM REPORT IS NR Active SCCP Cards Configured 1 Cards IS NR 1 Capacity Threshold 100 CARD VERSION PST SST AST MSU USAGE USAGE 1212 024 001 000 IS NR Active ALMINH 47 32 SCCP Service Average MSU Capacity 47 Average CPU Capacity 32 Command Completed NOTE Step 14 is only necessary for OAP equipped EAGLEs 14 Enter the following command to return the OAP terminals to the in service state alw trm trm x where x is the terminal number of the inhibited OAP terminal 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 31 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Application Service Module ASM to Transaction Service Module TSM 256 or higher Upgrade for GLS 5 32 Description Beginning with EAGLE 31 6 ASM cards are obsoleted and all ASM cards must be replaced by TSM cards Use the following procedure to replace your ASM cards with TSM cards 5 256 or higher The GLS identifier signifies that the ASM card is used for downloading gateway screening tables to link interface modules LIMs The upgraded cards will perform this downloading function as well Procedure Upgrading ASM
561. stallation of these systems must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION These are redundant systems to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and takes down the systems CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor CAUTION After the frame has been shipped or moved remove all cards prior to applying power Reseat all cards carefully to avoid possible indiscriminate faulty connections To remove or install a card use the injector module locking tabs at the top and bottom of the card faceplate Refer to Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Removing a Card CAUTION EOAP s open system architecture allows access to the operating system Any undocumented changes to the files may cause the system to become corrupted and unusable Making any undocumented changes on the EOAP including changes to the hardware operating system and or the components found therein will void the warranty WARNING Do not use tie wraps on or above the top traverse arms a frame Always trim tie wrap flush and turn the trimmed tie wrap to the rear of the cable Contact Site Supervisor f
562. stat seas if only the SEAS feature is on or rept stat 1sms if only the LNP feature is on commands to make sure that there are no alarms for the EOAPs If both the SEAS and LNP features are on then enter both commands to verify that there are no alarms for the EOAPs This is an example of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 Active SEAS Subsystem Report SEAS Interfaces Configured IS NR 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 SEAS SYSTEM TDM Port TDM Port OAP OAP 25 25 Link Link SEAS SYSTEM OAP OAP X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 X25 A B Al Al B1 B1 A2 A2 B2 B2 Link A1 Link A2 Link B1 Link B2 PVCS PVCS PVCS PVCS PVCS PVCS PVCS PVCS D 1 1 w ALA IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT IS NR OOS MT Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 250 001 000 IS NR 250 001 000 IS NR STAT STAT TUS TUS STAT TUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS 1 2 3 1 253 1 2 3 Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 6 147 EOAP rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10
563. status rept stat card The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 03 08 18 12 57 21 EST EAGLE 31 6 0 CARD 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1111 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1205 1206 1207 1218 Command Completed 5 36 VERSION XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX APPL TSM SCCP TSM SCCP TSM GLS TSM GLS LIMDSO SS7GX25 ACMENET STPLAN GPSM EOAM TDM _ S522 GPSM EOAM MDAL LIMDSO CCS7ITU DCM SS7IPGW DCM IPGWI TSM GLS PST SST AST IS NR Active IS NR Active XXXXX Sess XXXXX Fault IS NR Active IS ANR Active IS NR Active IS NR Active IS NR Standby IS NR Standby IS NR Active IS NR Active IS NR Active IS NR Active IS NR Active 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 4 From the output in Step 3 determine the MASP activity Record which GPSM is Active and Standby Record the card locations of both sets of GPSMs and TDMs Active e Active TDM Standby GPSM Standby In the sample output from Step 3 1113 1114 are active and 1115 1116 are standby 5 Check that the database status is OK Enter the following command to verify that the
564. t lt e es N INS N 25 n oo DS a N N M N N N Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 1 3 1 1 18B 178 168 158 148 138 128 118 28 A Az 201 221 pas p24 P25 P26 271 P291 P30 P311 P32 N log j ns U43 J44 E B es ER i 9 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MT IMT EXTENSION SHELF BACKPLANE NFBL OUT _ IN m IPMXA 10 850 0356 04 NOTE Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board HOT Extension shelf backplane P N 850 0356 04 is different from Extension shelf backplane P N 850 0356 03 in reference to J9 through J16 and 25 through J32 the Port numbers have been raised by two 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 27 Connectors Extension Shelf Modules ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM This section details the Extension Shelf backplane circuit board pin outs used for ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Refer to Table B 18 on page 31 for signal symbol values amp and Table B 16 lists pinouts for ACM ASM DCM DSM EILA ILA LIM MPL TSM Extension Shelf Backplane Top Connectors P1 through P8 and P10 through P17 Figure B 19 Extension Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O0O0O0O00000000000000008 i i 0000
565. t downloading is complete This can take up to 10 minutes NOTE Ensure that the primary FTP server points to the primary card Enter the following command on the primary card to return the card to the status recorded in Step 1 prior to the upgrade init card loc xxxx where xxxx is the location of the primary card Enter the following command to verify the card is operational IS NR rept stat meas 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System Use this procedure anytime a card is removed from a previously operational EAGLE system for upgrade purposes See the Maintenance Manual for card replacement Failure to use this procedure may result in equipment damage Use the procedures at the beginning of this section before physically removing any cards WARNING Before performing any maintenance procedures on the EAGLE make sure you wear a wrist strap connected to the wrist strap grounding point of the EAGLE System Before removing reseating or initializing a card inhibit any OAP terminal ports that are in service normal IS NR to ensure the card loads properly No database updates or single command line entries should be made while the card is loading perform maintenance during low traffic and database provisioning periods WARNING This procedure may interrupt service When possible such as the maintenance window Procedure Removin
566. t extension shelf in control frame Number Name Part number 1 Clock 830 0657 xx connection cable C 36 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0708 xx MMI Port Cable Table C 10 MMI Port Cable P N 830 0708 xx Cables M Feet Meters LE Feet Meters 830 0708 01 25 7 62 830 0708 14 350 106 68 830 0708 02 15 4 57 830 0708 15 400 121 92 830 0708 03 50 15 24 830 0708 16 450 137 16 830 0708 04 75 22 86 830 0708 17 550 167 64 830 0708 05 100 30 48 830 0708 18 600 182 88 830 0708 06 125 38 10 830 0708 19 650 198 12 830 0708 07 150 45 72 830 0708 20 700 213 36 830 0708 08 175 53 34 830 0708 21 750 228 60 830 0708 09 200 60 96 830 0708 22 800 243 84 830 0708 10 250 76 20 830 0708 23 850 259 08 830 0708 11 300 91 40 830 0708 24 900 274 32 830 0708 12 500 152 40 830 0708 25 950 289 56 830 0708 13 1000 304 80 Figure C 29 Man Machine Interface Port Cable P N 830 0708 01 P 1 SIG GND RXD TXD DTR RTS CTS DCD DB15M NC P1 ES EE 1 PIN 9 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 N 7 ER BRN 7 GND RED RED 4 2 WHT WHT 5 3 RXD GRN GRN 6 tt t 6 DSR ORG ORG 14 5 CTS BLU BLU 13 Hr 4 RTs 3 Lt BLK 8 000 20 DTR 1 9 1 2 8 19 I NC 21 12 15 25 DRAIN N D fe ET 53 7 38 h EJ
567. t increase in product related customer trouble reports Billing error rates that exceed specifications 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction Corruption of system or billing databases Problem Minor Other problems that a customer does not view as critical or major are considered minor Minor problems do not significantly impair the functioning of the system and do not significantly affect service to customers These problems are tolerable during system use Engineering complaints are classified as minor unless otherwise negotiated between the customer and supplier Response If a critical problem exists emergency procedures are initiated see Emergency Response If the problem is not critical information regarding the serial number of the system Common Language Location Identifier and initial problem symptoms and messages is recorded and a primary Technical Support engineer is assigned to work the Customer Service Report CSR and provide a solution to the problem The CSR is closed when problem has been resolved Emergency Response In the event of a critical service situation emergency response is offered by Tekelec Technical Services Call 24 hours a day 7 days a week Tekelec UK Phone 44 1784 467 804 Tekelec USA Phone within the continental US 888 FOR TKLC Phone outside the continental US 1 919 460 2150 Or you can request assistance by way of electronic mail at support tekelec c
568. t shrink 4 15 Heat shrink gun 4 15 Heat shrink gun hot air blower 4 13 Heavy Duty Frame 3 27 3 28 Heavy Duty Frame Panels 3 25 High Speed Master Timing 5 81 High speed Multiplexer 1 6 5 6 5 91 5 140 HMUX 2 3 5 83 holdover clock 5 112 holdover clock BITS clock source cables 5 115 Index 4 holdover clock card placement 5 108 Holdover Clock FAP 5 112 holdover clock fuses 5 117 holdover clock installation 5 108 holdover clock output connections 5 112 holdover clock output panel frame ground 5 109 holdover clock power connections 5 109 holdover clock switch settings 5 110 holes are drilled 3 21 hot air blower 4 15 HS Master Timing 5 83 Htap 4 9 Htapped 4 14 2 3 6 IMT 2 3 IMT Cables 5 7 install clock connection cable 6 44 C 36 clock in out cable 6 43 cooling duct 6 20 fan power cables 6 42 mounting brackets 6 23 terminal cables 6 48 Installation Elements 3 17 Installation Support 1 17 Installer s Cable Running List 2 8 C 4 Interdependencies 5 84 Interprocessor Message Transport 5 7 Interprocessor Message Transport IMT 5 7 IP7 Secure Gateway 1 10 Isolation sheet 3 20 J J 8 5 64 5 73 J 9 5 64 5 73 jumper board 4 5 L label cables 2 8 C 4 Label each cable 4 20 label kit 2 10 LED 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 8 DSM 8 LEDs 4 23 1 fan assembly Active 6 70 6 75 Alarm 6 70 6 75 Minor 6 70 6 75 LIM 2 3 LIM AINF 2 3 LIM ATM 2 3 LIM DSOA 2 3 Li
569. t to upgrade a spare TDM repeat Step 13 through Step 27 using the same card slot that was used to upgrade the standby card Once the upgraded standby TDM is replaced by the spare TDM the removed upgraded standby card can become the upgraded spare TDM and the inserted spare will become the upgraded standby card If you do not want to upgrade a spare TDM go to Step 29 29 To upgrade the active TDM first allow the standby GPSM II by entering the following command alw card loc xxxx where xxxx is the standby GPSM II card location as determined in Step 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 43 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 44 30 31 32 33 Enter the following command on the active GPSM II card to force it to become standby init card loc xxxx where xxxx is the active card location 1113 or 1115 from Step 3 Ater the active card is changed to standby the previously standby GPSM II and TDM cards will become active Repeat Step 2 through Step 27 to upgrade the active TDM If all TDMS have been upgraded turn on measurment collection by entering the following command chg meas collect on The system returns output similar to the following tekelecstp 00 01 07 15 25 36 EST Rel 31 6 0 CHG MEAS MASP A COMPLTD NOTE Step 32 and Step 33 are only necessary for OAP equipped EAGLEs Enter the following command to restore the OAP terminals changed in Step 10 chg trm trm x type oap wh
570. ta eit etes 60 Power Connector Extension Backplane B 61 Power Connector Control Back plane ca eo petentes B 62 Rack Alarm Alarm Interface B 63 Rack Alarm Control Backplane 64 Remote Maintenance Center Alarm Control Backplane B 65 Row Alarm Control Backplane ette 66 Serial Port Control Backplane a B 67 uyu B 68 Terminal Disk Module Control Backplane sss 70 B 2 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Connectors Table B 1 Control Shelf Backplanes P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 Control Shelf Control Shelf Control Shelf Control Shelf Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 P N 850 0330 03 04 P N 850 0330 06 J 1 BPOWER J 1 BPOWER J 38 PORT 1A J 45 PORT 1A PRIMARY 2 BFAN POWER J 8 BFAN POWER 39 RALM 3 J 46 RALM 3 3 POWER 9 POWER J 40 LMC 47 LMC 10 POWER 41 SECONDARY 48 SECONDARY SECONDARY BITS BITS 2 B POWER J 42 PRIMARY BITS 49 PRIMARY BITS SECONDARY 4 A POWER 11 A POWER 43 PORT 10 J 50 PORT 10B PRIMARY 5 RALMO 13 RALMO 44 PORT 9B 51 PORT 9B 6 B CLK 0 J 3 B CLK 0 J 45
571. tate of restricted means the EOAP is communicating to the Eagle STP however the X 25 is FAULT If a second EOAP is connected rept stat seas will display both EOAPs if the X25 Config in the EOAP s DEFAULT file is set to L1P3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 97 EOAP 6 98 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP EOAP Test Completion Checklist and Sign Off Matrix Confirmation that the EOAP Operational Test has been completed The Customer s signature is only required if not completed in conjunction with the Eagle STP Acceptance Test Please place a copy in the site file book Site Name Site Serial Number NT EOAP Serial Number Operating Company Operating Company Representative PRINT Operating Company Representative SIGN TEKELEC Representative PRINT TEKELEC Representative SIGN Date started Date completed Test Test Category Description Pass 1 Fail 1 Initial The EOAP is frame mounted equipment Utilize 1 the installation and power up procedure outline in the NSD Installation Manual for the proper cabling and fuse assignments Verify Aurora Serial Port Devices Verify All Procesesses are Running 4 Verify AURORA Serial Connections to Eagle STP Single Verify AURORA Serial Connections to Eagle STP Dual 6 Hosts IP Address 7 Enter the EOAP Configuration 8 LoopbackTest of the Test X 25 Interface 9 Verify
572. te EOAP Embedded Provide 890 1050 xx EAGLE only Operations Signaling and Support System Engineering Applications Administration Processor System SEAS interfacin between the EAGLE system and a SEAS console through an X 25 network HMUX High Speed Provides 870 1965 xx EAGLE only Multiplexer Interprocessor Message Transport IMT bus continuity for all cards connected to the IMT bus for large systems ILA Integrated Link Provides 1 or 2 870 1484 xx Interface Module DSOA or Applique V 35 interfaces for SS7 links LIM Link Interface Provides specific 870 1014 xx Module SS7 interfaces LIM AINF Link Interface Provides 1 or 2 870 1488 xx Replaced by Module OCU DSOA or ILA and EILA Application V 35 interfaces Interface for SS7 links LIM ATM Link Interface Provides 870 1293 xx Module 1 Asynchronous Asynchronous Transfer Mode Transfer Module over T1 Interface at 1 544 Mbps LIM DSOA Link Interface Provides 2 870 1009 xx Replaced by Module Digital Signal 870 1014 xx and FILA Level 0 Applique DSOA interfaces at 56 kbps LIM E1 Link Interface Connection point E1 European and E1 T1 Module E1 from system 870 1379 xx equivalent of MIM andE1 T1 MIM _ backplane to andE1 T1 the North external E1 MIM American T1 1 1 MIM 870 2198 01 interface 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 General Installation Information Table 2 1 2 4
573. ted for every frame clock cable that is to be replaced 1 Remove the plastic panels from the back of all shelves that require the frame clock cables replaced 2 Install Pin Protector Assembly P N 830 0880 01 all shelves that require the frame clock cables replaced The pin protectors are placed over the ID pins directly to the right and left of the A CLK IN cables connectors on each shelf Shelf ID pins must be covered with Pin Protector Assembly P N 830 0880 01 If contact is made with the ID pins the shelf may lose its identity 3 Connecta laptop or access by way of a monitor the EAGLE system and start ProComm or a terminal emulator program 4 Open a captured file by entering Alt F1 Name the file the last four digits of the NT xxyyzz CAP Example 2641E1T1 A cap 5 Issue the command to report clock status rept stat clk 6 Response to the clock status command is displayed tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel rept stat clk Command entered at termoinal 1 tekelecstp 03 02 10 05 34 03 HST Rel CARD LOC 1114 Standby CARD LOC 1116 Active PRIMARY BITS Active PRIMARY BITS Active SECONDARY BITS Idle SECONDARY BITS Idle HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS PRIMARY CLK Active HS SECONDARY CLK Idle HS SECONDARY CLK Idle PST SST AST SYSTEM CLOCK IS NR Active Cards using CLK A 7 Cards with bad CLK A 000 Cards using CLK B 0 Cards with
574. ted into an OAP frame On each side of the assembly attach it with two screws P N 600 0193 01 and external tooth washers P N 606 0062 01 to the front frame rail Tighten the screws Refer to Figure 6 7 Step 6 WARNING Do not overtighten the screws as the heads could snap AN off Reference Mechanical Assembly Torque Specification 906 0008 01 NOTE Spare rear bracket shipped with fan assembly 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 17 EOAP Figure 6 6 Insert Fan Assembly Below EOAP Shelf Fuse and Alarm Panel a Cooling duct Figure 6 7 Attach Fan Assembly to Front of Frame Rail Frame rail EA Fan Assembly A gt OO lt Tighten the screw S attached to the rear frame rail Insert the screws and washers through the mounting bracket into the side of the fan assembly Insert the screws and T washers through the fan assembly into the Screw front of the frame rail 6 18 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 9 From the rear of the frame and on each side of the fan assembly insert two screws through the mounting bracket and into the side of the fan assembly Refer to Figure 6 7 Step 2 10 Align the fan assembly with the sides of the shelf and tighten the two screws that secure the mounting brackets to the frame
575. tel associated GPSM ll is resetting is not code installed or has failed 0123456789 0123456789 revision number x 8 gt tu t part number 870 0774 XX REV XX TDM 870 0774 xx TDM tdm led a 3 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 A 31 LEDs TOCA Holdover Clock TOCA Timing Output Composite Automatic Holdover Clock TOCA P N 804 0166 01 Figure A 28 Holdover Clock TOCA Card LEDs LEDs Descriptions FAIL RED This card has failed or there is a loss of all input references to this card BLANK No card or input reference failure detected PORT ALM RED One to five outputs have failed or have been externally shorted BLANK No output failures detected ST GREEN An active clock is supplying the input reference for this card BLANK No active clock detected INPUT GREEN Card is receiving a reference signal from one or more of the following clock input A clock input B clock card A clock card B BLANK Card is not receiving a reference signal from any of the above sources 500 Not used 1000 Not used A 32 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 V 35 LIM Link Interface Module LEDs V 35 LIM P N 870 1012 xx and P N 870 1487 xx Figure A 29 LIM V 35 LEDs TEKELEC Serial number CLEI code 0123456789 0123456789 X Revision number 5 95 Part 55 number 1 limv35ledneb 910 4601 01 Revision D
576. tem can have up to five Extension Frames EF 00 to EF 04 EF 04 supports only one extension shelf Figures 4 17 through 4 21 show the numbering of the card locations on the extension frames Along with shelf DIP switch settings and ID wire wrap Figure 4 17 Extension Frame EF 00 Numbering Plan DIP switch Extension Shelf frame 2 shelf 1 21 identification SHELF ID 2100 W 1 LSB Card 2121212121212 2 anes 1111111111111 3 010001000 I 21314151617 8 MSB 7 IMT 8 a addresses 20 Extension Shelf frame 2 shelf 2 22 identification SHELF ID 2200 gt Card 2 2 2 2 numbers 2 2 2 2 3 010100 4 4 5 6 7 MSB IMT 4 addresses 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 39 3A 3B 3C 3D Extension Shelf frame 2 shelf 3 23 DIP Switch identification 2 3 B Card 2 212 212 0 i a di 3 3 3 3 3 9 3 010000 5 4 4 15 617 8 3 I MSS 1 7 addresses 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 8 4 36 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Wire identification SHELF BIT 00 01 02 03 Wire identification SHELF e ID e BIT 00 01 02 03 GRD Wire wrap identification SHELF e ID e BIT 00 01 02 03 Fuses and Alarm Panels Figure 4 18 Extension Frame EF 01 Numbering Plan DIP Switch Wire wrap Extension Shelf frame 3 she
577. terface Module Figure A 8 E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 01 00000 00000 APPLICATION JTAG TERMINAL OOOOO 00000 Serial number CLEI code gt Revision m number 20 So Part N number Ee 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 LEDs Descriptions APPL RED Critical alarm condition detected PROC No alarm IMT A RED Major alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm IMT B AMBER Minor alarm condition detected GREEN No alarm PORT 1 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned PORT 2 AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Channel Card GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned EXT AMBER Card is an E1 T1 Master Card PORT GREEN channels provisioned ISNR AMBER BLINKING Any channels provisioned OOS RED BLINKING channels provisioned OOS RED No channels are provisioned OOS Out of service A 11 LEDs E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 02 TEKELEC APPL O PROC O IMTA O IMTB PORT 1 O PORT EXT PORT 00000 00000 APPLICATION JTAG TERMINAL 00000
578. terruption WARNING gt P P This icon and text indicate the possibility of equipment damage TOPPLE Always read and understand instructions thoroughly and completely before working on moving raising or lowering the frame any portion of the frame or attachments to the frame or equipment TOPPLE Never try to unpack any frame from the shipping container without at least two people to steady any movement of the frame and related components At least two people are required to safely move and position any frame TOPPLE Never pull out the shelf of any frame that is not anchored properly Some frames are required to be attached to over head ladder racks before shelves are extended DANGER Atleast two people are required to safely move and position the frame DANGER No commercially AC powered equipment be used or placed within 7 ft of 48V equipment This may create a shock or current loop that can be severely hazardous to personnel and equipment DANGER Do not wear metal rings watches or jewelry or carry exposed metal keys or tools in pockets when working on system equipment or other related electrostatic sensitive components Always wear a wrist strap or other electrostatic protection when handling printed circuit cards and other electrostatic sensitive devices D N 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 PP P P gt A EOAP CAUTION All personnel associated with the in
579. the example in step 2 Test 10 From the EOAP terminal at the root directory Change to the su super user tekelec xxx ccsproj ocd tekelec XXX ccsproj su Password See ITAS for passwords Aug 9 07 34 41 tekelec XXX su root succeeded for ccsproj on dev console At the command line prompt issue the command to verify modem software pmadm 1 PMTAG PMTYPE SVCTAG FLGS ID lt PMSPECIFIC gt ttymonO ttymon 0 ux root dev term 0 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 0 ttymonO ttymon 1 ux root dev term 1 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 1 ttymonO ttymon 2 ux root dev term 2 usr bin login 9600 login dev term 2 zsmon ttymon ttya u root dev term a I usr bin login 9600 ldterm ttcompat ttya login tvi925 y zsmon ttymon 3 u root dev term b usr bin login 9600E ldterm ttcompat login 3 n NOTE Theoutput from the command should look something like this The last line bold is the critical one Identify EOAP GPL This test is to identify the GPL of the EOAP just built and tested Test 11 From the EOAP terminal enter the command to view the contents of the gpl directory for the modelSTP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 pkgingo grep TKLC Verify the output Application Application Application Application Application TKLCoap TKLCop702 TKLCop7 03 TKLCop704 TKLCscoap OAP Applocation 28 0 OAP Platform upgrade OAP Platf
580. the act oap config command completes immediately processing on the EOAP may take over 10 minutes depending on which parameters change and which EOAP hardware is installed Also whenever parameters are changed the EOAP reboots to use new data The reboot interrupts the connection between the EOAP and the SEAC or LSMS By updating only one EOAP at a time the system and the SEAC or LSMS will not be isolated as one EOAP is always connected to the SEAC or LSMS Table 6 1 shows the action and approximate completion time that you can expect after updating a group od EOAP parameters You do not need to perform the action manually they are all automatic when the act oap config command is executed If for any reason the Eagle STP fails to deliver the EOAP configuration to an EOAP or an EOAP fails to utilize it the EOAP may be configured incorrectly or the EOAP might be receiving bad data This condition will be detected but not automatically corrected The Eagle STP will generate an alarm within 10 seconds of any mismatch in Eagle STP and EOAP databases When the databases are back in synchronization the Eagle STP will clear the alarm within 5 seconds NOTE There can be two alarms raised one for each EOAP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Tools and Equipment The following tools and equipment are required for provisioning the EOAP for the first time 520 display unit s or equivalent connected to and EOAP B
581. the card has been successfully loaded there will be a response on the terminal that downloading is complete This can take up to 10 minutes 8 Enter the following command to verify the card is operational IS NR rept stat meas If the secondary MCPM card is operational go to Step 9 If it is not call Tekelec Technical Services 9 If you want to upgrade a spare MCPM go to Step 10 Otherwise got to Step 16 10 Remove the spare MCPM card from the spare card storage shelf and place it into an ESD container Next enter the following command to remove the previously upgraded secondary MCPM card from service This card will become the spare Do not use the force command unless this is the only MCPM card in service MCPM collection and reporting service should be maintained at all times NOTE Removing the last MCPM or only MCPM from service will cause loss of measurements data If there is more than one MCPM card in service enter inh card loc xxxx where xxxx is the secondary MCPM card location If there is only one MCPM card in service enter inh card loc xxx force yes where xxxx is the secondary MCPM card location 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 47 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 11 Remove the MCPM card See Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 for removal procedures Place the removed MCPM card into the spare card storage shelf Place the new MCPM EDSM card into its place Be s
582. the frame in the shipping container is shown without system hardware components Figure 3 4 Shipping Detach Dolly Heavy Duty Frame Four bolts 5 16 attach dolly to container floor removed front and back DO NOT remove gt bolts that attach dolly to frame Threaded rod to raise and lower dolly wheels 4 places 9 16 Threaded rod to raise and lower dolly wheels 4 places 9 16 U bolts 2 places Front door ramp wheel guide on the Front door ramp Front door ramp wheel guide on the inside of the wheel 9 With a minimum of two people carefully move the frame to the next location 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 7 Frames and Shelves 10 At the correct site location turn the threaded rods counter clockwise to lower the frame by raising the wheels of the dolly Again two technicians must turn the threaded rods at the same time avoid tilting Refer to Figure 3 5 for the location of the threaded rods attached to wheels Figure 3 5 Heavy Duty Frame Dolly 9 16 inch hex 9 16 inch hex 5 16 inch hex 3 8 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves 11 Remove the bolts front and rear that attach the dolly to the frame Refer to Figure 3 6 NOTE For clarity the Frame is shown without system hardware components Figure 3 6 Heavy Duty Frame with Dolly
583. the specific fuse location For those fuse locations that do not yet have circuit cards assigned use fuses and circuit cards assigned to other locations for the test procedure and then remove them Verify each fuse using the following tools Procedure Verify Individual Fuse Positions on page 4 23 to perform the verification 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 4 21 Fuses and Alarm Panels WARNING Use the antistatic wrist strap connected to the wrist strap grounding point on the frame when performing these procedures Table 4 5 Fuses and Card Locations on page 4 24 to determine fuse and card locations NOTE Thecard location numbers in the table indicate the shelf and the slot for that card The left two digits indicate the shelf and the right two digits indicate the card slot in that shelf For example a location of 1215 indicates a card in shelf 12 slot 15 Figure 4 3 FAP P N 870 2320 xx Front on page 4 5 to physically locate the fuse holders Figures 4 16 through 4 21 starting on page 4 35 to physically locate a card in a shelf Table 4 4 Fuse Color Codes of Alarm Flags Fuse Amp Fuse Flag Color Fuse Amp Fuse Flag Color 0 18A Orange Red 2A Orange 0 2A Black Red 2 5A White Orange 0 25A Violet 3A Blue 0 33A Yellow Green 3 5A White Blue 0 375A White Green 4A White Brown 0 5A Red 5A Green 0 65A Black 7 5A Black White 0 75A Brown 10A Red White 1A Gray 12A Ye
584. three inches There should be no less than two lacing cords between frames Lacing cord must be used on and above the top traverse arm Contact Site Supervisor for site specific customer information Some prior releases of EAGLE software do not support the E1 T1 MIM P N 870 2198 02 The following table list the supported card part numbers by release Both E1 T1 MIM part numbers are supported beginning with EAGLE Release 30 0 Table 5 1 E1 T1 MIM Release Compatibility E1 T1 MIM Release Release Release Release Release Part Number 28 x 29 0 29 0 2 29 1 29 1 1 870 2198 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 870 2198 02 No No Yes No Yes 5 6 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Intra system Cable Installation This section covers the installation of cables that run within frames and between frames in a multiple frame installation The cables covered in this section have been connected at one end in the factory and have connectors and are labeled at the other end for ease of installation Consult the Equipment Specification for this installation and the label at the unconnected end of each cable to determine its connection point The cables covered in this section are Interprocessor Message Transport IMT cables e Clock Alarm cables Logic ground cables Recommended Tools Tekelec tools should be labeled Property of TEKELEC with either a press on Field Too
585. tion Fuse and Alarm Panel Labeling EAGLE 5 SAS frames arrive from the factory with labels in place If a frame is assembled at a site a labeling kit may be necessary Label Kit for Fuse and Alarm Panel FAPs P N 870 2320 01 Use Label Kit P N 870 1915 01 to apply individual FAP labels if your frame was not shipped preassembled The label kit contains large sheets of die cut stick on labels for the appropriate frames There are three large sheets of labels Sheet P N 658 0604 01 is for FUSE BANK A CONTROL FRAME through EF 04 Sheet P N 658 0604 02 is for FUSE BANK B CONTROL FRAME through EF 04 Sheet P N 658 0604 03 is for MISC FRAME Also included in the Label Kit are smaller die cut stick on labels for different fuses relating to different amperes and individual pieces of site specific equipment press these labels into the fuse OPEN spaces Procedure Label FAP Faceplate 1 Peelthe individual die cut label that designates a specific frame from one of the three large die cut sheets of labels 2 Press the sticky side of the label into the silk screened area on the front of the faceplate of the Fuse and Alarm Panel P N 870 2320 01 for the specific frame The left side of the faceplate is marked A and the right side of the faceplate is marked B The label designates CONTROL FRAME or EF 00 through EF 04 There are also labels for the MISC FRAME The labels must be pressed into place on the front facepl
586. tion If this is the only ASM GLS card in service enter the following 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies inh card loc xxxx force yes where xxxx is the card location 4 Remove the ASM GLS card See Removing a Card in an Existing EAGLE System on page 5 51 for instructions Place the removed ASM card into a ESD container do not put it into the spare card storage shelf Place the new TSM card into its place Be sure the revision numbers on the cards are compatible with the EAGLE software release If in doubt call Tekelec Technical Services 5 Enter the following command to begin downloading gateway screening GWS data to the new TSM card alw card loc xxxx Where xxxx is the card location 6 Enter the following command to verify the successful download of GWS data and to verify that the new card has returned to service rept stat card The following is an example of the possible output RLGHNCXA03W 98 02 04 12 57 21 EST EAGLE 31 4 0 CARD VERSION TYPE APPL PST SST AST 1101 024 001 000 ASM GLS IS NR Active 1113 024 102 000 MASP OAM IS NR Active 1114 shee see TDM IS NR Active IIX5 eee MASP OAM OOS MT Isolated 1116 e TDM OOT MT Isolated 1117 eet MDAL c m IS NR Active 1201 024 102 000 LIMOCU CCS7ITU IS NR Active 1202 024 001 000 LIMDSO CCS7ITU IS NR Active M BIP ERR
587. to FAP B 1B RS 232 Processor Slot 1 Asynchronous VT 520 Terminal dev term a 2B RS 232 Processor Slot 1 Asynchronous Maintenance Modem dev term b 3B RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Asynchronous System s Terminal dev cua 0 Port 4B RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Asynchronous System s Terminal dev cua 1 Port 5B RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Synchronous X 25 port dev term 2 6B RS 232 Serial I O Slot 3 Synchronous X 25 port dev term 3 7B RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous 8B RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous 9B RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 synchronous 10B RS 232 Reserved for future Asynchronous Currently unused expansion through Slot 4 or synchronous Frontethernet 100BsT LAN connection 10 100BaseT Connection to L5MS Port RJ 45 via LAN 6 34 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Single Configuration Cabling Use this procedure to cable the shelf for a single configuration Cable Shelf for Single Configuration Procedure Cable Single Configuration EOAP 1 Attach power cable A P N 830 0699 to the EOAP backplane a Connect one end to port POWER IN A b Loosely route the power cable A from connector POWER IN A down and across the second tie down rod Route the cable to the right
588. trol Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND B01 LGND 01 XA02 D01 XA14 A02 50 02 LGND C02 XA03 D02 XA15 A03 ASERO _50 LGND XA04 203 XA16 A04 LGND B04 LGND C04 XA05 D04 EBI XA17 A05 B05 LGND C05 XA06 D05 EBI XA18 A06 B06 LGND C06 EBI XA07 D06 EBI XA19 A07 LGND 07 LGND C07 EBI XA08 D07 EBI XA20 A08 ASEL B08 C08 XA09 D08 EBI XA21 A09 B09 C09 10 D09 EBI XA22 A10 AMUXIN B10 C10 D10 EBI XA23 LGND 11 AIN C11 D11 EBI XA24 B 20 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table B 13 Control Shelf Backplane Pin Outs Top Connector Connectors Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A12 B12 LGND C12 D12 EBI XA25 A13 B13 LGND C13 D13 EBI XA26 A14 LGND B14 LGND C14 D14 EBI XA27 A15 ASERI _50 B15 LGND C15 D15 16 ASERI _50 16 LGND C16 D16 17 LGND B17 LGND C17 D17 A18 B18 C18 D18 A19 LGND B19 iu 55 C19 LGND D19 A20 B20 MBUSSRX C20 D20 LGND _50 A21 LGND B21 i SSTX 21 MA56KHZ _50 D21 A22 B22 is SSTX 22 MA56KHZ _50 D22 LGND A23 LGND B23 C23 MA8KHZ _50 D23 A24 amp IF1_60 B24 C24 MA8KHZ _50 D24 LGND A
589. ts Top 2 0 0 0 0 0 8 8O0OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0000000008 bp com Table 35 Backplane Pin outs Top Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal A01 LGND 01 LGND 01 XA02 D01 XA14 A02 ASERO _50 02 LGND C02 XA03 D02 EBI XA15 A03 ASERO _50 LGND C03 XA04 D03 XA16 A04 LGND B04 LGND C04 EBI XA05 204 EBI XA17 A05 B05 LGND C05 6 06 D05 EBI XA18 A06 B06 LGND C06 EBI XA07 D06 EBI XA19 A07 LGND B07 LGND C07 EBI XA08 D07 EBI XA20 A08 5 5 08 C08 XA09 208 EBI XA21 09 09 C09 XA10 D09 EBI XA22 A10 AMUXIN 10 10 D10 XA23 A11 LGND B11 AIN C11 D11 EBI XA24 A12 B12 LGND C12 D12 EBI XA25 A13 B13 LGND C13 D13 EBI XA26 A14 LGND B14 LGND C14 D14 EBI XA27 A15 ASERI 50 B15 LGND C15 D15 A16 ASERI 50 16 LGND C16 D16 A17 LGND 17 LGND C17 D17 A18 18 18 D18 A19 LGND 19 MBUSSRX _50 C19 HST GST D19 A20 B20 MBUSSRX 50 C20 D20 LGND B 54 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Table 35
590. type that prevents escaping dust particles that may contaminate electronic equipment Masking tape Fiberglass tape measure Isolation sheet in mounting hardware kit P N 840 0092 01 Subfloor marking tool e Ear protectors Felt tipped marking pen File Mounting hardware kit P N 840 0092 01 furnished with each heavy duty frame The procedure for preparing raised flooring is highly site specific For more information refer to the site specific specification as per the Method Of Procedure for the particular installation WARNING Before drilling holes in any flooring verify with facilities personnel that the area will support a loaded frame and is free of gas or water pipes ventilation ducts electrical wiring conduits or any other items that may be damaged If the hole is drilled at an angle the anchor and frame will not come together properly After marking anchor locations remove the tiles and take them to an approved location for drilling Do not drill tiles in the equipment area 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves Procedure Prepare Raised Floor for Anchors 1 Ontheraised floor mark the corners of the tiles so that the same tile will be returned to the same place when the job is complete Mark the spot to be drilled and remove the tiles from the equipment area 2 Drilla 1 inch 2 54 cm diameter hole in the tiles corresponding to the marked anchor locations Use a v
591. uld equal zero If any other B frame clock cables need to be replaced in the system repeat steps 5 through 14 After all the B frame clock cables in the system are replaced secure the cables with tie wraps or lacing cord according to specifications If no other frame clock cables are to be replaced and if the pin protectors are needed remove the ID pin protectors If no other frame clock cables need replacing return the plastic panels that were removed for these procedures to original locations Put all plastic panels back in place 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 97 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 33 Backplane P N 850 0330 06 Control Shelf A FAN APOWER A POWER B FAN B CLK BPOWER POWER POWER SECONDARY PRIMARY shelf 1200 BCLKO ACLKO and shelf 1300 3 5 m E same 5 25 3 o o i 5 Pi 3 189 5 P5 FA Pio P12 P13 pia 15 Pte em 3 8 x 023 8 m s To A CLK IN shelf 1200 and shelf 1300 SI same frame 518 m BCLK1 ACLK1 R2 R3 R5 R6 R7 RB Rio RIT E gt MIMI 5 Mme MMI7 o 5 o0 NS 5 5 S 5 20 22 N 5 8 5 5 oz e 2 g m n 8 2 2 2 r 8 25 3 Alta 3 3 3 a 2 3 8 3 EI 88 AE 218 Aral sm Sire ure ral Sis ALIS 5 5 e gt gt 38 Fis
592. umi 2770 i O 600 02970 log _ g i PORT 4A PORT 4B JO n2 9 gt e Ox 135 149 9 0 _ U OAMM14J2O PORTSB 08 134 248 os k w R D 3270 port PORT 6B Ug oor J 9 O _ O i PORT7A PORT 7B 9 EM acto 5 E __ o 6 2 J46 4 0 OWMITJIJ O PORT PORT 8B as og 231 J45 L 1 0 1 amp z 9 ge 20 2 peyi O L ea o o 39 55 PORT9A PORT 9B 2055 lon 130 la J44 PORT 10A PORT10B z j posso o o uis EXT ALM Primary Bits ON ure RG og o ONACLK 1 J15 O 57 0 7 CNACLK 5 J63 O0 2 Ere DA Ine ONIS X oz an ON 7097 ONACLK 4 56K Xm RoW secondary pits OSE 98010790 log 127 Oxo o 2 ONB cuk 1513 0 5 BCLK3J55 O a O og o L1 Dog 999 99 9 0080251270 d Owe9o oz og RALMO RALM1 RALM2 RALM3 RALM4 RALM5 joo 325 7C ON 389 am 66 850 0230 03 1 4 NOTE Conducts 48VDC for the printed circuit board B 18 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Control Shelf Backplane P N
593. ure the revision numbers of the card is compatible with the EAGLE software release If they are not go to Step 12 to flash the card to the software release level of the EAGLE system If your card is compatible with the EAGLE software relelease level go to Step 14 If in doubt about the compatibility of your new hardware call Tekelec Technical Services 12 Enter the following command to flash the card init flash loc xxxx code appr Where xxxx is the location of the card The following is sample output rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 FLASH Memory Downloading for card 1105 Started rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 BPDCM Downloading for card 1105 Complete rlghncxa03w 01 03 02 13 05 05 EST Rel 28 1 0 Command Completed n 13 Enter the following command to activate the FLASH GPL on the card act flash loc xxxx Where xxxx is the location of the card The following is sample output rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 FLASH Memory Activation for card 1105 Started rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 FLASH Memory Activation for card 1105 Completed rlghncxa03w 04 02 04 13 05 05 EST EAGLE 31 3 0 Command Completed n 5 48 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 14 Enter the following command to return the upgraded MCPM card into service This causes the MASP to begin downloading tables to the new MCPM
594. ures are on then enter both commands to verify that there are no alarms for EOAP A These are examples of the possible output rept stat seas rlghncxa03w 00 06 04 15 59 06 EST Rel 26 0 0 SEAS Subsystem Report SEAS Interfaces Configured SEAS SYSTEM ST IS NR Active 2 Interfaces IS NR 2 GPL PST SST AST IS NR Active IS NR Active IS NR Active 250 001 000 IS NR Active 250 001 000 IS NR Active IS NR Active IS NR Active TATUS No Alarms TATUS No Alarms TATUS No Alarms TATUS No Alarms TATUS No Alarms TATUS No Alarms TATUS No Alarms eS RC ml 243 1 273 TDM Port 4 TDM Port 10 OAP A OAP B X 25 Link Al X 25 Link B1 SEAS SYSTEM ALARM OAP A ALARM OAP B ALARM X25 Link A1 ALARM X25 Link A2 ALARM X25 Link B1 ALARM X25 Link B2 ALARM X25 A1 PVCs IS NR X25 A1 PVCs OOS MT X25 B1 PVCs IS NR X25 B1 PVCs OOS MT X25 A2 PVCs IS NR X25 A2 PVCs OOS MT X25 B2 PVCs IS NR X25 B2 PVCs OOS MT Command Completed 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP rept stat lsms rlghncxa03w 00 06 17 14 59 11 EST Release 26 0 0 GPL PST SST AST LSMS SYSTEM IS NR Active TDM Port 4 IS NR Active TDM Port 10 IS NR Active OAP A 250 001 000 IS NR Active OAP B 250 001 000 IS NR Active 0 3 Association 1 IS NR Active Q 3 Association B1 IS NR Active LSMS SYSTEM ALARM STATUS No Alarm
595. val of the card Part numbers LEDs Text and Bar codes are also located on the front of the cards To remove a card use both hands to toggle the levers out from the face of the card To insert a card align the card in the slot push slowly in until the connectors engage and press both levers in until they lock the card in place To ensure proper seating the toggle levers must be held in the release position until the locking tabs can engage the upper and lower flange on the shelf Once the locking tabs on the levers engage the shelf plane the levers are pressed in toward the card faceplate and must be flush with the faceplate when the card is completely seated 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 A 3 LEDs ACM Application Communication Module TEKELEC APPL PROC IMB HOST e STAT RSRV g 8 3 S 5 lt 870 1008 REV XX 4 870 1008 Figure A 1 ACM LEDs Descriptions RED Application processor is not running or is failing diagnostics AMBER ACM is 2 application or is being polled may be prevented from loading by maintenance out of service condition GREEN ACM is running an application RED ACM is off IMT bus A AMBER ACM is on IMT bus A but testing is not complete GREEN ACM is on IMT bus A BLANK Communication processor is not operating RED ACM is off IMT bus B AMBER ACM i
596. verse arms on a frame Always trim tie wrap flush and turn the trimmed tie wrap to the rear of the cable Contact the Site Supervisor for site specific customer information CAUTION personnel associated with the installation of these systems must adhere to all safety precautions and use required protection equipment to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel service degradation and or service interruption CAUTION This is a redundant system to allow service during normal maintenance When repairs require a total power disconnect both input supply sources must be disconnected This will cause service interruption and take down the system CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor CAUTION Branch Circuit Overcurrent Protection shall be rated min 48V 40A CAUTION To be installed in restricted access areas in accordance with articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electric Code ANSI NFPA 70 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Introduction CAUTION A readily accessible approved disconnect device is to be incorporated in the field wiring CAUTION Connect to a reliably grounded SELV source which is reliably earthed and electrically isolated from the AC source CAUTION Use only listed closed loop connectors for connection to the supply CAUTION After the frame has been shipped or moved remove all cards prior to
597. vision D May 2005 6 43 EOAP 6 44 Install EOAP Clock Connection Cable Use one EOAP clock connection cable P N 830 0657 xx to connect the EOAP shelf backplane P N 850 0488 xx to the last Eagle STP extension shelf backplane in the control frame Procedure Install Clock Connection Cable 1 Plug one end of the P N 830 0657 xx clock connection cable onto the connector marked BCLKIN A located at the upper middle of the EOAP backplane Refer to Figure 6 24 Tighten the cable connectors Figure 6 24 Install EOAP Clock Connection Cable 10 804 0657 xx To last extension shelf on control frame B clock out OQ O OO OO O OO goo i Oro 9 io a2 EN EE Uv PORT 9B PORT 5B PORT 8B PORT 7B H FAN B PWR A e POWER IN B POWER IN A OAPRST A BCLKOUT A Ponr 18 PORT 28 PORT1A 2 a E m d FAN A PWR B 3B 4B Pm cC ang 3A 25 4 g RST B MCI B BCLKOUT B b EOAPbackcables 2 OO PORT 5A V 10A TR 9A PORT 7A PORT 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP 2 From the connector loosely route the clock connection cable down to the second tie down rod and across the rod toward the right side of the EOAP backplane Figure 6 25 Route
598. vision D May 2005 Cables 830 0789 xx Patch Panel Crossover 830 0789 xx Patch Panel Crossover Cable DCM Table C 11 Patch Panel Crossover DCM P N 830 0789 xx Part Number o Part Number fae 830 0789 01 15 4 57 830 0789 06 100 30 50 830 0789 02 25 7 62 830 0789 07 150 45 75 830 0789 03 35 10 67 830 0789 08 200 60 10 830 0789 04 50 15 25 830 0789 09 250 76 25 830 0789 05 75 45 75 830 0789 10 328 107 54 Figure 39 Patch Panel Crossover Cable P N 830 0789 xx System Router Hub Network GR 376 g Pin 19 1 Male 26 8 PIN Male ARX WHTIBLU a 1 WHT BLU ARX BLU XO __ T ATX gt WHT ORN HE WHT ORN aver n3 x X X ORN apes 1 I 5 4 Y I 7 l I l 8 5 I I 8 dnd gee I Not used Drain Y 21 24 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 C 47 Cables 830 0814 xx Multi Port Power Cable C 48 Figure C 40 Multi Port Power Cable P N 830 0814 xx TABULATION BLOCK DASH NUMBER LENGTH IN 1 X IN 12 LABEL A USAGE LABEL B USAGE 01 64 0 6 0 TB1 POS 1 amp 4 SERVER B 51 02 70
599. visioned in slots dedicated to the MASP MDAL and HMUX cards Database Communications Module The Database Communications Module DCM P N 870 1984 xx used in EAGLE 5 SAS STP and SG systems The DCM card is based on the DCM primary board The DCM card is the basis of the Database Service Module DSM The following provisioning rules apply to the Database Service Module DSM An Applique Printer Circuit Board with One Gigabyte of memory D1G applique added to DCM P N 870 1984 01 is a Database Service Module DSM P N 870 1984 02 Two appliques with one gigabyte of memory each on the DCM card is DSM P N 870 1984 03 Three appliques with one gigabyte of memory each on the DCM is DSM P N 870 1984 04 Procedure Install Ethernet Cable for DCM DSM and EDCM 1 When the Database Communications Module DCM cards have been configured in the system run the Ethernet cables P N 830 0788 xx straight through 2 The Ethernet cables have DB26 connector on the system end and RJ45 on the other end of the cable One cable is required for each DCM card 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 5 25 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies 5 26 3 the system end DB26 if the card is in slots 1 3 5 or 7 the cable is run down the right side of the frame as seen from the back of the frame If DCM cards are in slots 11 13 15 or 17 the cables is run down the left side of the frame as seen from the
600. w Alarm Cable P N 830 0232 xx PIN1 PIN9 9 i d PIN 1 PIN 9 P2 F 22 AWG BLK R3MJNO 11 11 R3MJNO R3MNNO 10 _ 10 R3MNNO 22 AWG ORN R3BNO 9 9 R3BNO R3CRNC 5 5 R3CRNC d 22 AWG GRN i WANG GRA 1 1 3 20 AWG PRP DRAIN WIRE v v 3 SPARE 6 6 SPARE 8 8 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 J C 10 830 0232 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 830 0233 xx Remote Maintenance Center Cable Cables Table C 3 Remote Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0233 xx Part Number Tengi Length Part Number Benet T engt feet meters feet meters 830 0233 01 50 15 25 830 0233 07 200 61 00 830 0233 02 75 22 88 830 0233 08 250 76 25 830 0233 03 100 30 50 830 0233 09 300 91 50 830 0233 04 125 38 13 830 0233 10 500 152 50 830 0233 05 150 45 75 830 0233 11 1000 305 00 830 0233 06 175 53 38 Figure C 6 Remote Maintenance Center Cable P N 830 0233 xx Th PS Lo m PIN 1 P1 3 4 NOTUSED m RED BLU M BLU RED WHT GRA E X GRA WHT RMCANC 2 eaa This end of the cable is not RMCMJNC 6 BLU WHT equipped with a connector in ES turing RMCNNC 7 1 WHT ORN The wires must be cul eth RMCCRNC 8 ORN WHT and connected at the site specific location 10 WHT GRN RMCCOM 13
601. ways trim tie wraps flush and turn the trimmed tie wraps to the rear of the cable bundle when facing the back of the frame WARNING 48VDC is present on the backplane Use caution when working on the equipment If the site does not require more than two 1 channels in any 1 interface the E1 Interface kit may not need to be installed The E1 Interface Kit P N 890 1037 01 consists of 16 E1 patch cables two backplanes and attaching hardware The 1 Interface Backplane shown it as it would be installed on an extension shelf see Figure 5 50 Notice that the upper and lower backplanes are identical The cables P N 830 0605 02 shown connect the port B on the extension shelf backplane to the appropriate connectors on the 1 interface B 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Eagle STP and IP7 Secure Gateway Assemblies Figure 5 50 E1 T1 Interface Kit P N 890 1037 01 E1 and T1 backplane installed on back of frame E1 and T1 Interface Kit P N 890 1037 01 contains two backplanes Inner cable tie bars removed E1 and T1 backplane Typical patch cable from E1 and T1 backplane to shelf backplane Design Considerations for E1 External Interface Descriptions The E1 Interface Backplane provides a method for extending individual E1 channels from the E1 configured cards to any channel configured cards in use Note the following issues regarding the E1 backplane Only o
602. with a second system clock input in addition to the original composite clock Timing signals from both system clocks is distributed within the EAGLE STP to all LIM card slots The HS Master Timing feature is integrated into the programmable logic contents on the Terminal Disk Module TDM card and the PROM of the MAS communications application processor MCAP card The HS Master Timing feature requires updating these cards and the redundant TDM MCAP card pair to the release levels specified in the section Master Timing Site Requirements on page 5 83 of this manual Since a TDM MCAP card pair makes up the Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor MASP this card pair is also referred to as MASP in this manual Implementation of the HS Master Timing feature might require the replacement of both primary and redundant TDM MCAP card pairs the installation or presence of at least one ATM LIM card or E1 T1 MIM the replacement of both composite clock cables or adding new cables and the provisioning of at least one ATM LIM card or E1 T1 MIM ATM LIM cards or E1 T1 MIM that do not use the high speed clock source and LIM cards that continue using the composite clock source do not require any changes to card provisioning OAP terminals must be inhibited before replacing the TDM and MCAP cards for the HS Master Timing feature to ensure that no OAP updates are inadvertently sent to the database during the implementation 910 4601 01 Revis
603. wraps and lacing cord Flushcutter to cut cable ties Diagonal cutters Slotted screwdriver 1 8 inch blade 8 inch shank preferred Socket wrench set 1 4 inch or 3 8 inch drive or open end wrenches Non oxidizing grease Crimper tooth washers screws air filters Cooling duct for EOAP shelf Figure 6 2 Heavy Duty Frame Label Location 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Frame label Handle lt TEKELEC logo Product name Door perferation pattern designated by product 6 7 D May 2005 1s10n 910 4601 01 Rev EOAP EOAP Overview 6 8 This section describes the installation cabling and initial provisioning of an EOAP The procedures include the installation of the EOAP shelf fan assembly and cabling as well as the upgrade from a single configuration EOAP to a dual configuration EOAP Any personnel using these procedures must have a thorough knowledge of standard telecommunication installation specifications and procedures The EOAP consists of field replaceable CompactPCI cards and drive bays that may be swapped out in the event of a hardware failure The EOAP shelf is pre assembled as a single or dual configuration with the required EOAP components cards installed The EOAP shelf is delivered either Pre assembled for single or dual configuration and e Packed with a fan
604. x between the EOAP and the modems Finish these cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 Install EOAP X 25 Modem Cables Use two EOAP modem cables P N 830 0709 xx to connect to the X 25 modems A and B Procedure Install EOAP X 25 Modem Cables 1 Take the first modem cable P N 830 0709 xx and connect it to PORT located at the bottom right of the EOAP backplane Connect the other end to X 25 modem A Tighten the cable connectors 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 51 EOAP 6 52 2 Take the second modem cable P N 830 0709 xx and connect it to PORT 5B located at the bottom left of the EOAP backplane Connect the other end to X 25 modem B Tighten the cable connectors Loosely route these two cables along the third tie rod and across the rod toward the right side of the EOAP backplane Route the two cables around the right side of the shelf to the center of the next traverse arm extender Then route the cable up to the top of the EOAP frame across the cable rack and down to the X 25 modem A and B connectors You have now connected the two X 25 modem cables P N 830 0709 xx between the EOAP and the modems Finish these cables as described in Finish Backplane Cables on page 6 53 Install EOAP MMI X Cables Use two EOAP MMI cables P N 830 0708 xx to connect to the control shelf backplane Procedure Install EOAP MMI X Cables Take the first MMI cable P N 830 0708 xx and con
605. xpansion Sleeve Cone nut 1 with threads anchor attached to threaded rod 3 21 Frames and Shelves 3 Install two square washers below the round fiberglass washer as shown in Figure 3 14 Install the anchor assemblies in the order shown in Figure 3 14 The large steel washer nylon shoulder washer and round fiberglass washer are found in the mounting hardware kit NOTE When reassembling an anchor bolt assembly lightly finger tighten only When reassembling an anchor stud assembly the stud must be flush with the bottom of the cone nut and the torque nut must be near the top of the stud Insert each anchor into an anchor hole through the three square washers frame base and isolation sheet refer to Figure 3 14 Figure 3 14 Anchor Installation of Heavy Duty Frame 3 22 Bottom of Frame isolator pad Anchor 4 places Large steel washer Round fiber insulator washer Square metal washer Qty 3 Insulator pad 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 Frames and Shelves 6 Tighten the torque nut on the anchor stud assembly with a box end wrench until the top of the nut breaks free 7 Discard the hex nut or the broken free portion of the torque nut 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 3 23 Frames and Shelves Anchoring to Overhead Rack of Heavy Duty Frame Frames with shelves that may be extended by pulling the shelf into the aisle must be attached to overhead ladder racks
606. xtension Frame EF 04 Numbering Plan 5 161 Fuse and Alarm Panels 5 162 Test Points FAP P N 870 2320 01 5 163 Fuse GMT Brand Name oe 5 164 den 6 3 Heavy Duty Frame Label Location ette 6 6 EOAP Front eee etes 6 13 Fan Baffle to be Removed 6 16 Remove Grill and Filter from Fan Assembly 6 17 Insert Fan Assembly Below EOAP Shelf 6 18 Attach Fan Assembly to Front of Frame Rail 6 18 Position Cooling Duct on Fan Assembly 6 20 EOAP Shelf with Cooling Duct and Fan Assembly 6 21 EOAP Installed in 6 23 Fans and EOAP Showing Mounting Brackets 6 24 Fan Assembly Under FOAP soins En 6 25 EOAP Backplane Cable Connections Dual Configuration 6 28 EOAP Cable Connections Diagram Dual Configuration 6 29 EOAP Backplane Cable Connections Single Configuration 6 30 EOAP Cable Connections Diagram Single Configuration 6 31 Rear View P N 870 2320 01 6 36 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 List of Figures Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21
607. xx B clock cable in system Install B Clock Cable on page 5 99 Install EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 16 Install Cooling Duct on page 6 20 Install EOAP Shelf on page 6 23 Dual Configuration Cabling on page 6 38 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 Single configuration Preinstalled shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system Install B Clock Cable on page 5 99 Cable Single Configuration EOAP on page 6 35 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 Dual configuration Preinstalled shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Install B Clock Cable on page 5 99 Dual Configuration Cabling on page 6 38 Power Up EOAP on page 6 73 EOAP Provisioning Test Fan Operation on page 6 74 Set Up Maintenance Modem on page 6 77 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 EOAP Table 6 2 Installation Order Continued If your EOAP was delivered with Single configuration Packed shelf and fan assembly P N 830 0398 xx B clock cable in system complete the installation in this order Install EOAP Fan Assembly on page 6 16 Install Cooling Duct on page 6
608. ystem when connected to 5 48 pin 10 or P4B48RTN pin 11 3 CUFA14 Signals a customer defined trouble 14 to the system when connected to 5 48 pin 10 P4B48RTN pin 11 4 CUFA3 Signals a customer defined critical alarm trouble 3 to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or P4B48RTN pin 11 5 CUFA1 Reserved 6 CUFA9 Reserved 7 CUFA2 Signals a holdover clock critical alarm to the system when connected to 5 48 10 P4B48RTN pin 11 8 CUFA4 Signals a customer defined critical alarm trouble 4 to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or P4B48RTN pin 11 9 CUFA10 Signals a holdover clock minor alarm to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or PAB48RTN pin 11 10 4 Signal return path 11 P4B48RTN Signal return path 19 CUFA8 Signals customer defined major alarm trouble 8 to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or P4B48RTN pin 11 20 CUFA16 Signals a customer defined trouble 16 to the system when connected to 5 48 10 P4B48RTN pin 11 21 CUFA7 Signals a customer defined major alarm trouble 7 to the system when connected to P5A48RTN pin 10 or pin 11 22 CUFAI5 Signals a customer defined trouble 15 to the system when connected to 5 48 10 or PAB48RTN pin 11 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 B 35 Connectors Table B 21 External Alarm Connector C
609. ze 8 8 X25 Mode DTE DTE Active LSMS main main Main LSMS NSAP 198 102 115 125 198 102 115 125 Main LSMS SSEL emss emss Main LSMS PSEL emsp emsp Shadow LSMS NSAP Not configured Not configured Shadow LSMS SSEL Not configured Not configured Shadow LSMS PSEL Not configured Not configured When both the SEAS and LNP features are on all the fields of the rtrv oap config output are displayed This output example shows all the fields of the rtrv oap config output If only the SEAS LNP feature is on then only fields related to the feature that is on are displayed Table 6 17 on page 6 116 shows the fields that are displayed when the SEAS and LNP features are on Before the EOAP configuration can be sent to the specified EOAP with the act oap config command certain fields of the rtrv oap config command output must be correctly configured depending on whether the SEAS or LNP features are on or not If these fields do contain incorrect entries and the EOAP configuration is sent to the specified EOAP the specified EOAP may go out of service Table 6 17 on page 6 116 also shows the fields that must be correctly configured before the EOAP configuration is sent to the specified EOAP 910 4601 01 Revision D May 2005 6 137 EOAP 6 138 6 Make sure that there are no alarms for either EOAP If only the SEAS feature is on enter the rept stat seas command If only the LNP feature is on enter the rept stat 1sm

Clock Cable, 4601:5-104

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents